(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "Bulletin of Wake Forest University"

ST • • 



THE 
UNDERGRADUATE 

SCHOOLS 

- 

2000/200 1 




■-,*,) 



■ 



Wake Forest 

BULLETIN OF WAKE FOREST UNIVERSITY 



Cover photograph by Kenneth Garrett. 



BULLETIN of Wake Forest University (USPS 078-320) is published seven times a year in 
February, April, May, June and July (3 issues) by the University Editor's Office, Wake 
Forest University, P.O. Box 7205 Reynolda Station, Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7205. 
Periodicals postage paid at Winston-Salem, NC, and additional mailing office. POST- 
MASTER: Send address changes to BULLETIN of Wake Forest University, Director of 
Admissions, P.O. Box 7305 Reynolda Station, Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7305. 



New Series 

June 2000 

Volume 95, Number 3 

THE UNDERGRADUATE SCHOOLS 




"==5*83*.//' 



Wake Forest College 

and The Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy 



ANNOUNCEMENTS FOR 2000/2001 

This bulletin represents a record of the academic year 1999/2000 



The Academic Calendar 



Fall Semester 2000 



August 23 

August 24-29 
August 26 

August 27 

August 28-29 
August 30 
September 
September 13 
September 27 
October 18 
October 20 
Nov. 22-26 
November 27 
December 8 
December 11-16 
December 16 
Dec. 16-Jan. 13 



Wednesday 

Thursday-Tuesday 
Saturday 

Sunday 

Monday-Tuesday 

Wednesday 

(date to be announced) 

Wednesday 

Wednesday 

Wednesday 

Friday 

Wednesday-Sunday 

Monday 

Friday 

Monday-Saturday 

Saturday 

Saturday-Saturday 



Move-in day for new students; 

residence halls open 8 a.m-5 p.m. 
Orientation for new students 
Residence halls open for returning 

students, 8 a.m. -5 p.m. 
Residence halls open for returning 

students, noon-5 p.m. 
Validation/Registration 
Classes begin 
Opening Convocation 
Last day to add courses 
Last day to drop courses 
Mid-term grades due 
Fall holiday 
Thanksgiving holiday 
Classes resume 
Classes end 
Examinations 

All residence halls close at 7 p.m. 
Winter recess 



Spring Semester 1001 



January 13 
January 14 
January 15 
January 16 
January 17 
January 31 
February 14 
February 
March 9 
March 10-18 
March 10-18 
March 17 
March 19 
April 13 
May 2 
May 3-4 
May 5 
May 7-12 
May 13 
May 20 
May 21 



Saturday 

Sunday 

Monday 

Tuesday 

Wednesday 

Wednesday 

Wednesday 

(date to be announced) 

Friday 

Saturday 

Saturday-Sunday 

Saturday 

Monday 

Friday 

Wednesday 

Thursday-Friday 

Saturday 

Monday-Saturday 

Sunday 

Sunday 

Monday 



Residence halls open at 9 a.m. 

Residence halls open noon-5 p.m. 

Martin Luther King Jr. Day — no classes 

Validation of registration for all students 

Classes begin 

Last day to add courses 

Last day to drop courses 

Founders' Day Convocation 

Midterm grades due 

All residence halls close at noon 

Spring recess 

Residence halls reopen at 11 a.m. 

Classes resume 

Good Friday — no classes 

Classes end 

Reading Days 

Examinations 

Examinations 

Res. halls close for non-seniors at 7 p.m. 

Baccalaureate 

Commencement 

Residence halls close for seniors at 7 p.m. 



Table of Contents 






The Academic Calendar 


2 


Academic Calendar 


ib 


The University 


6 


Orientation and Advising 


26 


Buildings and Grounds 


7 


Registration 


26 


Information Systems 


9 


Classification 


17 


Libraries 


10 


Part-time Students 


2-7 


Recognition and Accreditation 


ii 


Class Attendance 


^■7 


The Undergraduate Schools 


12 


Auditing Courses 


28 


Wake Forest College 


J 3 


Dropping a Course 


28 


Statement of Purpose 


13 


Withdrawal from the College 


28 


Honor and Ethics System 


14 


Examinations 


29 


Summary of Computing Rights and 




Grading 


29 


Responsibilities 


14 


Grade Reports and Transcripts 


30 


Student Complaints 


17 


Dean's List 


30 


History and Development 


17 


Graduation Distinctions 


30 


Chronological History of 




Repetition of Courses 


3° 


Wake Forest University 


18 










Probation 


31 


Presidents of Wake Forest University 


18 


Requirements for Continuation 




Procedures 


19 


in the College 


3i 


Admission 


19 


Requirements for Readmission 


32 


Application 


19 


Summer Study 


32 


Early Decision - Single/First Choice 


10 


Transfer Credit 


32 


Admission of Students with Disabilities 


21 


Approval of Overseas Program 


3^ 


Advanced Placement and CLEP 


21 


Scholarships and Loans 


33 


Admission of Transfer Students 


21 


Academic Progress Requirements 


33 


Expenses 


22 


Scholarships 


35 


Tuition 


22 


Federal Financial Aid Programs 


52 


Room Charges 


22 


Exchange Scholarships 


52 


Food Services 


22 


Loans 


51 


Other Charges 


23 


Concessions 


53 


Refunds 


2-3 


Other Financial Aid 


54 


Refunds (Title IV Recipients) 


M 


Outside Assistance 


54 


Refunds (Non-Title IV) 


2-5 


Special Programs 


55 


Housing 


2-5 


Honors Study 


55 



Table of Contents 



Open Curriculum 


55 


Study at Salem College 


55 


International Studies 


56 


Center for International Studies 


56 


International Students 


56 


Residential Language Centers 


56 


Foreign Area Studies 


56 


Opportunities for Study Abroad 


56 


Austria (Vienna) 


56 


Benin (Contou) 


57 


Cuba (Havana) 


57 


Ecuador (Quito) 


57 


England (London) 


57 


Italy (Venice) 


58 


France (Dijon) 


58 


Spain (Salamanca) 


58 


China (Beijing) 


58 


Japan (Hiratsuka) 


58 


Russia 


59 


Study Abroad in 

Non- Wake Forest Programs 


59 


Requirements for Degrees 


60 


Degrees Offered 


60 


General Requirements 


60 


Basic Requirements 


61 


Divisional Requirements 


61 


Requirement in Health and 
Exercise Science 


62 


Proficiency in the Use of English 


61 


Basic and Divisional Requirements 


63 


Declaring a Major 


63 



Maximum Number of Courses 

in a Department 64 

Options for Meeting Major 

Requirements 64 

Double Majors and Joint Majors 64 

Minors 64 

Interdisciplinary Minors 65 

Foreign Area Studies 65 

Senior Testing 65 



Combined Degrees in 

Medical Technology 65 

Degrees in the Physician 

Assistant Program 66 

Degrees in Engineering 6y 

Degrees in Forestry and 

Environmental Studies 6y 

Five-Year Cooperative Degree Program 

in Latin American Studies 67 

Courses of Instruction — 

Wake Forest College 68 

American Ethnic Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 69 

Anthropology 69 

Art 73 

Asian Studies (Interdisciplinary Minor) 78 

Biology 80 

Chemistry 86 

Classical Languages 90 

Communication 94 

Computer Science 98 

Cultural Resource Preservation 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 10 1 

Early Christian Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 101 

East Asian Languages and Literatures 103 

East Asian Studies (Foreign Area Study) 105 

Economics 106 

Education 11 1 

English 118 

Environmental Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 124 

German and Russian 12J 

German Studies (Foreign Area Study) 129 

Health and Exercise Science 13 

Health Policy and Administration 134 

History 135 

Humanities 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 143 

Interdisciplinary Honors 147 

International Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) ijo 



Table of Contents 



Italian Studies (Foreign Area Study) 

journalism (Minor) 
Latin American Studies 
(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Linguistics (Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Mathematics 

Medieval Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Military Science 

Music 

Natural Sciences 

Neuroscience 

Philosophy 

Physics 

Politics 

Psychology 

Religion 

Romance Languages 

Russian and East European Studies 
(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Sociology 

Spanish Studies (Foreign Area Study) 

Theatre 

Dance 

Urban Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Women's Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 



J 5 J 


Overseas Courses 


226 


151 


Wayne Calloway School of 






Business and Accountancy 


235 


153 


Core Purpose 


235 


155 


Shared Values 


236 


157 


Programs 


236 


162 
163 
i6 5 

171 
172 

173 


Objectives 
Admission 
Transfer of Credit from Other Schools 


236 

^37 
237 


Requirements for Continuation 
Requirements for Graduation 
Senior Honors Program 


238 
238 

240 


Beta Gamma Sigma, 




i 7 8 


National Honor Society 


240 


181 


Courses of Instruction 


140 


187 


Business 


240 


191 


Accountancy 


246 


198 


Enrollment 


249 


111 
213 


Governing and Advisory Boards 
The Board of Trustees 
The Board of Visitors 


250 
250 
-251 


217 


The Board of Visitors, W. Calloway School 


218 


of Business and Accountancy 


252 


221 


The Administration 


153 




The Undergraduate Faculties 


266 


223 


Emeriti 


290 


223 


The Committees of the Faculty 


2-95 




Index 


299 




Bulletins of Wake Forest University 


304 



Table of Contents 



The University 



Wake Forest University is charac- 
terized BY ITS DEVOTION TO LIBERAL 
LEARNING AND PROFESSIONAL PREPA- 
RATION FOR MEN AND WOMEN, 
ITS STRONG SENSE OF COMMUNITY AND 
FELLOWSHIP, AND ITS ENCOURAGEMENT 
OF FREE INQUIRY AND EXPRESSION. 

Founded in 1834 by the Baptist State 
Convention of North Carolina, the school 
opened its doors on February 3 as Wake 
Forest Institute, with Samuel Wait as prin- 
cipal. It was located in Wake County, 
North Carolina, on the plantation of 
Calvin Jones, near which the village of 
Wake Forest later developed. 

Rechartered in 1838 as Wake Forest 
College, it is one of the oldest institutions 
of higher learning in the state. It was 
exclusively a college of liberal arts for men 
until 1894, when the School of Law was 
established. The School of Medicine, 
founded in 1902, offered a two-year medi- 
cal program until 1941. In that year, the 
school was moved from the town of Wake 
Forest to Winston-Salem, became associat- 
ed with the North Carolina Baptist 
Hospital, and was renamed the Bowman 
Gray School of Medicine. In 1942, Wake 
Forest admitted women as regular under- 
graduate students. In 1997, the medical 
school was renamed the Wake Forest 



School of Medicine to reflect its integral 
association with the University. 

A School of Business Administration 
was established in 1948. In 1969, the 
undergraduate school was succeeded by the 
Department of Business and Accountancy 
and the Department of Economics in Wake 
Forest College; at the same time the 
Babcock Graduate School of Management 
was established. In 1980, the undergradu- 
ate program in business and accountancy 
was reconstituted as the School of Business 
and Accountancy; in 1995, the name was 
changed to the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy. 

The Division of Graduate Studies, 
established in 1961, is now organized as 
the Graduate School and encompasses 
advanced work in the arts and sciences on 
both the Reynolda and Bowman Gray 
campuses in Winston-Salem. 

In 1946, the trustees of Wake Forest 
College and the Baptist State Convention 
of North Carolina accepted a proposal by 
the Z. Smith Reynolds Foundation to relo- 
cate the non-medical divisions of the 
College to Winston-Salem. The late 
Charles H. Babcock and his wife, the late 
Mary Reynolds Babcock, contributed a 
campus site, and building funds were 
received from many sources. Between 
1952 and 1956, the first fourteen buildings 
were erected in Georgian style on the new 
Winston-Salem campus. In 1956, the 
College moved all operations, leaving the 
122-year-old campus in the town of Wake 
Forest to the Southeastern Baptist 
Theological Seminary. The Divinity School 
was established in 1999. 

In 1967, the College's augmented char- 
acter was recognized by the change in 
name to Wake Forest University. Today, 



The University £ 



enrollment in all schools of the University 
stands at over 6,000. Governance remains 
in the hands of the Board of Trustees, and 
development for each of the seven schools 
of the University is augmented by advisory 
boards of visitors. A joint board of 
University trustees and trustees of the 
North Carolina Baptist Hospital is respon- 
sible for the Medical Center, which includes 
the hospital and the medical school. 

Wake Forest's relationship with the 
Baptist State Convention is an important 
part of the school's heritage. Wake Forest 
and the Convention have a fraternal, vol- 
untary relationship under which Wake 
Forest is autonomous in governance. 

Since moving to Winston-Salem, Wake 
Forest has been home to the Wake Forest 
Baptist Church, an independent congrega- 
tion which attracts members from both the 
University and the community. The congre- 
gation meets in Wait Chapel and has office 
and educational space in Wingate Hall. 

The College, Wayne Calloway School 
of Business and Accountancy, Babcock 
Graduate School of Management, School 
of Law, the Graduate School, and the 
Divinity School are located on the 
Reynolda Campus in northwest Winston- 
Salem. The Wake Forest School of 
Medicine is about four miles away, near 
the city's downtown, on what is known as 
the Bowman Gray Campus. The University 
also offers instruction regularly at Casa 
Artom in Venice, at Worrell House in 
London, at Flow House in Vienna, and in 
other places around the world. 

The College offers courses in more than 
forty fields of study leading to the bac- 
calaureate degree. The Wayne Calloway 
School of Business and Accountancy offers 
courses of study leading to baccalaureate 
degrees in business, analytical finance, 
information systems, or mathematical busi- 
ness (in cooperation with the Department 



of Mathematics); and a combination bac- 
calaureate and master of science degree in 
accountancy through the Graduate School 
of Arts and Sciences of the University. The 
Divinity School offers the master of divini- 
ty degree. The School of Law offers the 
juris doctor degree and the Babcock 
Graduate School of Management, the mas- 
ter of business administration degree. Both 
schools also offer a joint JD/MBA degree. 
In addition to the doctor of medicine 
degree, the Wake Forest School of 
Medicine offers, through the Graduate 
School, programs leading to the master of 
science and doctor of philosophy degrees in 
biomedical sciences. The Graduate School 
confers the master of arts, master of arts in 
education, master of arts in liberal studies, 
and master of science degrees in the arts 
and sciences and the doctor of philosophy 
degree in biology, chemistry, and physics. 
The Graduate School also offers MD/PhD 
and PhD/MBA programs. 

Buildings and Grounds 

The Reynolda Campus of Wake Forest is 
situated on approximately 340 acres; its 
physical facilities consist of over thirty 
buildings, most of which are of modified 
Georgian architecture and constructed of 
Old Virginia brick trimmed in granite and 
limestone. The Reynolda Gardens annex, 
consisting of about 150 acres and includ- 
ing Reynolda Woods, Reynolda Village, 
and Reynolda Gardens, is adjacent to the 
campus. The Graylyn International 
Conference Center, an educational confer- 
ence center, is nearby. 

Wait Chapel, named in memory of the 
first president of the College, seats 2,300. 
The Wait Chapel tower contains the Janet 
Jeffrey Carlisle Harris Carillon, an instru- 
ment of forty-eight bells. Wingate Hall, 



The University 



named in honor of President Washington 
Manly Wingate, houses the Department of 
Religion, the office of the University chap- 
lain and the Wake Forest Baptist Church, 
offices of the Divinity School, and other 
classrooms and offices. 

Reynolda Hall, across the upper plaza 
from Wait Chapel, houses most of the 
administrative offices for the Reynolda 
Campus. The Benson University Center is 
the central hub for student activities and 
events. The Z. Smith Reynolds Library 
and its Edwin Graves Wilson Wing house 
the main collection of books and docu- 
ments on the Reynolda Campus. Along 
with eight floors of open stacks, with a 
capacity for over 1,000,000 volumes, it 
has reading and reference rooms for study. 
Carswell Hall houses the departments of 
Communication, Economics, and 
Sociology, and a large multimedia lecture 
area, the Annenburg Forum. 

'Winston Hall houses biology; Salem Hall, 
the chemistry department. Both buildings 
have laboratories as well as classrooms 
and special research facilities. The Olin 
Physical Laboratory is the facility for the 
physics department. Harold W. Tribble 
Hall accommodates primarily humanities 
departments, and has seminar rooms, a 
philosophy library, and a multimedia lec- 
ture area, DeTamble Auditorium. The 
Museum of Anthropology houses the 
anthropology department and the 
Museum. The Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy and the depart- 
ments of mathematics and computer sci- 
ence are in Calloway Hall. East Hall hous- 
es psychology and languages. 

The James R. Scales Fine Arts Center is of 
contemporary design appropriate to the 
functions of studio art, theatre, musical 
and dance performances, and instruction 
in art history, drama, and music. Off its 



lobby is a large gallery for special exhibi- 
tions. In the art wing are spacious studios 
for drawing, painting, sculpture, and print- 
making, along with a smaller gallery and 
classrooms. In the theatre wing are design 
and production areas and two technically 
complete theatres, the larger of traditional 
proscenium design and the smaller for 
experimental ring productions. The music 
wing contains Brendle Recital Hall for 
concerts and lectures, classrooms, practice 
rooms for individuals and groups, and the 
offices of the music department. 

The Worrell Professional Center for Law 
and Management houses the School of 
Law and Babcock Graduate School of 
Management under one roof. 

The William N. Reynolds Gymnasium has 
classrooms for instruction in health and 
exercise science, courts for indoor sports, 
a swimming pool, and offices for the 
departments of health and exercise science 
and Student Health Service. Adjacent are 
tennis courts, sports fields, the Kentner 
Stadium, and the Athletic Center for 
intercollegiate athletics. 

The Information Systems Building houses 
the Information Systems, military science 
departments, and ICCEL, as well as a 
University Stores annex and a food ser- 
vice area. 

The Wake Forest campus has a wide vari- 
ety of housing options available to stu- 
dents. Babcock Hall, Bostwick Hall, 
Collins Hall, Davis Hall, Efird Hall, 
Huffman Hall, Johnson Hall, Kitchin Hall, 
Luter Hall, North Hall, Palmer Hall, 
Piccolo Hall, Polo Hall, Poteat Hall, the 
Student Apartments and Taylor Hall are 
coeducational by floor, wing, or apart- 
ment. Substance-free living environments 
are available in some residence halls. First- 
year students live in Babcock, Bostwick, 



The University g 



Collins, Johnson, Luter, Palmer, and 
Piccolo. Student housing is available in 
the townhouse apartments and several 
small houses owned by the University. 
Upperclass students may choose to live in a 
variety of theme houses including Fine Arts 
House, German House, and NIA House, 
or others that are currently being devel- 
oped. On the edge of the main campus are 
apartments for faculty and staff. 

Information Systems 

Information Systems supports University 
instruction, research, and administrative 
needs. The campus computer network 
offers high-speed connectivity from all resi- 
dence hall rooms, all offices, and many 
classrooms and public areas. 

Upon enrollment, all undergraduate 
students receive an IBM ThinkPad com- 
puter and color printer. At the beginning of 
the junior year, students exchange the 
ThinkPad for a new model. Upon gradua- 
tion, the new ThinkPad and the printer 
become the property of the student. 

These laptop computers contain a stan- 
dard suite of powerful programs that allow 
students easy access to research and class 
materials and offer the ability to interact 
with faculty, staff, and other students 
through the campus network. The programs 
include Microsoft Office, electronic mail, 
and Internet and library browsing, research, 
analytical, and development tools. A large 
variety of instructional, classroom, and 
research resources are accessible through the 
campus network. These include the library's 
CD-ROM network, OCLC FirstSearch, and 
other digital and data resources. 

Information Systems also supports an 
extensive online information system that 
includes documentation, class schedules 
and grades, University-wide activity calen- 
dars, the Wake Forest University Libraries 



information system, and the electronic ver- 
sion of the Old Gold and Black. The Wake 
Forest Information Network (WIN) pro- 
vides the University community with facul- 
ty, staff, and student databases and direc- 
tories, an alumni directory, class 
registration services, an online ride board 
and used textbook exchange for students, 
and customizable links to news, weather, 
and research sites. 

Students also have access to computing 
resources outside the University. The 
University is a member of the Inter- 
University Consortium for Political and 
Social Research (ICPSR), located at the 
University of Michigan. Membership in 
ICPSR provides faculty and students with 
access to a large library of data files, 
including public opinion surveys, cross- 
cultural data, financial data, and complete 
census data. The University is also a mem- 
ber of EDUCAUSE, a national consortium 
of colleges and universities concerned with 
computing issues. 

The University has an extensive collec- 
tion of computing facilities that serve both 
academic and business needs. A Hewlett- 
Packard series 3000/979, a 3000/969, and 
34 Windows NT servers provide for busi- 
ness computing needs. Three IBM SP/2s 
provide messaging, systems management, 
Intranet, and scientific and other research 
needs. These SP/2s contain 7, 9, and 12 
computing nodes respectively. The 12- 
node SP/2 complex performs supercomput- 
ing applications in the sciences. Fifty-nine 
Windows NT servers provide for file and 
print services and courseware. A Windows 
NT server and an IBM H50 provide 
library services. These systems are avail- 
able to students, faculty, and staff twenty- 
four hours a day through network and 
dial-up connectivity. 

Information Systems supports and 
maintains the University's high speed, 



The University 



switched FDDI (fiber distributed data 
interface), Gigabit Ethernet, and Fast 
Ethernet campus network. This network 
currently connects all academic and 
administrative buildings and provides 
robust interconnectivity for independent 
building Ethernet networks. Each residence 
hall room is equipped with two switched 
Ethernet connections. 

Wake Forest has a 155-megabit ATM 
(asynchronous transfer mode) connection 
to the Internet. Through this connection, 
the University has access to CRAY and 
IBM SP2 supercomputers located at the 
MCNC/North Carolina Supercomputing 
Center in the Research Triangle and to all 
the premier research networks in the 
world, including Internet II, Abilene, and 
the VBNS (Very high performance 
Backbone Network Service). The 
University is also working closely with the 
North Carolina Research and Education 
Network on other advanced networking 
technologies. 

Information Systems also provides tele- 
phone and cable television services to the 
students, faculty, and staff of Wake Forest 
University. All residence hall rooms are 
equipped with telephone jacks and cable 
TV connections. Local dial service for the 
campus and Winston-Salem area is provid- 
ed as part of the housing package. Students 
who wish to place long distance calls over 
the University telephone network can 
apply for services at the telecommunica- 
tions office located in Room 255, 
Information Systems Building. 

Cable television, while providing a 
recreational outlet, plays an important role 
by providing access to campus information 
and educational offerings. Cable channel 2 
is the Wake Forest University information 
channel, providing information and a cal- 
endar of campus events. WAKE Radio, a 
student-run station, provides background 



music for this channel. Channel 17 carries 
SCOLA, a non-profit educational service 
that features television programming from 
more than fifty different countries in their 
original languages. 

Information Systems provides walk-in 
and phone-based support from 8 a.m. until 
midnight Monday through Thursday; 
8 a.m. until 5 p.m. on Friday; and 4 p.m. 
until midnight on Sunday. A voice mail 
retrieval system is activated on weekends 
and during holiday breaks to respond to 
emergency calls. On-site computing sup- 
port in the residence halls is available from 
Resident Technology Advisors (RTAs). 

Libraries 

The libraries of Wake Forest University 
support instruction and research at the 
undergraduate level and in the disciplines 
awarding graduate degrees. The libraries 
of the University hold membership in the 
Association of College and Research 
Libraries, and the Association of 
Southeastern Research Libraries, and rank 
high in the Southeast in library expendi- 
tures per student. 

Facilities in the Z. Smith Reynolds 
Library include the Information 
Technology Center with multimedia view- 
ing, editing, and scanning, and a lab for 
student use. All-night study rooms are 
available to students with a key-card. 
Group study rooms are provided for stu- 
dent use. The Professional Center Library 
in the Worrell Professional Center serves 
the Law School and the Babcock Graduate 
School of Management. This library is 
open to undergraduates with research 
needs for its collection. 

All Wake Forest libraries share an 
online catalog which may be consulted at 
terminals in the buildings, from the cam- 
pus network or remotely through a 



The University jq 



modem. The Reference Department of the 
Z. Smith Reynolds Library provides a 
complete range of reference services 
including online searching, tours, first-year 
student orientation, presentation to indi- 
vidual classes, and assistance with directed 
and independent studies. Wake Forest 
Libraries offer access to a wide array of 
electronic databases, full text of journals, 
and other networked resources, as well as 
assistance in using and evaluating them. 
Reference tools are available in electronic 
and print formats. Interlibrary loan service 
is available for Wake Forest students, fac- 
ulty, and staff. Books, photocopies, and 
other materials may be borrowed from 
other libraries at no charge. 

The Wake Forest libraries hold over one 
million volumes in print, many thousands 
of subscriptions to periodicals and serials, 
over one and a half million microforms, 
more than 150,000 government documents, 
as well as a growing video collection. 

Special collections in the Reynolds 
Library include the Rare Books Collection 
and the Ethel Taylor Crittenden Baptist 
Historical Collection. The Rare Books 
Collection, greatly enhanced by the dona- 
tion of rare and fine books of the late 
Charles H. Babcock, emphasizes American 
and British authors of the late nineteenth 
and early twentieth centuries. Among such 
collections are those of Mark Twain, 
Gertrude Stein, William Butler Yeats and 
T.S. Eliot. There is also an extensive Anglo- 
Irish literature collection. The Baptist 
Historical Collection contains significant 
books, periodicals, manuscripts, and church 
records relating to North Carolina Baptists 
as well as a collection of the personal papers 
of prominent ministers, educators and gov- 
ernment officials. The Wake Forest 
College/University Archive also is main- 
tained in this area. The library houses a 
major collection on The Holocaust, as well. 



Recognition and 
Accreditation 

Wake Forest University is accredited by the 
Commission on Colleges of the Southern 
Association of Colleges and Schools (1866 
Southern Lane, Decatur, Georgia; tele- 
phone number [404] 679-4501) to award 
bachelor's, master's, and doctoral degrees. 

The Wake Forest University School of 
Medicine is a member of the Association 
of American Medical Colleges and is fully 
accredited by the Liaison Committee on 
Medical Education, the joint accrediting 
body of the Association of American 
Medical Colleges and the American 
Medical Association. The School of Law is 
a member of the Association of American 
Law Schools and is listed as an approved 
school by the Council of the Section of 
Legal Education and Admissions to the 
Bar of the American Bar Association and 
by the Board of Law Examiners and the 
Council of the North Carolina State Bar. 
The Babcock Graduate School of 
Management and the Wayne Calloway 
School of Business and Accountancy are 
accredited by the AACSB — The 
International Association for Management 
Education. The program in counseling 
leading to the master of arts in education 
degree is accredited by the Council for 
Accreditation of Counseling and Related 
Educational Programs. 

Wake Forest University is a member of 
many institutional organizations and associ- 
ations at the national, regional, and 
statewide levels, including the following: the 
American Council on Education, the 
Association of American Colleges, the 
National Association of Independent 
Colleges and Universities, the Council of 
Graduate Schools in the United States, the 
Southern Association of Colleges and 



jj The University 



Schools, the Southern Universities 
Conference, the Council of Southern 
Graduate Schools, the North Carolina 
Association of Colleges and Universities, and 
the North Carolina Association of 
Independent Colleges and Universities. In 
addition, many offices of the University are 
members of associations which focus on par- 
ticular aspects of university administration. 

Wake Forest has chapters of the princi- 
pal national social fraternities and sorori- 
ties, professional fraternities, and honor 
societies, including Phi Beta Kappa and 
Sigma Xi. There is an active chapter of the 
American Association of University 
Professors on campus. 

The Undergraduate Schools 

There are two undergraduate schools at 
Wake Forest University: Wake Forest 
College and the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy. The undergrad- 
uate schools are governed by the Board of 
Trustees, the University administration, and 
by their respective faculties. Responsibility 
for academic administration is delegated by 
the president and trustees to the associate 
provost, who is the chief academic officer 
of the University. The deans of the schools 
report to the associate provost and are 
responsible for academic planning and 
administration for their schools. 



Wake Forest University is committed to 
administer all educational and employ- 
ment activities without discrimination 
because of race, color, religion, national 
origin, age, sex, veteran status, handi- 
capped status or disability as required by 
law. The University has adopted a proce- 
dure for the purpose of resolving discrimi- 
nation complaints. Inquiries or concerns 
should be directed to: Harold Holmes, 
dean of student services, at (336) 758- 
5226; Paul Escott, dean of the college, at 
(336) 758-5312; or the assistant director 
of human resources, director of equal 
employment opportunity, and Title IX 
coordinator, at (336) 758-4814. 

In addition, Wake Forest rejects hatred 
and bigotry in any form and adheres to the 
principle that no person affiliated with 
Wake Forest should be judged or harassed 
on the basis of perceived or actual sexual 
orientation. In affirming its commitment 
to this principle, Wake Forest does not 
limit freedom of religious association or 
expression, does not presume to control 
the policies of persons or entities not affili- 
ated with Wake Forest, and does not 
extend benefits beyond those provided 
under other policies of Wake Forest. 



The University j2 



Wake Forest College 






Wake Forest College is the 
undergraduate school of arts 
and sciences of wake forest 
University. It is the center of the 
University's academic life; 
through it, the university carries 
on the tradition of preparing 
men and women for personal 
enrichment, enlightened citizen- 
ship, and professional life. 

Wake Forest College is a place of meeting. 
Its teachers and students are of diverse 
backgrounds and interests, and that diversi- 
ty is crucial to the distinctive character of 
the College. Wake Forest continually exam- 
ines its educational purpose and evaluates 
its success in fulfilling it. A formal statement 
of purpose was prepared as part of the 
school's decennial reaccreditation process 
and was adopted by the Board of Trustees. 

Statement of Purpose 

Wake Forest is a university dedicated to the 
pursuit of excellence in the liberal arts and 
in graduate and professional education. Its 
distinctiveness in its pursuit of its mission 
derives from its private, coeducational, and 
residential character; its size and location; 
and its Baptist affiliation. Each of these fac- 
tors constitutes a significant aspect of the 
unique character of the institution. 

The University is now comprised of 
seven constituent parts: two undergraduate 
institutions, Wake Forest College and the 
Wayne Calloway School of Business and 



Accountancy; the Graduate School; and 
four professional schools: the School of 
Law, the Wake Forest University School of 
Medicine, the Babcock Graduate School of 
Management, and the Divinity School. It 
seeks to honor the ideals of liberal learn- 
ing, which entail commitment to transmis- 
sion of cultural heritages; teaching the 
modes of learning in the basic disciplines 
of human knowledge; developing critical 
appreciation of moral, aesthetic, and reli- 
gious values; advancing the frontiers of 
knowledge through in-depth study and 
research; and applying and using knowl- 
edge in the service of humanity. 

Wake Forest has been dedicated to 
the liberal arts for over a century and a 
half; this means education in the funda- 
mental fields of human knowledge and 
achievement, as distinguished from edu- 
cation that is technical or narrowly voca- 
tional. It seeks to encourage habits of 
mind that ask "why," that evaluate evi- 
dence, that are open to new ideas, that 
attempt to understand and appreciate the 
perspectives of others, that accept com- 
plexity and grapple with it, that admit 
error, and that pursue truth. Wake Forest 
College has by far the largest student 
body in the University, and its function is 
central to the University's larger life. The 
College and the Graduate School are 
most singularly focused on learning for 
its own sake; they therefore serve as 
exemplars of specific academic values in 
the life of the University. 



13 



Wake Forest College 



Beginning as early as 1894, Wake 
Forest accepted an obligation to provide 
professional training in a number of fields, 
as a complement to its primary mission of 
liberal arts education. This responsibility is 
fulfilled in the conviction that the humane 
values embodied in the liberal arts are also 
centrally relevant to the professions. 
Professional education at Wake Forest is 
characterized by a commitment to ethical 
and other professional ideals that transcend 
technical skills. Like the Graduate School, 
the professional schools are dedicated to 
the advancement of learning in their fields. 
In addition, they are specifically committed 
to the application of knowledge to solving 
concrete problems of human beings. They 
are strengthened by values and goals which 
they share with the College and Graduate 
School, and the professional schools 
enhance the work of these schools and the 
University as a whole by serving as models 
of service to humanity. 

Wake Forest was founded by private 
initiative, and ultimate decision-making 
authority lies in a privately appointed 
Board of Trustees rather than in a public 
body. "Funded to a large extent from pri- 
vate sources of support, [Wake Forest] is 
determined to chart its own course in the 
pursuit of its goals. As a coeducational 
institution it seeks to 'educate together' 
persons of both sexes and from a wide 
range of backgrounds — racial, ethnic, reli- 
gious, geographical, socio-economic, and 
cultural... Its residential features are con- 
ducive to learning and to the pursuit of a 
wide range of co-curricular activities.lt has 
made a conscious choice to remain small in 
overall size; it takes pride in being able to 
function as a community rather than a 
conglomerate. Its location in the Piedmont 
area of North Carolina engenders an ethos 
that is distinctively Southern, and more 



specifically North Carolinian... As it seeks 
further to broaden its constituency and to 
receive national recognition, it is also find- 
ing ways to maintain the ethos associated 
with its regional roots." 

Wake Forest is proud of its Baptist and 
Christian heritage. For more than a centu- 
ry and a half, it has provided the 
University an indispensable basis for its 
mission and purpose, enabling Wake 
Forest to educate thousands of ministers 
and laypeople for enlightened leadership in 
their churches and communities. Far from 
being exclusive and parochial, this reli- 
gious tradition gives the University roots 
that ensure its lasting identity and branch- 
es that provide a supportive environment 
for a wide variety of faiths. The Baptist 
insistence on both the separation of church 
and state and local autonomy has helped 
to protect the University from interference 
and domination by outside interests, 
whether these be commercial, governmen- 
tal, or ecclesiastical. The Baptist emphasis 
upon revealed truth enables a strong reli- 
gious critique of human reason, even as 
the claims of revelation are put under the 
scrutiny of reason. The character of intel- 
lectual life at Wake Forest encourages open 
and frank dialogue and provides assurance 
that the University will be ecumenical and 
not provincial in scope, and that it must 
encompass perspectives other than the 
Christian. Wake Forest thus seeks to main- 
tain and invigorate what is noblest in its 
religious heritage. 

Honor and Ethics System 

The Honor and Ethics System is an expres- 
sion of the concern that students act with 
honor and integrity. Its essence is that each 
student's word can be trusted implicitly and 
that any violation of a student's word is an 



Wake Forest College 



14 



offense against the whole community. The 
Honor and Ethics System obligates students 
neither to give nor receive unauthorized aid 
on academic work; to have complete respect 
for the property rights of others; to make no 
false or deceiving statements regarding aca- 
demic or ethical matters to another member 
of the University community, and not to 
interfere with the procedures of the Honor 
and Ethics System. 

The Honor and Ethics System is main- 
tained and overseen by the Judicial 
Council of the undergraduate schools (see 
p. 298). Complete details are available at 
the Office of the Dean of Student Services. 

Summary of Computing 
Rights and Responsibilities 

The policy applies to all computer and 
computer communication facilities owned, 
leased, operated, or contracted by the 
University. This includes, but is not limited 
to, word processing equipment, microcom- 
puters, minicomputers, mainframes, com- 
puter networks, computer peripherals, and 
software, whether used for administration, 
research, teaching, or other purposes. The 
policy extends to any use of University 
facilities to access computers elsewhere. 

Basic Principles. The University's com- 
puting resources are for instructional and 
research use by the students, faculty, and 
staff of Wake Forest University. Ethical 
standards, which apply to other University 
activities (Honor and Ethics System, the 
Social Rules and Responsibilities, and all 
local, state, and federal laws), apply equal- 
ly to use of campus computing facilities. 

As in all aspects of University life, users 
of computing facilities should act honor- 
ably and in a manner consistent with ordi- 
nary ethical obligations. Cheating, stealing, 
making false or deceiving statements, pla- 



giarism, vandalism, and harassment are 
just as wrong in the context of computing 
systems as they are in all other domains. 

Use of campus facilities is restricted to 
authorized users. An "authorized user" is 
an individual who has been assigned a 
login ID and password by Information 
Systems staff (on any relevant system), or 
by an authorized agent. Individual users 
are responsible for the proper use of their 
accounts, including the protection of their 
login IDs and passwords. Users are also 
responsible for reporting any activities that 
they believe to be in violation of this policy, 
just as students are responsible for report- 
ing Honor and Ethics System violations. 

Individuals should use these facilities: 
in a manner consistent with the terms 

under which they were granted access 

to them; 
in a way that respects the rights and 

privacy of other users; 
so as not to interfere with or violate the 

normal, appropriate use of these 

facilities; and 
in a responsible and efficient manner. 

Abusive activities which are already covered 
under other University policies are to be 
handled in the same way, and by the same 
authorities, as if a computer had not been 
involved, following established guidelines. 

Systems Monitoring. This statement serves 
as notice to all users of campus computing 
systems that regular monitoring of system 
activities may occur. Only designated staff 
of Information Systems have authorization 
to engage in systems monitoring. 

Privacy. All individuals, including members 
of the Information Systems staff, should 
respect the privacy of other authorized 
users. Thus they should respect the rights of 



15 



Wake Forest College 



other users to security of files, confidentiali- 
ty of data, and the ownership of their own 
work. Nonetheless, in order to enforce the 
policies set out here, designated Information 
Systems staff is permitted to monitor activi- 
ty on local computing systems. 

In the event that staff should investi- 
gate a user, a record of the investigation 
shall be placed in a permanent file to be 
kept in Information Systems, beyond the 
standard log of all systems monitoring. 
This record shall state why the user was 
investigated, what files were examined, 
and the results of the investigation. 
Information Systems staff shall not reveal 
the contents of users' files, users' activities, 
or the record of investigations except in 
the following cases (and then only with the 
approval of the Chief Information Officer 
or the Provost): 

Evidence of Honor and Ethics System or 
Social Rules and Regulations violations 
will be referred to the dean of the appro- 
priate college, or to the Dean of Student 
Services. 

Evidence of improper activities by 
University employees will be referred to 
the Director of Human Resources or the 
appropriate University officers. 

Evidence of violations of law will be 
referred to the appropriate law enforce- 
ment officials. 

Examples of prohibited activities are pro- 
vided online (see below). 

Disciplinary actions. Substantial evidence 
of a violation of the principles described in 
this policy statement may result in disci- 
plinary action. As stated above, in cases 
where a policy already exists, and the only 
difference is that a computer was used to 
perform the activity, such action will be 



taken through appropriate University 
channels such as administrative proce- 
dures, the Honor and Ethics Council, the 
Graduate Council, or other supervisory 
authority to which the individual is sub- 
ject. Violation of state or federal statutes 
may result in civil or criminal proceedings. 
Otherwise, those who engage in computer 
violations are subject to the authority of 
Information Systems. 

Violation of the policies articulated 
here may result in one or more of the fol- 
lowing, plus any additional actions deemed 
appropriate by Information Systems: 

Suspension of one's ability to perform 
interactive logins on relevant machines 
on campus 

Suspension of one's ability to login to a 
campus network 

Suspension of one's ability to send 
e-mail 

Suspension of one's ability to receive 
e-mail 

Increased monitoring of further comput- 
er activity (beyond normal systems moni- 
toring) 

Any disciplinary action taken by 
Information Systems may be revoked 
and/or modified by the Provost of the 
University or anyone the Provost desig- 
nates to deal with such matters. 

Locating Computing Policy Information 
and Policy Updates. The above summary 
is based on the Policy on Ethical and 
Responsible Use of Computing Resources 
and other computing policies. These poli- 
cies may be updated, shortened, or 
expanded from time to time. Full policies 
can be reviewed online at www.wfu. 
edu/Computer-information/. 



Wake Forest College j£ 



Student Complaints 

Situations may arise in which a student 
believes that he or she has not received fair 
treatment by a representative of the 
University or has a complaint about the 
performance, actions or inaction of the 
staff or faculty affecting a student. The 
procedure for bringing these issues to the 
appropriate person or body is outlined 
below. Students are encouraged to seek 
assistance from their advisers or another 
member of the faculty or staff in evaluat- 
ing the nature of their complaints or decid- 
ing on an appropriate course of action. 

A complaint should first be directed as 
soon as possible to the person or persons 
whose actions or inactions have given rise 
to the problem — not later than three 
months after the event. For complaints in 
the academic setting, the student should talk 
personally with the instructor. Should the 
student and instructor be unable to resolve 
the conflict, the student may then turn to 
the chair of the involved department (the 
dean in the Calloway School) for assistance. 
The chair (or dean) will meet with both par- 
ties, seek to understand their individual per- 
spectives, and within a reasonable time, 
reach a conclusion and share it with both 
parties. Finally, a student may appeal to the 
Committee on Academic Affairs which will 
study the matter, work with the parties, and 
reach a final resolution. 

Students having complaints outside the 
academic setting, and who have been 
unable to resolve the matter with the indi- 
vidual directly involved, should process the 
complaint in a timely manner through the 
administrative channels of the appropriate 
unit. Students uncertain about the proper 
channels are encouraged to seek advice 
from faculty advisers, deans' offices, or the 
office of the dean of student services. 



Complaints which rise to the level of a 
grievance (as determined by the earlier 
steps in the process) may be heard as a 
final appeal before a University official 
designated by the associate provost after 
reviewing the nature of the complaint. The 
committee will include a representative of 
the faculty and a member of the student 
body. The grievance must be filed in writ- 
ing. Grievances not deemed frivolous by 
the committee will be heard. The student 
may be assisted during the hearing by a 
member of the University community. 

The complaint/grievance process out- 
lined above is meant to answer and resolve 
issues arising between individual students 
and the University and its various offices 
from practices and procedures affecting 
that relationship. In many cases, there are 
mechanisms already in place for the report- 
ing and resolution of specialized com- 
plaints (harassment and discrimination for 
instance) and these should be fully utilized 
where appropriate. Violation of student 
conduct rules or the honor system should 
be addressed through the judicial process 
specifically designed for that purpose. 

History and Development 

Since 1834, Wake Forest College has 
developed its distinctive pattern of charac- 
teristics: tenacity, independence, a fierce 
defense of free inquiry and expression, and 
a concern that knowledge be used respon- 
sibly and compassionately. That these 
characteristics have served the school well 
is displayed by its growth from a small sec- 
tarian school to one of the nation's signifi- 
cant small private universities. 

A brief history of Wake Forest is use- 
ful in understanding the University as it is 
today and appreciating the process 
through which it developed. 



17 



Wake Forest College 



Chronological History of 
Wake Forest University 

1834 Founded in the town of Wake 
Forest, N.C., as Wake Forest 
Manual Labor Institute in 
cooperation with the N.C. Baptist 
State Convention 
1838 Named Wake Forest College 
1894 School of Law established 
1902 School of Medicine founded 
19 21 First summer session 
193 6 Approval of the School of Law by 
the American Bar Association 

1 941 Relocation of the School of 
Medicine to Winston-Salem and 
eventual change of name to 
Bowman Gray School of Medicine 
and association with the North 
Carolina Baptist Hospital 

1942 Women admitted as 
undergraduate students 

19 j 6 Move to Winston-Salem in response 

to an endowment from the Z. Smith 

Reynolds Foundation 
1961 Graduate studies instituted 
1967 Becomes Wake Forest University 
1969 Babcock Graduate School of 

Management established 
1976 James R. Scales Fine Arts Center 

opened 



1984 Sesquicentennial anniversary 
1986 Redefined the relationship with the 
N. C. Baptist State Convention 

1989 Olin Physical Laboratory opened 

1990 Clifton L. Benson University Center 

opened 

1992 Edwin Graves Wilson Wing of Z. 
Smith Reynolds Library dedicated 

1993 Worrell Professional Center for 
Law and Management opened 

1994 Centennial anniversary— 
School of Law 

1995 Change of name to 

Wayne Calloway School of Business 

and Accountancy 
1997 Change of name to Wake Forest 

University School of Medicine 
1999 Opening of the Wake Forest 

University Divinity School 

Presidents of 

Wake Forest University 

1834 Samuel Wait 

190 j William Louis Poteat 

1 84 j William Hooper 

1927 Francis Pendleton Gaines 

1849 John Brown White 

1930 Thurman D. Kitchin 

1 8 $4 Washington Manly Wingate 

19 jo Harold Wayland Tribble 

1879 Thomas Henderson Pritchard 

1967 James Ralph Scales 

1884 Charles Elisha Taylor 

1983 Thomas K. Hearn Jr. 



Wake Forest College 



Procedures 



r - 






All students are responsible for 
familiarizing themselves with the 
portions of this bulletin which 
pertain to their course of study. 
Statements concerning courses 
and expenses are not to be 
regarded as irrevocable con- 
tracts between the student and 
the institution. the university 
reserves the right to change the 
schedule of classes and the cost 
of instruction at any time within 
the student's term of residence. 

Admission 

Candidates for admission must furnish evi- 
dence of maturity and educational achieve- 
ment. The Committee on Admissions care- 
fully considers the applicant's academic 
records, scores on tests, and evidence of 
character, motivation, goals, and general 
fitness for study in the College. The appli- 
cant's secondary school program must 
establish a commitment to the kind of 
broad liberal education reflected in the aca- 
demic requirements of the College. 

Admission as a first-year student 
normally requires graduation from an 
accredited secondary school with a mini- 
mum of sixteen units of high school credit. 
These should include four units in English, 
three in mathematics, two in history and 
social studies, two in a single foreign lan- 
guage, and one in the natural sciences. An 



applicant who presents at least twelve 
units of differently distributed college 
preparatory study can be considered. A 
limited number of applicants may be 
admitted without the high school diploma, 
with particular attention given to ability, 
maturity, and motivation. 

North Carolina law and Wake Forest 
University require that all new, transfer, 
readmit, unclassified, or visiting students 
submit proof of immunization against 
tetanus and diphtheria (Td), polio, rubeola, 
rubella, and mumps before registration. 
The Student Handbook has a detailed 
statement. A certificate from the student's 
high school, physician, or county health 
department director containing the 
approved dates is acceptable proof of 
immunization. The Student Health Service 
will furnish a form for this purpose. North 
Carolina law requires that students who do 
not submit proper proof of immunization 
within thirty days of enrollment cannot 
attend Wake Forest University until these 
immunizations have been documented. 

Application 

An application is secured from the Office 
of Admissions in person or by mail (P.O. 
Box 7305 Reynolda Station, Winston- 
Salem, North Carolina 27109-7305). It 
should be completed and returned to that 
office no later than January 15 for the fall 
semester. Most admissions decisions for 
the fall semester are made by April 1, with 



19 



Procedures 



prompt notification of applicants. For the 
spring semester, applications should be 
completed and returned no later than 
November 15. Except in emergency, the 
final date for applying for the fall semester 
is August 1 and for the spring semester, 
January 1. Application on this last-date 
basis is primarily for nonresident students. 

Wake Forest accepts the Common 
Application in lieu of its own form and 
gives equal consideration to both. Students 
may obtain copies of the Common 
Application from their high schools. 
Students may also apply via the Internet at 
www.wfu.edu. 

The admission application requires 
records and recommendations directly 
from secondary school officials. It also 
requires test scores, preferably from the 
senior year, on the SAT I: Reasoning Test 
of The College Board. SAT II: Subject Test 
scores are optional. All test scores should 
be sent directly to the University by 
Educational Testing Service. A $40 fee to 
cover the cost of processing must accom- 
pany an application. It cannot be applied 
to later charges for accepted students or 
refunded for others. The University 
reserves the right to reject any application 
without explanation. 

A $300 admission deposit is required 
of all regularly admitted students and must 
be sent to the Office of Admissions no later 
than May 1 following notice of accep- 
tance. It is credited toward first semester 
fees and is nonrefundable. Students noti- 
fied of acceptance after May 1 for the fall 
semester or November 1 for the spring 
semester should make a nonrefundable 
admission deposit within two weeks of 
notification. Failure to make the admission 
deposit is taken as cancellation of applica- 
tion by the student. No deposit is required 
for summer session enrollment. 



Early Decision 

Two early decision deadlines and notifica- 
tion schedules are available to well-quali- 
fied high school students who decide, by 
the close of their junior year, that Wake 
Forest is either their only choice or first 
choice college. 

Early Decision- 
Single Choice 

For students who have selected Wake 
Forest as their first choice and have 
applied to no other college. Students may 
submit an application at any time after 
completion of the junior year and no later 
than November 15. Decisions on these 
applicants are made on a rolling basis, 
three to four weeks after the application is 
completed. Students agree to enroll if 
accepted and submit a nonrefundable 
$500 deposit prior to January 1. 

Early Decision- 
First Choice 

Students who have selected Wake Forest as 
a first choice and only early decision choice 
but who may have submitted or have plans 
to submit regular decision applications to 
other institutions, may apply no later than 
November 15 and are notified by 
December 15. If accepted, students agree to 
enroll and to withdraw applications from 
other colleges. A $500 nonrefundable 
deposit is due by January 15. 

Candidates for early decision are nor- 
mally expected to have completed, or be 
enrolled in courses to complete, all sec- 
ondary school requirements. Decisions are 
based upon junior year grades and test 
scores. Applicants not admitted are asked 
to submit additional SAT I scores and the 



Procedures 20 



first semester senior year grade report, or 
they are advised to apply elsewhere. 

Admission of Students 
with Disabilities 

Wake Forest College will consider the appli- 
cation of any qualified student, regardless of 
disability, on the basis of the selection crite- 
ria established by the University which 
include personal and academic merit. Upon 
matriculation, all students will be required 
to meet the same standards for graduation. 
Programs at Wake Forest are accessible to 
all of its students. 

The University endeavors to provide 
facilities which are in compliance with all 
laws and regulations regarding access for 
individuals with disabilities. Additionally, 
special services are available to reasonably 
accommodate students with disabilities. For 
more information on assistance for under- 
graduate students, please contact Van D. 
Westervelt, director of the Learning 
Assistance Center, at (336) 758-5929 or the 
assistant director of human resources and 
director of equal employment opportunity, 
at (336) 758-4814. 

Advanced Placement 
and CLEP 

Advanced placement credit for college level 
work done in high school is available on 
the basis of the Advanced Placement 
Examination of The College Board and 
supplementary information. Especially 
well-qualified applicants for advanced 
standing may also be exempt from some 
basic and divisional courses with credit on 
the authorization of the department con- 
cerned. Credit by advanced standing is 
treated in the same manner as credit trans- 
ferred from another college. 



Under certain conditions, especially 
well-prepared applicants may be granted 
limited college credit through the subject 
tests of the College Level Examination 
Program (CLEP) of the Educational 
Testing Service. Such credit may be 
assigned with the approval of the depart- 
ment concerned or the dean of the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy. 

Admission of 
Transfer Students 

The number of transfer students who can 
be admitted each year depends upon the 
availability of space in the first-year (sec- 
ond semester), sophomore, and junior 
classes. An applicant for admission who 
has attended another college must be a 
graduate of a standard junior college or 
furnish a certificate of honorable dismissal 
stating eligibility in all respects to enter the 
college last attended, and must have an 
overall average of at least C on all college 
work attempted. A student who is admit- 
ted from another college before fully meet- 
ing the prescribed admissions requirements 
for entering first-year students must 
remove the entrance conditions during the 
first year at Wake Forest. 

Courses satisfactorily completed in 
other accredited colleges are accepted sub- 
ject to faculty approval. In general, no 
credit is allowed for courses not found in 
the Wake Forest curriculum. The mini- 
mum residence requirement for a bac- 
calaureate degree is two academic years, 
the senior and one other. 



2i Procedures 



Expenses 

Statements concerning expenses are not to 
be regarded as forming an irrevocable con- 
tract between the student and the 
University. The costs of instruction and 
other services outlined herein are those in 
effect on the date of publication of this 
bulletin, and the University reserves the 
right to change without notice the cost of 
instruction and other services at any time. 
A nonrefundable admission deposit of 
$300 is required to complete admission for 
all regularly admitted students. A non- 
refundable admission deposit of $500 is 
required to complete admission for all stu- 
dents who have applied to Wake Forest 
University as a first or single choice (see 
page 20). The applicable deposit is applied 
toward tuition and fees for the semester 
for which the student has been accepted. 
Charges are due in full on August 1 for the 
fall semester and December 15 for the 
spring semester. Faculty regulations require 
that student accounts be settled in full 
before the student is entitled to receive a 
grade report, transcript, or diploma, or to 
register for the following semester or term. 

Tuition 

Per Semester Per Year 

FULL-TIME $11,205 $22,410 

PART-TIME $650 PER CREDIT 

Students should expect an increase yearly 
in tuition. However, admittance to the 
undergraduate College is not based on 
financial resources. The University meets 
the demonstrated financial needs of all 
qualified students. 

Students enrolled in the College or in 
the Wayne Calloway School of Business 
and Accountancy for full-time residence 



credit are entitled to full privileges regard- 
ing libraries, laboratories, athletic contests, 
concerts, publications, the Student Union, 
the University Theatre, and the health ser- 
vice. Part-time students are entitled to the 
use of the libraries and laboratories but 
not to the other privileges mentioned 
above. They may secure a part-time stu- 
dent ID card, admissions to games and 
concerts, and publications by paying an 
activity fee of $166 per semester. 



Room Charges 



DOUBLE OCCUPANCY 



Per Semester 
$1,820 



Per Year 
$3,640 



Most first-year students will pay either 
$1,620 or $1,820 per semester depending 
upon room assignment location. Other 
room rentals range from $1,620 ro $2,280 
per semester. 

Food Services 

A cafeteria and table service dining room 
are located in Reynolda Hall; there are 
food courts in the Benson University 
Center and the Information Systems 
Building. A debit card system is used in 
which the student is charged only for the 
items selected at the time of purchase. A 
suggested range from $1,025 to $5,000 
per year is offered depending on the stu- 
dent's needs. The card may be used at any 
University food services facility or conve- 
nience store, and it allows a great deal of 
flexibility for eating on campus. 

First-year students living in residence 
balls are required to participate in both the 
fall and spring semesters in one of the 
board plans. 



Procedures 22 



Other Charges 

Admission application fee of $40 is 
required with each application for admis- 
sion to cover the cost of processing and is 
nonrefundable. 

Admission deposit of $500 is required 
for students applying to Wake Forest 
University as a first or single choice. An 
admission deposit of $300 is required for 
all regularly admitted students. All admis- 
sions deposits must be submitted to the 
Director of Admissions. The applicable 
deposit is credited to the student's charges 
for the semester for which he or she has 
been accepted for admission. 

Individual instruction music fees are 
required in addition to tuition for students 
enrolling for individual study in applied 
music in the Department of Music and are 
payable in the Office of Financial and 
Accounting Services. The fee for one credit 
per semester is $220; for more than one 
credit per semester, $440. 

Day Observation charges, made when the 
student is confined to the Student Health 
Service, are $125 per day. Ad-ditional 
charges may be made for any medica- 
tions, laboratory tests, and special sup- 
plies. Students must have hospital insur- 
ance. A group plan is available through 
the University for those not covered by a 
family plan. 

Library fines are charged for lost books 
and for violation of other library regula- 
tions and are payable in the library. 

A tuition deposit of $500 is required, at a 
date set by the Office of Financial and 
Accounting Services, of students enrolled in 
the spring semester who expect to return for 
the fall semester. It is credited to the student's 
University charges and is nonrefundable. 



Returned check fee of $25 is charged for 
each returned check by the office of 
Finanical and Accounting Services. 

Room change fee of $25 is charged for 
any unauthorized change. 

Improper check-in/out residence hall fee 
of $25 is charged for any student who 
does not follow appropriate administra- 
tive procedures. 

Residence hall lock core change fee of $70 
per lock is charged to any student who 
loses their room/suite/apartment key(s). 

Motor vehicle registration is $150 and traf- 
fic fines are $20 to $100. All students oper- 
ating a vehicle on campus (including student 
apartments, theme, and satellite houses) 
must register vehicles they are operating day 
or night, whether or not owned by the oper- 
ator. All vehicle registrations must be com- 
pleted within twenty-four hours from the 
first time the vehicle is brought to campus or 
the next business day. Proof of ownership 
must be presented to verify a license plate 
when applying for vehicle registration. For a 
vehicle to be properly registered, both the 
rear bumper decal and front windshield 
decal must be displayed. Fines are assessed 
against students violating parking regula- 
tions; copies of the violations are obtainable 
from the Office of Parking Management. 
Please inform any visitors of parking rules 
and regulations. 

Refunds of Charges and 
Return of Financial Aid 
Funds 

A student who withdraws during (begins, 
but does not complete) a term may be enti- 
tled to a refund of certain charges as out- 
lined in the Refund of Charges Policy. A 
withdrawal also affects financial aid 
eligibility, as outlined in the Return of 



2 3 



Procedures 



Non-Title IV Program Funds Policy and 
the federal Return of Title IV Program 
Funds Policy. Withdrawal procedures are 
coordinated by the deans of the College 
and the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy. 

Refund of Charges Policy 

A withdrawing student receives a tuition 
refund according to the following sched- 
ule. This schedule applies to a student who 
drops courses, as well as to a student who 
withdraws. 



Number of Weeks 

Attendance Percentage of Total 

(Including first day Tuition to be 

of registration Refunded 

validation) 



1 WEEK 


TOTAL TUITION LESS DEPOSIT 


2 WEEKS 


75 PERCENT 


3 WEEKS 


50 PERCENT 


4 WEEKS 


25 PERCENT 



A withdrawal must be official and students 
must return the University identification 
card before claiming a refund. There is no 
refund of room rent or the parking regis- 
tration fee if the decal has been placed on 
the vehicle. Unused meal plan funds are 
refunded. Fees for individual instruction in 
the Department of Music are refunded on 
the following basis: If a student drops the 
course before the fifth lesson, the fee will 
be one-fourteenth the full semester's 
instruction fee times the number of lessons 
the student has completed; there is no 
refund after the fifth lesson. 

The Office of Financial and Accounting 
Services calculates the refund of charges, 
and has available an example of the appli- 
cation of the University Refund of 
Charges Policy. 



Return of Title IV Program 
Funds Policy 

The 1998 amendments to the Higher 
Education Act (HEA) of 1965 (Section 
484B), and subsequent regulations issued 
by the United States Department of 
Education (34 CFR 668.22), establish a 
policy for the return of Title rV, HEA 
Program grant and loan funds for a recipi- 
ent who withdraws. The Return of Title rV 
Funds policy, implemented August 30, 
2000 at Wake Forest, replaces the former 
statutory federal refund policies. 

Title IV Funds include the following 
aid programs: Federal Pell Grant, Federal 
Supplemental Educational Opportunity 
Grant (FSEOG), Federal Perkins Loan, 
Federal Work-Study (FWS), Federal 
Stafford Loan (subsidized and unsubsi- 
dized), Federal PLUS Loan, and 
Leveraging Educational Assistance 
Partnership Grant (LEAP). 

The percentage of the term completed 
is determined by dividing the total number 
of calendar days comprising the term 
(excluding breaks of five or more consecu- 
tive days) into the number of calendar 
days completed. The percentage of Title rV 
grant and loan funds earned is: (1) up 
through the 60 percent point in time, the 
percentage of the term completed, (2) after 
the 60 percent point in time, 100 percent. 

The amount of Title rV grant and loan 
funds unearned is the complement of the 
percentage of earned Title IV funds applied 
to the total amount of Title IV funds dis- 
bursed (including funds that were not dis- 
bursed but could have been disbursed, i.e., 
post- withdrawal disbursements). 

If the amount earned is less than the 
amount disbursed, the difference is 
returned to the Title IV programs. If the 
amount earned is greater than the amount 



Procedures 



24 



disbursed, the difference is treated as a late 
disbursement in accordance with the feder- 
al rules for late disbursements. 

Unearned funds, up to the amount of 
total institutional charges multiplied by the 
unearned percentage of funds, are returned 
by the University; the student returns any 
portion of unearned funds not returned by 
the University. 

A student (or parent for PLUS loans) 
repays the calculated amount attributable 
to a Title IV loan program according to 
the loan's terms. If repayment of grant 
funds by the student is required, only 50 
percent of the unearned amount must be 
repaid. A student repays a Title IV grant 
program subject to repayment arrange- 
ments satisfactory to the University or the 
Secretary of Education's overpayment col- 
lection procedures. 

Funds returned are credited in the fol- 
lowing order: Unsubsidized FFEL (Staf- 
ford) Loans, Subsidized FFEL (Stafford) 
Loans, Federal Perkins Loans, Federal 
PLUS Loans, Federal Pell Grants, Federal 
Supplemental Educational Opportunity 
(SEOG) Grants, and other Title IV funds 
for which a return of funds is required. 

The Office of Student Financial Aid 
calculates the amount of unearned Title IV 
grant and loan funds, and has available 
examples of the application of this federal 
policy and a copy of the relevant Code of 
Federal Regulations section (CFR 668.22). 

Return of Non-Title IV 
Program Funds Policy 

A student who drops to less-than-full-time 
enrollment during a term loses eligibility 
for all University grants and scholarships 
for the entire term. 

The Office of Student Financial Aid cal- 
culates the amount of non-Title IV 



Program funds to be returned to the vari- 
ous programs when a recipient withdraws. 
For a recipient who withdraws, the total 
amount of the financial aid award (includ- 
ing institutional grants, scholarships, and 
loans) from University fund sources is 
reduced by the same percentage as the per- 
centage of total tuition to be refunded 
(from the table in the Refund of Charges 
section above). The order in which each 
University program of aid is reduced (and 
returned to the program) is determined on 
a case-by-case basis by the Office of 
Student Financial Aid, with the guiding 
principle being to return funds to those 
University accounts most likely to be used 
by other students in future terms. 
Return of funds to various state and pri- 
vate programs is determined by specific 
program rules. If rules allow, loan funds 
are returned to the programs before any 
grant and scholarship funds are returned. 
Required returns of funds to all financial 
aid programs are made prior to the refund 
to the student. 

Housing 

All unmarried first-year students are 
required to live in the residence halls, 
except ( 1 ) when permission is given by the 
director of residence life and housing for 
the student to live with parents or a relative 
in the Winston-Salem area; (2) by special 
arrangement when space is not available on 
campus; (3) the student is admitted as a 
day student; or (4) if the student has lost 
residence hall space because of a Residence 
Halls Agreement violation or disciplinary 
action. Fifth-year students are ineligible for 
campus housing except when permitted to 
do so by the Office of Residence Life and 
Housing. Married students are not permit- 
ted to live within the residence halls. 



2-5 



Procedures 



Residence halls are supervised by the direc- 
tor of residence life and housing, associate 
and assistant directors of residence life and 
housing, residence life coordinators, and 
graduate student hall directors. 

The charges for residence hall rooms 
for 2000-2001 will range from approxi- 
mately $1,620 per single to $2,280 per 
semester depending on the location and 
amenities available. 



Academic Calendar 

The academic calendar of the College and 
the Wayne Calloway School of Business 
and Accountancy includes a fall semester 
beginning in late August and ending before 
Christmas, a spring semester beginning in 
January and ending in May, and two five- 
week summer sessions. Semesters usually 
last fifteen weeks. 



Off-campus Housing Policy 

The University has developed guidelines 
and policies for those undergraduate stu- 
dents who desire to live off-campus in resi- 
dential areas zoned for single family use 
(i.e. non-apartment complex residential 
property). Such policies will not affect 
apartment or other multi-family residences; 
however all students will be required to 
apply for off-campus housing status. 

Guideline information is sent to all 
undergraduate students each year regarding 
this policy. Conditions may be placed on 
students who choose to live in single family 
areas, or students may be denied the ability 
to live within such a location. Students who 
desire to reside off campus must complete 
an application and obtain approval from 
the Office of Residence Life and Housing 
prior to signing off -campus leases. 

Resident undergraduate students are 
guaranteed campus housing for eight 
semesters. To protect yourself and to give 
yourself the most options until you have 
an opportunity to review this policy fully, 
do not sign any off-campus leases. Please 
contact the Office of Residence Life and 
Housing for a copy of the full Off-campus 
Housing Policy and Guidelines. 



Orientation and Advising 

A five-day orientation period for new 
students in the College precedes registra- 
tion for the fall semester. An academic 
adviser and an upperclass student pro- 
vide guidance during and between regis- 
tration periods throughout the student's 
first and second years. Advisers meet 
with students both individually and in 
small groups. Students are encouraged to 
take the initiative in arranging additional 
meetings at any time they feel a need for 
advice or other assistance. The adviser 
suggests and approves courses of instruc- 
tion until the student declares a major(s) 
in a field(s) of study toward the end of 
the second year. At that time, a new 
adviser is assigned. 

Registration 

Registration for continuing students in the 
College and the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy occurs in April 
for the fall and summer terms, and in 
November for the spring term. New stu- 
dents register at the beginning of the term in 
which they first enroll. Consultation with 
the academic adviser must be completed 
prior to registration. Confirmation of 
enrollment is required before classes begin 
each term. All tuition and fees must be paid 



Procedures 26 



in full to the Office of Financial and 
Accounting Services prior to confirmation. 

Classification 

Classification of students by class standing 
and as full-time or part-time is calculated 
in terms of credits. Most courses in the 
College and the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy have a value of 
four credits, but may vary from one credit 
to six. The normal load for a full-time stu- 
dent is eighteen credits per semester, with a 
maximum of twenty permitted during reg- 
istration. A student wishing to register for 
more than twenty credits per semester 
must seek the permission of the academic 
adviser and the appropriate dean once 
drop-add begins. Non-business or non- 
accounting majors wishing to take courses 
in the Calloway School must have met the 
specific courses' prerequisites and have 
permission of the instructor. Enrollment in 
the course is subject to space availability. 

Twelve credits per semester constitute 
minimum full-time registration at the 
University. (Recipients of North Carolina 
Legislative Tuition Grants must be enrolled 
by the tenth day of classes for at least four- 
teen credits each semester. Recipients of 
veterans' benefits, grants from state gov- 
ernment, and other governmental aid must 
meet the guidelines of the appropriate 
agencies.) A student who feels that he or 
she has valid and compelling reasons to 
register for more than twenty credits per 
semester must seek permission of the 
adviser and the appropriate dean after reg- 
istration. Only if both the adviser and the 
dean agree that the proposed course load is 
needed and in the best interest of the stu- 
dent will permission be granted. 

The requirements for classification 
after the first year are as follows: 



Sophomore— the completion of no 

fewer than 29 credits toward a degree; 

Junior— the completion of no fewer 
than 65 credits toward a degree; 

Senior— the completion of no fewer 
than 104 credits toward a degree. 

Part-time Students 

A student may not register for fewer than 
twelve credits without specific permission 
from the appropriate dean to register as a 
part-time student. A full-time student in 
the fall semester of any given year may not 
be a part-time student in the spring 
semester immediately following without 
approval, given before the beginning of the 
semester, by one of the academic deans. 
The approval carries with it the permission 
to pay for such work on a per-credit basis. 
Any student who petitions for part-time 
status within the semester in which he or 
she wishes to gain such status will be 
required to pay full tuition. Part-time stu- 
dents are ineligible for campus housing 
except when permitted to do so by the 
Office of Residence Life and Housing. 

Class Attendance 

Attendance regulations place the responsi- 
bility for class attendance on the student, 
who is expected to attend classes regularly 
and punctually. A vital aspect of the resi- 
dential college experience is attendance in 
the classroom; its value cannot be measured 
by testing procedures alone. Students are 
considered sufficiently mature to appreciate 
the necessity of regular attendance, to 
accept this personal responsibility, to 
demonstrate the self-discipline essential for 
such performance, and to recognize and 
accept the consequences of failure to attend. 
Students who cause their work or that of 



27 



Procedures 



the class to suffer because of absence or 
lateness may be referred by the instructor to 
the dean of the College or to the dean of the 
Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy for suitable action. Any stu- 
dent who does not attend classes regularly 
or who demonstrates other evidence of aca- 
demic irresponsibility is subject to such dis- 
ciplinary action as the Committee on 
Academic Affairs may prescribe, including 
immediate suspension from the College or 
from the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy. 

Students who miss class while acting as 
duly authorized representatives of the 
University at events and times approved by 
the appropriate dean are considered 
excused. Students will inform their instruc- 
tors in advance of these excused absences. 
The disposition of missed assignments will 
be arranged between instructor and stu- 
dent. Students anticipating numerous 
excused absences should consult the 
instructor before enrolling in classes in 
which attendance and class participation 
count heavily toward the grade. For poli- 
cies pertaining to absences resulting from 
illness, please see the statement on the 
Student Health Service and class excuses in 
the Student Handbook. 

Auditing Courses 

When space is available after the registra- 
tion of regularly enrolled students, others 
may request permission of the instructor to 
enter the course as auditors. No additional 
charge is made to full-time students in the 
College or the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy; for others the 
fee is $30 per credit. Permission of the 
instructor is required. An auditor is subject 
to attendance regulations and to other con- 
ditions imposed by the instructor. 



Although an auditor receives no credit, 
a notation of audit is made on the final 
grade report and entered on the record of 
regularly enrolled students who have met 
the instructor's requirements. An audit 
may not be changed to a credit course or a 
credit course changed to an audit after the 
first official day of classes for each 
semester or term. 

Dropping a Course 

The last day in each term for dropping a 
class without a grade of F is listed in the 
calendar in the front of this bulletin. A stu- 
dent who wishes to drop any course before 
this date must obtain the necessary form 
from the registrar and have it signed by his 
or her instructor. After this date, a student 
who wishes to drop a course must consult 
his or her academic adviser, the course 
instructor, and the dean of the College or 
the dean of the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy, as appropriate. 
If the dean approves the request, he or she 
authorizes the student to discontinue the 
course. Except in cases of emergency, the 
grade in the course will be recorded as F. 

If, at any time, a student drops any 
course without prior written approval of 
the appropriate dean, the student will be 
subject to such penalties as the Committee 
on Academic Affairs of the faculty may 
impose. 

Withdrawal 

A student who finds it necessary to with- 
draw from the College or the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy must do so through the office 
of the appropriate dean. With the approval 
of the dean of the College or the dean of 
the Wayne Calloway School of Business 



Procedures 28 



and Accountancy, no grades are recorded 
for the student for that semester, but the 
student's standing in courses at the time of 
the withdrawal may be taken into consid- 
eration when readmission is sought. If 
withdrawal is for academic reasons, failing 
grades may be assigned in all courses in 
which the student is doing unsatisfactory 
work. A student who leaves the College or 
the Wayne Calloway School of Business 
and Accountancy without officially with- 
drawing is assigned failing grades in all 
current courses, and the unofficial with- 
drawal is recorded. 

Withdrawal from the College or the 
Calloway School cannot be finalized until 
ThinkPads, printers, connecting cables, 
WFU ID cards, residence hall keys (if 
applicable) and post office box keys, along 
with any other pertinent University proper- 
ty items, have been turned in to the appro- 
priate offices. 

Examinations 

Final examinations are given at regularly 
scheduled times. All examinations are con- 
ducted in accordance with the Honor and 
Ethics System adopted by the student body 
and approved by the faculty. Under it, the 
student is expected to refrain from unfair- 
ness in any form and to report to the 
Honor and Ethics Council any student 
whom he or she knows to be cheating. 

Grading 

For most courses carrying undergraduate 
credit, there are twelve final and one con- 
ditional grade: A (exceptionally high 
achievement), A-, B+, B (superior), B-, C+, 
C (satisfactory), C-, D+, D, D- (passing 
but unsatisfactory), F (failure), and I 
(incomplete). 



Grade of I. The grade of I may be 
assigned only when a student fails to com- 
plete the work of a course because of ill- 
ness or some other emergency. If the work 
recorded as I is not completed within thir- 
ty days after the student enters for his or 
her next semester, the grade automatically 
becomes F. The instructor must report the 
final grade to the registrar within forty-five 
days after the beginning of that semester. 

Grade Points. Grades are assigned grade 
points for the computation of academic 
averages, class standing, and eligibility for 
continuation, as follows: 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF A 4.00 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF A- 3.67 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF B+ 3.33 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF B 3.00 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF B- 2.67 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF C+ 2.33 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF C 2.00 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF C- 1 .67 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF D+ 1 .33 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF D 1 .00 POINTS 

FOR EACH CREDIT OF D- 0.67 POINTS 

FOR EACH GRADE OF F NO POINTS 

Pass/Fail. To encourage students to ven- 
ture into fields outside their major areas of 
competence and concentration, the under- 
graduate schools make available the 
option, under certain conditions, of regis- 
tering in courses on a pass/fail basis rather 
than for a letter grade. Courses taken 
under the pass/fail option yield full credit 
when satisfactorily completed but, whether 
passed or not, they are not computed in 
the grade point average. In no case may a 
student change from grade to pass/fail 
mode, or from pass/fail to grade mode, 
after the last day to add a course, listed in 
the calendar at the front of this bulletin. 

A student may count toward the 
degree no more than twenty-four credits 



2-9 



Procedures 



taken on a pass/fail basis. First- and sec- 
ond-year students are not eligible to elect 
the pass/fail mode, but may enroll for 
courses offered only on a pass/fail basis. 
Third- and fourth-year students may elect 
as many as sixteen credits on a pass/fail 
basis, but no more than five credits in a 
given semester. Courses used to fulfill 
basic, divisional, major, or minor require- 
ments may not be taken on a pass/fail basis 
unless they are offered only on that basis. 
Courses in the major(s) not used for satis- 
fying major requirements may be taken on 
a pass/fail basis if the department of the 
major does not specify otherwise. 

No courses in the Calloway School can 
be taken pass/fail. 

Grade Reports and 
Transcripts 

A midterm report and a final report of 
grades are issued to students by the regis- 
trar in the fall and spring semesters. A 
final report of grades is issued for each 
summer term. 

Transcripts of the permanent educa- 
tional record will be issued to students 
upon written request unless there are 
unpaid financial obligations to the College 
or University, or other unresolved issues. 
Copies of a student's cumulative record are 
issued by the registrar, but only on the 
written authorization of the student. 

Under the law, the University has the 
right to inform parents of dependent stu- 
dents and certain other qualified individu- 
als of the contents of educational records. 

Dean's List 

The Dean's List is issued at the end of the 
fall and spring semesters. It includes all 
full-time degree-seeking students in the 



College and the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy who have a 
grade point average of 3.0 or better for the 
semester and who have earned no grade 
below C during the semester. 

Graduation Distinctions 

Graduation distinctions are determined by 
the grade-point system and are based 
entirely on grades earned in Wake Forest 
courses. A degree candidate with a cumu- 
lative average of not less than 3.8 for all 
courses attempted is graduated with the 
distinction summa cum laude. A candidate 
with a cumulative average of not less than 
3.6 for all courses attempted is graduated 
with the distinction magna cum laude. A 
candidate with a cumulative average of 
not less than 3.4 for all courses attempted 
is graduated with the distinction cum 
laude. Details are available in the Office 
of the Registrar. 

Repetition of Courses 

A student may not repeat a course in 
which he or she has received a grade of C 
or higher. A student may, however, repeat 
at Wake Forest a Wake Forest course for 
which he or she has received a grade of C- 
or lower. In this case, all grades received 
will be shown on the transcript, but the 
course may be counted only one time for 
credit. If a student fails a course previously 
passed, the credit originally earned will not 
be lost. For purposes of determining the 
cumulative grade point average, a course 
will be considered as attempted only once, 
and the grade points assigned will reflect 
the highest grade received. These provi- 
sions do not apply to any course for which 
the student has received the grade of F in 
consequence of an honor violation. 



Procedures 



30 



Probation 

Any student who is placed on probation 
because of honor code or conduct code 
violations may be placed on such special 
academic probation as the Committee on 
Academic Affairs imposes. The Committee 
on Academic Affairs may at any time sus- 
pend or place on probation any student 
who has given evidence of academic irre- 
sponsibility, such as failing to attend class 
regularly or to complete papers, examina- 
tions, or other work on time. 

If poor academic performance is 
attributable to circumstances over which 
the student clearly had no control (e.g., 
serious injury or illness), the student may, 
after consultation with one of the academ- 
ic deans, petition the Committee on 
Academic Affairs for further consideration 
of his or her status. 

In deciding whether to permit excep- 
tions to the foregoing eligibility require- 
ments, the Committee on Academic Affairs 
will take into account such factors as con- 
victions for violations of the College honor 
code or social conduct code, violations of 
the law, and any other behavior demon- 
strating disrespect for the rights of others. 

Any student convicted of violating the 
honor code is ineligible to represent the 
University in any way until the period of 
suspension or probation is completed and 
the student is returned to good standing. 
Students who are on probation for any 
reason may not be initiated into any frater- 
nity or sorority until the end of their pro- 
bationary period. 



Requirements for 
Continuation 

A student's academic eligiblility to contin- 
ue is determined by the number of course 
credits passed and the grade point average. 
The number of credits passed is the sum of 
the credits transferred from other institu- 
tions and the credits earned in the under- 
graduate schools of the University. The 
grade point average is computed only on 
work attempted in the undergraduate 
schools of the University and excludes 
both non-credit and pass/fail courses. 

Students are expected to make reason- 
able and systematic progress toward the 
accomplishment of their degree programs. 
To be eligible to continue in the College, 
students must maintain 

for credits passed: a minimum cum. GPA of: 

1-36 1.45 

37-72 1 .60 

73-108 1.75 

109 AND ABOVE 1.90 

Students are responsible for knowing their 
academic standing at all times. Any student 
whose GPA falls below the required mini- 
mum shall have a grace period of one 
semester to raise the average to the req- 
uired level. Students also have the option of 
attending summer school at Wake Forest in 
an effort to raise the average. 

The Committee on Academic Affairs 
will suspend students who earn eight or 
fewer grade points in any given semester 
in courses other than Education 353; mili- 
tary science courses; Music 111-121 
(ensemble courses); Dance 128; and elec- 
tive 100-level courses in health and exer- 
cise science. In cases where failure was 
due to circumstances beyond the students' 
control, they may appeal to the 
Committee for an exception. 



31 



Procedures 



Any student who is in academic diffi- 
culty is urged to seek advice and counsel 
from his or her academic adviser, from the 
Office of the Dean of the College, from the 
Learning Assistance Center, and from the 
University Counseling Center. 

A student who has or develops a health 
problem which, in the judgment of the 
director of the Student Health Service, cre- 
ates a danger to the safety and well-being 
of the student or others may be required to 
withdraw until the problem is resolved. 

Requirements for 
Readmission 



College or the dean of the Wayne Calloway 
School of Business and Accountancy. 
Courses taken elsewhere on the semester- 
hour plan are computed as transfer credit at 
1.125 credits for each approved semester 
hour. All transfer work taken after enroll- 
ment at Wake Forest must be taken in an 
approved four-year institution. 

Courses taken outside the U.S. require, 
in addition, prior approval from the 
Center for International Studies. Students 
must obtain a course approval form from 
the Center for International Studies. 

Transfer Credit 



The Committee on Academic Affairs over- 
sees the readmission of former students. In 
making a decision on whether to readmit, 
the Committee considers both the academic 
and non-academic records of the student. 
Students who have been ineligible to contin- 
ue for academic reasons must present to the 
Committee a list of steps they plan to take to 
raise their academic standing to acceptable 
standards. Non-academic grounds for denial 
may include convictions for violations of the 
honor code or the social conduct code, for 
violations of the law, and other behavior 
showing disrespect for the rights of others. 

Summer Study 

In addition to regular courses, a number 
of special summer programs for credit are 
described in the bulletin of the summer 
session. 

In order to be eligible to take summer 
courses at another college or university, the 
student must have a cumulative grade point 
average of no less than 2.0 and must obtain 
advance approval of the head of the depart- 
ment concerned, the registrar, and in some 
cases, the Office of the Dean of Wake Forest 



All work attempted in other colleges and 
universities must be reported to the regis- 
trar of Wake Forest University. Students 
wishing to receive transfer credit for work 
to be undertaken elsewhere must have a 
cumulative grade point average of no less 
than 2.0 and must obtain faculty approval 
in advance. For enrolled Wake Forest stu- 
dents, transfer work can be accepted only 
from approved four-year institutions. To 
be accepted for transfer credit, the grade in 
any course must be C or better. Courses 
completed at other colleges or universities 
with the grade of C- or lower will not be 
awarded transfer credit in Wake Forest. 

Approval of 
Overseas Programs 

Students who wish to receive academic 
credit for courses taken outside the U.S. 
need to obtain approval of the program 
before applying from the Center for 
International Studies and then faculty 
approval of specific courses after accep- 
tance. The Approval Form for Study 
Outside the United States is available in 
the Center for International Studies. 



Procedures 



32 



Scholarships and Loans 






Any student regularly admitted 
to Wake Forest College who 
demonstrates financial need will 
receive assistance commensurate 
with that need. 

By regulation of the Board of Trustees, all 
financial aid must be approved by the 
Committee on Scholarships and Student 
Aid. Applications should be requested from 
the committee at P.O. Box 7246 Reynolda 
Station, Winston-Salem, North Carolina 
27109-7246. Scholarships supported by 
funds of the undergraduate schools are not 
granted to students enrolled in other 
schools of the University. To receive consid- 
eration for financial aid, the applicant must 
either be enrolled as an undergraduate or 
have been accepted for admission. The 
financial aid program comprises institu- 
tional, state, and federal scholarship, loan, 
and work funds. Full-time students are eli- 
gible to apply for institutional funds. Half- 
time and part-time students are eligible to 
apply for federal funds. 

The University offers a number of 
scholarships based upon merit. Those with 
a stipend based upon tuition will increase 
as tuition increases; those with a dollar 
stipend remain fixed for the four years of 
enrollment. 

Additional scholarship assistance not 
listed herein is offered to student athletes 
through the Department of Athletics. 

Need is a factor in the awarding of 
most financial aid, and each applicant 
must file an annual financial statement 
with the application for financial aid. After 
reviewing the standard financial analysis, 
the Committee on Scholarships and 



Student Aid determines aid awards, and 
aid is credited, by semester, to the student's 
account in the Office of Financial and 
Accounting Services. The calculation of 
need, and therefore the amount of an 
award, may vary from year to year. The 
Committee on Scholarships and Student 
Aid reserves the right to revoke financial 
aid for unsatisfactory academic achieve- 
ment, for violation of University regula- 
tions including its honor code, or for viola- 
tion of federal, state, or local laws. 

Satisfactory Academic 
Progress Requirements for 
Financial Aid Recipients 

The Higher Education Act mandates that 
institutions of higher education establish 
minimum standards of "satisfactory aca- 
demic progress" for students receiving fed- 
eral financial aid. Wake Forest University 
makes these minimum standards applica- 
ble to all programs funded by the federal 
government. Additionally, University poli- 
cy generally precludes awarding institu- 
tionally controlled scholarships and grants 
to any student with less than a 2.0 cumula- 
tive grade point average on all work 
attempted at Wake Forest, and to any stu- 
dent enrolled on less than a full-time basis. 
Students should note that the policy on 
satisfactory academic progress applies only 
to the general eligibility for financial aid 
consideration. Certain loan programs 
require either the passage of a period of 



33 



Scholarships and Loans 



time or the advancing of a grade level 
between annual maximum borrowing, 
regardless of general eligibility for aid. 
Certain scholarship programs have addi- 
tional requirements. Institutional scholar- 
ship aid is generally not awarded for sum- 
mer school. 

An evaluation will be made at the end 
of each academic year for the next aca- 
demic year. Students must maintain a WFU 
grade point average required for continued 
enrollment and, in addition, must have 
received WFU credits as listed after the 
indicated terms of enrollment. Credits 
earned are based upon a maximum time 
frame of six years (no WFU scholarship or 
grant assistance is generally available after 
four years) and represent a minimum per- 
centage of work to be completed. Please 
the see chart on academic progress below 
for minimum requirements related to 
semesters at Wake Forest, credits earned at 
Wake Forest, and GPA on credits attempt- 
ed at Wake Forest. * 

Part-time students must have earned 80 
percent of all credits attempted (as of the 
last day to drop a course), with the same 
grade point average requirement as full- 
time students, in order to be eligible for 
Federal Pell Grant and Federal Stafford 
Loan consideration. No aid can be award- 
ed to part-time students beyond the 1 8th 
semester except in extenuating circum- 
stances. Repeated courses will count for 



GPA according to University policy. When 
successfully completed they will count as 
their appropriate credit earned. 

Transfer students must earn 12 credits per 
semester of enrollment at WFU; their 
grade point average requirement will be 
that average consistent with University 
policy for continuation. University grant 
assistance for transfer students is limited to 
the equivalent of four years, based upon 
transfer credit. Summer sessions will not 
be counted as semesters in residence. 
Incompletes count as credits attempted. 

Denial of aid under this policy may be 
appealed in writing to the Committee on 
Scholarships and Student Aid. The 
Committee may grant a probationary rein- 
statement of one semester (in exceptional 
cases this period may be for one full aca- 
demic year) to any student upon demon- 
stration of extenuating circumstances, 
which must be documented in writing to 
the satisfaction of the Committee. 
Examples of extenuating circumstances 
and appropriate documentation include, 
but are not necessarily limited to: illness 
of student or immediate family members — 
statement from physician that illness inter- 
fered with opportunity for satisfactory 
progress; death in family — statement of 
student or minister; temporary or perma- 
nent disability — statement from physician. 
During a probationary period, students are 
considered to be making satisfactory 



* Academic Requirements for Full-time Students 

Semester 123 45 6 789 10 11 

Credits Earned 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 

GPA 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.60 1.60 1.60 1.75 1.75 1.75 1.90 1.90 



Scholarships and Loans 



34 



academic progress under this policy and 
may continue to receive federal aid. A 
determination of satisfactory academic 
progress for any period of enrollment after 
the probationary period will be made, 
upon the student's written request, at the 
end of the probationary period. 
Reinstatement after probation can be made 
only after the student has received credit 
for the appropriate percentage of work 
attempted with the required cumulative 
GPA. Any student determined ineligible for 
any academic year may request a special 
review at the end of one semester or sum- 
mer term and may thereby be reinstated 
for all or part of the academic year. The 
student must request any such mid-year 
review in writing; otherwise only one 
determination of satisfactory academic 
progress will be made each academic year. 
Reinstatement cannot be made retroactive. 

Scholarships 

The Reynolds Scholarships are awarded 
each year to up to five extraordinarily 
capable men and women entering the 
College as first-year students. Made possi- 
ble through a grant from the Z. Smith 
Reynolds Foundation in honor of Nancy 
Susan Reynolds, these scholarships cover 
the cost of tuition, room, and board, and 
include an allowance for books and per- 
sonal expenses. Scholars may receive up to 
$1,500 each summer for travel or study 
projects approved by the Reynolds 
Committee. The Reynolds Scholarships are 
awarded without regard to financial need 
and will be renewed annually through the 
recipient's fourth year of college, subject to 
satisfactory performance. A separate appli- 
cation is required by December 1. 



The Graylyn Scholarship provides one full 
tuition, room, and board renewable schol- 
arship to a student who applies for the 
Reynolds or Carswell Scholarship and who 
possesses extraordinary academic and 
leadership skills. The Graylyn Scholarship 
is provided by the Graylyn International 
Conference Center in support of under- 
graduate excellence. Scholars also have a 
stipend for personal expenses and summer 
grant opportunities. The fund also pro- 
vides for leadership awards to the medical, 
law and business schools. 

The O. W. Wilson Scholarship, created 
under the will of O. W. Wilson of Yancey 
County, N.C., is awarded to an individual 
who demonstrates outstanding qualities of 
intellectual promise and leadership. The 
scholarship has a value equivalent to annu- 
al tuition and provides summer grant 
opportunities to encourage individual study 
projects. Awarded through the Reynolds 
and Carswell scholarship applications. 

The Dr. George E. and Lila C. Bradford 
Fund awards in alternate years a renew- 
able full-tuition academic scholarship 
annually to a student possessing outstand- 
ing leadership and aptitude who intends to 
pursue a premedical course of study. 
Awarded through the Reynolds and 
Carswell scholarship applications. 

The Guy T. Carswell Scholarships, made 
possible by and established in honor of the 
late Guy T Carswell and his wife Clara 
Carswell of Charlotte, N.C., have an annu- 
al value ranging from a minimum stipend of 
$10,700 to a maximum stipend of full 
demonstrated need. Each scholar may apply 
for at least one summer grant of up to 
$1,000 to fund travel and study projects of 
the student's design. A Carswell scholar 
must be a student applying to the College 
who possesses outstanding qualities of intel- 
lect and leadership. Up to thirty scholars 



35 



Scholarships and Loans 



are selected annually. A separate application 
is due by January 1 . 

The Thomas E. and Ruth Mullen Scholars 
of the Upperdass Carswell Scholarship 
program are chosen among outstanding 
undergraduates who have a minimum of 
one year of academic work at Wake Forest. 
A separate application is due by 
October 15. 

The Presidential Scholarships for 
Distinguished Achievement, established by 
the University's alumni/ae, award twenty 
renewable $10,700 scholarships on the 
basis of exceptional talent and leadership. 
Candidates must be students who will 
enrich and add to the diversity of life at 
Wake Forest through their special talents in 
the areas of the fine arts (including music, 
art, theatre, dance, film, and other arts), 
debate and public speaking, writing, leader- 
ship, public service, and entrepreneurial 
achievement. A separate application must 
be submitted by December 1. 

The Joseph Gordon and Wake Forest 
Diversity Scholarships, established by 
endowment from the University's 
Sesquicentennial Fund and gifts from the 
Z. Smith Reynolds Foundation, are award- 
ed each year to entering first-year students 
who demonstrate academic promise and 
leadership potential, with a preference for 
students with outstanding achievements 
who will add to the diversity of the student 
body. This program provides seven full- 
tuition scholarships. All scholarships are 
renewable annually through the recipient's 
fourth year based upon a suitable academ- 
ic and honor record. Awards are made 
without regard to financial need. A sepa- 
rate application is required by January 1. 

The William Louis Poteat Scholarships, 
valued at $10,700 per year, are awarded to 
twenty entering first-year students. To be 



eligible, a student must be an active mem- 
ber of a church affiliated with the Baptist 
State Convention of North Carolina or the 
General Baptist State Convention of North 
Carolina and must be likely to make a sig- 
nificant contribution to church and soci- 
ety. A separate application is required by 
December 15. 

Several scholarships awarded through the 
Poteat program are endowed and are 
named by the donor(s), they include: 

The Ben T. Aycock Jr./Minta Aycock 
McNally Scholarship, established by Leila 
Holding Aycock. 

The Beach Scholarship, established by 
Benjamin S. Beach. 

The Ed and Jean Christman Scholarship, 
established by the Ministerial Council of 
Wake Forest University. 

The Cockman-Gore Scholarship, estab- 
lished by Ivey and Claudia Cockman in 
honor of Daniel and Roberta Gore. 

The H. Max Craig Jr. Scholarship, estab- 
lished by Winfred Norman Hasty Jr. 

The Nathan D. Dial Scholarship, estab- 
lished by Robert I. and Barbara D. 
Whiteman of Raleigh, N.C. 

The Evans Family Scholarship, established 
by Ernest Leroy and Austine Odom Evans 
of Ahoskie, N.C. 

The W.D. and Alberta B. Holleman 
Memorial Scholarship Fund, established 
by Robert D. Holleman in memory of his 
parents and awarded to a student from 
Durham County. 

The E. Glen and Joyce Holt Scholarship, 
established by Charles Holt and Amy Holt 
Neill. 

Wake Forest Honor Scholarships provide 
an annual renewable grant of $5,000 to 
students selected from those who apply for 



Scholarships and Loans i£ 



the Reynolds or Carswell Scholarships and 
who demonstrate exceptional academic 
ability and leadership. 

The George Foster Hankins Scholarships, 
made possible by the late Colonel George 
Foster Hankins of Lexington, N.C., for res- 
idents of North Carolina or children of 
alumni/ae living in other states with prefer- 
ence given to residents of Davidson County, 
have an annual value of up to full demon- 
strated need. Recipients must demonstrate 
need as well as academic promise. A sepa- 
rate application is due by January 1. 

The Robert P. and Dorothy Caldwell 
Scholarships, given by family and friends 
of Robert P. and Dorothy Caldwell, pro- 
vide up to three scholarships annually on 
the basis of outstanding academic achieve- 
ment, demonstrated leadership ability, 
record of community service, and a com- 
mitment to helping others. A portion of 
these funds gives preference to students 
from Gaston and Catawba (N.C.) counties 
who need assistance in order to attend 
Wake Forest. The student must apply for 
the merit-based Caldwell Scholarship 
through the Reynolds and Carswell schol- 
arships applications. 

The Holding Scholarship, provided by a 
gift from the Robert P. Holding 
Foundation in memory of Mr. Holding, a 
member of the Class of 1916, offers one 
full tuition renewable scholarship in alter- 
nate years to a student of exceptional lead- 
ership and academic promise, who is in 
residence at least one year in North 
Carolina. The student must complete an 
application for either the Nancy Susan 
Reynolds or Carswell Scholarship. 

The Junius C. and Eliza P. Brown 
Scholarships are designed to recognize 
excellence among North Carolina students 
demonstrating financial need in order to 



attend Wake Forest. Preference for selec- 
tion is given first to students from the 
Madison area of Rockingham County, sec- 
ond to students from the Reidsville area of 
Rockingham County, and third to other 
applicants from Rockingham County. A 
separate application is due by January 1. 

National Achievement Scholarships are 
awarded to four finalists in the achievement 
scholarship program. The minimum of 
$3,000 ($750 annually for four years) will 
extend up to $2,000 annually depending on 
need. Students must select Wake Forest as 
their first-choice college in the NASC pro- 
gram; recipients are chosen by the 
Scholarship Committee, usually by April 1 . 

National Merit Scholarships are awarded 
to four finalists in the merit scholarship 
program. The minimum award of $3,000 
($750 annually for four years) will extend 
up to $2,000 annually depending on need. 
Students must note Wake Forest as their 
first-choice college in the NMSC testing 
program; recipients are chosen by the 
Scholarship Committee, usually by April 1. 

For all the following scholarships, there is 
no separate application required except 
where noted. Students who complete the 
Financial Aid PROFILE of the College 
Scholarship Service will be considered for 
appropriate scholarships. 

The Page W. Acree Humanities in Science 
Scholarship Fund was established to pro- 
vide support for students majoring in 
chemistry, physics, biology, or mathemat- 
ics/computer science, who have career 
objectives in medicine or science-related 
fields that require human service, and who 
wish to take unrequired academic work in 
the humanities. A separate application to 
the dean of the College is required. 



37 



Scholarships and Loans 



The Charles I. and Louise Allen 
Scholarship Fund, established under the 
will of Louise Lambeth Allen, is awarded 
on the basis of ability and need to a stu- 
dent who may be interested in pursuing a 
medical career. 

The Alumni and General Scholarship Fund 
provides assistance to students at the dis- 
cretion of the Committee on Scholarships 
and Student Aid. 

The Army Reserve Officers' Training 
Corps (AROTC) Scholarships are award- 
ed for academic and personal achievement. 
These four-, three-, and two-year scholar- 
ships annually pay: (1) $16,000 for tuition; 
(2) a flat rate for texts, equipment, and 
supplies (presently $450) and (3) a subsis- 
tence allowance of up to $1,500 ($150 per 
month for the months spent in school). All 
benefits are tax-free. Recipients must 
enroll and fully participate in Army 
ROTC. Four-year AROTC scholarships 
are applied for during the latter part of the 
junior or the early part of the senior year 
of high school. Two- and three-year 
AROTC scholarships are applied for dur- 
ing the sophomore and freshman years, 
respectively, through the Department of 
Military Science. 

The Teresa Mae Arnold Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of ability and need to 
a student enrolled in Wake Forest College. 

The Camillo Artom Fund for Italian 
Studies was established in 1976 in honor 
of Camillo Artom, professor of biochem- 
istry from 1939 to 1969. Scholarship aid is 
made available, usually to one or two stu- 
dents each semester, to assist with their 
expenses. Well-qualified students who can 
demonstrate need are eligible to apply. 
(Interested persons should apply to the 
Office of the Provost.) 



The Baker-Martin Scholarship Fund, estab- 
lished by Jerry H. Baker and Cassandra M. 
Baker of Marietta, Ga., provides scholar- 
ships on the basis of need for undergradu- 
ate students attending Wake Forest with 
the following qualifications: (1) who have 
earned their high school diploma from a 
high school located in North Carolina; and 
(2) whose parents (one or both) are cur- 
rently employed in private or public educa- 
tion or who are employees of the govern- 
ment. Preference will be given to students 
whose residence is located in the counties 
of Cabarrus or Nash. 

The Hubbard and Lucy Ball Scholarship 
Fund, established by Robert T Ball of 
Surprise, Ariz., is awarded on the basis 
of need. 

The Donald Alan Baur Memorial 
Scholarship is awarded on the basis of 
leadership, dedication, competitiveness, 
and citizenship, with preference given to 
members of Delta Nu Chapter, Sigma Chi 
Fraternity. 

The Gaither M. Beam Sr. Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of both ability and 
need with preference given to certain 
descendants and residents of Franklin 
County, N.C. 

The George M. and Daisy Olive Beavers 
Scholarship Fund, donated by Lydia 
Beavers in memory of her parents, is for 
one scholarship awarded on the basis of 
leadership, good citizenship, and excel- 
lence of character. 

The fames Wallace Beavers Scholarship 
Fund, established by Barbara J. Beavers, 
PhD of Atlanta, Ga., and Wwalter L. 
Beavers and Olive Beavers Jordan of 
Greensboro, N.C; and Walter L. Beavers 
of Greensboro, provides a scholarship to 
entering freshmen, and it may be renewed 
for three years of undergraduate study. 



Scholarships and Loans ^8 



The Becton Family Scholarship Fund is 
awarded on the basis of academic ability 
and financial need to a premedical student. 
Preference is given to students from 
Augusta, Ga., and secondly to other stu- 
dents from Georgia. 

The /. Irvin Biggs Scholarship is awarded 
to needy and deserving undergraduates, 
with preference given to students from 
Lumberton or Robeson County, N.C. 

The Blackbyrd Scholarship provides one 
annual scholarship to a chemistry major, 
with preference to the student having the 
second highest overall grade point average. 

The Peter Bondy Scholarship for study 
abroad is available through application 
with the Center for International Studies. 

The Robert C. Bridger Jr. Scholarship, 
donated by George R. Bridger in honor of 
his father, is made to a senior major in the 
Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy. Selection of the recipient is 
based on demonstrated academic ability 
and financial need, with preference given 
to students from Bladen County or south- 
eastern North Carolina. 

The William D. Brigman Scholarship Fund 
is awarded to a student in the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy on the basis of academic abil- 
ity and outstanding leadership potential. 

The H. Grady Britt Scholarship was creat- 
ed under the will of H. Grady Britt to ben- 
efit students in the Department of Biology. 

The Claude U. Broach Scholarship is 
awarded to a first-year or upperclass stu- 
dent with preference given to students 
from St. John's Baptist Church of 
Charlotte, N.C. 

The Gov. J. Melville and Alice W. 
Broughton Scholarship Fund, established 
in honor of Governor, Senator, and Wake 



Forest Trustee J. Melville Broughton and 
his wife, Alice W Broughton, by the 
Broughton family of Raleigh, N.C, 
awards one scholarship annually to a 
North Carolina student on the basis of 
academic ability and financial need. 

The Dean D. B. Bryan Memorial 
Scholarship Fund was established in honor 
of D. B. Bryan, dean of Wake Forest 
College from 1923 to 1957. It awards a 
partial or full-tuition scholarship to a stu- 
dent who plans to pursue a career in edu- 
cation, and who demonstrates financial 
need and academic ability. The recipient 
must pledge to work in the education field 
for a minimum of five years following 
graduation or must repay the scholarship 
to the University. 

The Joseph M. Bryan Sr. Scholarship is 
awarded to undergraduates in the form of 
both athletic and general scholarships. 

The Jack Buchanan Scholarship is award- 
ed on the basis of financial need and aca- 
demic ability, with preference given to stu- 
dents from western North Carolina 
planning a business major. 

The Lib and Joyner Burns Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of both ability and 
need, with preference given first to stu- 
dents having a physical handicap and sec- 
ond to students from Forsyth or Guilford 
counties, N.C. 

The D. Wayne Calloway Scholarship Fund 
provides scholarships for students attend- 
ing the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy Management 
Program for liberal arts majors. 

The John Douglas Cannon Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of academic ability 
and need to freshmen students, with pref- 
erence to a student from Rock Hill, S.C. 



39 



Scholarships and Loans 



The James Lee Carver Memorial 
Scholarship, donated by Jean Freeman 
Carver with her children, James Lee Carver 
II and Elizabeth Jeanine Carver, in memory 
of her husband, James Lee Carver, is for 
deserving and promising students who 
demonstrate a need for financial assistance, 
with preference given to students from the 
Oxford Orphanage in Oxford, N.C. 

The /. D. Cave Memorial Scholarship is 
awarded to a North Carolina male student 
who demonstrates strong character, a will- 
ingness to grow intellectually, and evidence 
of need, for an approximate annual value 
of $600. 

The Neal M. Chastain Memorial 
Scholarship, established by Mrs. June 
Booth of Charlotte, N.C. in memory of her 
son, is awarded to a senior business major 
exhibiting Christian ideals and good aca- 
demic achievement. 

The W.H. and Callie Anne Coughlin Clark 
Scholarship Fund, established by W.H. and 
Callie Anne Coughlin Clark of Hinsdale, 
111., provides assistance to undergraduate 
students, with preference to needy students. 

The Cobb Foundation Scholarship is award- 
ed on the basis of academic ability and 
financial need, with preference given first to 
students from Oxford Orphanage or other 
children's homes and second to students 
from Granville or Vance counties, N.C. 

The Wake Forest College Scholarships are 
available to first-year and upperclass stu- 
dents presenting satisfactory academic 
records and evidence of need. 

The William and Susan Collins Scholarship 
Fund, established by William A. and Susan 
A. Collins of Collinsville, Va., provides 
awards to students from the 
Commonwealth of Virginia, with prefer- 
ence to students from certain counties and 
cities in southwest Virginia. 



The Elton C. Cocke Memorial Fund was 
established by the family of Elton C. 
Cocke, former chair of the biology depart- 
ment, in his memory. The fund provides 
financial aid to undergraduate students 
majoring in biology and biology graduate 
students of outstanding ability. 

The Howard F. and Ruby C. Costello 
Scholarship Fund was created under the 
will of Ruby C. Costello to benefit finan- 
cially needy students. 

The William Henry Crouch Scholarship 
for ministerial students has been estab- 
lished by the Providence Baptist Church of 
Charlotte, N.C. in honor of its pastor. The 
scholarship is valued at $3,000 per year 
and is available for a North Carolina 
Baptist ministerial student or students 
based upon merit or need. 

The O.B. Crowell Memorial Scholarship 
Fund, donated by Louise T Crowell of 
Hendersonville, N.C, in memory of her 
husband, O. B. Crowell, is awarded on the 
basis of character, need, and promise. 

The Gary Franklin Culler Scholarship 
Fund, donated in memory of Gary 
Franklin Culler, is awarded on the basis of 
academic ability and outstanding leader- 
ship potential, with preference given to 
students from High Point, N.C. 

The Egbert L. Davis Jr. Scholarship, pro- 
vided by the Davis family in honor of 
Egbert L. Davis Jr., noted Wake Forest 
alumnus and benefactor, provides merit 
and need assistance to one or more stu- 
dents demonstrating outstanding academic 
performance, diligence, integrity, character, 
leadership, and reasonable athletic compe- 
tence. Awards are renewable on the basis 
of a B average, exemplary personal con- 
duct, and participation in the religious life 
of the University. 



Scholarships and Loans 



40 



The Eleanor Lay field Davis Art 
Scholarship Fund awards a scholarship to 
a student with interest and ability in studio 
art, who has been recommended by the 
chair of the art department, to exemplify 
the talents and interests of Eleanor 
Layfield Davis. 

The Mrs. Paul Price Davis Scholarship 
Fund was established by Jessie Leigh Davis 
Boney and Betty Davis Britt to assist North 
Carolina students. Preference is given to 
students who have been residents of Baptist 
Children's Homes of North Carolina. 

The Thomas H. Davis Business 
Scholarship, established by employees of 
the former Piedmont Aviation Inc. in 
honor of its founder and retired chair, is 
awarded to a senior business major based 
on academic achievement, financial need, 
and potential for business leadership. 

The Deal Family Scholarship provides 
funding for the Carswell Scholarship pro- 
gram, with preference first to students from 
Catawba, Caldwell, Burke, and Alexander 
counties, N.C.; second to other North 
Carolinians; and third to other students. 

The Otis William Deese Presidential 
Scholarship is awarded as a supplement to 
the Presidential Scholarships for 
Distinguished Achievement program to 
undergraduate students with demonstrated 
financial need. 

The Justus and Elizabeth S. Drake 
Scholarship is awarded to an English 
major who demonstrates academic ability 
and financial need, upon the recommenda- 
tion of the chair of the English department. 

The Barry and Ann Griffin Driggs 
Scholarship provides a scholarship or 
scholarships for undergraduate students 
who are classified as juniors or seniors and 
who are majoring in mathematics. 
Preference will be given to those with 



demonstrated financial need and a merito- 
rious academic record and an interest in 
applied mathematics. 

The Fred H. Duvall Scholarship provides 
funds for needy students. 

The Dean Robert Dyer Scholarship Fund 
for International Students, established by 
Dr. Ping K. Tse and Dr. Dominic K. Chan, 
provides scholarships for undergraduate 
students from countries other than the 
United States of America. 

The Ernst and Young International 
Scholarship is awarded through the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy to an accounting student or 
rising accounting student in the master of 
science in accountancy program. 

The Douglas Esherick Award Fund is used 
annually for a member of the Sigma Chi 
fraternity. 

The Theodore and Freda Fisher 
Scholarship, donated by Emile T Fisher in 
honor of his parents, is awarded to North 
Carolina students with demonstrated 
financial need and with grade point aver- 
ages in the C and low B categories. 

The Bobbie Fletcher Memorial Scholarship 
is awarded on the basis of academic ability 
and uncommon leadership qualities to a 
female student from North Carolina. 
Recipients will possess the qualities of 
kindness, thoughtfulness, unselfishness, 
patience, and determination which distin- 
guished Bobbie Fletcher. Preference will be 
given to students demonstrating need. 

The Lecausey P. and Tula H. Freeman 
Scholarship, donated by Mr. and Mrs. G. 
H. Singleton of Raleigh, in memory of the 
parents of Mrs. Singleton, is available to a 
first-year student, sophomore, or junior 
whose home is within the West Chowan 
Baptist Association of North Carolina, 



41 



Scholarships and Loans 



with preference given to Bertie County stu- 
dents, on the basis of need and ability. 
Residents of the Roanoke Association may 
be considered for the scholarship. 

The Wallace G. Freemon Memorial 
Scholarship is awarded to needy premedi- 
cal students in Wake Forest College. 

The F. Lee Fulton Scholarship Fund, estab- 
lished by friends and associates of F. Lee 
Fulton, is awarded on the basis of leader- 
ship, citizenship, moral character, academ- 
ic ability, and need. 

The James Walker Fulton Jr. Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of need and merit, 
with preference to students who meet one 
or more of the following conditions: North 
Carolina resident, evangelical Christian, 
member of Kappa Alpha, or varsity bas- 
ketball player. 

The Gaddy Scholarship Fund awards a 
need-based scholarship each year to a 
North Carolina student, with preference 
given to residents of Anson, Union, and 
Wake counties. 

The Lewis Reed Gaskin Scholarship Fund, 
established by E. Reed Gaskin and Jean H. 
Gaskin in honor of Lewis Reed Gaskin, is 
awarded to a first-year student or upper- 
classman with preference given to a pre- 
medical student. The award shall be made 
on the basis of academic ability and poten- 
tial as a physician. Recipients shall be 
known as Lewis Reed Gaskin scholars. 

The Daniel Eugene and Beulah B. 
Gatewood Scholarship, given by Beulah B. 
Gatewood in honor of her husband, is 
awarded to an undergraduate accounting 
major based on academic merit and finan- 
cial need. 

The A. Roy all Gay Scholarship is awarded 
on the basis of scholarship, character, and 



high ideals. Preference is given to graduat- 
ing seniors from Youngsville, N.C. 

The James W. Gill Scholarship, donated by 
Ruth R. Gill in memory of her husband, 
James W Gill, provides a scholarship for a 
deserving student, with preference given to 
students from Montgomery and Prince 
Georges counties, Md. 

The Samuel T. Gladding Scholarship Fund 
for Leadership provides scholarships for 
students on the basis of merit, demonstrat- 
ed leadership ability, and community ser- 
vice. Preference is given to students from 
Alabama. 

The Eugene Basil Glover Memorial 
Scholarship is awarded to an incoming or 
enrolled student based on ability and need, 
with slight preference given to students 
from Halifax County, N.C. 

The Wallace Barger Goebel Scholarship, 
made possible through a donation from 
Miriam M. Goebel, is based upon ability 
and financial need, with first preference 
given to a student with an interest in litera- 
ture, second preference to a student with an 
interest in history, and third preference to a 
student enrolled in the premedical program. 

The George Washington Greene Memorial 
Scholarship Fund may provide an award to 
the rising senior in Delta Chapter of Phi Beta 
Kappa who has the highest academic aver- 
age, upon the recommendation of the chair- 
man of Delta Chapter of Phi Beta Kappa. 

The Stanley McClayton Guthrie 
Scholarship Fund awards one scholarship 
each year to a needy student, with prefer- 
ence given to students from Halifax 
County, Va., then to children of Wake 
Forest alumni. 

The David Hadley/Worrell House 
Scholarship Fund provides a scholarship to 
an undergraduate student who otherwise 



Scholarships and Loans 42 



qualifies for the Worrell House program, 
but who would incur excessive financial 
sacrifices without the scholarship. 

The John Locksley Hall Scholarship Fund 
provides scholarships on the basis of need 
to North Carolinians interested in business 
careers. Preference is given to intercolle- 
giate athletes. 

The Hall Family Endowment Fund pro- 
vides internships for undergraduate stu- 
dents in Health and Exercise Science. The 
fund was created by Hugh Lee and Edith 
Hall McKinney of Austin, Texas, in loving 
memory of the Rev. Romulus Ferdinand 
Hall, Wake Forest College Class of 1918; 
the Rev. Remus James Hall, Wake Forest 
College Class of 1917; and Horace 
Douglas Hall, Wake Forest College Class 
of 1947. 

The Fuller Hamrick Scholarship, created 
under the will of Everett C. Snyder of 
Wake Forest, N.C., in memory of Fuller 
Hamrick, is used to educate students from 
the Mills Home in Thomasville, N.C. 

The George G. and Georgine M. Harper 
Charitable Trust awards scholarships of 
varying stipends annually to students with 
high academic potential and financial need, 
with preference to a North Carolinian. 

The William R. Hartness Jr. Scholarship is 
awarded to needy North Carolina residents. 

The Henry Russell and Clara Stephenson 
Harris Scholarship Fund, established by 
Elizabeth Harris in memory of her parents, 
provides a scholarship awarded on the 
basis of academic ability and financial 
need to a senior business major who plans 
to pursue a career in banking. 

The M. Elizabeth Harris Music 
Scholarship Fund provides an annual 
scholarship for a music major, with prefer- 
ence given to a student whose primary 



interest is church music. The award is 
made on the basis of academic ability and 
financial need. 

The Margaret S. Hasty Memorial 
Scholarship Fund, established by Judge 
Fred H. Hasty in memory and honor of his 
beloved wife, is for one or more female 
undergraduate students with good aca- 
demic ability and financial need. The 
scholarship is renewable if the student 
places in the upper third of her class. 

The Louise Patton Hearn Scholarship for 
Human Service is awarded to a student 
who has demonstrated exceptional service 
to improve the well-being of other people 
and who shows interest and potential in 
leading others to make similar contribu- 
tions to humanity. 

The Thomas K. Hearn Jr. Fund for Civic 
Responsibility recognizes exemplary con- 
tributions by a rising senior to the 
University and the larger community. 

The Hixson Fund provides assistance to 
students studying in the Wake Forest 
London program. 

The Frank P. Hobgood Scholarship, donat- 
ed by Kate H. Hobgood of Reidsville, 
N.C, in memory of her husband, is avail- 
able to those who qualify on the basis of 
character, purpose, intelligence, and need, 
with preference given to those who plan to 
enter the ministry, do religious work, 
become teachers, or become lawyers, the 
preference being in the order named, for 
the residents of the Reidsville area recom- 
mended by the deacons of the First Baptist 
Church of Reidsville. 

The /. Sam Holbrook Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of need. 

The Forrest H. Hollifield Scholarship, 
donated by Mr. and Mrs. H. H. Hollifield in 
memory of their son, Forrest H. Hollifield, is 



43 



Scholarships and Loans 



awarded to upperclassmen with evidence of 
character and need, with preference given to 
natives of Rowan and Rutherford counties, 
N.C., and to members of the Delta Nu 
Chapter of Sigma Chi Fraternity. 

The Murray A. Honeycutt Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of need to a male 
student. 

The Hubert Humphrey Studies Abroad 
Scholarship is awarded on the basis of 
need and merit to undergraduate students 
participating in the Wake Forest programs 
in London, Venice, or Vienna. 

The Jeanette Wallace Hyde Scholarship, 
donated by Jeanette Wallace Hyde of 
Raleigh, is awarded on the basis of financial 
need and academic ability. Preference is 
given, but not limited to, female students 
from Yadkin County, N.C., who are politics 
majors or are planning to pursue a career in 
social work or guidance counseling. 

The Stanton B. Ingram Scholarship Fund 
provides assistance to needy students. 
Preference is given first to students from 
Alabama, and second to students from 
Mississippi, Georgia, Louisiana, Tennessee, 
or Florida. 

The Japan Foundation Grants for study in 
Japan are made available through applica- 
tion with the Center for International 
Studies. 

The H. Broadus Jones Scholarship Fund 
provides an award to a rising senior student 
showing superior achievement in English 
and outstanding qualities of character. 

The Jones-Holder Business Scholarship 
Fund, awarded upon the recommendation 
of the dean of the Wayne Calloway School 
of Business and Accountancy, recognizes a 
rising senior business major who has 
demonstrated a high level of achievement. 



The Dyeann B. and Henry H. Jordan II 
Theatre Scholarship Fund supports junior 
and senior theatre majors. A separate 
application to the department is required. 

The John Council J oyner Sr. Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of merit and need to 
a student from North Carolina. 

The Jay H. Kegerreis Scholarship is award- 
ed to sophomore, junior, and senior stu- 
dents who exemplify the character and 
qualities of Jay H. Kegerreis, which 
include a willingness to work diligently 
both during the academic year and at 
breaks to earn money for college expenses, 
a 3.0 grade point average, high moral 
character, and a willingness to make per- 
sonal sacrifices to attend college. 

The /. Lee Keiger Sr. Scholarship is an 
academic scholarship awarded annually 
to a North Carolina student, with prefer- 
ence given to students living in the ALL- 
TEL-Carolina Telephone Company ser- 
vice region. 

The Senah C. and C.A. Kent Scholarships 
are awarded to first-year and upperclass 
students on the basis of leadership, aca- 
demic merit, and financial need, without 
regard to race, religion, sex, or geographi- 
cal origin. The Committee on Scholarships 
and Student Aid nominates recipients and 
provides an application to be submitted to 
the Foundation. 

The George Yancey Kerr and Albert Yancey 
Kerr Scholarship, established by Katharine 
Kerr Kendall of Wake County, N.C., is 
awarded to worthy and needy students. 

The Kirkpatrick-Howell Memorial 
Scholarship Fund, donated by the Delta 
Nu Chapter of Sigma Chi Fraternity, 
makes available one or two scholarships, 
with preference given to members of the 
Sigma Chi Fraternity, upon recommenda- 
tion of the Kirkpatrick-Howell Memorial 



Scholarships and Loans 



44 



Scholarship Board, for a value of approxi- 
mately $800. 

The Roena B. and Petro Kulynych 
Scholarship provides aid to students on 
the basis of ability and need with prefer- 
ence first to students from Wilkes County, 
N.C., and second to students from Avery 
County, N.C. 

The Kutteh Family Scholarship is awarded 
as a part of the Hankins Scholarship pro- 
gram, with strong preference given first to 
students from Iredell County, and second 
to students from counties contiguous to 
Iredell County. 

The Randall D. Ledford Scholarship pro- 
vides scholarships for undergraduate stu- 
dents attending Wake Forest who have 
declared, or who plan to declare, a major 
in physics. 

The Charles L. Little Scholarship Fund, 
established by Charles L. Little, is given to 
students who demonstrate academic ability 
and financial need. 

The Thomas D. and Betty H. Long 
Scholarship Fund is awarded on the basis 
of need, with preference first to students 
from Person County, N.C, and second to 
other North Carolinians. 

The Lowden Family Scholarship Fund 
provides scholarships as part of the 
Hankins Scholarship program, with prefer- 
ence first to students from Montgomery 
County and second to students from 
Anson, Stanley, Davidson, Randolph, 
Moore, or Richmond counties, N.C. 

The Lowe's Food Fund provides scholar- 
ships on the basis of merit and demonstrat- 
ed leadership qualities to students in the 
Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy, with preference to students 
from North Carolina and Virginia. 



The MacAnderson Scholarship is awarded 
to students who are studying a foreign lan- 
guage, preferably at a university in Europe. 

The Dr. George C. Mackie Sr. Fund is 
awarded to a junior or senior premedical 
student on the basis of need and merit. 

The Elton W. Manning Endowed Fund 
provides scholarships for worthy students 
based on financial need and academic 
merit with preference given to students 
from eastern North Carolina. 

The Lex Marsh Scholarship is awarded on 
the basis of academic ability and financial 
need to a student from North Carolina. 

The James Capel Mason Scholarship, 
established under the will of the Rev. 
Oscar W. McManus of Laurinburg, N.C, 
provides assistance to worthy students. 

The Study Abroad Scholarship is awarded 
to students paying the tuition under the 
Undergraduate Plan. Students must have a 
minimum 3.0 grade point average. The 
award is $2,000 for semesters, and $1,500 
for summers. 

The Burke M. McConnell Management 
Excellence Scholarship, established by 
Pace Communications, Inc. of Greensboro, 
N.C, is given to the senior in the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy who holds the highest grade 
point average for his or her first three 
years at the University. 

The Wilma L. McCurdy Memorial Fund 
Scholarship is awarded on the basis of 
character, academic standing, and need. 

The Thane Edward McDonald and Marie 
Dayton McDonald Memorial Scholarship 
Fund, made possible by the late Thane 
Edward McDonald, professor of music, is 
available to a deserving and qualified 
music student. Applications must be made 
to the Department of Music. 



45 



Scholarships and Loans 



The James McDougald Scholarship pro- 
vides assistance to students first from 
Robeson County and second from 
Scotland County, N.C., on the basis of 
leadership and ethics, academic prepara- 
tion, desire, community pride, and finan- 
cial need. 

The McGladrey & Pullen Scholarship, 
granted by the public accounting firm, 
McGladrey & Pullen, is awarded to a 
senior accounting major designated by the 
accounting faculty on the basis of merit, 
financial need, and interest in public 
accounting, and has a value of $750. 

The Robert A. and Margaret Pope 
Mclntyre Scholarship is awarded annually, 
with preference given to students from 
Robeson County, N.C. 

The Jasper L. Memory Fund provides 
scholarships to students selected by the 
Department of Education. 

The Robert Lee Middleton Scholarship, 
donated by Sarah Edwards Middleton of 
Nashville, Tenn., in memory of her hus- 
band, is awarded on the basis of character, 
purpose, intelligence, and need, with pref- 
erence given to a student planning to enter 
the field of literature, accounting, teaching, 
or the gospel ministry or other full-time 
religious work. 

The Marcus C. Miller Scholarship Fund, 
donated by Marcus C. Miller of Chicago, 
111., is awarded to freshmen who have 
demonstrated ability in the innovative use 
of information technology. 

The Mildred Bronson Miller Scholarship 
Fund, donated by Mildred B. Miller of 
Atlanta, Ga., is awarded to students on the 
basis of leadership, dedication, competi- 
tiveness, and citizenship. 

The Hiram Abif Myers HI Scholarship 
Fund, established in memory of Hiram 



Abif ("Bif") Myers who died early in his 
first year at Wake Forest, awards one 
scholarship to a senior from Roswell High 
School, Roswell, Ga., who best exemplifies 
the ideals and characteristics of Bif Myers. 
The candidate is recommended by the 
Roswell High School principal. 

The Charlie and Addie Myers Memorial 
Scholarship is awarded to preministerial 
students or to students contributing to 
Christianity. 

The R. Frank Nanney Scholarship pro- 
vides a scholarship for undergraduate stu- 
dents, with first preference for students 
who reside in Rutherford County, N.C. 
Second preference will be given to students 
residing elsewhere in North Carolina. 

The George Thompson Noel, M.D., 
Memorial Scholarship is awarded on the 
basis of academic ability and financial need, 
with preference given to students from 
Cabarrus County and North Carolina. The 
Noel Scholarship is renewable for succeed- 
ing school years, provided the recipient 
demonstrates continuing need and ranks in 
the top third of his or her class. 

The Norfleet Scholarships, donated by Mr. 
and Mrs. Eustace Norfleet of Wilmington, 
N.C, in memory of his parents, John A. 
and Mary Pope Norfleet, are available to 
deserving and promising students needing 
financial assistance. 

The North Carolina Scholarships are made 
available by the North Carolina General 
Assembly and are awarded on the basis of 
financial need to full-time students who 
are bona fide residents of North Carolina. 

North Carolina Student Incentive Grants 
are available to undergraduate residents of 
North Carolina with exceptional financial 
need who require these grants in order to 
attend college, for a value up to $1,500 



Scholarships and Loans 



46 



per year. The amount of assistance a stu- 
dent may receive depends upon need, tak- 
ing into account financial resources and 
the cost of attending the college chosen. 

The Gordon Alexander O 'Brien 
Scholarship Fund, donated by Mrs. Verna 
O'Brien of Naples, Fla., is awarded on the 
basis of ability and need. Preference is 
given to students from Rockingham 
County, N.C. 

The Curtis Eugene Overby Sr. Scholarship 
is awarded on the basis of academic ability, 
financial need, and outstanding leadership 
potential to a North Carolina junior or 
senior majoring in communication, with 
an interest in broadcasting. Preference is 
given to students from Forsyth, 
Rockingham, and Caswell counties. 

The Benjamin Wingate Farham 
Scholarship, donated by Kate J. Parham of 
Oxford, N.C, in memory of her husband, 
is awarded on the basis of ability and need 
and may be renewed for succeeding years. 

The H. Franklin Perritt III Memorial 
Scholarship Fund provides a scholarship 
of at least $1,000 annually to one or more 
rising sophomores enrolled in the Reserve 
Officers' Training Corps. Selection is based 
upon outstanding leadership potential. 

The Thomas F. Pettus Scholarships, admin- 
istered by the North Carolina Baptist 
Foundation under the terms of the will of 
the late Thomas F. Pettus of Wilson 
County, N.C, make two or more scholar- 
ships available each year in memory of Mr. 
Pettus and are awarded on the basis of 
merit and need, with preference given to 
North Carolina Baptist students. 

Presidential Aide Scholarships are awarded 
through a selection process with the Office 
of the President. 



The Pro Humanitate Scholarships are 
awarded to needy out-of-state students 
who embody the spirit of Pro Humanitate, 
by having demonstrated leadership ability, 
a commitment to community or volunteer 
service, and a high level of character in 
their personal and academic lives. 

The Mark Christopher Pruitt Scholarship 
Fund is awarded to a junior or senior pre- 
medical student on the basis of need and 
merit. The student must be a member of 
the Delta Omega Chapter of Kappa Sigma. 

The H. Ray Pullium Scholarship Fund, 
established by Mrs. H. Ray Pullium in 
honor of her husband, is awarded on the 
basis of ability and need. Preference is 
given to students from North Carolina 
Baptist Children's Homes. 

The Beulah Lassiter and Kenneth Tyson 
Raynor Scholarships were established by 
friends in memory of Kenneth Tyson 
Raynor and in honor of Beulah Lassiter 
Raynor. Mr. and Mrs. Raynor were long- 
time professors of mathematics and 
English, and the scholarships support stu- 
dents in these areas. 

The Resident Technology Advisor 
Scholarships are awarded on a merit basis 
through the Office of Information Systems. 

The Oliver D. and Caroline Revell 
Scholarship is awarded to needy preminis- 
terial students or needy students entering 
full-time Christian service. 

The Revelle Family Scholarship provides 
financial assistance to needy students from 
Northampton and Hertford counties, with 
second preference to students from other 
areas of northeastern North Carolina. 

The Leroy and Teresa Robinson 
Scholarship Fund is awarded on the basis 
of financial need, with preference first to 
graduates of East Montgomery High 



47 



Scholarships and Loans 



School, second to other Montgomery 
County residents, and third to other North 
Carolina students. 

The Roy O. Rodwell Sr. Scholarship, 
established by Roy O. Rodwell Jr. and 
Rebecca Tarry Rodwell of Durham and by 
Nancy Rand Rodwell of Chapel Hill, 
awards one scholarship each year, up to the 
cost of tuition, to an undergraduate student. 
Preference will be given to students who are 
current residents of North Carolina. 

The George D. Rovere Scholarship Fund 
awards a scholarship annually to a student 
planning to become an athletic trainer. 

The William Royall Scholarship Fund, given 
by family and friends of William Royall, 
provides a scholarship award for excellence 
in classical studies, with preference given to 
students planning to travel abroad to classi- 
cal sites. Applications must be made to the 
Department of Classical Languages. 

The William Lee Rudd and Ruth Crosby 
Rudd Scholarship is awarded to worthy 
and needy students majoring in religion. 

The W.D. Sanders Scholarships are awarded 
annually for language study in Germany or 
Austria. Sophomores, juniors, or seniors 
who have completed German 153 or above 
are eligible. The scholarships are designated, 
in order of priority, for summer language 
study, semester or year programs with the 
Institute of European Studies (IES), or 
junior year abroad programs with other 
institutions. Applications should be made to 
the Department of German and Russian. 

The Scales International Studies Fund, 
established in honor and recognition of 
Dr. James Ralph Scales and his outstand- 
ing contributions to international studies, 
provides support for undergraduate study 
outside the United States. Applications 
should be made to the Center for 
International Studies. 



The Emily Crandall Shaw Scholarship in 
Liberal Arts is made through the depart- 
ments of art, English, music, and theatre to a 
student who best exemplifies a diverse inter- 
est in literature, art, music, and the theatre. 

The Sara Jo Brownlow Shearer 
Scholarship is awarded to students special- 
izing in the area of learning disabilities. 

The Franklin R. Shirley Debate 
Scholarship, established in honor of the 
late Franklin R. Shirley, professor emeritus 
of speech communication, is awarded to a 
student who has debate experience and 
who successfully participates in the 
University's debate program. 

The James F. Slate Fund provides an annu- 
al scholarship or loan to a student who 
plans a ministerial career. It is renewable 
upon evidence of a continuing need and 
interest in the ministry. 

The Joseph Pleasant and Marguerite Nutt 
Sloan Memorial Scholarship, established 
by Patricia Sloan Mize in honor of her par- 
ents, is awarded annually to an applied 
music student on the basis of academic 
ability and need. It has a value of approxi- 
mately $500. Applications must be made 
to the Department of Music. 

The Zachary T. Smith Leadership 
Scholarships, given by the Z. Smith 
Reynolds Foundation, provide scholar- 
ships to needy North Carolinians with out- 
standing evidence of and promise in lead- 
ership skills, often to reduce loan 
expectations for recipients. 

The Ann Lewallan Spencer and Lewallan 
Family Scholarship Fund provides schol- 
arships for children of alumni on the basis 
of need. 

The Gilbert T. Stephenson Scholarship, 
established by Grace W. Stephenson in mem- 
ory of her husband, is awarded on the basis 



Scholarships and Loans 



48 



of ability and need to a student from Kirby 
Township or Northampton County, N.C. 

The Sigmund Sternberger Scholarships, 
donated by the Sigmund Sternberger 
Foundation, are for needy North 
Carolinians, with preference given to 
undergraduate students from Greensboro 
and Guilford County. 

The John Belk Stevens Scholarship in 
Business, donated by the Belk Foundation 
in honor of John Belk Stevens, is given to 
senior business majors with particular 
interests in retailing or marketing and is 
based on academic merit. 

The Edna and Ethel Stowe Scholarship is 
awarded to a first-year or upperclass stu- 
dent, with preference given to female stu- 
dents who have a physical handicap. 

The /. W. Straughan Scholarship, donated 
by Mattie, Mable, and Alice Straughan in 
memory of their brother, J. W. Straughan, 
of Warsaw, N.C, with preference given to 
students from Duplin County, N.C, who 
are interested in pursuing a medical career 
(especially in the field of family practice), 
is for those who need financial assistance. 

The Amos Arthur Swann Scholarship Fund 
provides scholarships to needy students 
from Sevier County, Tenn., or other 
Tennessee counties. 

The Ralph Judson Sykes Scholarship Fund 
provides scholarships to North Carolina 
residents on the basis of need, moral char- 
acter, and outstanding Christian fellowship. 

The Saddye Stephenson and Benjamin 
Louis Sykes Scholarship, donated by 
Charles L. Sykes and Ralph J. Sykes in 
memory of their mother and father, is 
awarded on the basis of Christian character, 
academic proficiency, and financial need, 
with preference given to first-year students 
from North Carolina. It is renewable. 



The Walter Low Latum Scholarship in 
Mathematics provides in alternate years a 
renewable merit scholarship. The stipends 
of $500 each for the first two years are 
replaced by $5,000 awards in each of the 
last two years, provided that the Tatum 
Scholar fulfills the expectation to enroll in 
and maintain a major in mathematics in 
the Department of Mathematics. Given by 
the late Samuel Tatum, a life trustee from 
Greensboro, N.C, and named in honor of 
his late brother, Dr. Walter Low Tatum, the 
Tatum Scholarship is renewable with con- 
tinued strong academic performance and 
an exemplary record of honor and conduct. 

The Augustine John Laylor and Roby Ellis 
Laylor Accountancy Scholarship is 
awarded to accounting students, with 
preference given to students whose perma- 
nent residence is within fifty miles of 
Winston-Salem. 

The H. Howell Taylor Jr. Risk 
Management Scholarship Fund, estab- 
lished by H. Howell Taylor of Denver, 
Colo., is awarded though the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy to students interested in the 
Risk Management Internship Program. 

The Russell Taylor Scholarship is awarded 
to a high school senior with a distin- 
guished record in citizenship and scholar- 
ship. Preference is given to students plan- 
ning careers in the areas of religion or law, 
students exemplifying positive principles of 
the Christian faith, needy students, and 
students from Iredell County, N.C 

The Thomas C. Taylor Scholarship Fund 
for International Studies provides scholar- 
ships for accountancy majors studying out- 
side the United States, or studying interna- 
tional studies within the United States, on 
the basis of integrity, compassion, cooper- 
ativeness, and an accumulated record of 
outstanding academic achievement. 



49 



Scholarships and Loans 



The Teague Scholarship Fund provides 
scholarships to needy students enrolled in 
the Wayne Calloway School of Business 
and Accountancy who express an interest 
in entrepreneurism. 

The Fred N. Thompson Sr. Scholarship is 
awarded to needy students with preference 
to residents of Virginia counties south and 
east of the city of Richmond. 

The Lowell and Anne Smith Tillett 
Scholarship provides scholarships for 
undergraduate students studying in eastern 
Europe, Russia, and other countries in the 
former Soviet Union. The scholarship(s) 
may be awarded to pay tuition, living 
expenses, travel or other expenses incurred 
with respect to foreign study. 

The Harold Wayland and Nelle Futch 
Tribble Scholarship Fund, established to 
honor the late President Emeritus and Mrs. 
Tribble, provides a scholarship to students 
enrolled in the College who demonstrate 
superior academic ability. 

The Kenneth Monroe Tucker Scholarship 
is awarded on the basis of academic merit, 
with preference given to students from 
Wilkes, New Hanover, or Brunswick coun- 
ties, N.C. It may be renewed provided the 
recipient's cumulative average is in the 
upper 20 percent of his or her class. 

The Tyner-Pitman Scholarship Fund, 
donated by Cora Tyner Pitman, makes 
available at least one scholarship for needy 
North Carolina students. 

The R. Stanley Vaughan/Pricewater- 
houseCoopers Scholarship provides schol- 
arships for students attending the 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy who are enrolled as accoun- 
tancy majors and for students enrolled in 
the master's program in accountancy. 
Preference will be given in awarding the 
scholarships to fourth-year students. 



The Venable Scholarship, established by 
the will of Nora M. Venable of Davidson 
County, N.C, provides scholarships in 
memory and honor of Nora M. Venable, 
George C. Venable, and George Martin 
Venable on the basis of academic ability 
and outstanding leadership potential, with 
preference given to descendants of Nora 
M. Venable. 

The Gerald C. Wallace Jr. Scholarship 
Fund, established by R. Douglas 
Maclntyre and Elizabeth W Maclntyre of 
Atlanta, Ga., provides awards to needy 
students from North Carolina, South 
Carolina, and Georgia. 

The John W. Ward Jr. Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of demonstrated 
need, with preference given to students 
from Robeson County, N.C. 

The Brian James Watkins Scholarship 
Fund is awarded on the basis of demon- 
strated leadership ability, community 
involvement, and character, with prefer- 
ence to students from North Carolina, 
Mississippi, and Delaware. 

The Watkins-Richardson Scholarship is 
awarded on the basis of academic ability 
and outstanding leadership potential to 
students from the southeastern United 
States. Watkins-Richardson Scholarship 
awards are renewable for succeeding 
school years, provided the recipient ranks 
in the top third of his or her class and con- 
tinues to display leadership potential. 

The /. Andrews White Scholarship is an 
unrestricted fund that provides scholar- 
ships for deserving students. 

The Alexander Hines Whitley Jr. 
Scholarship is awarded to qualified stu- 
dents selected by the Committee on 
Scholarships and Student Aid. 



Scholarships and Loans 



50 



The A. Tab Williams Scholarship Fund 
provides scholarships to needy North 
Carolinians. 

The Jesse A. Williams Scholarships, created 
under the will of the late Jesse A. Williams 
of Union County, N.C., give preference to 
deserving students of Union County. 

The Leonidas Polk Williams Sr. 
Scholarship Fund was established to pro- 
vide aid to students from Chowan, 
Camden, and Pasquotank counties, N.C., 
on the basis of merit. 

The John G. Williard Scholarship is 
awarded to middle-income students, with 
preference given to students from Davie 
County, N.C. 

The James Bennett Willis Scholarship 
Fund, established by James B. Willis of 
Hamlet, N.C, gives preference to needy 
North Carolina Baptist students interested 
in the ministry and Christian education. 
Applications must be made to the depart- 
ments of religion or philosophy. 

The Marie Thornton Willis and Miriam 
Carlyle Willis Scholarship Fund, estab- 
lished by James B. Willis in memory of his 
wife and daughter, gives preference to 
needy North Carolina Baptist students 
who are interested in all phases of the min- 
istry of music. 

The Charles Littell Wilson Scholarship, 
created under the will of Jennie Mayes 
Wilson in memory of her husband, Charles 
Littell Wilson, is for a needy student. 

The O. W. Wilson-Yancey County 
Scholarships, created under the will of O. 
W. Wilson of Yancey County, N.C, are 
awarded to students from Yancey County 
who have excellent academic records and 
who demonstrate need. 

The Phillip W. Wilson/Peat Marwick 
Memorial Scholarship, established as a 



memorial to Phillip W. Wilson by his 
friends, colleagues, and family, is awarded 
to a senior accountancy major who has 
demonstrated leadership skills, outstand- 
ing interpersonal skills, and a strong com- 
mitment to the community and the 
accounting profession. The recipient must 
also be in the top fifth of his or her class 
based on a grade point average within the 
Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy. 

The William H. and Anne M. Woody 
Memorial Scholarship is awarded on the 
basis of character, scholastic achievement, 
and financial need, with preference given 
to students from Person County, N.C, and 
to students intending careers in medicine, 
education, or ministry. 

The William Luther Wyatt HI Scholarship 
Trust, donated by Mr. and Mrs. William L. 
Wyatt Jr. of Raleigh, in memory of their 
son, William Luther Wyatt III, with prefer- 
ence given to a male student entering the 
junior year who has shown an interest and 
an ability in the field of biology, is based 
on need and ability. 

The Matthew T Yates Scholarship Fund 
awards scholarships to the children of mis- 
sionaries of the Foreign Mission Board of 
the Southern Baptist Convention on the 
basis of merit and need. The applicant 
must notify the Office of Student Financial 
Aid of his or her eligibility to be consid- 
ered for this award. 



rj Scholarships and Loans 



Federal Financial Aid 
Programs 

The federal government, through the 
Department of Education, sponsors a num- 
ber of aid programs to help pay college 
costs. Among these programs are Federal 
Pell Grants, Federal Supplemental 
Educational Opportunity Grants (FSEOG), 
Federal Work-Study (FWS), Federal 
Perkins Loans, and Federal Family 
Education Loans (including Federal 
Stafford Loans, both subsidized and 
unsubsidized, and PLUS Loans). 

To receive assistance through these 
programs, a student must complete the 
necessary applications, meet basic eligibili- 
ty requirements, and maintain satisfactory 
academic progress, earning a minimum of 
twelve credits per semester of enrollment 
with a grade point average at or above the 
published minimum level for continued 
enrollment. A copy of the full policy on 
satisfactory academic progress is available 
upon written request from the financial 
aid office. 

Federal aid programs are described 
more fully in the Wake Forest University 
brochure, "Need-Based Financial Aid 
Information for Undergraduates," and in 
the federal publication, "The Student 
Guide," available upon request from the 
financial aid office and the U.S. 
Department of Education. 

Exchange Scholarships 

The German Exchange Scholarship, estab- 
lished in 1959 with the Free University of 
Berlin, is available to a student with at least 
two years of college German or the equiva- 
lent, and who has junior standing by the 
end of the semester in which application is 
made, but who need not be a German 



major. It provides 850 German marks per 
month for ten months, remission of fees, 
200 marks per semester for books, and 300 
marks per month for rent. (Interested stu- 
dents should communicate with the chair 
of the Department of German.) 

The Spanish Exchange Scholarships are 
available for study at the University of 
Burgos in Spain. They may be awarded to 
four students for one semester's study each 
or to two students for two semesters. 
Applicants must have completed at least 
two years of college Spanish or the equiva- 
lent. Scholarships provide remission of fees 
and the cost of books, board, and accom- 
modations. (Interested students should 
communicate with Professor Candelas 
Gala in the Department of Romance 
Languages.) 

The French Exchange Scholarship, estab- 
lished with the University of Burgundy, 
France, is available to a graduating senior, 
who receives a two-semester graduate 
teaching assistantship at a lycee chosen by 
the French Ministry of Education. 
(Interested students should communicate 
with the chair of the Department of 
Romance Languages.) 

Loans 

The James W. Denmark Loan Fund, origi- 
nated in 1875 by James William Denmark 
of Dudley, N.C., is available to qualified 
students. 

The Hutchins Student Loan Fund, origi- 
nated by Robert W Hutchins Jr. on behalf 
of himself and his late wife, Nancy D. 
Hutchins of Winston-Salem, is in honor of 
members of the Hutchins' family who have 
attended Wake Forest and is for the benefit 
of needy undergraduate students. 



Scholarships and Loans 



52- 



The Grover and Addy Raby Loan Fund, 
established in 1945 by J. G. Raby of 
Tarboro, N.C., in memory of his parents, 
gives preference to applicants from the 
First Baptist Church of Tarboro. 

The Sidney G. Wallace Loan Fund, created 
under the will of Mrs. Blanche Wallace, is 
used to assist undergraduate students. 
Preference is given to students studying in 
a Wake Forest-sponsored or approved 
overseas program. 

Concessions 

North Carolina Legislative Tuition Grants. 
The North Carolina General Assembly 
provides an annual grant to all legal resi- 
dents of North Carolina enrolled at Wake 
Forest. For 1999-2000, the grant was 
$1,750 for the year. 

To be eligible, a student must be 
enrolled for at least fourteen credits each 
semester (through October 1 in the fall and 
through the tenth day of classes in the 
spring). If the student is enrolled for only 
one semester, they may receive the grant 
for that semester, provided they meet the 
qualifications listed above. The student 
must be working toward their first bache- 
lor's degree. Students in the five-year 
BS/MS in accounting program are eligible 
for the first four years of that program. 
Residency determinations are made in the 
Office of Student Financial Aid at Wake 
Forest; additionally, students must com- 
plete an NCLTG application annually. 
Students must return the application to the 
Office of Student Financial Aid by the first 
week of classes of their first semester of 
each academic year. This includes students 
studying abroad. 

NCLTG forms are sent to all first-year 
students in the Financial Information and 
Billing Statement packet in the weeks 



before enrollment. For continuing students, 
only those with permanent North Carolina 
addresses will receive the form in their 
Billing Statement packets. Students who 
believe they are eligible for the grant but do 
not receive a form may obtain one in the 
Office of Student Financial Aid. Such stu- 
dents may include children of military per- 
sonnel with North Carolina residency sta- 
tus who live out of state, residents who live 
near the state line, or residents who have 
recently moved out of state. 

The actual amount of the NCLTG is 
subject to an annual appropriation by the 
North Carolina General Assembly. 
Amounts listed on award letters are esti- 
mates only, and are subject to adjustment 
when the actual authorized grant is deter- 
mined. The grant is credited to student 
accounts when the funds are received from 
the state, usually late in the fall and spring 
semesters. Students are responsible for any 
differences between the estimated and 
actual amounts. 

The NCLTG is awarded without 
regard to need but must count as a grant 
resource in any aid decision based upon 
demonstrated need. 



Ministerial students receive an $800 con- 
cession per year if they (1) have a written 
recommendation or license to preach from 
their own church body and (2) agree to 
repay the total amount, plus 4 percent 
interest, in the event that they do not serve 
five years in the pastoral ministry within 
twelve years of attendance in the College. 

Children and spouses of pastors of North 
Carolina Baptist churches receive an 
$800 concession per year if they are the 
children or spouses of (1) ministers, (2) 
missionaries of the Southern Baptist 
International Missions Board, (3) officials 
of the Baptist State Convention of North 
Carolina, or (4) professors in North 



53 



Scholarships and Loans 



Carolina Baptist colleges or universities 
who are ordained ministers. Pastors them- 
selves are also eligible. 

Children of other ministers who are not 
eligible for the above concession receive a 
$150 concession per year if their parent 
makes a living chiefly by the ministry and 
they have a demonstrated need. 

Other Financial Aid 

Church Choir Work Grants, given by the 
College and Wake Forest Baptist Church to 
encourage outstanding music students, are 
awarded on the basis of talent, reliability, 
and interest in the church on the recom- 
mendation of the music committee of the 
church and the Department of Music, for 
the value of $300. Interested students 
should communicate with the chair of the 
Department of Music. 

The Ministerial Aid Fund, established in 
1897 by the estate of J. A. Melke, is avail- 
able to preministerial students on a loan or 
grant program on the basis of merit and 
need, and, particularly in the case of 
grants, academic achievement. 



Student/Student Spouse Employment is 
possible for part-time, on-campus and off- 
campus work, for a recommended maxi- 
mum of twenty hours per week for full- 
time students. Summer employment may 
also be available. Interested students 
should communicate with the Office of 
Student Financial Aid. 

Veterans' Benefits are administered by the 
Department of Veterans Affairs in the 
Federal Building at 251 North Main Street 
in Winston-Salem. Records of progress are 
kept by this institution on veteran and 
non-veteran students alike. Progress 
records are furnished to the students, vet- 
erans and non-veterans alike, at the end of 
each scheduled school term. 

Outside Assistance 

Students who apply for financial aid from 
Wake Forest must advise the financial aid 
office if they receive any assistance from 
outside organizations, including but not 
limited to National Merit or Achievement 
Scholarships; College Scholarship Service- 
sponsored scholarships; local, state, and 
national scholarship and loan programs. 
This outside assistance will be considered 
when the financial aid award is calculated. 



Scholarships and Loans 



54 



Special Programs 



Students in the College are 
encouraged to apply to special 
programs, both on and off cam- 
pus, which complement their abil- 
ities and interests. these include 
the programs described below 
and the special degrees, minors, 
and concentrations described on 
page 60 and beyond. 

Honors Study 

For highly qualified students, a series of 
interdisciplinary honors courses is 
described under Courses of Instruction. 
Under the supervision of the coordinator 
of the Honors Program, students may par- 
ticipate in three or more honors seminars 
during the first, sophomore, and junior 
years. Those who complete four seminars 
with a superior record and who are not 
candidates for departmental honors may 
complete a final directed study course. 
With a superior record in that course and a 
grade point average of 3.0 in all work, a 
student may be graduated with the distinc- 
tion "Honors in the Arts and Sciences." 

For students especially talented in indi- 
vidual areas of study, most departments in 
the College offer special studies leading to 
graduation with honors in a particular 
discipline. The minimum requirement is a 
grade point average of 3.0 in all work and 
3.3 (or higher in some areas) in the major. 
Other course, seminar, and research require- 
ments vary from one department to another. 












Open Curriculum 

For students with high motivation and 
strong academic preparation, the Open 
Curriculum provides the opportunity to 
follow a course of study planned within the 
framework of a liberal arts education but 
not necessarily fulfilling all basic and divi- 
sional requirements for the degree. Under 
the Committee on Open Curriculum, a lim- 
ited number of students are selected by pre- 
vious record of achievement, high aspira- 
tions, ability in one or more areas of study, 
strength of self-expression, and other spe- 
cial talents. The course of study for the 
lower division is designed by the student 
and his or her adviser. 

Study at Salem College 

For full-time students, Wake Forest and 
Salem College share a program of 
exchange credits for courses taken at one 
institution because they are not offered at 
the other. An application must be 
approved by the academic adviser and the 
dean of the College or the dean of the 
Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy. Except in courses of private 
instruction, there is no additional cost to 
the student. Grades and grade points 
earned at Salem College are evaluated as if 
they were earned at Wake Forest. 



55 



Special Programs 



International Studies 






■■^..»«:M.....;' 



Residential 
Language Centers 



Center for 
International Studies 

The Center for International Studies pro- 
vides information on all programs in inter- 
national studies. Students interested in 
studying abroad should visit the center for 
assistance and program information. Any 
student seeking credit for non-Wake Forest 
courses taken overseas for either the sum- 
mer, semester, or year is required to sched- 
ule an appointment with the Center for 
International Studies before they apply to 
make sure their program is approved. 
Once the student is accepted, they need to 
pick up a course approval form from the 
center. For detailed information on study 
abroad in a non-Wake Forest program see 
page 59. 

The center provides various informa- 
tion and services for the international stu- 
dents at Wake Forest. For guidance on INS 
policies and issues contact the center. The 
center also administers the international 
studies minor. For a full description of the 
minor see page 150. 

International Students 

International students can obtain informa- 
tion and assistance in the Center for 
International Studies. 



For students prepared to speak German on 
a regular basis with other students study- 
ing the same language, the University 
offers residential language centers coordi- 
nated by the German and Russian depart- 
ment. Such students attend regular classes 
on the campus. Organized social and con- 
versational programs are available. 

Foreign Area Studies 

The Foreign Area Studies program enables 
students to choose an interdisciplinary 
concentration in the language and culture 
of a foreign area. For a full description of 
these programs, see page 65 and the vari- 
ous listings under Courses of Instruction. 

Opportunities for Study Abroad 
Wake Forest Programs 

Austria (Vienna) 

Each semester students have the opportu- 
nity to study and live at the Flow House in 
the 19th District of Vienna (northwest sec- 
tion of the city). Faculty directors from a 
wide variety of departments lead groups of 
fourteen students and offer two courses in 
their respective disciplines. In addition, 
Viennese professors offer courses in the 
study of the German language (153) or lit- 
erature (216), Austrian art and architec- 
ture, music, or history of Austria and 
Central Europe. Group excursions to cen- 
tral Europe enhance the learning experi- 
ence as well as numerous integrative expe- 
riences within the city itself. Students 
selected for the Vienna program are 



International Studies 



56 



required to have completed Elementary 
German(lll-112orll3). Further infor- 
mation may be obtained from the Center 
for International Studies. 

Benin (Cotonou) 

Students wishing to study in Africa are 
invited to apply for the Wake Forest 
University program in Benin, West Africa. 
This four-credit course is designed for the 
study of the problems faced by African 
countries in the process of economic 
growth and development. Discussions 
focus on the examination of solutions to 
those problems. This is an approximately 
five-week summer program (occuring usu- 
ally during the first summer session), 
which combines classroom instruction, 
field trips and homestay. The program is 
directed by Professor Sylvain H. Boko of 
the Department of Economics. Additional 
information may be obtained from 
Professor Boko or the Center for 
International Studies. 

Cuba (Havana) 

Students interested in an unusual study 
opportunity may apply for a six-week 
summer program in Cuba. Under the 
direction of Dr. Linda Howe (Department 
of Romance Languages), students take 
intensive courses in Spanish at the 
University of Havana. (Students need not 
major in Spanish, but one course beyond 
Spanish 213 or proficiency in the language 
is required.) Courses offered include Afro- 
Cuban Cultural Expression and Cuban 
Literature (alternate courses offered peri- 
odically). Students in Cuba also participate 
in a community project for internship cred- 
it in Spanish. Information may be obtained 
from Dr. Linda Howe by e-mail at how- 
els@wfu.edu or by contacting the Center 
for International Studies. 



Ecuador (Quito) 

Students who wish to take either Spanish 
113 or Spanish 153 in an immersion set- 
ting may apply for Wake Forest's summer 
program at the Pontificia Universidad 
Catolica del Ecuador in Quito. This six- 
week program offers a ten-credit intensive 
course in Spanish language and the cul- 
tures of the Hispanic world. Students who 
have already taken Spanish 153 or any 
more advanced course in the language are 
ineligible for this program. Additional 
information may be obtained in the 
Department of Romance Languages. 

England (London) 

A program of study is offered each 
semester at Worrell House, the University's 
residential center near Regent's Park in 
London. Courses typically encompass 
aspects of the art, theatre, literature, and 
history of London and Great Britain. (See, 
for example, Art 2320, English Art, 
Hogarth to the Present, and History 2260, 
History of London, in the course listings 
of those departments.) Each term a differ- 
ent member of the faculty serves as the 
director of the program, which accommo- 
dates fifteen students. Further information 
may be obtained in the Center for 
International Studies. 



57 



International Studies 



Italy (Venice) 

Students wishing to spend a semester in 
Italy may apply to study at Casa Artom, 
the University's residential center on the 
Grand Canal in Venice. Under the direc- 
tion of various members of the faculty, 
approximately twenty students per 
semester focus on the heritage and culture 
of Venice and Italy. (Courses offered usual- 
ly include Art 2693, Venetian Renaissance 
Art; Italian 2213, Spoken Italian; Italian 
215, Introduction to Italian Literature I; 
Italian 216, Introduction to Italian 
Literature II; and other courses offered by 
the faculty member serving as director.) 
Students selected for the Venice program 
are required to have completed elementary 
training in Italian. Limited scholarship aid 
is available to one or two students each 
semester to assist with expenses. 
Additional information may be obtained in 
the Center for International Studies. 

France (Dijon) 

Students wishing to study in France may 
apply for a semester's instruction at the 
University of Burgundy. Under the direc- 
tion of a faculty residential adviser from 
the Department of Romance Languages, 
courses are taken at the University of 
Burgundy by student groups of varying 
levels of preparation. (A major in French is 
not required, but French 219 or its equiva- 
lent or any French course above the inter- 
mediate level is required.) 



Spain (Salamanca) 

Students wishing to study in Spain may 
apply for a semester's instruction at the 
University of Salamanca. Under the direc- 
tion of a faculty residential adviser from 
the Department of Romance Languages, 
courses are taken at the University of 
Salamanca by student groups of varying 
levels of preparation. (Students need not 
major in Spanish, but Spanish 220 or its 
equivalent is required.) 

China (Beijing) 

Students who wish to study in China may 
apply to participate in the Wake 
Forest/SASASAAS Program in Beijing, 
Peoples Republic of China. Offered in the 
fall semester, the program includes courses 
in both Chinese language and culture. It is 
open to students with no previous knowl- 
edge of Chinese or to those wishing to con- 
tinue their study of the language. 
Additional information may be obtained in 
the Center for International Studies. 

Japan (Hiratsuka) 

For students wishing to study in Japan, 
Wake Forest offers a fall semester in Tokai 
University, outside Tokyo. Coursework 
focuses on Japanese language and culture: 
one course is taught by a Wake Forest pro- 
fessor; another course is taught by 
Japanese faculty members, in English, on 
various aspects of Japanese society; a third 
course is the Japanese language at the 
appropriate level. No prior knowledge of 
Japanese is required. Additional informa- 
tion may be obtained in the Center for 
International Studies. 



International Studies eg 



Russia (Moscow) 

One or two students wishing to study indi- 
vidually in Russia can apply to spend a fall 
or spring semester at Moscow State 
University each year. The requirements are 
a good academic record and the ability to 
attend and pass classes that are taught 
entirely in Russian. For more information, 
contact William Hamilton, associate dean 
of the College. 

Study Abroad in 
Non-Wake Forest Programs 

Students wishing to study abroad in a non- 
Wake Forest program must visit the Center 
for International Studies for assistance. The 
center maintains a sizable collection of 
material on a wide variety of overseas pro- 
grams. All students planning to study in 
non-Wake Forest programs in other coun- 
tries for a summer, a semester, or a year 
need to attend an international studies 
information session. The CIS staff is avail- 
able for advising students about particular 
programs. Before students apply, they must 
obtain the approval of the program from 
the CIS. If the program is not approved, the 
student will not receive credit for the study 



abroad program. Once a student is accept- 
ed, they are required to fill out a course 
approval form with the CIS. In no case may 
a student undertake study elsewhere with- 
out completing this process in advance to 
the satisfaction of the Center for 
International Studies, the registrar, and the 
academic departments which oversee the 
granting of credit for each course. A pro- 
cess exists so that normally students who 
successfully complete a fully approved 
course load during a semester in a non- 
Wake Forest program will receive sixteen 
credits. For more information, consult with 
the Center for International Studies. 

Students may request to have scholar- 
ship and financial aid applied to approved 
non-Wake Forest programs. Additional 
information is available in the Center for 
International Studies and the Office of 
Student Financial Aid. 



59 



International Studies 



Requirements for Degrees 






with a major in professional accountancy. 
(See page 235 of this bulletin.) 

A student may receive only one bache- 
lor's degree (either the bachelor of arts or 
the bachelor of science) from Wake Forest. 



Degrees Offered 



General Requirements 



The College offers undergraduate pro- 
grams leading to the bachelor of arts and 
bachelor of science degrees. The bachelor 
of arts degree is conferred with a major in 
anthropology, art history, studio art, chem- 
istry, classical studies, communication, eco- 
nomics, English, French, German, Greek, 
history, Latin, mathematics, music, philos- 
ophy, physics, politics, psychology, reli- 
gion, Russian, sociology, Spanish, or the- 
atre. The bachelor of science degree is 
conferred with a major in biology, chem- 
istry, computer science, health and exercise 
science, mathematical economics, mathe- 
matics, or physics. The bachelor of arts 
degree is available with a major in elemen- 
tary education or education with a state 
teacher's certificate in social studies. The 
bachelor of science degree is available with 
a major in education with a state teacher's 
certificate in science. The bachelor of sci- 
ence degree may be conferred in combined 
curricula in engineering, forestry and envi- 
ronmental studies, medical technology, and 
the physician assistant program. 

The Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy offers under- 
graduate programs leading to the bachelor 
of science degree with a major in business, 
analytical finance, information systems, or 
mathematical business; and offers a five- 
year program of study leading to a bachelor 
of science and a master of science degree 



Students in the College have considerable 
flexibility in planning their courses of 
study. Except for two semesters of required 
health and exercise science courses, only 
three specific courses are required: the writ- 
ing seminar, one in a foreign language, and 
a first-year seminar. To complete prepara- 
tion for more specialized work in a major 
field or fields, students select courses in 
each of five divisions of the undergraduate 
curriculum: (1) literature; (2) the natural 
sciences, mathematics, and computer sci- 
ence; (3) history, religion, and philosophy; 

(4) the social and behavioral sciences; and 

(5) the fine arts. Normally the basic and 
divisional requirements are completed in 
the first and sophomore years and the 
requirements in the major field or fields are 
completed in the junior and senior years. 

All students must complete ( 1 ) the basic 
and divisional requirements (unless accept- 
ed for the Open Curriculum), (2) a course 
of study approved by the department or 
departments of the major, and (3) elective 
courses, for a total of 144 credits. No more 
than sixteen credits toward graduation may 
be earned from among all of the following 
cou r ses: Education 353; all military science 
courses; Music 111-121 (ensemble cours- 
es); Dance 128; and elective 100-level 
courses in health and exercise science. A 
cross-listed course may be taken one time 
for credit toward graduation, unless other- 
wise specified by the course description. 



Requirements for Degrees £q 



All students must earn a minimum 
cumulative 2.0 grade point average on all 
work attempted at all colleges and universi- 
ties and on all work attempted in Wake 
Forest College and the Wayne Calloway 
School of Business and Accountancy. Of the 
144 credits required for graduation, at least 
seventy-two must be completed in the 
undergraduate schools of Wake Forest 
University, including the work of the senior 
year (except for combined degree curricula). 
All financial obligations to the University 
must be discharged. 

A student has the privilege of graduat- 
ing under the requirements of the bulletin 
of the year in which he or she enters, 
except in the case of major or minor 
requirements which are those in effect dur- 
ing the term in which a student begins tak- 
ing courses after the declaration of a major 
or minor. If course work is not completed 
within six years of entrance, the student 
must fulfill the requirements for the class 
in which he or she graduates. 

Seniors must submit an application for 
graduation in order for their records to be 
activated for certification. Information 
packets are mailed immediately prior to 
the beginning of the fall term to all stu- 
dents classified as seniors. Students who 
are not enrolled in the fall term, or who do 
not receive the packet but intend to gradu- 
ate within the academic year, may request 
one from the Office of the Registrar. 

Basic Requirements 

All students must complete five required 
basic courses (unless exempted through 
procedures established by the departments 
concerned): 

A first-year seminar 

English 1 1 1 (writing seminar) 



Foreign language (literature), one course 
from among the following: 

French 21 3, 21 3H, 216, or the 
equivalent 

Spanish 213, 213H, 217, 218, or 
the equivalent 

Italian 215, 216, or the equivalent 

German 215 or 216 

Russian 215 or 216 

Greek 211 or 212 

Latin 211,212,216, or 218 

Near Eastern Languages & Literature 
211 or 212 (Hebrew) 

Japanese 21 1 

Chinese 211 or 212 
Health and Exercise Science 100,101 

A note about the language placement pro- 
cedures: All students new to Wake Forest 
with some high school language courses 
must take the placement exam to deter- 
mine their language placement or, in the 
case of students with Advanced Placement 
scores of four or above (in language or lit- 
erature), to register their AP scores and 
discuss their options. Students will not 
receive credit for a class at a lower level 
than that at which they placed on the 
placement exam, unless they a) register for 
the class in which they placed; b) attend a 
few class meetings; c) consult with their 
professor; d) and then successfully appeal 
their placement to the language placement 
appeals officers of the department and be 
reassigned to a lower level course. 

Divisional Requirements 

All students must complete courses as 
specified below in each of the five divisions 
of the undergraduate curriculum (unless 
exempted by completion of advanced 
placement requirements or by participa- 
tion in the open curriculum): 



£l Requirements for Degrees 



Division I. Literature (two courses; no more 
than one course from any one of the three 
groups) 

1 . English literature (English 1 60 or 1 65) 

2. American literature (English 1 70 or 
175) 

3. Foreign literature (other than the 
course used for the basic requirement) 

Classical languages 
Greek 21 1,21 2, 231,241, 
or 242 

Latin 211,21 2, 21 6, 21 8, 221 , 
225, or 226 

German 215 or 216 

Chinese 21 1 or 212 

Near Eastern Languages & 
Literature 211 or 21 2 (Hebrew) 

Japanese 21 1 

Romance languages (French, Italian, 
or Spanish) literature 

Russian 215 or 216 

In English translation: 
Classics 255, 261, 263, or 264 
Humanities 2 1 3, 2 1 4, 2 1 5, 2 1 6, 
217, 218, 219, 221, or 222 

Division II. The Natural Sciences, 
Mathematics, and Computer Science[ three 
courses, selected from two of the four 
groups) 

1 . Biology 1 1 1 , 112, 113 (if one 
course, 1 1 1 is strongly recommended; 
if two courses, 1 1 1 is strongly 
recommended as one of the courses.) 

2. Chemistry 108, 111 (with 1 1 1 L), 
116 (with 116L), 120* (unless 
advanced preparation indicates a 
higher course); if one course, 1 08, 
1 1 1 (with 1 1 1 L), or 1 20; if two 
courses, 1 1 1 (with 1 1 1 L), and 1 1 6 
(with 11 6L), or 111 (with 111L), and 
120* 

3. Physics 109, 1 10, 1 13, 1 14, 120* 



4. Mathematics 1 06, 1 09, 1 1 1 , 1 1 2, 
1 1 7, Computer Science 1 1 1 

* Credit not allowed for both Chemistry 
1 20 and Physics 120. 

Division III. History, Religion, and Philosophy 
(three courses; no more than one course 
from each group) 

1. History 101, 102, 103, or 104 

2. Religion 101, 102, or 103 

3. Philosophy 1 1 1 

Division IV. The Social and Behavioral 
Sciences (three courses, no more than one 
from any one group) 

1 . Anthropology 1 1 1 , 1 1 2, 1 1 3, or 
114 

2. Economics 150 

3. Politics 1 1 3, 114, 115, or 116 

4. Psychology 151 

5. Sociology 151,1 52, 1 53, or 1 54 

Division V. The Fine Arts (one course) 

1. Art 103, 1 04, or 1 1 1 

2. Music 101, 109, 181, or 182 

3. Theatre 110 or 112 

4. Dance 202 
Requirement in Health 
and Exercise Science 

All students must complete Health and 
Exercise Science 100 and 101. This 
requirement must be met before enroll- 
ment in additional health and exercise sci- 
ence elective courses, and in any case 
before the end of the second year. 

Proficiency in the Use 
of English 

Proficiency in the use of the English lan- 
guage is recognized by the faculty as a 
requirement in all departments. A compo- 
sition condition, indicated by cc with the 



Requirements for Degrees ^2 



grade for any course, may be assigned in 
any department to a student whose writing 
is unsatisfactory, regardless of previous 
credits in composition. The writing of 
transfer students is evaluated during the 
orientation period each term, and students 
whose writing is deficient are given a com- 
position condition. 

A student who has been assigned a cc 
will receive a "Not Reported" for the 
course. The student will have one semester 
(understood to be the next semester for 
which she or he is officially enrolled) in 
which to work in the Writing Center, revis- 
ing the course work to the instructor's sat- 
isfaction. Should the student fail to work 
in the Writing Center, or fail to revise the 
work to the instructor's satisfaction during 
the semester of his or her next enrollment, 
the grade will become an F unless some 
action is taken by the instructor. (If extenu- 
ating circumstances make it impossible for 
the student to make significant progress in 
a semester, the student may appeal to the 
dean's office for an additional semester of 
work to remove the "NR.") Removal of 
the deficiency is prerequisite to graduation. 

Basic and Divisional 
Requirements 

The basic and divisional requirements are 
intended to introduce the student to vari- 
ous fields of knowledge and to lay the 
foundation for concentration in a major 
subject and related fields during the junior 
and senior years. For these reasons, as 
many of the requirements as feasible should 
be taken in the first two years. 

No course requirements may be set 
aside or replaced by substitutes except 
through regular procedures already estab- 
lished by the faculty, or through a specific 
vote of the faculty in regular session. 



Declaring a Major 

To enter upon a major, a student should 
have earned at least sixty-five credits. The 
normal time for reaching this point is the 
end of the second semester of the sopho- 
more year. Thirty days before the end of the 
sophomore year, each student who will have 
acquired the requisite credits by the end of 
the semester or the end of the summer 
school is required to indicate to the registrar 
and to the department or departments con- 
cerned the selection of a major for concen- 
tration during the junior and senior years. 
Before this selection is recorded by the regis- 
trar, the student must present a written state- 
ment from the authorized representative of 
the department or departments indicating 
that the student has been accepted as a can- 
didate for the major in that department. An 
adviser is available to assist the student in 
planning a course of study for the junior and 
senior years. A department which rejects a 
student as a major must file with the dean of 
the College a written statement indicating 
the reason(s) for the rejection. 

If thirty days before the end of the 
sophomore year a student sees that he or 
she will begin the fifth semester without 
attaining sixty-five credits, he or she 
should consult the registrar's office about 
the proper course to follow. 

A student wishing to major in business, 
analytical finance, information systems, 
mathematical business, or the five-year 
accounting program, should make applica- 
tion to the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy. (See page 232 of 
this bulletin.) 

The undergraduate schools try to pro- 
vide ample space in the various major fields 
to accommodate the interests of students. It 
must be understood, however, that the 
undergraduate schools cannot guarantee 



^2 Requirements for Degrees 



the availability of space in a given major 
field or a given course, since the preferences 
of students change and there are limits to 
both faculty and facilities. 

After the initial declaration, a student 
may not change from one major to another 
without the written approval of the depart- 
ments concerned. The student's course of 
study for the junior and senior years includes 
the minimum requirements for the depart- 
mental major, with other courses selected by 
the student and approved by the adviser. 

At least half of the major must be com- 
pleted at Wake Forest University. 

The following fields of study are recog- 
nized for the major: accounting, analytical 
finance, anthropology, art history, studio 
art, biology, business, chemistry, classical 
studies, communication, computer science, 
economics, education, English, French, 
German, Greek, health and exercise sci- 
ence, history, information systems, Latin, 
mathematical business, mathematical eco- 
nomics, mathematics, music, philosophy, 
physics, politics, psychology, religion, 
Russian, sociology, Spanish, and theatre. 

Maximum Number of 
Courses in a Department 

Within the College, a maximum of 48 
credits in a single field of study is allowed 
within the 144 credits required for gradua- 
tion. Fifty-six credits toward graduation 
are allowed in any department authorized 
to offer two fields of study or more. 

These stipulations exclude required 
related courses from other departments. 
They further exclude, for students majoring 
in English, English 111; and, for students 
majoring in a foreign language, elementary 
courses in that language. These limits may 
be exceeded in unusual circumstances only 
by action of the dean of the College. 



Options for Meeting Major 
Requirements 

For purposes of satisfying graduation 
requirements, a student must select one, 
and only one, of the following options, 
which will receive official recognition on 
the student's permanent record: (1) a single 
major, (2) a joint major, (3) a single major 
and a minor, (4) a single major and a dou- 
ble minor, (5) a double major. In addition 
to the options above, a student may com- 
plete the requirements of a foreign area 
studies program. 

Double Majors and 
Joint Majors 

A student may major in two departments 
in the College with the written permission 
of the chair of each of the departments and 
on condition that the student meet all 
requirements for the major in both depart- 
ments. A student may not use the same 
course to meet requirements in both of the 
majors. The student must designate one of 
the two fields as the primary major, which 
appears first on the student's record. Only 
one undergraduate degree will be awarded, 
even if the student completes two majors. 

A joint major consisting of fifty-six 
credits in two fields of study is available in 
classical studies, mathematical business, 
and mathematical economics. 

Minors 

A minor is not required. Those students, 
however, who select a single major — not 
those working toward a double or joint 
major — may choose a minor field from 
among the following: anthropology, art 
history, studio art, astrophysics, biology, 
chemistry, communication, computer 



Requirements for Degrees ^a 



science, dance, economics, educational 
studies, professional education, English, 
French language and culture, French litera- 
ture, German, Greek, history, information 
systems, Italian, journalism, Latin, mathe- 
matics, music, philosophy, physics, poli- 
tics, psychology, religion, Russian, sociolo- 
gy, Spanish, and theatre, or from the 
interdisciplinary minors listed below. 

For details of the various minors, see 
the appropriate departmental headings in 
the section of this bulletin that lists course 
offerings. 

Interdisciplinary Minors 

Interdisciplinary minors are listed alphabeti- 
cally under Courses of Instruction in the bul- 
letin. The following programs are offered: 

American Ethnic Studies (p6^) 

Asian Studies (py8) 

Cultural Resource Preservation (pioi) 

Early Christian Studies (pioz) 

Environmental Studies (P124) 

Health Policy and Administration (P134) 

Humanities (P143) 

International Studies (pijo) 

Latin American Studies (P153) 

Linguistics (P155) 

Medieval Studies (pi6z) 

Neuroscience (piyz) 

Russian and East European Studies (pziz) 

Urban Studies (pzzy) 

Women's Studies (pzz^) 

Foreign Area Studies 

The foreign area studies programs enable 
students to choose an interdisciplinary 
concentration in the language and culture 
of a foreign area. An area studies concen- 
tration may include courses in the major 
and also in the minor field, if a minor is 



chosen. Foreign area studies programs do 
not replace majors or minors; they may 
supplement either or both. A faculty advis- 
er coordinates each foreign area studies 
program and advises students; students 
who wish to participate in one of these 
programs must consult with the program 
coordinator, preferably in their sophomore 
year. Questions also may be directed to the 
Center for International Studies. 

Foreign area studies are listed alpha- 
betically under Courses of Instruction in 
the bulletin. The following programs are 
offered: 

East Asian Studies (pio$) 
German Studies (pizy) 
Italian Studies (P151) 
Spanish Studies (pziy) 

Senior Testing 

All seniors may be required to participate 
in a testing program designed to provide 
objective evidence of educational develop- 
ment. If the Committee on Academic 
Affairs decides to conduct such a program, 
its purpose would be to assist the 
University in assessing the effectiveness of 
its programs. The program does not sup- 
plant the regular administration of the 
Graduate Record Examination for students 
applying for admission to graduate school. 

Combined Degrees in 
Medical Technology 

Students may qualify for the bachelor of 
science degree in medical technology by 
completion of the academic requirements 
outlined in the following paragraph and by 
satisfactory completion of the full program 
in medical technology offered by the 
Division of Allied Health Programs of the 



£c Requirements for Degrees 



Wake Forest School of Medicine. A grade 
of at least C is required in all courses taken 
in the program in medical technology. At 
least one year (thirty-six credits) of the 
required academic work must be completed 
in the College. (Under current scheduling, 
successful candidates receive the baccalau- 
reate degree in August rather than in May.) 
Students seeking admission to the pro- 
gram must file application in the fall of the 
junior year with the Division of Allied 
Health Programs of the medical school. 
Selection is based upon recommendations 
of teachers, college academic record, Allied 
Health Professions Admissions Test score, 
impressions made in personal interviews, 
and work experience (not essential, but 
important). Students must complete the 
basic course requirements; the divisional 
course requirements in Divisions I, III, and 
IV; the health and exercise science require- 
ment; Biology 111, 112, 113, 214 (three 
courses or equivalents); Biology 326; 
Chemistry 111/111L, 1 16/1 16L, 22 1/221 L, 
and 222/222L; mathematics (one course); 
and electives for a total of 108 credits. 
Desirable electives outside the area of 
chemistry and biology include physics, data 
processing, and personnel and management 
courses. (Interested students should consult 
a biology department faculty member dur- 
ing the first year for further information.) 

Degrees in the Physician 
Assistant Program 

Wake Forest students may apply for entry 
into the Physician Assistant Program in 
either of two ways: 

A. The degree in the Physician Assistant 
Program, a combined 3+2 program, open 
to no more than two students a year 



No more than two students a year may 
qualify for the bachelor of science degree in 
the Physician Assistant Program by com- 
pleting three years (108 credits) in the 
College with a minimum average grade 
level of C, and by satisfactory completion of 
the full twenty-four-month course in the 
Physician Assistant Program offered by the 
Division of Allied Health Programs of the 
Wake Forest University School of Medicine. 
This 3+2 contract program requires that at 
least one year (thirty-six credits) of the 
required academic work must be completed 
in the College. Candidates for the degree 
must complete the basic course require- 
ments, the divisional course requirements, 
the health and exercise science requirement, 
and at least four courses in biology (includ- 
ing one year in anatomy-physiology or one 
semester each of anatomy and physiology, 
and in microbiology). At least four courses 
in the social sciences (including sociology, 
psychology, and economics), a course in 
statistics, and three or four courses in chem- 
istry are recommended. Applicants to the 
program must have a minimum of six 
months of clinical experience in patient care 
services. Interested students should consult 
the health professions adviser during the 
first year for further information. 

B. Certificate of Completion, for regularly- 
graduating four-year students 

Students intending to graduate regular- 
ly must apply no later than January 1 of 
the senior year. They must have completed 
two courses in general biology, two cours- 
es in general chemistry, and one full year 
of anatomy and physiology (or one 
semester each of anatomy and physiology). 
One course in microbiology is strongly rec- 
ommended. Applicants must have one 
thousand hours of clinical experience in 
patient care services. Interested students 



Requirements for Degrees 55 



should consult the health professions 
adviser for further information. 



Degrees in Forestry and 
Environmental Studies 



Degrees in Engineering 

The College cooperates with North 
Carolina State University and other engi- 
neering schools in offering a broad course 
of study in the arts and sciences combined 
with specialized training in engineering. A 
program for outstanding students covers 
five years of study, including three years in 
the College and approximately two years 
in one of the schools of engineering. 
(Depending upon the field chosen, it may 
be advisable for a student to attend the 
summer session in the engineering school 
after transfer.) Admission to Wake Forest 
does not guarantee admission to the engi- 
neering school. Those decisions are based 
on the student's transcript, performance, 
and status at the time of application. Upon 
successful completion of the five years of 
study, the student receives the bachelor of 
science degree in engineering from the 
University and the bachelor of science 
degree in one of the specialized engineering 
fields from the engineering school. 

The curriculum for the first three years 
must include all the basic and divisional 
requirements and additional courses in sci- 
ence and mathematics which will prepare 
the student for the study of engineering, 
such as Mathematics 111, 112, 251, 301, 
302, and 304; Physics 113, 114, 141, 162, 
165, and 166; Chemistry 111, 111L, 116, 
and 116L; and Economics 150. 

These electives are chosen in consulta- 
tion with the chair of the Department of 
Physics. 



The College cooperates with the Duke 
University School of Forestry and 
Environmental Studies to offer students 
interested in these areas the possibility of 
earning both bachelor's and master's 
degrees within five years. For details about 
the program, students should consult a 
faculty member in the biology department. 

Five-Year Cooperative 
Degree Program in 
Latin American Studies 

Wake Forest and Georgetown universities 
have instituted a Five-Year Cooperative 
Degree Program in Latin American 
Studies. Under this program, undergradu- 
ate students who minor in Latin American 
Studies may apply to have a limited num- 
ber of credits from their undergraduate 
work count toward a master's degree in 
Latin American Studies at Georgetown 
University in Washington, D.C. The BA is 
awarded by Wake Forest, while the mas- 
ter's degree is awarded by Georgetown. 
Those whose application is accepted may 
complete both their BA and MA degrees in 
a five-year period. To apply for the com- 
bined BA/MA, students should declare an 
interest in the five-year cooperative degree 
program during their junior year. Students 
must then complete the regular 
Georgetown graduate application process 
and seek formal acceptance to the MA 
program during their senior year. The 
five-year program is an opportunity for 
exceptional students to complete degree 
requirements at an accelerated pace. 
Interested students should contact the five- 
year degree program coordinator, Peter 
Siavelis, assistant professor of politics. 



5y Requirements for Degrees 



Courses of Instruction 



Plans of study, course descriptions, and the identification of instruc- 
tors APPLY TO THE ACADEMIC YEAR 1999-2OOO UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, AND 

reflect official faculty action through march 1 7, 2000. 

The University reserves the right to change programs of study, aca- 
demic REQUIREMENTS, ASSIGNMENT OF LECTURERS, OR THE ANNOUNCED CALEN- 
DAR. The courses listed in this Bulletin are not necessarily taught 

EVERY YEAR; THEIR AVAILABILITY IS A FUNCTION OF BOTH STAFFING CON- 
STRAINTS AND STUDENT DEMAND. WHILE NO GUARANTEES ABOUT FUTURE 
SCHEDULING CAN BE MADE, STUDENTS ARE ENCOURAGED TO ALERT THEIR ADVIS- 
ERS AND DEPARTMENT HEADS TO THEIR NEEDS AND DESIRES AS SOON AS THEY 
CAN BE FORESEEN. FOR AN EXACT LIST OF COURSES OFFERED IN EACH PARTICU- 
LAR SEMESTER AND SUMMER, STUDENTS CONSULT THE COURSE SCHEDULES 
ISSUED BY THE OFFICE OF THE REGISTRAR DURING THE PRECEDING TERM. 

Odd-numbered courses are normally taught in the fall, even-numbered in the spring. 
Exceptions are noted after course descriptions. Number of credits is shown by numerals 
immediately after the course title — for example, (3) or (3,3). The symbols P — and C — 
followed by course numbers or titles are used to show prerequisites and corequisites for 
a course. 

Courses 101-199 are primarily for first-year students and sophomores; courses 200- 
299 are primarily for juniors and seniors; courses 301-399 are for advanced undergradu- 
ate students. Graduate courses are described in the bulletin of the Graduate School. 

Courses of Instruction £g 



American Ethnic Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 
Earl Smith (Sociology), Director 

The interdisciplinary minor in American ethnic studies requires twenty-four credits. The stu- 
dent must take American Ethnic Studies 151, Introduction to American Ethnic Studies, dur- 
ing the second or third year at Wake Forest, and American Ethnic Studies 300, Research in 
American Ethnic Studies. At least one additional four-credit course must be taken from the 
behavioral and social sciences, and one from the humanities. This structure gives students an 
understanding of the interdisciplinary nature of American ethnic studies within the context of 
the traditional liberal arts curriculum. 

151. Introduction to American Ethnic Studies. (4) A systematic survey of American eth- 
nicity. An interdisciplinary approach to the examination of multiethnic America. 

232. The American Jewish Experience. (4) An interdisciplinary course exploring Jewish 
immigration to America with a primary focus on the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. 

234. Ethnicity and Immigration. (4) An exploration of the socio-historical dynamics of 
the peopling of America in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries. 

300. Research in American Ethnic Studies. (4) Survey of multidisciplinary methodologies 
used to study American ethnicity. Supervised research projects required. 

Other courses may be chosen from a list on file in the office of the director of the program. 

Anthropology 

Jeanne M. Simonelli, Chair 
Professors Jay R. Kaplan, Jeanne M. Simonelli, Stanton K. Tefft, 

David S. Weaver, J. Ned Woodall 
Director/Curator, Museum of Anthropology/Associate Professor Mary Jane Berman 

Adjunct Associate Professor Sara A. Quandt 

Adjunct Assistant Professor Steven Folmar 

Adjunct Instructor Beverlye H. Hancock 

A major in anthropology requires a minimum of forty credits and must include 
Anthropology 111, 112, 113, 114, 340, 390, and one course from each of the following 
three groups: Methods 353, 354, 378, 380, 381, 382, 383, 384, 387; Subfield Topics 305, 
315, 332, 336, 337, 339, 342, 361, 362, 363, 366, 368, 370; Area 313, 330, 358, 373, 
374, 376, 377. 

Students are encouraged but not required to enroll in a course offering intensive field 
research training. However, only four credits from Anthropology 381, 382 and four cred- 
its from Anthropology 353, 354, 383, 384 may be used to meet major requirements. 

A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in anthropology courses is required at the time 
the major is declared. A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in all anthropology courses 
is required for graduation. 



6 9 



Anthropology 



A minor in anthropology requires twenty-four credits and must include 
Anthropology 111, 112, 113, 114. Only one course (excluding Anthropology 111, 112, 
113, 114) can be taken under the pass/fail grading option and used to meet minor 
requirements. Only four credits from Anthropology 398, 399 may be used toward the 
minor. Only four credits from Anthropology 353, 354, 381, 382, 383, and 384 may be 
used to meet minor requirements and departmental permission must be obtained for 
minor credit in these courses. 

To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Anthropology," highly qualified 
majors (3.5 grade point average in anthropology) should apply to the department for 
admission to the honors program. They must complete a senior research project, docu- 
ment their research, and satisfactorily defend their work in an oral examination. For addi- 
tional information, members of the departmental faculty should be consulted. 

111. Peoples and Cultures of the World. (4) A representative ethnographic survey of 
world cultures, including hunting-gathering, kin-based, and agricultural societies, as well 
as ethnic groups in complex societies. 

112. Introduction to Archeology. (4) An overview of world prehistory, from the earliest 
stone tools to the appearance of civilization, with an emphasis on the relationship 
between culture change and the natural environment. 

113. Introduction to Biological Anthropology. (4) Introduction to biological anthropolo- 
gy, including human biology, human variation, human genetics, human evolution, and 
primatology. 

114. Introduction to Cultural Anthropology. (4) Investigates and interprets the historic 
cultural diversity of the world's peoples, through an understanding of economic, social, 
and political systems; law and order, ritual, symbol, and religion; language and culture; 
kindship and the family; and modernization and culture change. 

305. Museum Anthropology. (4) Examines the historical, social, and ideological forces 
shaping the development of museums. Emphasizes the history of anthropology, the forma- 
tion of anthropological collections, representation, and the intellectual and social chal- 
lenges facing museums today. P — Anthropology 111 or 112 or 114 or 201 or 203 or per- 
mission of instructor. 

313. Tradition, Continuity, and Struggle: Mexico and Central America. (4) Acquaints stu- 
dents with the lives and struggles of indigenous and non-indigenous people of Mexico and 
neighboring countries, with special focus on the Maya. The class will include study of 
contemporary and prehispanic traditions, including Mayan cosmology, language, art and 
architecture, issues of contact during Spanish colonization, and current political, econom- 
ic, health, and social issues affecting these areas today. 

315. Material Culture Studies. (4) Explores the social and cultural roles of objects 
through the study of materials, technology, economy, context, and meaning. 
P — Anthropology 111 or 112 or 114 or 201 or 203 or permission of instructor. 

330. Seeing World Cultures. (4) Focuses on selected cultures throughout the world to bet- 
ter understand these societies through the use of ethnographic literature and assesses the 



Anthropology jq 



effectiveness of visual communication in conveying ideas about these cultures through the 
use of ethnographic videos and films. P — Anthropology 101 or 111 or 112 or 113 or 114 
or permission of instructor. 

332. Anthropology of Gender. (4) Focuses on the difference between sex, a biological cat- 
egory, and gender, its cultural counterpart. An anthropological perspective is used to 
understand both the human life cycle and the status of contemporary women and men 
worldwide. In section one, topics include evolution and biological development, sexuality 
and reproduction, parenting, and life cycle changes. The second section takes students to 
diverse locations, including Africa, South Dakota, China, India, and the Amazon for a 
cross-cultural comparison examining roles, responsibilities, and expectations, and how 
these interact with related issues of class and race. 

336. Myth, Ritual, and Symbolism. (4) Explores how people envision and manipulate the 
supernatural in cross-cultural perspective. Emphasizes functional aspects of religious 
beliefs and practices. P — Anthropology 101 or 111 or 112 or 113 or 114 or permission of 
instructor. 

337. Economic Anthropology. (4) Examines the relationship between culture and the 
economy and its implications for applied anthropology. The variable nature and meaning 
of economic behavior will be examined in societies ranging from non-industrial to post- 
industrial. Discusses the impact of economic development programs, foreign aid and 
investment, technology transfer, and a variety of other economic aid programs. 

P — Anthropology 101 or 111 or 112 or 113 or 114 or permission of instructor. 

339. Culture and Nature. (2) A study of the reciprocal effects of the culture and nature 
relationship, with an emphasis on how different cultures define, use, and value nature. 

340. Anthropological Theory. (4) A study and evaluation of the major anthropological 
theories of humans and society. The relevance and significance of these theories to modern 
anthropology are discussed. P — Anthropology 201 and 202 and 203 or 112 and 113 and 

1 14 or permission of instructor. 

342. Applied Anthropology. (4) Seminar exploring the ways anthropological concepts and 
data contribute to understanding and solving contemporary problems facing human pop- 
ulations everywhere. Emphasis will be on change and conflict situations in developing 
areas, but problems encountered by urban and industrialized cultures also are considered. 
P — Anthropology 111 or 114 or 203 or permission of instructor 

353/354. Field Research. (4,4) Issues-based field program providing students with a criti- 
cal understanding of the historical, social, political-economic, and environmental condi- 
tions that have shaped the lives of the people of the Greater Southwest, with special atten- 
tion to the Native American and Latino/a experience. The program moves from the 
Mexican border region through New Mexico and Arizona, focusing on border issues, 
archaeology and prehispanic history, and contemporary Native American culture. 
Students camp, hike, and learn to use digital technology in the field. Specific sites may 
vary from year to year. P — Permission of instructor. 

358. The American Indian. (2) Ethnology and prehistory of the American Indian. 
P— Anthropology 101 or 111 or 112 or 113 or 114. 



yj Anthropology 



361. Evolution of Human Behavior. (4) The application of Darwinian principles to the 
study of human nature and culture. Considers the existence, origin, and manifestation of 
human behavioral universals and the theoretical and practical implications of individual 
variability. 

362. Medical Anthropology. (4) The impact of Western medical practices and theory on 
non-Western cultures and anthropological contributions to the solving of world health 
problems. P — Anthropology 101 or 111 or 112 or 113 or 114 or permission of instructor. 

363. Primate Behavior and Biology. (4) Examines the evolution and adaptations of the 
order primates. Considers the different ways that ecology and evolution shape social 
behavior. A special emphasis on the lifeways of monkeys and apes. 

366. Human Evolution. (4) The paleontological evidence for early human evolution, with 
an emphasis on the first 5 million years of bio-cultural evolution. P — Anthropology 113 
or 202 or permission of instructor. 

368. Human Osteology. (4) A survey of human skeletal anatomy and analysis, emphasiz- 
ing archeological and anthropological applications. 

370. Old World Prehistory. (4) Survey of Old World prehistory, with particular attention 
to geological and climatological events affecting culture change. P — Anthropology 112 or 
201 or permission of instructor. 

373. Southwestern Archeology. (2) Prehistoric cultural development of the Mogollon, 
Hohokam, Anasazi, and associated groups. Topics include environment, early peopling of 
the Southwest, ceramic and architectural traditions, origins of agriculture, rise of social 
complexity, and abandonment. 

374. Prehistory of North America. (4) The development of culture in North America as 
outlined by archeological research, with an emphasis on paleoecology and sociocultural 
processes. P — Anthropology 112 or 201 or permission of instructor. 

376. Archeology of the Southeastern United States. (2) A study of human adaptation in 
the Southeast from Pleistocene to the present, emphasizing the role of ecological factors 
in determining the formal aspects of culture. P — Anthropology 101 or 111 or 112 or 113 
or 114. 

377. People and Cultures of the Southwest. (2) Survey of the major Native American cul- 
tures with emphasis on their history, contemporary ecology, economics, social, political, 
and religious organizations, artistic expression, and interaction and shared histories with 
Hispanic, Anglo, and other ethnic groups. 

378. Conservation Archeology. (2) A study of the laws, regulations, policies, programs, 
and political processes used to conserve prehistoric and historic cultural resources. 

380. Anthropological Statistics. (4) Basic statistics, emphasizing application in anthropo- 
logical research. (A student who receives credit for this course may not also receive credit 
for Biology 380, Business 201, or Mathematics 109.) 

381, 382. Archeological Research. (4,4) The recovery of anthropological data through 
archeological fieldwork. Students will learn archeological survey, mapping, excavation, 



Anthropology 72 



recording techniques and artifact and ecofact recovery and analysis. P — Anthropology 
101 or 111 or 112 or 113 or 114 and permission of instructor. 

383, 384. Field Research in Cultural Anthropology. (4,4) Training in techniques for the 
study of foreign cultures, carried out in the field. P — Anthropology 101 or 1 1 1 or 1 12 or 
1 13 or 1 14 and permission of instructor. 

385, 386. Special Problems Seminar. (4) Intensive investigation of current scientific 
research within the discipline. The course concentrates on problems of contemporary 
interest. 

387. Ethnographic Research Methods. (4) Designed to familiarize students with ethno- 
graphic research methods and their application. Considers the epistemological, ethical, 
political, and psychological aspects of research. Laboratory experience and data analysis. 
P-Anthropology 111 or 114 or 203. 

390. Student-Faculty Seminar. (4) A review of contemporary problems in the fields of 
archeology, and biological and cultural anthropology. P — Junior standing or permission 
of instructor. 

398, 399. Individual Study. (1,2,3, or 4) A reading, research, or internship course 
designed to meet the needs and interests of selected students, to be carried out under the 
supervision of a departmental faculty member. P — Permission of instructor. 

Art 

Margaret S. Smith, Chair, Wake Forest Professor 

Charlotte C. Weber Professor of Art, David M. Lubin 

Reynolds Professor Terisio Pignatti (Venice) 

Professors Robert Knott, Margaret S. Smith 

Associate Professors Bernadine Barnes, David L. Faber, 

Page H. Laughlin, Harry B. Titus Jr. 

Assistant Professors David Finn, John R. Picket 

Visiting Instructor Alix Hitchcock 

Lecturers Brian Allen (London), Maria A. Chiari (Venice), 

Beatrice Ottersbock (Vienna), Katie Scott (London) 

Gallery Director Victor Faccinto 

The department offers courses in the history of art and in the practice of drawing, paint- 
ing, printmaking, and sculpture. A visiting artist program and varied exhibitions in the 
gallery of the Scales Fine Arts Center, as well as internships in local cultural organizations, 
supplement the regular academic program of the department. 

The department offers two fields of study, art history and studio art. A major in art his- 
tory requires forty credits in the department. Thirty-two credits are to be in art history, and 
eight credits are to be in studio art. A major in studio art requires forty credits in the depart- 
ment. Thirty-two credits are to be in studio art, and eight credits are to be in art history. 

A minor in art history requires twenty credits in the department, sixteen in art history 
and four in studio art. A minor in studio art requires twenty credits in the department, 



j-2 Art 



sixteen in studio art and four in art history. Students may major in one field and minor in 
the other within a limit of fifty-six credits. 

Any student interested in majoring or minoring in art should consult the chair of the 
art department. 

Qualified students in both the art history and studio areas may ask to participate in 
the department's honors program. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Art," 
students must execute a written project or create a body of work; the results of their 
efforts must be presented and defended before a committee of the departmental faculty. 
Interested students should consult any member of the department for additional informa- 
tion concerning the requirements for this program. 

Art History 

103. History of Western Art. (4) A historical introduction to the arts of various cultures 
and times with discussions of technique, style, methodology, and terms. Satisfies the 
Division V requirement. 

104. Topics in World Art. (4) An examination of the visual arts in selected world cultures, 
with discussions of technique, style, methodology, and terms. Topics may include one or 
more of the following: the arts of China, Japan, India, Africa, Islamic cultures, or the 
indigenous cultures of the Americas. Satisfies the Division V requirement. 

231. American Visual Arts. (4) American art and culture from the Colonial period to 
1900 in terms of changing aesthetic standards, social, and historical developments. 
Includes fine arts, folk arts, material culture, and mass media. 

233. American Architecture. (4) A discussion-based course focusing on American archi- 
tecture from 1650 to the present. 

241. Ancient Art. (4) A survey of architecture, painting, and sculpture from the prehis- 
toric through the late Roman periods. 

244. Greek Art. (4) A survey of architecture, painting, and sculpture from the prehistoric 
through the Hellenistic periods. 

245. Roman Art. (4) A survey of Etruscan and Roman architecture, painting, and sculp- 
ture. 

251. Women and Art. (4) A historical examination of the changing image of women in art 
and the role of women artists. 

252. Romanesque Art. (4) Art and architecture from the Carolingian Renaissance through 
the twelfth century. 

253. The Gothic Cathedral. (4) The character and evolution of Gothic cathedrals and the 
sculpture, stained glass, metalworks, and paintings designed for them. 

254. Luxury Arts in the Middle Ages. (4) Medieval illuminated manuscripts and precious 
objects made of gold, silver, ivory, enamel, and other luxury materials are the subjects of 
this course. 



Art 74 



258. The History of Prints. (4) A survey of the technical and stylistic developments in 
printmaking from the fifteenth century to the present. Special attention will be given to 
the function of prints in society. Student research will focus on prints in the University 
Print Collection. 

259. The History of Photography. (4) A historical and critical survey of photography 
from its invention in 1826 to the present. Special attention to the medium's cultural and 
artistic reception. 

260. Classics of the Sound Cinema. (4) Selected masterpieces of world cinema (1930- 
1960). Particular emphasis is placed on developing skills for viewing films as a form of 
visual art. 

268. Italian Renaissance Art. (4) The development of the art and architecture in Italy, 
from around 1300 to the late sixteenth century. 

270. Northern Renaissance Art. (4) A survey of painting, sculpture, and printmaking in 
Northern Europe from the mid-fourteenth century through the sixteenth century. 

271. Studies in French Art. (2) Lectures and field trips in French painting, sculpture, and 
architecture, concentrating on the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. Offered in Dijon. 

272. Baroque Art. (4) A survey of European painting and sculpture from 1600 to 1700. 

275. History of Landscape Architecture. (4) Study of garden design, beginning with 
Roman gardens and continuing through the creation of public parks in the nineteenth 
century. 

281. Nineteenth Century Art. (4) A survey of European and American art from the 
French Revolution to 1900, emphasizing the major movements from Romanticism to 
Impressionism and post-Impressionism. 

282. Twentieth Century Art. (4) A survey of European and American painting and sculp- 
ture from 1900 to the present. 

283. Impressionism. (4) A study of Impressionism and post-Impressionism with an 
emphasis on stylistic innovations and the social and cultural context in which they were 
produced. 

284. Contemporary American Art. (4) An intensive study of American painting and sculp- 
ture from 1950 to the present. 

288. Modern Architecture. (4) A survey of European and American architecture from 
1900 to the present. 

290. Issues in Art History. (4) A discussion-based course focusing on critical theory and 
methods employed by art historians working today as well as by some of the founding fig- 
ures of the discipline. 

291. Individual Study. (4) A course of independent study with faculty guidance. 

292. Individual Study. (4) A course of independent study with faculty guidance. 

293. Practicum. (4) Internships in local cultural organizations, to be arranged by the art 
department. Pass/fail. 



■jc Art 



296. Art History Seminar. (2,4) Offered by members of the faculty or visiting faculty on 
topics of their choice. A paper is required. P — Permission of instructor. 

a. Ancient Art b. Medieval Art 

c. Renaissance Art d. Baroque Art 

e. Modern Art f. Contemporary Art 

g. American Art h. Modern Architecture 

i. American Architecture j. Special Topics 

298. Seminar: Signs of the Century. (4) Form and meaning in popular visual imagery of 
twentieth century America. Emphasizes discussion of the students' semester-long research 
projects. 

299. International Studies in Art. (4) Offered by art department faculty in locations out- 
side of the United States, on specific topics in art history or studio art. Offered in the 
summer. 

2320. English Art, Hogarth to the Present. (4) A survey of English painting, sculpture, 
and architecture in the Georgian, Victorian, and modern periods. Slide lectures, student 
reports, museum visits, and lectures. Taught by special lecturer. Offered in London. 

2693. Venetian Renaissance Art. (4) A survey of the art of the Venetian Renaissance, with 
slide lectures and museum visits. Offered in Venice. 

2767. Austrian Art and Architecture. (4) A study of the development of Austrian art and 
architecture and its relationship to European periods and styles. Includes visits to sites and 
museums. Offered in Vienna. 

Studio Art* 

111. Introduction to Studio Art Fundamentals. (4) Students are introduced to basic ele- 
ments of two-dimensional and three-dimensional fine art through hands-on experimenta- 
tion and critical thinking. Six class hours per week. Satisfies the Division V requirement. 

112. Introduction to Painting. (4) An introduction to painting fundamentals in a variety 
of contemporary styles in the oil or acrylic medium. 

114. Introduction to Digital Media. (4) An introduction to basic concepts in computer 
generated art. No previous experience with computers required. Art 111 recommended as 
a prerequisite. 

115. Introduction to Sculpture. (4) An introduction to basic sculptural styles and multi- 
media, with emphasis on contemporary concepts. 

117. Introduction to Printmaking. (4) An introduction to one or more of the following 
areas of printmaking: lithography, intaglio, and silkscreen. 

119. Introduction to Photography. (4) An introduction to photography as an expressive 
medium, including basic camera, darkroom techniques, and digital imagery. Preference to 
art majors. Not open to students who have had Sociology 205. 

* Prerequisites may be waived with permission of instructor. 



Art 



76 



211. Intermediate Drawing. (4) Continuation of Art 111, with concentrated emphasis on 
drawing fundamentals and idea development in realistic and abstract styles, emphasizing 
composition, value, line, and form. Six class hours per week. 

212. Intermediate Painting. (4) Continuation of Art 112, with concentrated emphasis on 
idea development. P — Art 112. May be repeated. 

214. Intermediate Digital Art. (4) Intermediate computer-based and analog imaging tech- 
niques emphasizing multimedia through Web page design, interactivity, hypertext and dig- 
ital video. Topics include conventional darkroom-based photography, motion pictures, 
and digital art. P — Art 114 or 119. 

215. Intermediate Sculpture. (4) Continuation of Art 115, with emphasis on idea develop- 
ment. P — Art 115. May be repeated. 

217. Intermediate Printmaking. (4) Continuation of Art 117, with emphasis on idea devel- 
opment. P — Art 117. May be repeated. 

218. Figure Drawing. (4) An introduction to figure drawing. 

219. Intermediate Photography. (4) Continuation of Art 119, with emphais on idea devel- 
opment. P — Art 119 or permission of instructor. 

221. Advanced Drawing. (4) A course of individual study with faculty guidance. May be 
repeated. P — Art 211. 

222. Advanced Painting. (4) A course of individual study with faculty guidance. May be 
repeated. P — Art 212. 

224. Advanced Digital Art. (4) Semester-long digital projects working with faculty, staff, 
and fellow students to create Web pages, interactive CD-ROMS, digital portfolios, and 
independent digital art and analog photography projects. Semester could also include 
internships within the University and in the community. P — Art 214. 

225. Advanced Sculpture. (4) A course of individual study with faculty guidance. May be 
repeated. P — Art 215. 

227. Advanced Printmaking. (4) A course of individual study with faculty guidance. May 
be repeated. P — Art 217. 

229. Advanced Photography. (4) A course of individual study with faculty guidance. May 
be repeated. P — Art 219. 

290. Printmaking Workshop. (4) A workshop course exploring relief, intaglio, lithogra- 
phy, and monotype techniques, open to students at any skill level. Offered in the summer. 

295. Studio Seminar. (2,4) Offered by members of the faculty or visiting faculty on topics 
of their choice and related studio activities. P — Permission of instructor. 



jj Art 



Asian Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Charles H. Kennedy (Politics), Coordinator 

The minor in Asian Studies consists of a total of twenty-four credits which students must 
select from an approved list of courses on file with the coordinator and listed below. 
Candidates for the minor are required to take these courses from at least three different 
departments and/or programs. While some study of an Asian language is strongly recom- 
mended, it is not required. Although students may repeat Asian Studies 381, Independent 
Research in Asian Studies (2-4) for credit, only four of these credits can apply toward 
completion of the Asian Studies minor. 

Appropriate credit in various fields of Asian Studies also may be obtained by study in 
China through the SASASAAS/Wake Forest Program or in Japan through the Wake 
Forest/Tokai University Program, or through other Wake Forest approved courses of 
study in Asia. Students intending to minor in Asian Studies should consult the coordina- 
tor, preferably in their sophomore year. Courses may be chosen from among the following 
list. (See course descriptions under appropriate listings.) 

311. Special Topics in Asian Studies. (2-4) An intensive survey of one or more important 
issues in Asian Studies not included in the regular course offerings. 

381. Independent Research in Asian Studies. (2-4) Supervised independent research pro- 
ject on a topic related to Asia. Requires the approval of both the instructor and the coor- 
dinator of Asian Studies. May be repeated for credit. 

Art 104. Topics in World Art (when 

focus is on Asia). (4) 
Chinese Lang. Ill, 112. Elementary Chinese. (5,5) 
& Liter. 151, 152. Intermediate Chinese. (5,5) 

199. Individual Study. (1-4) 

211. Wen-xue: Introduction to Literature Written in Chinese. (4) 
Communication 351. Comparative Communication. (2,4) 

(a) Japan 
History 341. History of Women in Modern Asia. (4) 

343. Imperial China. (4) 

344. Modern China. (4) 

346. Japan before 1600. (4) 

347. Japan since World War II. (4) 

348. Japan since 1600. (4) 
Humanities 170. Understanding Japan. (4) 

219. Introduction to Japanese Literature. (4) 

221. Introduction to Chinese Literature. (4) 

251. The Asian American Experience: Literature and Personal 

Narrative. (4) 
347. Women Writers in Japanese Culture. (4) 



Asian Studies 



78 



International 

Japanese Lan§ 
& Liter. 



Linguistics 
Philosophy 
Politics 



Religion 



Women's 
Studies 



348. Chinese Revolutionary Literature to 1948. (2) 

349. Chinese Liberation Literature since 1948. (2) 

350. Modern Chinese Literature. (4) 

210. Japanese and American Culture: A Cross-Cultural 
Studies Comparison. (4) 

111, 112. Elementary Japanese. (5,5) 
151, 152. Intermediate Japanese. (5,5) 
199. Individual Study. (1-4) 

211. Bungaku: Introduction to Literature Written in Modern 
Japanese. (4) 

220. Advanced Conversation. (4) 

230. Advanced Japanese I. (4) 

231. Advanced Japanese II. (4) 

231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) 

(Also listed as Women's Studies 231.) 
253. The Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) 

(Also listed as Religion 380.) 

246. Politics and Policies in South Asia. (4) 

247. Islam and Politics. (4) 

248. Government and Politics of China. (4) 

249. Government and Politics of Japan. (4) 

259. The Arab-Israeli Conflict. (4) 

260. East Asian International Relations. (4) 

361. Buddhism. (4) 

362. Islam. (4) 

380. The Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) 
231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) 
(Also listed as Linguistics 231.) 



79 



Asian Studies 



Biology 

Herman E. Eure, Chair 

Babcock Chair of Botany William K. Smith 

Wake Forest Professors Gerald W. Esch, Raymond E. Kuhn 

Professors Carole L. Browne, Robert A. Browne, William E. Conner, 

Ronald V. Dimock Jr., Herman E. Eure, Hugo C. Lane, Peter D. Weigl 

Associate Professors David J. Anderson, James F. Curran, Kathleen A. Kron, 

Gloria K. Muday, Wayne L. Silver 

Assistant Professors Miriam A. Ashley-Ross, Miles R. Silman, 

Brian W. Tague, Clifford W. Zeyl 

Adjunct Professors J. Whitfield Gibbons, Terry C. Hazen 

Adjunct Assistant Professor and Director of Imaging Facility Jennifer C. Waters 

Visiting Assistant Professors A. Daniel Johnson, Pat C. W. Lord 

At the end of the sophomore year a student electing to major in biology meets with a 
major adviser to plan the course of study for the junior and senior years. The require- 
ments for completion of the major are those in effect at the time of the conference, since 
the curriculum and departmental requirements may change slightly during the student's 
period of residence. All majors are required to take Biology 112, 113, and 214, and at 
least three 300-level five-credit biology courses. Co-major requirements are Chemistry 
111, 111L, 116, 116L, and two additional physical science courses with labs. 

For students declaring majors in the spring, the requirements for a major are a mini- 
mum of forty-one credits in biology. A minimum grade point average of C on all courses 
attempted in biology at Wake Forest University is required for graduation with a major in 
biology. (Students declaring a major later than the spring should consult with a biology 
major adviser for the specific major requirement at that time.) 

A minor in biology requires twenty credits. Courses taken pass/fail cannot count 
toward a minor. A minimum overall grade point average of C must be earned on all Wake 
Forest University biology courses taken to complete a minor. 

Prospective majors are strongly urged to select either Biology 112 or 113 as their first 
course in biology. Most prospective majors also should take Chemistry 111, 111L and 
116, 116L in their first year; the majority continue with two additional physical sciences 
with labs as sophomores. 

Advanced work in many areas of biology may require additional courses in mathe- 
matics, the physical sciences, and other areas of biology. The adviser calls these to the 
attention of the student, depending on individual needs. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in biology. To be graduated with the distinction "Honors in Biology," a 
graduating student must have a minimum grade point average of 3.0 in all courses and a 
3.3 in his/her biology courses. In addition, the student must submit an honors paper (writ- 
ten in the form of a scientific paper) describing the research which must be defended before 
his/her advisory committee. Specific details regarding the honors program, including select- 
ing an adviser and an advisory committee, deadlines, and writing of the honors thesis, may 
be obtained from the chair of the departmental undergraduate studies committee. 



Biology 8q 



Most 300-level courses have the 112, 113, 214 series as prerequisites. Any exceptions 
to the stated prerequisites must be approved by the chair of the department. Students 
enrolled at Wake Forest may not take courses in biology at other institutions to satisfy 
divisional requirements. 

111. Biological Principles. (5) A study of the general principles of living systems with 
focus on the cellular, organismal, and populational levels of biological organization, 
emphasizing the role of heredity and evolution in these systems. Course may count for 
major credit in biology, but is intended for students with little or no previous experience 
in biology. Lab — three hours. 

112. Comparative Physiology. (5) An introduction to the form and function of organisms, 
with emphasis on physical principles, structural organization, and critical function of 
plants and animals. Intended as a beginning course in biology for prospective majors and 
for any students with adequate high school preparation in biology. Lab — three hours. No 
prerequisites. 

113. Evolutionary and Ecological Biology. (5) An introduction to the principles of genet- 
ics, ecology, and evolution as they apply to organisms, populations, and communities, 
with emphasis on evolutionary processes within an ecological context. Intended as a 
beginning course in biology for prospective majors and for any students with adequate 
high school preparation in biology. Lab — three hours. No prerequisites. 

214. Cellular and Molecular Biology. (5) An introduction to the principles and processes 
of cellular and molecular biology including molecular organization of cellular structures, 
regulation of cellular functions, energetics and metabolism, molecular nature of the 
genome and the regulation of gene expression. Lab — three hours. P — Chemistry 111, 
111L, and 116, 116L. 

301-306. Topics in Biology. (1-5) Seminar and/or lecture courses in selected topics, some 
involving laboratory instruction. May be repeated if the course title differs. 

307. Biophysics. (4) An introduction to the structure, dynamic behavior, and function of 
DNA and proteins, and a survey of membrane biophysics. The physical principles of struc- 
ture determination by X-ray, NMR, and optical methods will be emphasized. P — Physics 
113, 114, Biology 112, 113, and 214 or permission of instructor 

311. Genetics. (4) A lecture course on the use of genetic analytical methods to establish the 
principles of inheritance and the mechanisms of gene function. Covered topics include mecha- 
nisms of genetic change, the genetics of development, and population genetics. Students may 
not receive credit for both Biology 311 and Biology 312. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

312. Genetics. (5) A lecture and lab course on the use of genetic analytical methods to 
establish the principles of inheritance and the mechanisms of gene function. Covered top- 
ics include mechanisms of genetic change, the genetics of development, and population 
genetics. The lab will include projects involving classical and current techniques of genetic 
investigation. Students may not receive credit for both Biology 311 and Biology 312. 
Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

314. Evolution. (4) Analysis of the theories, evidences, and mechanisms of evolution. 
P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

8l Biology 



315. Population Genetics. (4) A study of the amount of distribution of genetic variation in 
populations of organisms, and of how processes such as mutation, recombination, and 
selection affect genetic variation. The lecture will present both an introduction to theoreti- 
cal studies, and discussion of molecular and phenotypic variation in natural populations. 
P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

317. Plant Physiology and Development. (5) A lecture and laboratory course examining 
the structure, growth, development, and physiological processes of higher plants. The lab 
will utilize structured experiments and an independently designed research project. 
Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

320. Comparative Anatomy. (5) A study of the vertebrate body from an evolutionary, 
functional, and developmental perspective. Laboratories emphasize structure and func- 
tion, primarily through the dissection of representative vertebrates. Lab — three hours. 
P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

321. Parasitology. (5) A survey of protozoan, helminth, and arthropod parasites from the 
standpoint of morphology, taxonomy, life histories, and host/parasite relationships. Lab — 
three hours. P— Biology 112, 113, 214. 

322. Biomechanics. (5) An analysis of the relationship between organismal form and func- 
tion using principles from physics and engineering. Solid and fluid mechanics are employed 
to study design in living systems. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

323. Animal Behavior. (5) A survey of laboratory and field research on animal behavior. 
Lab— three hours. P— Biology 112, 113 and 214. 

326. Microbiology. (5) The structure, function, and taxonomy of microorganisms with 
emphasis on bacteria. Covered special topics include microbial ecology, industrial micro- 
biology, and medical microbiology. The lab emphasizes microbial diversity through char- 
acterizations of isolates from nature. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

331. Invertebrates. (5) Systematic study of invertebrates, with emphasis on functional 
morphology, behavior, ecology, and phytogeny. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, 
and 214. 

333. Vertebrates. (5) Systematic study of vertebrates, with emphasis on evolution, physiol- 
ogy, behavior, and ecology. Laboratory devoted to systematic, field, and experimental 
studies. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

335. Insect Biology. (5) A study of the diversity, structure, development, physiology, 
behavior, and ecology of insects. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

335S. Insect Biology. (5) A five-week course taught during the summer at the Archbold 
Biological Station in Central Florida. A study of the diversity, structure, development, 
physiology, behavior, and ecology of insects. Fieldtrips include Lake Okeechobee and the 
Big Cypress Swamp. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

338. Plant Systematics. (5) A study of the diversity and evolution of flowering plants. 
Lectures emphasize the comparative study of selected plant families, their relationships 
and the use of new information and techniques to enhance our understanding of plant 
evolution. Labs emphasize more practical aspects of plant systematics such as the use of 



Biology 82 



identification keys, recognition of common local plants, molecular techniques, and basic 
phylogenetic analysis. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

339. Principles of Biosystematics. (5) An exploration of the current theoretical and practi- 
cal approaches to the study of macroevolution in plants and animals. Topics include theo- 
ry and methods of constructing evolutionary trees, sources of data, and cladistic biogeog- 
raphy. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

340. Ecology. (5) Interrelationships among living systems and their environments; struc- 
ture and dynamics of major ecosystem types; contemporary problems in ecology. 

Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

341. Marine Biology. (5) An introduction to the physical, chemical, and biological param- 
eters affecting the distribution of marine organisms. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 
113, and 214. 

342. Aquatic Ecology. (5) A course designed to cover the general principles and concepts 
of limnology and aquatic biology as they apply to lentic and lotic habitats. A major por- 
tion of the field study is centered at the Charles M. Allen Biological Station. Lab — three 
hours. P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

344. Ecological and Evolutionary Genetics. (4) Principles of genetics in the context of eco- 
logical and evolutionary studies, including micro- and macro-evolutionary processes. 

P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. Permission of instructor. 

345. Neurobiology. (4) Introduction to the structure and function of the nervous system 
including the neural basis of behavior. Anatomical, physiological, and neurochemical 
approaches will be integrated in the study of the peripheral and central nervous systems. 
P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

346. Neurobiology. (5) Introduction to the structure and function of the nervous system 
including the neural basis of behavior. Anatomical, physiological, and neurochemical 
approaches will be integrated in the study of the peripheral and central nervous systems. 
The laboratory will emphasize electrophysiological techniques with experiments from the 
cellular to the behavioral level. Lab — three hours. P — Permission of instructor. 

347. Physiological Plant Ecology. (4) A course designed to provide a fundamental under- 
standing of how different plants have adapted to the stresses of their respective habitats, 
particularly in harsh or extreme environments such as deserts, the alpine, the arctic tun- 
dra, and tropical rain forests. Mechanisms of evolution, as well as future impacts of glob- 
al change (elevated CC>2 and global warming) on plant ecology will be explored. P — 
Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

348. Physiological Plant Ecology Laboratory. (1) A weekly, three-hour lab designed to 
introduce students to the broad array of portable field instrumentation now available in 
this research area. Instruments for measuring photosynthesis, respiration, water rela- 
tions, and plant microclimate at remote field locations (e.g. mountaintops). Gas 
exchange and micrometeorological instrumentation, data logging and analysis, and natu- 
ral (stable) isotope analysis will be included. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. This course 
paired with Biology 347 may satisfy one of the three, 300-level, five-credit courses 
required for the major. 



83 



Biology 



350. Biological Resources and the Environment. (4) Lectures, readings, and discussions 
examining biological resources, their limitations and methods for sustainability. Genetic, 
aquatic, terrestrial, and ecosystem resources will be examined. P — Biology 112, 113, and 
214, or permission of instructor. 

351. Vertebrate Physiology. (5) A lecture and laboratory course examining regulatory 
principles, integration in the nervous system and the physiology of the cardiovascular, res- 
piratory, and renal systems of vertebrates. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

354. Vertebrate Endocrinology. (4) A lecture course which considers the evolution of the 
endocrine glands and hormones and the physiology of the main hormonal pathways of 
vertebrates. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

355. Avian Biology. (5) A lecture and laboratory course emphasizing ecological and evolu- 
tionary influences on the physiology, behavior, and population biology of birds. Includes tax- 
onomy of the world's major bird groups. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

360. Development. (5) A description of the major events and processes of animal develop- 
ment, with an analysis of the causal factors underlying them. Special attention is given to 
the embryonic development of vertebrates, but consideration is also given to other types 
of development and other organisms. Topics include fertilization, early development, 
growth and cell division, cell differentiation, the role of genes in development, cell interac- 
tion, morphogenesis, regeneration, birth defects, and cancer. Lab — three hours. 
P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

362. Immunology. (4) A study of the components and protective mechanisms of the 
immune system. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

363. Sensory Biology. (4) A lecture course with emphasis on sensory physiology and other 
aspects of sensory systems, e.g. molecular biology and anatomy. Credit not allowed for 
both Biology 363 and 364. P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

364. Sensory Biology. (5) A lecture and laboratory course with emphasis on sensory phys- 
iology and other aspects of sensory systems, e.g. molecular biology and anatomy. Credit 
not allowed for both Biology 363 and 364. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

365. Biology of the Cell. (5) A lecture and laboratory course on classic experiments and 
recent advances in cell biology. Lectures emphasize analysis and interpretation of experi- 
mental data in the primary literature, focusing on topics such as the targeting of macro- 
molecules, cell-cell communicatio, and the control of cell division. The text for this 
course consists of papers that have led to the Nobel Prize in Physiology and Medicine 
and more current work using biological tools. The laboratory introduces basic tech- 
niques in cell biology and leads to an independent project. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 
112, 113, and 214. 

366. Human Evolution. (4) Investigation of primate and human evolution, both in anato- 
my and in behavior. (May count as either biology or anthropology but not both; choice to 
be made at registration.) P — Permission of instructor. 

370. Biochemistry. (4) A lecture course introducing the principles of biochemistry, with an 
emphasis on the experimental approaches that elucidated these principles. Major topics 
will include structure, function, and biosynthesis of biological molecules, analysis of 



Biology 



8 4 



enzyme function and activity, and regulation of metabolic pathways. P — Biology 112, 
113, and 214. 

371. Biochemistry Laboratory. (1) The laboratory emphasizes approaches to isolation and 
analysis of both proteins and nucleic acids. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 
214. P — or C — Biology 370. This course, paired with Biology 370, may be used as one of 
the three 300-level five-credit courses required for the major. 

372. Molecular Biology. (5) An analysis of the molecular mechanisms by which stored 
genetic information directs cellular development. Emphasis is placed on storage and trans- 
mission of genetic information, regulation of gene expression, and the role of these pro- 
cesses in development. The laboratory focuses on modern techniques of recombinant 
DNA analysis. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

375. Microscopy for Biological Sciences. (5) Methods in light and electron microscopy 
including specimen preparation, image generation and recording. Students learn the basic 
techniques of photography (developing and printing), fixation and sectioning of speci- 
mens, and video-enhanced, computer-generated imaging as well as image and motion 
analysis. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

376. Ichthyology. (5) A comparative study of structure/function, classification, and phy- 
logeny of fish. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

377. Community Ecology. (5) An advanced ecology course covering mechanisms that 
determine the dynamics and distribution of plant and animal assemblages: life-history, 
competition, predation, geology, climate, soils, and history. Lectures focus on ecological 
principles and theory. Lab includes local field trips and discussion of the primary litera- 
ture. Several weekend field trips. Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

379. Molecular Techniques in Evolution and Systematics. (5) A lecture and laboratory 
course that explores molecular methods that are basic to many disciplines within biology, 
especially ecology, evolution, and systematics. Laboratories focus on the acquisition of 
molecular techniques, including allozyme electrophoresis, mitochondrial plastid, and 
nuclear DNA restriction fragment length polymorphism analyses, gene amplification, 
PCR (polymerase chain reaction), direct and/or cycle sequencing, and RAPDs (randomly 
amplified polymorphic DNAs). Lab — three hours. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

380. Biostatistics. (4) An introduction to statistical methods used by biologists, including 
descriptive statistics, hypothesis-testing, analysis of variance, and regression and correla- 
tion. May count as biology or anthropology but not both; choice to be made at registra- 
tion. (A student who receives credit for this course may not also receive credit for 
Anthropology 380, Business 201, or Mathematics 109.) P— Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

381. Biostatistics Laboratory. (1) Application of computer-based statistical software. P — 
Biology 112, 113, and 214. P — or C — Biology 380. This course, paired with Biology 
380, may not be used to satisfy one of the three 300-level five-credit courses required for 
the major. 

391, 392. Research in Biology. (2,2) Independent library and laboratory investigation car- 
ried out under the supervision of a member of the staff. Pass/fail or for grade at discretion 
of the instructor. * P — Permission of instructor. 



r Biology 



393, 394. Research in Biology. (2,2) Courses designed for students who wish to continue 
research projects beyond Biology 391 and 392. Pass/fail optional. Not to be counted 
toward major.* P — Permission of instructor. 

395S. Marine Models in Biological Research. (6) An eight-week course that is taught at 
the Marine Biology Laboratory in Woods Hole, Mass. Students attend lectures and semi- 
nars in areas of cell and developmental biology and marine ecology. Each student is guid- 
ed in a research project selected from the area of expertise of participating faculty and 
which takes advantage of the special facilities of the MBL, such as confocal microscopy 
and intracellular Ca++ imaging. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

396. Biomedical Ethics. (4) Lectures and seminars examining contemporary issues in 
biomedical ethics including the proper role of biomedical research, and current controver- 
sies in health care and medical practice. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

397. Seminar in Biology. (2-4) Consideration of major biological topics through intensive 
reading and discussions. P — Biology 112, 113, and 214. 

''"The same numbered course cannot be repeated. Subsequent courses should be taken in 
consecutive order. 

Chemistry 

Bradley T. Jones, Chair 

Wake Forest Professors Roger A. Hegstrom, Willie L. Hinze, Mark E. Welker 
Professors Dilip K. Kondepudi, Gordon A. Melson, 
Ronald E. Noftle, Robert L. Swofford 
Associate Professors Bradley T. Jones, Abdessadek Lachgar 
Assistant Professors Ulrich Bierbach, Christa L. Colyer, Steven C. Haefner, 
S. Bruce King, Richard A. Manderville 
Senior Lecturer Angela Glisan King 
Visiting Professors Nanette A. Stevens, Catherine Owens Welder 

The department offers programs leading to the bachelor of arts and bachelor of science 
degrees in chemistry. The bachelor of science degree is certified by the American Chemical 
Society. 

The bachelor of arts degree in chemistry includes Chemistry 111, 111L, 116, 116L, 
221, 221L, 222, 222L, 341, 341L, 342 or 344, 342L, and 361, 361L; Mathematics 111, 
112; and Physics 113, 114. 

The bachelor of science degree in chemistry includes Chemistry 111, 111L, 116, 116L, 
221, 221L, 222, 222L, 334, 334L, 341, 341L, 344, 342L, either 351 or 356/357, 361, 
361L, 381, 382, 383, 391 or 392; Mathematics 111 and 112 and either 113 or 301; and 
Physics 113, 114. 

Additional mathematics and science courses are strongly recommended for bachelor 
of science degree candidates. The number and selection of these courses depends on the 
professional goals of the individual student. Examples of these courses are Mathematics 
302 and 304; Physics 161 and 164; and Biology 370 and 371. 



Chemistry g£ 



A minor in chemistry requires twenty-three credits in chemistry and must include at 
least one of the following courses: 334, 341 and 341L, 342 or 344 and 342L, 351, 
356/357, 361 and 361L. The department will not accept courses taken pass/fail to count 
toward the minor. 

Unless otherwise stated, all chemistry courses are open to chemistry majors on a letter- 
grade basis only. Majors are also required to complete on a letter-grade basis the required 
physics and mathematics courses. 

A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in the first two years of chemistry is required 
of students who elect to major in the department. Admission to any class is contingent 
upon satisfactory grades in prerequisite courses, and registration for advanced courses 
must be approved by the department. Candidates for either the bachelor of arts or bache- 
lor of science degree with a major in chemistry must have a minimum grade point average 
of 2.0 in their chemistry courses numbered 200 or above. 

Qualified majors are considered for honors in chemistry. To be graduated with the 
designation "Honors in Chemistry," a student must have a minimum grade point average 
in chemistry courses of 3.3 and a minimum overall grade point average of 3.0. In addi- 
tion, the honors candidate must satisfactorily complete an approved research project, pre- 
pare a paper describing the project, and present results at a seminar for departmental 
approval. For additional information, members of the departmental faculty should be 
consulted. 

For the BA major, the following schedule of chemistry and related courses is typical: 

First Year Sophomore Junior Senior 

Chem. Ill, 111L Chem. 221, 221L Chem. 341, 341 L Chem. 361, 361L 

Chem. 1 1 6, 1 1 6L Chem. 222, 222L Chem. 342, 342L 

Math. 111,112 Physics 113, 114 

For the BS major, the following schedule of chemistry and related courses is typical: 

First Year Sophomore Junior Senior 

Chem. Ill, 11 1L Chem. 221, 221 L Chem. 341, 341 L Chem. 334, 334L 

Chem. 11 6,11 6L Chem. 222, 222L Chem. 344, 342L Chem. 361, 361L 

Math 111, 112 Physics 113, 114 Chem. 381,382 Chem. 381,382 

Math 1 13 (or 301) Chem. 383 Chemistry 

Chem. 391 or 300-Level Elective 
392 Science courses 

For variations in either of the schedules above, the student should consult a member of 
the faculty in chemistry. 

Students electing laboratory courses in chemistry are required to pay for breakage and 
for certain consumable materials as determined by the department. 

108. Everyday Chemistry. (5) Introduction to chemistry for non-science majors. 
Laboratory covers experimental aspects of topics discussed in lecture. Satisfies Division II 
requirement. A student may not receive credit for both Chemistry 108 and Chemistry 
111. Lab — three hours. 



87 



Chemistry 



*111. College Chemistry. (4) Fundamental chemical principles. C — Chemistry 111L. 

*111L. College Chemistry Lab. (1) Laboratory covers experimental aspects of basic con- 
cepts. Lab — three hours. C — Chemistry 111. 

*116. Equilibrium and Analysis. (4) Fundamental principles of equilibrium as applied to 
inorganic and generalized acid-base systems. P — Chemistry 111. C — Chemistry 116L. 

*116L. Equilibrium and Analysis Lab. (1) Laboratory covers aspects of quantitative and 
inorganic qualitative analysis. Lab — three hours. P — Chemistry 111. C — Chemistry 116. 

120. Physics and Chemistry of the Environment. (5) The course coheres the basic physi- 
cal and chemical processes in the earth's atmosphere, biosphere and the oceans. It consists 
of two parts: 1) chemical processes in the environment such as element cycles and the 
chemistry of the pollutants in air and water and, 2) physical aspects of the environment 
such as solar energy and the atmosphere, and the physics of weather and climate. 
Lab — three hours. P — Chemistry 111 or Physics 113. (Also listed as Environmental 
Studies 225 and Physics 120.) 

*221. Organic Chemistry I. (4) Principles and reactions of organic chemistry. 
P — Chemistry 116. C — Chemistry 22 1L. 

*221L. Organic Chemistry I Lab. (1) Lab — four hours. P — Chemistry 116. 
C — Chemistry 221. 

*222. Organic Chemistry EL (4) Principles and reactions of organic chemistry. 
P — Chemistry 221. C — Chemistry 222L. 

*222L. Organic Chemistry II Lab. (1) Lab — four hours. P — Chemistry 221. 
C — Chemistry 222. 

301, 302. Elective Research. (0,0) P — Permission of instructor. Summers only. 

*334. Chemical Analysis. (5) Theoretical and practical applications of modern methods 
of chemical analysis. Lab — four hours. C — Chemistry 341, 341 L. 

*341. Physical Chemistry I. (4) Fundamentals of equilibrium thermodynamics and elec- 
trochemistry, phenomenological kinetics, and introductory computational methods. 
P— Chemistry 116, Mathematics 111, Physics 113-114. C— Chemistry 341L, 
Mathematics 112, (Physics 113, with permission of instructor). 

*341L. Physical Chemistry I Lab. (1) Lab — four hours. P — Chemistry 116, Mathematics 
111, Physics 113-114. C — Chemistry 341, Mathematics 112. 

*342. Physical Chemistry IIA. (4) Fundamentals of quantum mechanics, statistical ther- 
modynamics, and introductory computational methods. P — Chemistry 341, 
Mathematics 111-112, Physics 113-114. C — Chemistry 342L, (Physics 114, with permis- 
sion of instructor). 



*The lecture and corresponding lab are strict corequisites of each other. A student must 
register for both during the same semester. However, either can be repeated independently 
if the student wishes. 



Chemistry gg 



*342L. Physical Chemistry IIA Lab. (1) Lab— four hours. P— Chemistry 341, 
Mathematics 111-112, Physics 113-114. C— Chemistry 342 or 344. 

344. Physical Chemistry IIB. (4) Fundamentals of quantum mechanics, statistical thermo- 
dynamics, and introductory computational methods. Lab — four hours. P — Chemistry 
341, Mathematics 111-112 and 301 (or 113), Physics 113-114. C— Chemistry 342L, 
(Physics 114, with permission of instructor). 

351. Special Topics in Biochemistry. (4) Fundamentals of biochemistry, with particular 
emphasis on mechanistic analysis of metabolic pathways, enzymatic activity, and drug 
action. P — Chemistry 222. 

356, 357. Chemical Spectroscopy. (2,2) Fundamental aspects of the theory and applica- 
tion of chemical spectroscopy, as found in the areas of analytical, inorganic, organic, and 
physical chemistry. Emphasis will vary. Seven-week courses. P — Chemistry 342 or 344, 
361, or permission of instructor. 

*361. Inorganic Chemistry. (4) Principles and reactions of inorganic chemistry. 
P— Chemistry 342 or 344. C— Chemistry 36 1L. 

*361L. Inorganic Chemistry Lab. (1) Lab — four hours. P — Chemistry 342 or 344. 
C — Chemistry 361. 

381, 382. Chemistry Seminar. (0,0) Discussions of contemporary research. Attendance 
required of bachelor of science chemistry majors in the junior and senior years. 

383. Chemical Literature. (1) Introduction to the chemical literature and searching tech- 
niques for the acquisition of chemical information. P — Chemistry 222. 

391, 392. Undergraduate Research. (2,2) Undergraduate research. Lab — eight hours. 



"The lecture and corresponding lab are strict corequisites of each other. A student must 
register for both during the same semester. However, either can be repeated independently 
if the student wishes. 



8 9 



Chemistry 



Classical Languages 

John L. Andronica, Chair 

Professors John L. Andronica, Robert W. Uleryjr. 
Associate Professors Mary L. B. Pendergraft, James T. Powell 
Adjunct Assistant Professor Patricia Marshall 

The Department of Classical Languages offers majors and minors in three areas: Greek, 
Latin, and classical studies. 

A major in Greek requires thirty-two credits in the department beyond Greek 112. 
Twenty-eight of these credits must be in Greek courses; Greek 225 is required. Also 
required is History 315. 

A minor in Greek requires twenty credits: Greek 153; two 200-level courses in Greek; 
Classics 275 or History 315; and one additional course in Greek (200-level), Latin, or 
classics. 

A major in Latin requires thirty-two credits in the department beyond Latin 153. 
Twenty-four of these credits must be in Latin courses; Latin 250 is required. Also required 
is History 316. 

A minor in Latin requires twenty credits: three 200-level courses in Latin; Classics 276 
or History 316; and one additional course in Greek, Latin (200-level), or classics. 

A major in classical studies requires forty credits. A minimum of twenty-eight credits 
must be taken in the department. The following are required: 

a. One zoo-level course in Greek or Latin (prerequisites to this course do not count 

toward the forty required credits); 

b. Classics 275 and Classics 276; 

c. History 315 or History 316; 

d. At least one course from the following: Art 241 (Ancient Art); Art 244 (Greek Art); 

Art 245 (Roman Art); History 308 (Alexander the Great); Philosophy 232 
(Ancient and Medieval Philosophy); Philosophy 331 (Plato); Philosophy 332 
(Aristotle); Politics 271 (Plato, Aristotle, and Classical Political Philosophy); 
Politics 274 (Noble Greeks and Romans); Religion 314 (Ancient Israel and Her 
Neighbors). Other courses may be substituted by permission of the department. 

A minor in classical studies requires a minimum of twenty-four credits in the department, 
of which no more than nine may be in Greek or Latin courses. Classics 275 or 276 is 
required. 

The requirements for certification to teach Latin in high school are the same as the 
requirements for a major in Latin. A major in classical studies may serve as an appro- 
priate part of the program of studies required for certification to teach Latin in high 
school. A student wishing to secure this certification should confer with the chair of the 
department. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in Latin, Greek, or classical studies. To be graduated with the designation 
"Honors in Latin," "Honors in Greek," or "Honors in Classical Studies," a student must 
complete an honors research project and pass a comprehensive oral examination. For 



Classical Languages 



90 



honors in Latin or Greek, at least two of the courses counted toward the major must be 
seminar courses; for honors in classical studies, at least one seminar course in Latin, 
Greek, or classics is required. For additional information, members of the departmental 
faculty should be consulted. 

Greek 

111, 112. Elementary Greek. (5,5) An introduction to the language; the courses provide a 
foundation for reading in the ancient authors. 

153. Intermediate Greek. (4) Review of grammar; readings in classical authors. P — Greek 
112 or equivalent. 

211. Plato. (4) Selections from the dialogues of Plato. P — Greek 153 or equivalent. 

212. Homer. (4) Selections from the Iliad and the Odyssey. P — Greek 153 or equivalent. 

221. Greek Readings. (2,3, or 4) A course designed to meet individual needs and interests. 
P — permission of instructor. 

225. Advanced Grammar and Composition. (4) Intensive work in morphology and syn- 
tax, with practice in composition and stylistic analysis of selected readings. P — Greek 153. 

231. The Greek New Testament. (4) Selections from the Greek New Testament. P — Greek 
153. 

241. Greek Tragedy. (4) Close study of a selected tragedy or tragedies. This course 
includes consideration of the origin and history of Greek tragedy, with collateral reading 
of other tragedies in English translation. Seminar. P — Greek 211, 212, or equivalent. 

242. Greek Comedy. (4) Close study of a selected comedy or comedies of Aristophanes. 
This course includes consideration of the origin and history of Greek comedy, with collat- 
eral reading of other comedies in English translation. Seminar. P — Greek 211, 212, or 
equivalent. 

291, 292. Honors in Greek. (2,2) Directed research for honors paper. P — Permission of 
the department. 

Latin 

111, 112. Elementary Latin. (4,4) An introduction to the language; the courses provide a 
foundation for reading in the ancient authors. 

113. Intensive Elementary Latin. (5) An introduction to the language; the course covers 
the material of Latin 111 and 112 in one semester. Not open to students who have had 
Latin 111 or 112. 

120. Reading Medieval Latin. (2,4) Introduction to post-classical Latin with readings in 
selected works from late antiquity and the middle ages. P — Latin 112 or equivalent. 

153. Intermediate Latin. (5) Review of grammar and selected introductory readings. 
P— Latin 112 or 113. 



nj Classical Languages 



211. Introduction to Latin Poetry. (4) Readings from selected poets mainly of the late 
Republic and early Empire, with an introduction to literary criticism. P — Latin 153 or 
equivalent. 

212. Introduction to Latin Prose. (4) Readings primarily from the works of Cicero, with 
attention to their artistry and historical context. P — Latin 153 or equivalent. 

216. Roman Lyric Poetry. (4) An interpretation and evaluation of lyric poetry through 
readings from the poems of Catullus and Horace. P — Latin 153 or equivalent. 

218. Roman Epic Poetry. (4) Readings in the epics of Virgil and Ovid, with attention to 
their position in the epic tradition. P — Latin 153 or equivalent. 

221. Roman Historians. (4) Readings in the works of Sallust, Livy, or Tacitus, with atten- 
tion to the historical background and the norms of ancient historiography. P — Latin 153 
or equivalent. 

225. Roman Epistolography. (4) Selected readings from the correspondence of Cicero and 
Pliny the Younger and the verse epistles of Horace and Ovid. P — Latin 153 or equivalent. 

226. Roman Comedy. (4) Readings of selected comedies of Plautus and Terence, with a 
study of the traditions of comedy and dramatic techniques. P — Latin 153 or equivalent. 

231. Roman Elegy. (4) Readings from the poems of Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid, with 
study of the elegiac tradition. P — Latin 200-level or equivalent. 

241. Roman Satire. (4) Selected readings from Horace and Juvenal, with attention to the 
origin and development of hexameter satire. P — Latin 200-level or equivalent. 

243. Latin Readings. (2,3, or 4) A course designed to meet individual needs and interests. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

250. Advanced Grammar and Composition. (4) Intensive work in morphology and syn- 
tax, with practice in composition and stylistic analysis of selected readings. P — Latin 153 
or equivalent. 

Seminars 

The following seminars are offered by members of the faculty on topics and authors of 
their choice. A paper is required. 

260. Seminar in Latin Poetry. (4) Advanced study in selected authors and topics. 
A research paper is required. P — Latin 200-level or equivalent. 

280. Seminar in Latin Prose. (4) Advanced study in selected authors and topics. 
A research paper is required. P — Latin 200-level or equivalent. 

291, 292. Honors in Latin. (2, 2) Directed research for honors paper. P — Permission of 
the department. 



Classical Languages 02 



Classics 

151. Ethics in Greece and Rome. (2) Reading and discussion of Aristotle's Ethics and 
Cicero's On Moral Duties, with attention to our own ethical dilemmas. A knowledge of 
the Greek and Latin languages is not required. 

252. Women in Antiquity. (4) The course explores the place of women in Greek and 
Roman society through the study of a wide range of primary sources, literary and non- 
literary. A knowledge of the Greek and Latin languages is not required. 

255. Classical Epic: Iliad, Odyssey, Aeneid. (4) A study of the three principal epic poems 
from ancient Greece and Rome. A knowledge of the Greek and Latin languages is not 
required. 

259. Virgil and His English Legacy. (4) A study of Virgil's Eclogues, Georgics, and selected 
passages of the Aeneid, and their influence on English literature, using translations and 
original works by writers of the sixteenth through the eighteenth centuries, including 
Spenser, Marlowe, Milton, Dryden, and Pope. Knowledge of Latin is not required. (Also 
listed as English 319.) 

261. Greek Myth. (4) A consideration, principally through close study of selected literary 
works, of Greek myth in its various forms, primary (archaic and classical periods) and 
secondary (Hellenistic and Roman); the course also will consider Greek myth's afterlife in 
the modern period. A knowledge of the Greek language is not required. 

263. Greek Tragedy. (4) A study of the plays of Aeschylus, Sophocles, and Euripides. A 
knowledge of the Greek and Latin languages is not required. 

264. Greek and Roman Comedy. (4) Representative works of Aristophanes, Menander, 
Plautus, and Terence, with attention to the origins and development of comedy. A knowl- 
edge of the Greek and Latin languages is not required. 

275. The Age of Pericles. (4) A study of Greek culture in all its aspects during the fifth 
century. A knowledge of the Greek language is not required. 

276. The Age of Augustus. (4) A study of Roman culture in all its aspects during the early 
Empire. A knowledge of the Latin language is not required. 

279. Studies in Roman Biography. (2,3, or 4) A study in depth of a key figure of Roman 
history using the evidence of history, literature, numismatics, and epigraphy as well as art 
and archeology when appropriate. A knowledge of the Latin language is not required. 

285. Interdisciplinary Seminar in the Greco-Roman World. (4) This seminar is designed 
specially to meet the needs of students earning the interdisciplinary minor in early 
Christian studies, but is not limited to them. It will explore from various points of view 
the culture of the Mediterranean world from which Christianity was born and grew: liter- 
ature and art, history and economics, religions and philosophies. Also offered by the 
Department of Religion as Religion 285. Course may be repeated for credit. 

288. Individual Study. (2,3, or 4) 

291, 292. Honors in Classical Studies. (2,2) Directed research for honors paper. 
P — Permission of the department. 



o2 Classical Languages 



Communication 

Michael David Hazen, Chair 

University Distinguished Chair in Communication Ethics and 

Professor of Communication Michael J. Hyde 

Professors Michael David Hazen, Jill Jordan McMillan 

Adjunct Professor Jo Whitten May 

Associate Professors John T. Llewellyn, Allan D. Louden, 

Randall G. Rogan, Margaret D. Zulick 

Assistant Professors Betty LaFrance, Ananda Mitra, Eric K. Watts 

Visiting Assistant Professor Mary M. Dalton, Steven M. Giles 

Adjunct Assistant Professors Andrew W. Leslie, Dee Oseroff-Varnell 

Adjunct Instructors Anne Boozell, Susan L. Faust, Denise Franklin 

Ernest S. Jarrett, Mardene G. Morykwas, Karen L. Oxendine 

Debate Coach Ross K. Smith 

A major in communication requires forty credits, at least twelve of which must be at the 
300-level. All majors are required to take courses 100, 110, and 220 or 225 and should 
begin their study of communication with these courses. In addition, at least twelve credits 
must be taken from among the following courses: 113, 114, 200, 201, 245, 246, 335, and 
340 (or 341). An overall minimum grade point average of 2.0 in all communication 
courses attempted is required for graduation. 

A minor in communication requires twenty-four credits, at least four of which must 
be at the 300-level, and shall include courses 100, 110, and 220 or 225. Remaining 
coursework must include at least four credits from among the following courses: 113, 
114, 200, 201, 245, 335, and 340 (or 341). An overall minimum grade point average of 
2.0 in all communication courses attempted is required for graduation. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in communication. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in 
Communication," students must pass the departmental honors course, complete a senior 
research project, and satisfactorily defend their work in an oral examination. For more 
details, consult faculty members in the department. 

100. Introduction to Communication and Rhetoric. (4) An introduction to the theories, 
research, and analysis of verbal and nonverbal processes by which human beings share 
meanings and influence one another. 

110. Public Speaking. (4) A study of the theory and practice of public address. Lab experi- 
ences in the preparation, delivery, and critique of informative and persuasive speeches. 

111. Radio-TV Speech. (2) An introduction to announcing and performing on radio and 
television. 

112S. Oral Interpretation of Literature. (4) Fundamentals of reading aloud, with empha- 
sis on selection, analysis, and performance. Offered in summer only. 



Communication 04 



113. Interpersonal Communication. (4) An introductory overview of interpersonal com- 
munication theories and principles designed to improve the student's understanding of 
and ability to effectively communicate in interpersonal contexts. 

114. Group Communication. (4) An introduction to the theory and practice of group 
interaction and decision-making. The course features lectures and discussions of theory 
and includes opportunities to participate in formal and informal group processes. 

115. Introduction to Broadcast Writing. (2) Covers the basic principles and rules of 
broadcast writing with an emphasis on determining news value. 

116. On-Camera Performance. (4) Designed to introduce students to the theory and prac- 
tice of performing for the camera. This course covers basic method acting, newscasting, 
and other performance formats. (Also listed as Theatre 141.) 

117. Writing for Public Relations and Advertising. (2,4) Principles and techniques of pub- 
lic relations and applied advertising. Students use case studies to develop public relations 
and advertising strategies. Permission of Instructor. (Also listed as Journalism 286.) 

140. Information and Disinformation on the Internet. (2) An examination of information 
gathering practices on the Internet and World Wide Web. Students will develop and apply 
standards for evaluating information through analysis of Web sites dealing with impor- 
tant and controversial topics. 

160. Sign Language for the Deaf I. (2) An introduction to the basic expressive and 
receptive skills for finger spelling and the language of signs with attention to the culture 
of the deaf. 

161. Sign Language for the Deaf II. (2) Advanced work on basic expressive and receptive 
skills for finger spelling and the language of signs with attention to the culture of the deaf. 

200. Debate and Advocacy. (4) The use of argumentative techniques in oral advocacy: 
research, speeches, and debate. 

201. Persuasion. (4) A study of the variables and contexts of persuasion in contempo- 
rary society. 

210. Advanced Public Speaking. (4) Advanced study in the art of public address. This 
course is recommended for students with some previous speech experience and/or 
training. 

211. Media Production: Studio. (4) An introduction to the production of audio and video 
media projects. Multiple camera studio production emphasized. Lecture/laboratory. 

212. Media Production: Field. (4) An introduction to the production of audio and video 
media projects. Single camera field production and post-production emphasized. 
Lecture/laboratory. 

213. Film Production. (4) A study of the basic elements of motion picture production. 

216. Introduction to Radio News. (2) The principles of developing and producing radio 
news stories. P — Communication 115. 

217. Introduction to Television News. (2) The principles of developing and producing 
television news stories. P — Communication 115. 



95 



Communication 



220. Empirical Research in Communication. (4) An introduction to methodological 
design and univariate statistics as used in communication research. 

225. Historical/Critical Research in Communication. (4) Introduces students to the his- 
torical and critical analysis of rhetoric. Examines current methods of rhetorical criticism 
with a view to researching and composing a critical paper in the field. 

245. Introduction to Mass Communication. (4) A historical survey of mass media and an 
examination of major contemporary media issues. 

246. Introduction to Film. (4) An introduction to the aesthetics of motion pictures 
through a study of the basic elements of film such as cinematography, editing, sound, 
lighting, color, etc. 

261. Disorders of Articulation and Phonology. (4) Etiology, evaluation and management 
of articulation and phonological disorders. Offered in alternate fall semesters. 

262. Communication Disorders of the Hearing-Impaired. (4) The etiology and effect of 
hearing impairment on communication. The fundamentals of auditory training, speech 
reading, and other resources for the rehabilitation of the hearing-impaired individual. 
Offered in alternate spring semesters. 

263. Introduction to Communication Disorders. (4) An introduction to the disorders of 
human communication including fluency, language, voice, and articulation. Offered in 
alternate fall semesters. 

264. Diagnosis and Treatment of Communication Disorders. (4) The basic principles of 
evaluation, remediation and instruction for children and adults with communication dis- 
orders. Offered in alternate spring semesters. 

270. Special Seminar. (1-4) An examination of selected topics in the study of commu- 
nication. 

280. Communication Practicum I. (2,4) Individual projects in debate or communication 
internship to be approved, supervised, and evaluated by an appropriate faculty adviser. 
No student may register for more than two credits of practicum in any semester. No stu- 
dent is allowed to take more than a total of eight credits in practicum, only four credits 
of which may be counted toward a major in communication. Pass/fail only. P — 
Permission of instructor. 

281. Communication Practicum II. (2,4) See previous description. 

283. Individual Study. (1-4) Directed study in an area of interest to be approved and 
supervised by a faculty adviser. P — Permission of instructor. 

285. Honors Course. (2,4) Intensive research in an area of special interest for selected 
seniors who wish to graduate with departmental honors. P — Permission of department. 

300. Classical Rhetoric. (4) A study of major writings in Greek and Roman rhetorical the- 
ory from the Sophists to Augustine. Offered in alternate years. 

301. Semantics and Language in Communication. (4) A study of how meaning is created 
by sign processes. Among the topics studied are language theory, semiotics, speech act the- 
ory, and pragmatics. (Also listed as Linguistics 301.) 



Communication 



9 6 



302. Argumentation Theory. (4) An examination of argumentation theory and criticism; 
examines both theoretical issues and social practices. Offered in alternate years. 

303S. Directing the Forensic Program. (2,4) A pragmatic study of the methods of direct- 
ing high school and college forensics with work in the High School Debate Workshop. 
Offered in the summer. 

304. Freedom of Speech. (4) An examination of the philosophical and historical tradi- 
tions, significant cases, and contemporary controversies concerning freedom of expres- 
sion. Offered in alternate years. 

305. Communication and Ethics. (4) A study of the role of communication in ethical con- 
troversies. 

310. Advanced Media Production. (1-4) Special projects in audio and video production 
for students with previous media production experience. P — Communication 211, 212, 
213, or permission of instructor. 

330. Communication and Conflict. (4) A review of the various theoretical perspectives on 
conflict and negotiation as well as methods for managing relational conflict. 

335. Survey of Organizational Communication. (4) An overview of the role of communi- 
cation in constituting and maintaining the pattern of activities that sustain the modern 
organization. 

336. Organizational Rhetoric. (4) Explores the persuasive nature of organizational mes- 
sages — those exchanged between organizational members, and those presented in behalf 
of the organization as a whole. Offered in alternate years. 

337. Rhetoric of Institutions. (4) A study of the communication practices of institutions as 
they seek to gain and maintain social legitimacy. Offered in alternate years. 

340. American Rhetorical Movements to 1900. (4) Examines the interrelation of 
American rhetorical movements through the nineteenth century by reading and analyzing 
original speeches and documents with emphasis on antislavery and women's rights. 

341. American Rhetorical Movements since 1900. (4) Examines the interrelation of 
American rhetorical movements in the twentieth century by reading and analyzing origi- 
nal speeches and documents. Among the movements addressed are labor, civil rights, stu- 
dent radicals, and women's liberation. 

342. Political Communication. (4) Study of electoral communication, including candidate 
and media influences on campaign speeches, debates, and advertising. 

345. Mass Communication Theory. (4) Theoretical approaches to the role of communica- 
tion in reaching mass audiences and its relationship to other levels of communication. 

346. Film Theory and Criticism. (4) A study of film aesthetics through an analysis of the 
work of selected filmmakers and film critics. P — Communication 246 or permission of 
instructor. 

347. Film Flistory to 1945. (4) A survey of the developments of motion pictures to 1945. 
Includes lectures, readings, reports, and screenings. 



07 Communication 



348. Film History since 1945. (4) A survey of the development of motion pictures from 
1946 to the present day. Includes lectures, readings, reports, and screenings. 

349. Communication and Technology. (4) An exploration of how communication tech- 
nologies influence the social, political, and organization practices of everyday life. 

350. Intercultural Communication. (4) An introduction to the study of communication 
phenomena between individuals and groups with different cultural backgrounds. Offered 
in alternate years. 

351. Comparative Communication. (2,4) A comparison of communicative and linguistic 
processes in one or more national cultures with those of the United States. (Also listed as 
Linguistics 351.) 

3 51 A Japan 

35 IB Russia 

35 1C Great Britain 

35 ID Multiple Countries 

351E China 

355. Health Communication. (4) An examination of communication processes within the 
health professions. Includes topics such as patient-provider communication, public health 
communication campaigns, and communication in health institutions. 

370. Special Topics. (1-4) An examination of topics not covered in the regular curriculum. 

380. Great Teachers. (1,2,4) An intensive study of the ideas of three noted scholars and 
teachers in the field of communication. Students will interact with each teacher during a 
two to three-day visit to Wake Forest. 



Computer Science 

Jennifer J. Burg, Chair 

Reynolds Professor Robert J. Plemmons 

Associate Professors Daniel Canas, David J. John, 

Stan J. Thomas, Todd C. Torgersen 

Assistant Professors Yaorong Ge, Paul Hemler 

Instructor Patricia Y. Underhill 

A major in computer science requires forty credits in computer science and four courses in 
mathematics. The courses in computer science must include 112, 211, 212, 235, 236, and 
277. The required courses in mathematics are 111, 112, 117, and 121. Students consider- 
ing graduate work in computer science should consult a major adviser in the department 
for assistance in planning an appropriate course of study. 

A minor in computer science requires four courses, at least sixteen credits, in comput- 
er science numbered higher than 111, Mathematics 117, and an additional four credits in 
mathematics other than Mathematics 105. 

A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in courses which comprise a major or minor 
in the department is required for graduation. 



Computer Science 



9 8 



Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Computer Science," 
students must satisfactorily complete a senior research paper and have a minimum grade 
point average of 3.5 in the major and 3.0 in all college course work. For additional infor- 
mation, members of the departmental faculty should be consulted. 

Students who are enrolled at Wake Forest may not take courses in computer science 
at other institutions to satisfy divisional requirements. 

111. Introduction to Computer Science. (4) Lecture and laboratory. A rigorous introduc- 
tion to the process of algorithmic problem-solving; an introduction to the organization of 
computers on which resulting programs run; and an overview of the societal and ethical 
context in which computer science exists. A scheduled laboratory experience is used for 
both the computer programming and computer organization aspects of the course. 

Lab — two hours. 

112. Fundamentals of Computer Science. (4) Lecture and laboratory. Problem-solving and 
program construction are emphasized using top-down design, data abstraction, and 
object-oriented programming. Linear data structures, fundamental software engineering 
tools, and problem-solving paradigms are introduced for the beginning computer science 
student. Lab — two hours. P — Computer Science 1 1 1 or permission of instructor. 

211. Computer Software Organization and Architecture. (4) Lecture and laboratory. 
Hierarchical software organization, representation and manipulation of data, instruction 
sets, addressing and structure of memory. The laboratory focuses on the understanding of 
an assembly language. Lab — two hours. P — Computer Science 112 and Mathematics 117. 

212. Computer Hardware Organization. (4) Lecture and laboratory. Basic von Neumann 
computer architectures. Study and design of combinational logic circuits, arithmetic units, 
and memory devices. P — Computer Science 211. 

235. Data Structures and Algorithms I. (4) Study, analysis, and implementation of 
abstract data structures such as list, stack, queue, and tree. Complexity analysis of algo- 
rithms which operate upon these data structures. P — Computer Science 112 and 
Mathematics 117. 

236. Data Structures and Algorithms II. (4) A continuation of the study, analysis, and 
implementation of abstract data structures. The complexity of algorithms is studied more 
rigorously than in Computer Science 235 and complexity classes are introduced. 

P — Computer Science 235 and Mathematics 111. 

277. Programming Languages. (4) Lecture and laboratory A study of the properties of 
programming languages including syntax, semantics, control structures, and run-time 
representations. P — Computer Science 112 and Mathematics 117. 

301. Software Engineering. (4) The principles and methods for the specification, 
design, and validation of large software systems. Topics may include formal specifica- 
tion techniques, design techniques, programming methodology, program testing, 
proofs of program correctness, software reliability, and software management. P — 
Computer Science 235. 



on Computer Science 



302. Operating Systems. (4) The study of algorithms for sequencing, controlling, 
scheduling, and allocating computer resources. P — Computer Science 211 and Computer 
Science 235. 

320. Object-oriented and Visual Programming. (4) A study of encapsulation, inheritance, 
polymorphism, aggregates, and code reuse in object-oriented programming, along with an 
introduction to visual and multimedia programming. P — Computer Science 277 or per- 
mission of instructor. 

323. Computer Graphics. (4) A study of software and hardware techniques in computer 
graphics. Topics include line and polygon drawing, hidden line and surface techniques, 
transformations, and ray tracing. P — Computer Science 235 and Mathematics 121. 

330. Computer Communications. (4) A study of the operation, design, and analytic mod- 
eling of computer communication and networking systems. P — Computer Science 211. 

355. Introduction to Numerical Methods. (4) Numerical computations on modern com- 
puter architectures; floating point arithmetic and round-off error. Programming in a scien- 
tific/engineering language (C or FORTRAN). Algorithms and computer techniques for 
the solution of problems such as roots of functions, approximation, integration, systems 
of linear equations, and least squares methods. Credit not allowed for both Mathematics 
355 and Computer Science 355. P — Mathematics 112, Mathematics 121, and Computer 
Science 111. 

361. Selected Topics. (2, 3, or 4) Topics in computer science which are not studied in reg- 
ular courses or which further examine topics begun in regular courses. P — Permission of 
instructor. 

372. Compilers. (4) A study of techniques for compiling computer languages including 
scanning, parsing, translating, and generating code. P — Computer Science 211 and 
Computer Science 235. 

374. Database Management Systems. (4) An introduction to large-scale database manage- 
ment systems. Topics include data independence, data base models, query languages, secu- 
rity, integrity, and concurrency. P — Computer Science 235. 

379. Artificial Intelligence. (4) An introduction to problems in artificial intelligence. 
Techniques of representation and heuristic search in areas such as problem solving, 
pattern recognition, theorem proving, and information processing. P — Computer 
Science 236. 

381. Individual Study. (2,3, or 4) A course of independent study directed by a faculty 
adviser. By prearrangement. Not to be counted toward the minor in computer science. 



Computer Science jqo 



Cultural Resource Preservation 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 
Ned Woodall (Anthropology), Coordinator 

The departments of anthropology, art, history, and sociology offer an interdisciplinary 
minor in cultural resource reservation (CRP) which will give students preliminary training 
in the field of historic preservation and cultural resource management aimed at the pro- 
tection and enhancement of archeological, historical, and architectural resources. 

The minor requires History 366, Studies in Historic Preservation (4), and four other 
courses for a total of twenty credits. These twenty credits must be distributed among at 
least three departments. The following courses may be included in the minor. (See course 
descriptions under appropriate listings.) 

Anthropology 101. General Anthropology. (4) (May count as a 
Division IV requirement.) 

305. Museum Anthropology. (4) 

370. Old World Prehistory. (4) 

374. Prehistory of North America. (4) 

378. Conservation Archeology. (2) 

381, 382. Archeological Research. (4,4) 
Art 233. American Architecture. (4) 

275. History of Landscape Architecture. (4) 

288. Modern Architecture. (4) 

293. Practicum. (4) 
History 381, 382. Preservation Practicum I, II. (4,4) 

398. Individual Study. (1-4) 
Sociology 151. Principles of Sociology. (4) (May count as a 

Division IV requirement.) 

205. Photography in the Social Sciences. (4) 

Students intending to minor in Cultural Resource Preservation should consult the adviser 
appointed from one of the participating departments and listed with the registrar. 
Students are strongly urged to consult the adviser during the first semester of their junior 
year. Equivalent courses must be approved by the adviser. 



IOI Cultural Resource Preservation 



Early Christian Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Mary Pendergraft (Classics) and 

Kenneth G. Hoglund (Religion), Coordinators 

The interdisciplinary minor in early Christian studies currently requires twenty-four credits. 

A. The student must take the following core courses: 

Religion 321. Intro to NT. (4) 

Classics 276. The Age of Augustus. (4) 

Classics/Religion 285. Interdisciplinary Seminar in the Greco-Roman World. (4) 

B. The student must take three additional courses (twelve additional credits), with no 
more than one course (four credits) from any one department, from the following list: 



Art 



Greek 

History 

Philosophy 



Religion 



241. Ancient Art. (4) 

244. Greek Art. (4) 

245. Roman Art. (4) 

296. Art History Seminar. (2,4) a. Ancient Art / b. Medieval Art 

231. Greek New Testament. (4) 
315, 316. The Ancient World. (4,4) 

232. Ancient and Medieval Philosophy. (4) 

331. Plato. (4) 

332. Aristotle. (4) 

319. Visions of the End: Jewish and Christian Apocalyptic. (4) 

320. Jesus and the Synoptic Gospels. (4) 

322. The General Epistles. (4) 

323. Parables of Jesus. (4) 

324. Early Christian Literature. (4) 

326. Early Christian Theologians: Paul. (4) 

327. Early Christian Theologians: the Fourth Evangelist. (4) 

328. The New Testament and Ethics. (4) 
261. Foundations of Traditional Judaism. (2) 
372. (a) Patristic Thought. (2) 



Early Christian Studies jq2 



East Asian Languages and Literatures 

Associate Professor Patrick Moran, Coordinator 

Assistant Professor David P. Phillips 

Visiting Assistant Professor Yasuko Takata 

Introductory courses are offered in the Chinese and Japanese languages to meet the basic 
requirements in language. In addition, advanced language and literature courses are 
offered, as well as literature in translation and culture courses. Students also may study 
abroad with Wake Forest programs in China and Japan. 

Chinese 

Chinese 111, 112. Elementary Chinese. (5,5) Emphasis on the development of listening 
and speaking skills in Mandarin. Introduction to the writing system and to basic sentence 
patterns. Lab required. 

Chinese 151, 152. Intermediate Chinese. (5,5) Further study in grammar, reading, conver- 
sation, and composition. Lab required. P — Chinese 112 or equivalent. 

Chinese 199. Individual Study. (1-4) P — Permission of instructor. 

Chinese 211. Wen-xue: Introduction to Literature Written in Chinese. (4) Readings in 
Chinese in prose and poetry. P — Chinese 152 or permission of instructor. 

Chinese 212. Wen-xue: Advanced Literature Written in Chinese. (4) Readings in contempo- 
rary Taiwan and mainland Chinese literature. P — Chinese 152 or permission of instructor. 

Chinese 251. Business Hanyu. (4) Communicating in Mandarin Chinese for business pur- 
poses. Addresses cultural differences in communication and spoken and written linguistic 
forms. P — Chinese 152 or permission of instructor. 

""Humanities 221. Introduction to Chinese Literature. (4) 

* Humanities 348. Chinese Revolutionary Literature to 1948. (2) 

* Humanities 349. Chinese Liberation Literature since 1948. (2) 

* Humanities 350. Modern Chinese Literature. (4) 

* Philosophy 253. Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) 

Humanities 

Humanities 251. The Asian American Experience: Literature and Personal. (4) An introduc- 
tion to the writings and narratives of Asian Americans of South and Southeast Asian 
descent, including Asian Americans of Chinese, Japanese, Korean, and Indian descent. The 
course explores the process of assimilation, including the effects of immigration and cultural 
conflict on literary forms of expression, as well as the formation of new cultural identities. 



'See appropriate listings for descriptions and prerequisites of courses given in English. 

103 East Asian Languages 
and Literatures 



Japanese 

Japanese 111, 112. Elementary Japanese. (5,5) Emphasis on the development of listening 
and speaking skills. Introduction to the writing systems. Basic sentence patterns covered. 
Lab required. 

Japanese 151, 152. Intermediate Japanese. (5,5) Further study in grammar, reading, con- 
versation, and composition. Lab required. P — Japanese 112 or equivalent. 

Japanese 199. Individual Study. (2-4) P — Permission of instructor. 

Japanese 211. Bungaku: Introduction to Literature Written in Modern Japanese. (4) 

Readings in Japanese in prose and poetry. P — Japanese 152 or permission of instructor. 
Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

Japanese 220. Advanced Conversation. (4) Study of conversational and interactional skills 
using reading materials and audiovisual materials as basis for class discussion. P — 
Japanese 211. 

Japanese 230. Advanced Japanese I. (4) Integration of speaking, reading, and writing 
skills with emphasis on written and audiovisual sources including newspapers, literature, 
and film. P — Japanese 220. 

Japanese 231. Advanced Japanese II. (4) Continuation of Japanese 230, with emphasis on 
oral presentation and compositional skills. P — Japanese 230. 

Humanities 170. Understanding Japan. (4) Understanding Japanese culture and behavior 
from the structure of social units such as family, educational institutions, and sports, artis- 
tic, and professional organizations. 

^Humanities 219. Introduction to Japanese Literature. (4) 

^Humanities 347. Women Writers in Japanese Culture. (4) 

International Studies 210. Japanese and American Culture: A Cross-Cultural 
Comparison. (4) An exploration and comparison of values, behavior, and beliefs in 
Japanese and American culture, with special attention to such topics as education, gender 
differences, and social hierarchy. 

Linguistics 231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) Analyses of social and 
psychological factors related to gender differences in Japanese language usage. (Also listed 
as Women's Studies 231.) 



'"See appropriate listings for descriptions and prerequisites of courses given in English. 



East Asian Languages 104 
and Literatures 



East Asian Studies 

(Foreign Area Study) 
Charles H. Kennedy (Politics), Coordinator 

East Asian studies requires twenty-four credits, which must be taken from at least three 
different departments and/or programs. One of these must be either Chinese 211 or 
Japanese 211. Although Asian Studies 381, Independent Research in Asian Studies, may 
be repeated for credit, only four of these credits can apply toward East Asian studies. 
Appropriate credit in East Asian studies also may be obtained by study in China through 
the SASASAAS/Wake Forest program or in Japan through the Wake Forest/Tokai 
University program, or through other Wake Forest approved courses of study in Asia. 
Study abroad is strongly encouraged but not required. Courses may be chosen from 
among the following list. (See course descriptions under appropriate listings.) 



Art 

Asian Studies 

Chinese Lang. 
& Literature 



Communication 
History 



Humanities 



International 

Studies 
Japanese Lang. 

& Literature 



104. Topics in World Art (when focus is on Asia). (4) 

311. Special Topics in Asian Studies. (2-4) 

381. Independent Research in Asian Studies. (2-4) 

111,112. Elementary Chinese. (5,5) 

151,152. Intermediate Chinese. (5,5) 

199. Individual Study. (1-4) 

211. Wen-xue: Introduction to Literature Written in Chinese. (4) 

351. Comparative Communication. (2,4) 

a. Japan 
310. Seminar. (4) 
341. History of Women in Modern Asia. (4) 

343. Imperial China. (4) 

344. Modern China. (4) 

346. Japan before 1600. (4) 

347. Japan since World War II. (4) 

348. Japan since 1600. (4) 
170. Understanding Japan. (4) 

219. Introduction to Japanese Literature. (4) 
221. Introduction to Chinese Literature. (4) 
251. The Asian American Experience: Literature and 
Personal Narratives. (4) 

347. Women Writers in Japanese Culture. (4) 

348. Chinese Revolutionary Literature to 1948. (2) 

349. Chinese Liberation Literature since 1948. (2) 

350. Modern Chinese Literature. (4) 

210. Japanese and American Culture: A Cross-Cultural 

Comparison. (4) 
111, 112. Elementary Japanese. (5,5) 
151, 152. Intermediate Japanese. (5,5) 
199. Individual Study. (2-4) 



I0 5 



East Asian Studies 



211. Bungaku: Introduction to Literature Written in Modern 

Japanese. (4) 
220. Advanced Conversation. (4) 

230. Advanced Japanese I. (4) 

231. Advanced Japanese II. (4) 

Philosophy 253. The Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) 

(Also listed as Religion 380.) 
Politics 248. Government and Politics of China. (4) 

249. Government and Politics of Japan. (4) 
260. East Asian International Relations. (4) 
Religion 361. Buddhism. (4) 

362. Islam. (4) 

380. The Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) 
(Also listed as Philosophy 253.) 
Women's 231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) 

Studies (Also listed as Linguistics 231.) 



Economics 

Allin F. Cottrell, Chair 

Archie Carroll Professor of Ethical Leadership John C. Moorhouse 

Reynolds Professor John H. Wood 

Professors David G. Brown, Allin F. Cottrell, Donald E. Frey, Claire H. Hammond, 

J. Daniel Hammond, Michael S. Lawlor, Perry L. Patterson 

Associate Professors Robert M. Whaples 

Assistant Professors Sylvain H. Boko, Jac C. Heckelman 

Instructor Richard DePolt 

The objectives of the economics program are to help prepare students for effective partici- 
pation in the decision-making processes of society, to develop analytical skills in solving 
economic problems, to promote a better understanding of alternative economic systems, 
and to provide a balanced curriculum to prepare students for graduate study or positions 
in industry and government. 

The major in economics consists of thirty-six credits in economics, including 
Economics 150, 205, 206, 207, and 208. The remaining economics courses are selected 
by the student and his or her adviser. A minimum grade of C is required in Economics 
150, 205, and 207, and an overall 2.0 average in economics courses. The student also 
must make a minimum grade of C in either Mathematics 106 or 111 and Mathematics 
109 (or similar course with permission of department chair). 

The minor in economics consists of twenty-four credits, including Economics 150, 
205, and 207. The mathematics and minimum grade requirements for the minor are the 
same as for the major. 



Economics \q6 



Economics majors are encouraged to take complementary courses in mathematics, the 
humanities, or other social sciences to sharpen their analytical skills and to acquire a 
broader understanding of important issues. The faculty adviser will assist each student in 
determining the particular combination of courses that satisfies his or her needs. 

Economics majors with a grade point average of at least 3.0 and 3.3 in economics may 
graduate with "Honors in Economics" by satisfying the research requirement of 
Economics 298. It is recommended, but not required, that Economics 297 be taken first. 

The Department of Economics and the Department of Mathematics offer a joint 
major leading to a bachelor of science degree in mathematical economics. This interdisci- 
plinary program, consisting of no more than fifty-six credits, affords the student an 
opportunity to apply mathematical methods to the development of economic theory, 
models, and quantitative analysis. The major consists of the following course require- 
ments: Economics 150, 205, 207, 210, 211, 215, 218; Mathematics 111, 112, 113, 121, 
254, 255; and three additional courses chosen with the approval of the program advisers. 
Students electing the joint major must receive permission from both the Department of 
Economics and the Department of Mathematics. A minimum grade average of C in all 
courses attempted for the mathematical economics joint major is required for graduation. 

Highly qualified majors are encouraged to apply for admission to the honors program 
in the joint major. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Mathematical 
Economics," a student must satisfy the requirements of Economics 298 or Mathematics 
381 by successfully completing a senior research project. Consult the program advisers for 
additional information. 

For the BA in economics the following schedule is typical: 

First Year Sophomore Junior"' Senior 

Lower Division Economics 150 Economics 205, 206 Four electives 

requirements Mathematics 106 Economics 207, 208 in economics 

or 1 1 1 
Mathematics 109 

"It is expected that economics majors will complete the intermediate theory sequences in 

their junior year. 

For the BS in mathematical economics the following schedule is typical: 

First Year Sophomore Junior Senior 

Mathematics 1 1 1,1 12 Economics 150 Economics 205, 207 Economics 218 

Lower Division Mathematics 1 13, Economics 210, 21 1 Three electives in 

requirements 121 Economics 215 economics and/or 

Mathematics 254, 255 mathematics 

150. Introduction to Economics. (4) A survey of micro and macroeconomic principles. 
Introduction to basic concepts, characteristic data and trends, and some analytic tech- 
niques. Preference in enrollment will be given to students with sophomore or upperclass 
standing. 

168. The Political Economy of Environmental Policy. (2) Develops a set of core economic 
principles essential for understanding and evaluating environmental policy issues. 



IO7 



Economics 



(Required for environmental studies minor. Does not count toward economics major and 
minor requirements unless Economics 248 also is successfully completed.) 

205. Intermediate Microeconomics I. (4) Development of demand and supply analysis, 
neoclassical theory of household and firm behavior, and alternative market structures. 
P — Economics 150. 

206. Intermediate Microeconomics II. (4) More advanced theory of maximizing behavior 
of economic agents with discussion of risk, uncertainty, and economic dynamics. Theory 
employed in assessment of policy issues. P — Economics 205. 

207. Intermediate Macroeconomics I. (4) Development of macroeconomic concepts of 
national income, circular flow, income determination, IS-LM analysis, and Phillips curves. 
Emphasizes contributions of Keynes and the Keynesian tradition, including some atten- 
tion to primary literature. P — Economics 150. 

208. Intermediate Macroeconomics II. (4) Considers extensions of Keynesian theory, 
such as the post-Keynesians, and alternatives to Keynesian theory, such as monetarism, 
traditional classical, and new classical theories. More advanced tools of macroeconomic 
analysis may be introduced, for instance large forecasting models or dynamics. 

P — Economics 207. 

210. Microeconomic Models. (2) Development of formal models of consumer behavior, 
choice under risk, the firm, and demand and supply. Static and dynamic properties of the 
models are explored. P — Economics 205 and Mathematics 111. 

211. Macroeconomic Models. (2) Development of formal Keynesian, post-Keynesian, 
monetarist, and new classical macro models. Static and dynamic properties of the models 
are explored. P — Economics 207 and Mathematics 111. 

212. Economic Forecasting. (4) A computer-oriented application of modern econometric 
and time series methods for forecasting economic variables. P — Economics 150. 

C — Economics 207. 

215. Introduction to Econometrics. (4) Economic analysis through quantitative methods, 
with emphasis on model construction and empirical research. P — Economics 205, 207 
and Mathematics 109 or 121. 

218. Seminar in Mathematical Economics. (4) Calculus and matrix methods used to 
develop basic tools of economic analysis. P — Economics 205, 207 and Mathematics 
111,112. 

219. Decision Analysis. (4) The theory and practice of decision making under uncertainty. 
Applications and examples are drawn from realms of personal, legal, business, medical, 
and environmental decision making. P — Economics 150 and Mathematics 109. 

221. Public Finance. (4) An examination of the economic behavior of government. 
Includes principles of taxation, spending, borrowing, and debt-management. 

P — Economics 205. 

222. Monetary Theory and Policy. (4) An investigation of the nature of money, the 
macroeconomic significance of money, financial markets, and monetary policy. 

P — Economics 207. 



Economics jq! 



223. Financial Markets. (4) A study of the functions, structure, and performance of finan- 
cial markets. P — Economics 205, 207. 

224. Law and Economics. (4) An economic analysis of property, contracts, torts, criminal 
behavior, due process, and law enforcement. P — Economics 205. 

225. Public Choice. (4) Traditional tools of economic analysis are employed to explore 
such topics in political science as political organization, elections, coalition formation, the 
optimal provision of public goods, and the scope of government. P — Economics 205. 

231. Economics of Industry. (4) Analysis of the link between market structure and market 
performance in United States industries from theoretical and empirical viewpoints. 
Examines the efficiency of mergers, cartels, and other firm behaviors. Case studies may 
include automobiles, steel, agriculture, computers, sports, and telecommunications. 

P — Economics 205. 

232. Antitrust Economics. (2,4) Analysis of the logic and effectiveness of public policies 
designed to promote competition in the United States. P — Economics 150 and 205. 

235. Labor Economics. (4) A theoretical and empirical survey of labor markets. Topics 
include: the demand and supply of labor, compensating wage differentials, education and 
training, discrimination, unions, public sector employment, earnings inequality, and 
unemployment. P — Economics 205. 

240. Economics of Health and Medicine. (4) Applications of the methods of economic 
analysis to the study of the health care industry. P — or C — Economics 205 and (choose 
one): Anthropology 380, Business 201, Biology 380, Health and Exercise Science 262, 
Economics 215, Psychology 211, Mathematics 256, Mathematics 358, or Sociology 371. 

246. Urban Economics. (4) Theoretical and empirical study of the city as an economic 
entity, with attention to land-use patterns and prices, urban decay and redevelopment, 
suburbanization, housing, and city finance. P — Economics 150. 

248. Resource Economics. (2) The economic theory of natural resource allocation and 
environmental quality. P — Economics 168 and 205. 

251. International Trade. (4) Development of the theory of international trade pat- 
terns and prices and the effects of trade restrictions such as tariffs and quotas. P — 
Economics 205. 

252. International Finance. (4) A study of foreign exchange and Eurocurrency markets, 
balance of payments, and macroeconomic policy in open economies. P — Economics 
205, 207. 

253. Economies in Transition. (4) A theoretical and institutional examination of histori- 
cally socialist nations and the dilemmas of transition. Special reference to the former 
Soviet Union. P — Economics 150. 

258. Economic Growth and Development. (4) A study of the problems of economic 
growth, with particular attention to the less developed countries of the world. 
P — Economics 205 or permission of instructor. 

261. American Economic Development. (4) The application of economic theory to histor- 
ical problems and issues in the American economy. P — Economics 150. 



109 



Economics 



262. History of Economic Thought. (4) A historical survey of the main developments in 
economic thought from the Biblical period to the twentieth century. P — Economics 205, 
207. 

265. Economic Philosophers. (2,4) An in-depth study of the doctrines and influence of up 
to three major figures in economics, such as Smith, Marx, and Keynes. P — Economics 
205, 207. 

268. Morals and Markets. (4) Historical survey of individualistic ethical values that have 
accompanied the development of market economics in the West. Considers critiques of, 
and alternatives to, these values. P — Economics 150. 

270. Current Economic Issues. (2,4) Examines current economic issues using economic 
theory and empirical evidence. Topics may include recent macroeconomic trends, the dis- 
tribution of income, minimum wages, immigration, Social Security, global warming, 
trade, regulation and deregulation, antitrust policy, health care, labor unions, tax reform, 
educational reform, and others. P — Economics 150. 

271, 272. Selected Areas in Economics. (1,2,4; 1,2,4) A survey of an important area in 
economics not included in the regular course offerings. The economics of housing, educa- 
tion, technology, and health services are examples. Students should consult the instructor 
to ascertain topic before enrolling. P — Economics 205, 207. 

290. Individual Study. (2,4) Directed readings in a specialized area of economics. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

297. Preparing for Economic Research. (2) Designed to assist students in selecting a 
research topic and beginning the study of the selected topic. P — Permission of instructor. 

298. Economic Research. (4) Development and presentation of a senior research project. 
Required of candidates for departmental honors. P — Permission of department. 



Economics ho 



Education 

Joseph O. Milner, Chair 

Professors John P. Anderson, Patricia M. Cunningham, Samuel T. Gladding, 

John H. Litcher, Joseph O. Milner, Linda N. Nielsen, Leonard P. Roberge 

Associate Professors Robert H. Evans, Donna A. Henderson, 

Leah P. McCoy, Mary Lynn B. Redmond, Loraine M. Stewart 

Assistant Professors Ann C. Cunningham, Laura J. Veach 

Visiting Assistant Professor Debbie W. Newsome 

Adjunct Assistant Professors Alan S. Cameron, G. Dianne Mitchell, 

Marianne A. Schubert, Elizabeth H. Taylor 

Instructor Johnne W. Armentrout 

Wake Forest University believes that the teaching profession is important to society and 
that its welfare is significantly affected by the quality of educational leadership. One of 
the important objectives of the University has been and continues to be the preparation of 
teachers. The University's commitment to quality in teacher education is demonstrated by 
selective admission to the program, a wide range of professional courses, and closely 
supervised internships appropriate to the professional development of students. 

Prospective elementary and social studies teachers earn licensure in those broad areas 
and major in education. Prospective secondary teachers of English, Latin, math, science, 
and prospective K-12 teachers of foreign languages major in that discipline and minor in 
education. In addition to the professional program, the department provides elective 
courses open to all students. 

Teacher Licensure. The state of North Carolina issues the Professional Class A Teacher's 
License to graduates who have completed an approved program, including the specified 
courses in their teaching fields and the prescribed courses in education, who have demon- 
strated specific competencies, and who receive recommendations from the designated offi- 
cials in their teaching areas and from the chair of the department. 

Students who have graduated from an institution of higher education but have not 
completed an approved licensure program may seek admission to the department in order 
to complete the Class A License. 

Admission Requirements. Application for admission to the teacher education program 
normally occurs during the sophomore year. Admission involves filing an official applica- 
tion with the department's licensure officer, being interviewed, and being officially 
approved by the department. In addition, the state of North Carolina requires teacher 
education program applicants to successfully complete the Praxis I before being formally 
admitted. 

All students are required to have a 2.5 or better grade point average before being for- 
mally accepted in the Teacher Education Program. Formal acceptance into the program 
should take place during the first week of the semester prior to student teaching. 
Elementary education students must have a 2.5 grade point average at the end of 
December of their junior year; secondary education students must have a 2.50 grade point 
average at the end of August of their junior year. 



HI Education 



Program Area Goals. The goals and objectives for each licensure area are available in the 
office of the Department of Education. 

Course Requirements. The approved program of teacher education requires candidates to 
complete successfully a series of professional education courses. The exact sequence of 
professional and academic courses varies with a student's particular program and is deter- 
mined by the adviser in conference with the candidate. For those seeking secondary certi- 
fication, the majority of the professional work is taken during one semester of the senior 
year. Candidates for the elementary license typically begin course work required for licen- 
sure during the sophomore year. 

Student Teaching. Prerequisites for registering for student teaching include (1) senior, 
graduate, or special student classification; (2) completion of Methods and Materials, 
Educational Technology, Educational Psychology, and the Foundations of Education 
course; (3) formal admission to the teacher education program. 

Students are assigned to student teaching opportunities by public school officials on 
the basis of available positions and the professional needs of the student and the public 
school system. One semester of the senior year is reserved for the student teaching experi- 
ence and the block of courses preparatory to that experience in the schools. Students may 
not take other courses during this semester without the approval of the department chair. 

Exit Requirements. Students must maintain a 2.5 grade point average while enrolled in 
the teacher education program, and complete the program with a minimum grade point 
average of 2.5. The state of North Carolina requires candidates for professional licensure 
to successfully complete the Principles of Learning and Teaching and the Specialty Area 
Exam of the NTE or the appropriate Praxis II Subject Assessment Exam(s). 

Teaching Area Requirements 

Secondary Certificate 

English — Forty credits, including 287, 323, and 390 or its equivalent. A course in world 
literature is also required. 

French — Licensure in K-12 in French: A minimum of nine four-credit French courses 
numbered above French 213. French 215, 216, 219, 220, 222, 370, and one of the genre 
courses (363, 364, or 365) are required. 

Spanish — Licensure in K-12 in Spanish: A minimum of nine four-credit Spanish courses 
numbered above Spanish 213. Spanish 217, 218, 219, 220, 322, plus three advanced 
courses in literature, of which one must be in Spanish literature and one in Spanish- 
American literature, are required. 

German — Licensure in K-12 in German: Thirty-seven credits beyond German 112 or 113. 
These must include German 217; 218, 219, 220, or 221; at least one course from among 
the sequence 249, 281, 285, and the seminar for majors. 

Latin — The requirements are the same as those for the major in Latin. 



Education h2 



Mathematics — Forty credits, including Mathematics 111, 112, 113, 121, 221, 331; four 
credits from 311, 317, or 357; at least two additional 300-level courses. If the student 
does not elect 357, it is recommended that he/she take 109. 

Science — Licensure in the individual fields of science: biology (forty-one credits), chem- 
istry (fifty-five credits), or physics (thirty-six credits). All credits must be from the same 
courses required for majors in those fields. 

Social Studies — Forty credits, including twenty-four credits in history, with course work in 
United States, European, and Third World history; sixteen credits with one course in eco- 
nomics, geography, politics, and anthropology or sociology. 

Education courses required for a secondary license include Education 201, 307, 311, 354, 
364, 374, and 381. 

Elementary Certificate 

A major in elementary education requires forty-eight credits including Education 201, 
202, 203, 221, 222, 250, 293, 294, 295, 296, 298, 301, 311, 382. In addition to or as 
part of lower division requirements, all education majors must have taken at least one 
course in biology, one course in mathematics, and one course in art or music. Elementary 
education majors must complete a minor in any department or have a concentration in 
one of the following areas: language arts, social studies, science, mathematics, or foreign 
language. (Because many courses must be taken in the junior year to prepare for the 
senior fall student teaching block, education majors who want to take a semester abroad 
should take that semester during the sophomore year.) 

Education Minor 

A minor in professional education requires Education 201, 307, 311, 354, 364, 374, 381, 
and is awarded only to students in the teacher education program. 

102. Exploration of Career Planning. (4) Examination of educational/vocational planning 
as a personal process, based on knowledge of self and the work world. No prerequisite. 

201. Foundations of Education. (4) Philosophical, historical, and sociological foundations 
of education, including analysis of contemporary issues and problems. Includes twenty- 
hour field experience component. P — Permission of instructor. 

202. Field Experience One. (2) Practical experiences in elementary or secondary class- 
rooms. Weekly public school participation and seminar. Pass/fail only. P — Permission of 
department. 

203. Field Experience Two. (2) Further experiences in elementary or secondary class- 
rooms. Weekly public school participation and seminar. Pass/fail only. P — Education 202. 

221. Children's Literature and Reading. (4) A survey of the types of literature appropriate 
for the elementary grades and an investigation of the basic problems in reading. 
P — Permission of instructor. 



113 



Education 



222. Integrating the Arts and Movement into the Elementary Curriculum. (3) A survey of 
the materials, methods, and techniques of integrating the arts and physical development 
into the elementary curriculum. P — Permission of instructor. 

231. Adolescent Literature. (4) A study of recent fiction centering on the lives of adoles- 
cents. Attention is given to interpretation of literature ranging from the reader response 
approach to critical pluralism. 

250. Student Teaching: Elementary. (6) Supervised teaching experience in grades K-6. 
Pass/fail. P — Permission of instructor. 

271. Geography: The Human Environment. (4) A survey of the geography of human 
activity as it occurs throughout the world. Emphasis is placed on current problems related 
to population, resources, regional development, and urbanization. (Credit not allowed for 
both Education 271 and 274.) 

272. Geography Study Tour. (4) A guided tour of selected areas to study physical, eco- 
nomic, and cultural environments and their influence on man. Background references for 
reading are suggested prior to the tour. Offered in the summer. 

273. Geography: The Natural Environment. (4) A systematic study of the major compo- 
nents of physical geography with special emphasis on climate and topography. 

274. Environmental Geography. (4) A systematic study of major environmental issues on 
a global scale with an exploration of implications and possible solutions. (Credit not 
allowed for both Education 274 and 271.) 

281. Public Life and the Liberal Arts. (4) The course will be devoted to topics of abiding 
significance. Fundamental dilemmas and resolutions associated with each topic will be 
examined through a consideration of their treatment in the liberal arts tradition. Politics 
and the Arts and Theory and Practice in Public Life are representative topics. 

293. Elementary School Curriculum: Theory and Practice. (3) General principles of cur- 
riculum construction and teaching methods. Introduction to the use of audiovisual mate- 
rials and equipment. P — Permission of instructor. 

294. Teaching Elementary Language Arts. (3) A survey of the basic materials, methods, 
and techniques of teaching language arts in the elementary grades. P — Permission of 
instructor. 

295. Teaching Elementary Social Studies. (3) A survey of the basic materials, methods, 
and techniques of teaching social studies in the elementary grades. P — Permission of 
instructor. 

296. Teaching Elementary Mathematics. (4) A survey of the basic materials, methods, and 
techniques of teaching mathematics in the elementary grades, centering on relevant math- 
ematics content. P — Permission of instructor. 

297. Trends and Issues in American Schools. (2) An exploration of contemporary trends 
and issues as they affect course content and teaching methods in the schools. The course is 
intended to help those not entering professional education evaluate their schools as 
informed citizens and decision-makers. 



Education ha 



298. Teaching Elementary Science. (4) A survey of the basic materials, methods, and tech- 
niques of teaching science in the elementary grades, centering on relevant science content. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

301. Microcomputer and Audiovisual Literacy. (4) An introduction to microcomputers 
for educators and other users, emphasizing familiarity with computers, use and evaluation 
of software, and elementary programming skills. Experience with audiovisual materials 
and techniques is included. 

302. Production of Instructional Methods. (4) Methods of producing instructional materi- 
als and other technological techniques. P — Education 301. 

303. History of Western Education. (4) Educational theory and practice from ancient 
times through the modern period, including American education. 

304. Theories of Education. (4) Contemporary proposals for educational theory and 
practice studied in the context of social issues. 

305. The Sociology of Education. (4) A study of contemporary educational institutions. 
This course examines such issues as school desegregation, schooling and social mobility, 
gender equity, and multiculturalism. 

307. Technology in Education. (3) An introduction to the use of computers in education. 
Includes use of Internet, software, and hardware, including multimedia, to meet instruc- 
tional goals. P — Education 203. 

308. School and Society. (4) A study of continuity and change in educational institutions, 
including analysis of teachers, students, curriculum, evaluation, contemporary problems, 
and reform movements. P — Education 201 or introductory course in history or social sci- 
ence. 

311. Educational Psychology. (4) The theories, processes, and conditions of effective 
teaching/learning. Includes twenty-hour field experience component. P — Education 201 or 
permission of instructor. 

312. Teaching Children with Special Needs. (4) A survey of the various types of learning 
problems commonly found in elementary children. Students will observe exemplary pro- 
grams, tutor children with special needs, and attend seminars on effective instructional 
techniques. P — Education 221 and 250. 

313. Human Growth and Development. (4) A study of the intellectual, emotional, and 
physical components of growth from birth to adolescence, with special concern for the 
educational implications of this process. 

341. Principles of Counseling and Guidance. (4) Counseling history, philosophy, theory, 
procedure, and process. Therapeutic and developmental counseling approaches in guid- 
ance and personnel work in education, business, and community service agencies. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

351. Adolescent Psychology. (5) An introduction to theories of adolescent psychology as 
related to teaching and counseling in various settings. The readings emphasize 
researchers' suggestions for parenting, teaching, and counseling adolescents between the 
ages of thirteen and nineteen. 



115 



Education 



354. Methods and Materials. (5) Methods, materials, and techniques used in teaching 
particular secondary subjects (English, mathematics, science, second languages, social 
studies). Includes forty-hour field experience component. P — Education 201 and permis- 
sion of instructor. 

358. Studies in Contemporary Leadership. (4) An examination of contemporary leader- 
ship theory and its various applications in society. Students engage in practical leader- 
ship exercises, read on a variety of leadership topics, and develop their own philosophy 
of leadership. A twenty-five contact hour internship is required. (Cross-listed as 
Humanities 358.) R 

362. Field Experience One. (2) Practical experiences in elementary or secondary class- 
rooms. Weekly public school participation and seminar. Pass/fail only. 

363. Field Experience Two. (2) Further experiences in elementary or secondary class- 
rooms. Weekly public school participation and seminar. Pass/fail only. P — Education 362. 

364. Secondary Student Teaching. (12) Supervised teaching experience in grades 6-12. 
Full-time, seventeen-week field experience. P — Permission of instructor. 

374. Student Teaching Seminar. (2) Analysis and discussion of problems and issues in the 
teaching of particular secondary subjects (English, mathematics, science, second lan- 
guages, social studies). Emphasis on the application of effective instructional methods and 
materials. 

381. Special Needs Seminar. (2) Analysis and discussion of practical problems and issues 
in the teaching of special needs students in the secondary classroom. Topics include class- 
room management, reading and writing in the content area, inclusion, diversity, and 
evaluation. 

382. Reading and Writing in Content Areas. (2) A survey of methods for teaching reading 
and writing to help students learn in the various content areas, and of techniques for 
adapting instruction to the literacy levels of students. P — Permission of instructor. 

387. Tutoring Writing. (2) Introduction to composition theory and rhetoric with a special 
emphasis on one-to-one tutoring techniques. Students will analyze their own writing pro- 
cess and experiences, study modern composition theory, and practice tutoring techniques 
in keeping with these theories. (Strongly recommended for those interested in working in 
the Writing Center as peer tutors.) A student may not receive credit for both Education 
387 and English 287. 

390. Methods and Materials for Teaching Foreign Languages (K-6). (4) A survey of the 
basic materials, methods, and techniques of teaching foreign languages in the elementary 
and middle grades. Emphasis is placed on issues and problems involved in planning and 
implementing effective second language programs in grades K-6. Spring semester. 

391. Teaching the Gifted. (4) An investigation of theory and practice pertinent to teachers 
of the gifted. 



Education h6 



392. The Psychology of the Gifted Child. (4) A discussion of giftedness and creativity in 
children and the relationship of those characteristics to adult superior performance. 
Topics to be covered include a history of the study of precocity, methods and problems 
of identification, the relationship of giftedness and creativity, personality characteristics 
and social-emotional problems of gifted children, and the social implications of study- 
ing giftedness. 

393. Individual Study. (2,4) A project in an area of study not otherwise available in the 
Department of Education. Permitted upon departmental approval of petition presented by 
a qualified student. 

394. Internship in Education of the Gifted. (4) An intensive period of observation and 
instruction of gifted students. Readings and directed reflection upon the classroom experi- 
ence will be used to develop a richer understanding of such a special school setting. 

395. Teaching Exceptional Students. (3) An introduction to understanding exceptional 
students and effective teaching strategies for their inclusion in the regular classroom. 

396. Education in Business and Industry. (4) Educational concepts applied to programs in 
education and training in business/industrial settings. 

397. Research and Trends in the Teaching of Foreign Languages. (4) A study of current 
trends and issues in foreign language education. Research topics include language and 
linguistics, culture, and technology. 



117 



Education 



English 

Nancy J. Cotton, Chair 

W.R. Kenan Jr. Professor of Humanities Allen Mandelbaum 

Wake Forest Professor of English James S. Hans 

Professors Nancy J. Cotton, Mary K. DeShazer, 

Andrew V. Ettin, W. Dillon Johnston, Philip F. Kuberski, 

Robert W. Lovett, Barry G. Maine, Dolly A. McPherson, William M. Moss, 

Gillian R. Overing, Gale Sigal, Edwin G. Wilson 

Associate Professors Anne Boyle, Bashir El-Beshti, 

Claudia Thomas Kairoff, Scott W. Klein 

Assistant Professors Janis Caldwell, Jeryl J. Prescott, 

Lisa Sternlieb, Olga Valbuena, Eric Wilson 

Adjunct Assistant Professor Julie Edelson 

Visiting Assistant Professors Barbara Bennett, Ralph Black, 

Loren Glass, Borislav Knezevic, Allen Michie, Madhuparna Mitra, 

Steven Shoemaker, Michael Strysick, Suzanne Young 

Associate Professor in Journalism Wayne King 

Adjunct Lecturers in Journalism Justin Catanoso, Michael Horn 

Instructor Thomas W. McGohey 

Visiting Instructors Alex Garganigo, Christopher Neumann 

Poet-in-Residence Jane Mead 

The major in English requires a minimum of forty credits, at least thirty-two of which 
must be in advanced language and literature courses numbered 300 to 399. These courses 
must include Shakespeare, two additional courses in British literature before 1800, one 
course in American literature, and a major seminar, which must be taken no later than the 
spring semester of the junior year. Majors and their advisers plan individual programs to 
meet these requirements and to include work in the major literary genres. 

A minor in English requires English 160 or 165 and English 170 or 175, plus twenty 
credits in advanced language and literature courses. Each minor will be assigned an advis- 
er in the English department who will plan a program of study with the student. 

The prerequisite for all 300-level courses in English is any one of the courses in British 
and American literature numbered 160, 165, 170, and 175, all of which are offered each 
semester. Additional courses in journalism and writing are offered by the department as 
related subjects but do not count toward an English major; they may be taken as electives 
regardless of the field of study in which a student majors. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply in the second semester 
of their junior year for admission to the honors program in English. To graduate with 
"Honors in English," students must have a minimum grade-point average of 3.5 in the 
major and 3.2 in all course work and must satisfy the requirements for English 388 dur- 
ing their senior year. Interested students may consult departmental faculty members for 
further information. 



English jj; 



Lower Division Courses 

105. Introduction to Critical Reading and Writing. (4) Training in the fundamentals of 
written English and introduction to the activities basic to undergraduate study: critical 
reading and writing, interpretation, report, and discussion. Admission by placement only; 
does not satisfy the basic composition requirement. 

•111. Writing Seminar. (4) Training in expository writing; frequent essays based on read- 
ings in a selected topic. 

160. Introduction to British Literature. (4) Eight to ten writers representing different peri- 
ods and genres. 

165. Studies in British Literature. (4) Three to five writers representing different periods; 
primarily discussion, with frequent short papers. Limited enrollment. P — Permission of 
department. 

170. Introduction to American Literature. (4) Emphasis on a minimum of seven writers of 
the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, including both prose and poetry. 

175. Studies in American Literature. (4) Three to five writers representing different peri- 
ods; primarily discussion, with frequent short papers. Limited enrollment. P — Permission 
of department. 

210. Advanced Composition. (4) Study of prose models of exposition; frequent papers 
and individual conferences. Enrollment limited. P — Satisfaction of basic composition 
requirement. 

224. Exploring Shakespeare. (4) Six to eight works by Shakespeare in different genres, 
studied through printed texts, films, and videos. Emphasis will be placed on developing 
abilities to understand and appreciate Shakespeare's works in performance through atten- 
tion to language and stagecraft. This course may not be counted toward the major or 
minor in English. 

299. Individual Study. (2-4) A course of independent study with faculty guidance. By pre- 
arrangement. 

Journalism Courses 

See section on Journalism, page ijo. 

Writing Courses 

285. Poetry Workshop. (2, 4) A laboratory course in the writing of verse. Study of poet- 
ic techniques and forms as well as works of contemporary poets. Frequent individual 
conferences. 

286. Short Story Workshop. (2, 4) A study of the fundamental principles of short fiction 
writing; practice in writing; extensive study of short story form. P — Permission of 
instructor. 

* English 111 is a prerequisite for all other courses in English unless the requirement 
is waived. 



119 



English 



287. Tutoring Writing. (2) Introduction to composition theory and rhetoric, with a special 
emphasis on one-to-one tutoring techniques. Students will analyze their own writing pro- 
cess and experiences, study modern composition theory, and practice tutoring techniques 
in keeping with these theories. Strongly recommended for those interested in working in 
the Writing Center as peer tutors. A student may not receive credit for both Education 
387 and English 287. 

383, 384. Theory and Practice of Poetry Writing. (4,4) Emphasis on reading and dis- 
cussing student poems in terms of craftsmanship and general principles. P — English 285 
or permission of instructor. Either 383 or 384 may count toward the major in English, but 
not both. 

Advanced Language and Literature Courses 

The prerequisite for all 300-level courses in English is any one of the courses in British 
and American literature numbered 160, 165, 170 and 175, all of which are offered each 
semester. 

300. Seminar in the Major. (4) Selected topics in British and American literature. 
Intensive practice in critical discourse, including discussion, oral reports, and short essays. 
Introduction to literary scholarship and research methodology leading to a documented 
paper. Required for all majors. 

301. Individual Authors. (2) Study of selected work from an important American or 
British author. May be repeated. 

302. Ideas in Literature. (2, 4) Study of a significant literary theme in selected works. May 
be repeated. 

304. History of the English Language. (4) A survey of the development of English syntax, 
morphology, and phonology from Old English to the present, with attention to vocabu- 
lary growth. 

305. Old English Language and Literature. (4) An introduction to the Old English lan- 
guage and a study of the historical and cultural background of Old English literature, 
including Anglo-Saxon and Viking art, runes, and Scandinavian mythology. Readings 
from Beowulf and selected poems and prose. 

310. The Medieval World. (4) Through the reading of primary texts, this course will 
examine theological, philosophical, and cultural assumptions of the Middle Ages. Topics 
may include Christian providential history, drama, devotional literature, the Franciscan 
controversy, domestic life, and Arthurian romance. 

311. The Legend of Arthur. (4) The origin and development of the Arthurian legend in 
France and England, with emphasis on the works of Chretien de Troyes and Sir Thomas 
Malory. 

312. Medieval Poetry. (4) The origin and development of poetic genres and lyric forms of 
Middle English. 



English 120 



315. Chaucer. (4) Emphasis on The Canterbury Tales and Troilus and Criseyde, with 
some attention to minor poems. Consideration of literary, social, religious, and philosoph- 
ical background. 

319. Virgil and His English Legacy. (4) A study of Virgil's Eclogues, Georgics, and selected 
passages of the Aeneid, and their influence on English literature, using translations and 
original works by writers of the sixteenth through the eighteenth centuries, including 
Spenser, Marlowe, Milton, Dryden, and Pope. Knowledge of Latin is not required. (Also 
listed as Classics 259.) 

320. British Drama to 1642. (4) British drama from its beginning to 1642, exclusive of 
Shakespeare. Representative cycle plays, moralities, Elizabethan and Jacobean tragedies, 
comedies, and tragicomedies. 

323. Shakespeare. (4) Thirteen representative plays illustrating Shakespeare's development 
as a poet and dramatist. 

325. Sixteenth-century British Literature. (4) Concentration on the poetry of Spenser, 
Sidney, Shakespeare, Wyatt, and Drayton, with particular attention to sonnets and The 
Faerie Queene. 

326. Studies in English Renaissance Literature. (4) Selected topics in Renaissance litera- 
ture. Consideration of texts and their cultural background. 

327. Milton. (4) The poetry and selected prose of John Milton, with emphasis on 
Paradise Lost. 

328. Seventeenth-Century British Literature. (4) Poetry of Donne, Herbert, Vaughan, 
Marvel, Crashaw; prose of Bacon, Burton, Browne, Walton. Consideration of religious, 
political, and scientific backgrounds. 

330. Restoration and Eighteenth-Century British Literature. (4) Representative poetry 
and prose, exclusive of the novel, 1660-1800, drawn from Dryden, Behn, Swift, Pope, 
Johnson, and Wollstonecraft. Consideration of cultural backgrounds and significant liter- 
ary trends. 

335. Eighteenth-Century British Fiction. (4) Primarily the fiction of Defoe, Richardson, 
Fielding, Smollett, Sterne, and Austen. 

336. Restoration and Eighteenth-Century British Drama. (4) British drama from 1660 to 
1780, including representative plays by Dryden, Etherege, Wycherley, Congreve, 
Goldsmith, and Sheridan. 

337. Studies in Eighteenth-Century British Literature. (4) Selected topics in eighteenth 
century literature. Consideration of texts and their cultural background. 

340. Studies in Women and Literature. (4) a.) The woman writer in society, b.) Feminist 
critical approaches to literature. 

350. British Romantic Poets. (4) A review of the beginnings of Romanticism in British lit- 
erature, followed by study of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, and Shelley; collater- 
al reading in the prose of the period. 



121 English 



351. Studies in Romanticism. (4) Selected topics in European and/or American 
Romanticism with a focus on comparative, interdisciplinary, and theoretical approaches 
to literature. 

353. Nineteenth-Century British Fiction. (4) Representative major works by Dickens, 
Eliot, Thackeray, Hardy, the Brontes, and others. 

354. Victorian Poetry. (4) A study of Tennyson, Browning, Hopkins, and Arnold or 
another Victorian poet. 

360. Studies in Victorian Literature. (4) Selected topics, such as development of genres, 
major authors and texts, and cultural influences. Readings in poetry, fiction, autobiogra- 
phy, and other prose. 

361. Literature and Science. (4) Literature of and about science. Topics will vary and may 
include literature and medicine, the two culture debate, poetry and science, nature in liter- 
ature, the body in literature. 

362. Blake, Yeats, and Thomas. (4) Reading and critical analysis of the poetry of Blake, 
Yeats, and Dylan Thomas; study of the plays of Yeats and his contemporaries in the Irish 
Renaissance, especially Synge and Lady Gregory. 

363. Studies in Modernism. (4) Selected issues in Modernism. Interdisciplinary, compara- 
tive, and theoretical approaches to works and authors. 

364. Studies in Literary Criticism. (4) Consideration of certain figures and schools of 
thought significant in the history of literary criticism. 

365. Twentieth-Century British Fiction. (4) A study of Conrad, Lawrence, Joyce, Forster, 
Woolf, and later British writers, with attention to their social and intellectual backgrounds. 

366. James Joyce. (4) The major works by James Joyce, with an emphasis on Ulysses. 

367. Twentieth-Century English Poetry. (4) A study of twentieth-century poets of the 
English language, exclusive of the United States poets, will be read in relation to the liter- 
ary and social history of the period. 

368. Studies in Irish Literature. (4) Critical readings of the works of major Irish writers 
within the context of the political, social, and literary history of Ireland. 

369. Modern Drama. (4) Main currents in modern drama from nineteenth-century real- 
ism and naturalism through symbolism and expressionism. After an introduction to 
European precursors, the course focuses on representative plays by Wilde, Shaw, Synge, 
Yeats, O'Neill, Eliot, Hellman, Wilder, Williams, Hansberry, and Miller. 

370. American Literature to 1820. (4) Origins and development of American literature 
and thought in representative writings of the Colonial, Revolutionary, and Federal 
periods. 

372. American Romanticism. (4) Writers of the mid-nineteenth century, including 
Emerson, Thoreau, Hawthorne, and Melville. 

373. Literature and Film. (4) Selected topics in the relationship between literature and 
film, such as film adaptations of literary works, the study of narrative, and the develop- 
ment of literary and cinematic genres. 



English 122 



375. American Drama. (4) A historical overview of drama in America, covering such 
playwrights as Boucicault, O'Neill, Hellman, Wilder, Williams, Inge, Miller, Hansberry, 
Albee, Shepard, Norman, Mamet, and Wilson. 

376. American Poetry before 1900. (4) Readings and critical analysis of American poetry 
from its beginnings to the end of the nineteenth century, including Bradstreet, Emerson, 
Longfellow, Melville, and Poe, with particular emphasis on Whitman and Dickinson. 

377. American Jewish Literature. (4) A survey of writings on Jewish topics or experiences 
by American Jewish writers. The course explores cultural and generational conflicts, 
responses to social change, the impact of the Shoah (Holocaust) on American Jews, and 
the challenges of language and form posed by Jewish and non-Jewish artistic traditions. 

378. Literature of the American South. (4) A study of Southern literature from its begin- 
nings to the present, with emphasis upon such major writers as Tate, Warren, Faulkner, 
O'Connor, Welty, and Styron. 

379. Literary Forms of the American Personal Narrative. (4) Reading and critical analysis 
of autobiographical texts in which the ideas, style, and point of view of the writer are 
examined to demonstrate how these works contribute to an understanding of pluralism in 
American culture. Representative authors may include Hurston, Wright, Kingston, 
Angelou, Wideman, Sarton, Chuang Hua, Crews, and Dillard. 

380. American Fiction from 1865 to 1915. (4) Such writers as Twain, James, Howells, 
Crane, Dreiser, Wharton, and Cather. 

381. Studies in Black American Literature. (4) Reading and critical analysis of selected fic- 
tion, poetry, drama, and other writing by representative black Americans. 

382. Modern American Fiction, 1915 to 1965. (4) To include such writers as Stein, Lewis, 
Anderson, Hemingway, Fitzgerald, Faulkner, Dos Passos, Wolfe, Wright, Ellison, Agee, 
Flannery O'Connor, and Pynchon. 

383. 384. Theory and Practice of Poetry Writing. (4,4) Emphasis on reading and dis- 
cussing student poems in terms of craftsmanship and general principles. P — English 285 
or permission of instructor. Either 383 or 384 may count toward the major in English, but 
not both. 

385. Twentieth-century American Poetry. (4) Readings of modern American poetry in 
relation to the literary and social history of the period. 

386. Directed Reading. (2-4) A tutorial in an area of study not otherwise provided by 
the department; granted upon departmental approval of petition presented by a quali- 
fied student. 

388. Honors in English. (4) A conference course centering upon a special reading require- 
ment and a thesis requirement. For senior students wishing to graduate with "Honors in 
English." 

390. The Structure of English. (4) An introduction to the principles and techniques of 
modern linguistics applied to contemporary American English. 

391. Studies in Postmodernism. (4) Interdisciplinary, comparative, and theoretical 
approaches to works and authors. 



123 



English 



394. Contemporary Drama. (4) The course will consider experiments in form and sub- 
stance in plays from Godot to the present. Readings will cover such playwrights as 
Beckett, Osborne, Pinter, Stoppard, Churchill, Wertenbaker, Albee, Shepard, Mamet, 
Wilson, Soyinka, and Fugard. 

395. Contemporary American Literature. (4) A study of post- World War II American 
poetry and fiction by such writers as Bellow, Gass, Barth, Pynchon, Lowell, Ashbery, 
Ammons, Bishop, and Rich. 

396. Contemporary British Fiction. (4) A study of the British novel and short story, with 
particular focus on the multicultural aspects of British life, including works by Rushdie, 
Amis, Winterson and Ishiguro. 



Environmental Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Robert Browne (Biology), Coordinator 

The environmental studies minor provides an interdisciplinary approach to the study of 
human-environmental interaction. The program seeks to identify and apply perspectives 
from biology, chemistry, physics, geography, English, government, economics, history, 
law, ethics, and anthropology to the human impact on the natural environment. The envi- 
ronmental studies minor, coupled with a liberal arts major, is designed to prepare students 
for careers in the environment sciences, law, public health, public policy, and public 
administration, and to develop attitudes and values consistent with a sustainable environ- 
mental future. 

The minor requires the core course, Environmental Studies 201, which is considered 
a prerequisite to all other courses in the minor. It is suggested that a prospective minor 
take this course and any other necessary prerequisites in the freshman and sophomore 
years. A minimum of twenty-six credits is required for this minor. The following courses 
are required (except Environmental Studies 391-392): 

Anthropology 260. Culture and Nature. (2) A study of the reciprocal effects of the culture 
and nature relationship, with an emphasis on how different cultures define, use, and value 
nature. 

Biology 113. Evolutionary and Ecological Biology. (5) An introduction to the principles 
of genetics, ecology, and evolution as they apply to organisms, populations, and commu- 
nities, with emphasis on evolutionary processes within an ecological context. Intended as 
a beginning course in biology for prospective majors and for any students with adequate 
high school preparation in biology. Lab — three hours. No prerequisites. 

Economics 168. The Political Economy of Environmental Policy. (2) Develops a set of 
core economic principles for understanding and evaluating environmental policy issues. 
(Does not count toward economics major and minor requirements unless Economics 248 
also is successfully completed.) 



Environmental Studies 124 



Education 274. Environmental Geography. (4) A systematic study of major environmental 
issues on a global scale with an exploration of implications and possible solutions. 

Environmental Studies 201. Introduction to Environmental Studies. (4) An interdisci- 
plinary course taught by faculty representing a number of fields. Topics include scien- 
tific principles, human populations, resource management, pollution, and environmen- 
tal ethics. 

Environmental Studies 225. Physics and Chemistry of the Environment. (5) The course 
coheres the basic physical and chemical processes in the earth's atmosphere, biosphere, 
and the oceans. It consists of two parts: 1) chemical processes in the environment such as 
element cycles and the chemistry of the pollutants in the air and water; 2) physical aspects 
of the environment such as solar energy and the atmosphere and the physics of weather 
and climate. Lab — three hours. P — Chemistry 111 or Physics 113. 

Environmental Studies 391, 392. Individual Study. (2, 2) A field study, internship, project 
or research investigation carried out under the supervision of a member of the environ- 
mental studies minor faculty. Pass/fail or for a grade at the discretion of the instructor. 
Pass/fail is not optional for an individual study that will be used as an elective course in 
the environmental studies minor. P — Permission of instructor. (The same numbered course 
cannot be repeated. Courses can be taken during the same semester or, if not, in consecu- 
tive order.) 



German and Russian 

Timothy F. Sellner, Chair 
Professors William S. Hamilton, Timothy F. Sellner, Larry E. West 

Associate Professor Kurt C. Shaw 

Assistant Professor Rebecca Thomas 

Lecturers Christa G. Carollo, Perry L. Patterson, Stefanie H. Tanis 

A major in German requires thirty-seven credits beyond German 112 or 113. These must 
include German 217; at least one course from among the sequence 249, 281, 285; and the 
seminar for majors. A minor in German requires five courses beyond German 153, includ- 
ing German 217 and at least one course from among the sequence 249, 281, 285. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in German. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in German," 
students must complete a senior research project. For additional information, members of 
the departmental faculty should be consulted. 

Students of German are invited to apply for the exchange scholarship at the Free 
University of Berlin, the W. D. Sanders Scholarships and program of study at Freiburg, 
Berlin, and Vienna, administered by the Institute for the International Education of 
Students (IES). Majors and minors are strongly encouraged to live at least one semester in 
the German House. 



I2 5 



German and Russian 



Ill, 112. Elementary German. (4, 4) This course covers the principles of grammar and 
pronunciation and includes the reading of simple texts. Lab — one hour. 

113. Intensive Elementary German. (5) A one-semester course covering the material of 
German 111 and 112. For students whose preparation for German 153 is inadequate or 
who have demonstrated proficiency in another language. Not open to students who have 
had German 111 or 112. 

153. Intermediate German. (5) The principles of grammar are reviewed; reading of select- 
ed prose and poetry. Lab — one hour. P — German 112 or 113. 

153x. Intermediate German. (4) The principles of grammar are reviewed; reading of 
selected prose and poetry. Lab — one hour. P — Three years of high school German. 

160. German Language and Customs. (4) Students spend one month in four different 
regions of Germany and Austria in a program designed to provide constant exposure to 
the language, customs, geography, and art of these countries. Students attend daily lan- 
guage classes as well as lectures and cultural events. They are required to keep a journal in 
German. Pass/fail. Offered in summer. P — German 112 or 113. 

215, 216. Introduction to German Literature. (4,4) The object of this course is to 
acquaint students with masterpieces of German literature. Parallel reading and reports. 
P — German 153 or equivalent. 

217. Composition and Grammar Review. (4) A review of the fundamentals of German 
grammar with intensive practice in translation and composition. Required for majors. 
P — German 153 or equivalent. Fall. 

218. Basic Conversation. (4) Practice in speaking German, stressing correctness of struc- 
ture, phonetics, pronunciation, fluency, and vocabulary for everyday situations. 

P — German 153 or equivalent. Spring. 

219. Advanced Conversation. (4) Practice in speaking German at a more advanced level, 
stressing discussion of various topics of current importance in the German-speaking coun- 
tries. Considerable attention is devoted to achieving fluency. P — German 218 or permis- 
sion of instructor. Offered fall semester of even years. 

220. German Civilization I. (4) Survey of German culture and civilization from prehistoric 
times to 1918. Conducted in German. P — German 153 or equivalent. Offered fall 
semester of odd years. 

221. German Civilization II. (4) Survey of German culture and civilization from the Weimar 
Republic to the present, with particular emphasis on contemporary Germany. Conducted in 
German. P — German 153 or equivalent. Offered spring semester of even years. 

229. German for Business and Economics. (4) Introduction to the spoken and written lan- 
guage of the German business world. Emphasis on business correspondence and oral pro- 
ficiency skills for banking, import/export and commercial transactions. P — German 217 
and 218 or permission of instructor. Offered spring semester of odd years. 

231. Weimar Germany. (4) Art, literature, music, and film of Weimar Germany, 1919-33, 
in historical context. (Also listed as History 318.) 



German and Russian 126 



240. Masterworks in Translation. (2) Examination and interpretation of selected texts in 
English translation. Literary periods, genres, and authors will vary according to instruc- 
tor. Does not count toward a major or minor in German. 

249. German Literature before 1700. (4) A survey of German literature of the Middle 
Ages, Reformation, and Baroque eras; emphasizes the chivalric period, medieval drama, 
Martin Luther, and the Baroque period. P — German 215, 216, or equivalent. Fall. 

270. Individual Study. (1-4) Readings on selected topics in literature or current events not 
ordinarily covered in other courses. P — German 215, 216, and permission of instructor. 

281. German Literature from the Enlightenment through Romanticism. (4) Selected 
works from the Enlightenment, the Storm and Stress period, the poetry and major dra- 
mas of Goethe and Schiller, and German Romanticism. P — German 215, 216, or equiva- 
lent. Fall. 

285. German Literature from Poetic Realism to the Modern Age. (4) Intensive study of 
representative works of major German writers from 1848 to the present, including litera- 
ture of the post-war era. P — German 215, 216, or equivalent. Fall. 

0287, 288. Honors in German. (3,3) A conference course in German literature. A major 
research paper is required. Designed for candidates for departmental honors. 

300. Seminar in the Major. (4) Selected genre topics in German literature. Intensive prac- 
tice in critical discourse, including discussion and an oral presentation (Referat). 
Introduction to literary scholarship and research methodology leading to a documented 
paper. Required for all majors. P — German 249, 281, 285, or equivalent. May be 
repeated. Spring. 

Russian 

A major requires thirty-two credits beyond Russian 153 and must include Russian 215, 
216, 221, and either 217 or 218. A minor in Russian requires twenty credits beyond 153, 
four of which must be earned in Russian 221. Students of Russian are invited to apply for 
study at Moscow State University. Majors and minors are strongly encouraged to live at 
least one semester in the Russian House. 

Ill, 112. Elementary Russian. (4,4) The essentials of Russian grammar, conversation, 
drill, and reading of elementary texts. Lab required. 

153. Intermediate Russian. (5) Principles of Russian grammar are reviewed and expanded 
upon; reading of short prose pieces and materials from the Russian press. Lab required. 
P — Russian 112 or equivalent. 

215. Introduction to Nineteenth-Century Russian Literature. (4) Readings of selected 
short stories and excerpts from longer works from the nineteenth century. P — Russian 
153 or equivalent. 

216. Introduction to Twentieth-Century Russian Literature. (4) Readings of selected short 
stories and excerpts from longer works from the twentieth century. P — Russian 153 or 
equivalent. 



127 



German and Russian 



217. Seminar in Nineteenth Century Russian Literature. (4) A study of the foremost writ- 
ers, with reading of representative works. P — Russian 153 or equivalent. 

218. Seminar in Twentieth Century Russian Literature. (4) A study of the foremost writ- 
ers, with reading of representative works. P — Russian 153 or equivalent. 

221. Advanced Conversation and Composition. (4) Study of grammar at the advanced 
level. Intensive practice in composition and conversation based on contemporary Russian 
materials. 

228. Advanced Grammar. (4) Mastery of Russian declension and conjugation, with spe- 
cial attention to the correct use of reference materials. Syntax of complex and problematic 
sentences. P — Russian 221. 

230. The Structure of Russian. (4) The linguistic tools of phonetics, phonemics, and mor- 
phophonemics are explained and applied to modern Russian. Emphasis is given to the 
study of roots and word formation. P — Permission of instructor. 

232. The History of the Russian Language. (4) The evolution of Russian from Common 
Slavic to the modern language; theory of linguistic reconstruction and the Indo-European 
family; readings from selected Old East Slavic texts. P — Russian 221 and permission of 
instructor. 

240. Seminar in Translation. (4) Advanced work in English-to-Russian and Russian-to- 
English translation. P — Russian 221 and permission of instructor. 

242. Research on Language and Culture in Russia. (2) An investigation designed by the 
student is carried out in Russia during spring break. An evaluative paper follows the class 
trip. Credit given for the minor when the project is done in Russian. P — Russian 111 and 
permission of instructor. Limited enrollment. 

250. Russian Culture and Civilization. (4) Survey of Russian contributions to art, archi- 
tecture, music, and religious thought from Russia's beginnings to the present. Taught in 
Russian. P — Russian 215 or 216. 

252. Russian Poetry. (4) Survey of Russian poetry from Slovo o polku Igoreve to the 
present, with particular emphasis on the works of major nineteenth and twentieth century 
poets. P — Russian 215 or 216. 

270. Individual Study. (2-4) Study in language or literature beyond the 215-216 level. 
P — Russian 215 or higher. 

275. Studies in Russian Literature. (4) Selected special topics in Russian literature. 
P — Russian 215 or 216. 

280. Russian Women Writers. (4) Readings of selected prose works by such writers as 
Teffi, Forsh, Inber, Baranskaya, Grekova, Tokareva, Petrushevskaya, Vaneeva and 
Tolstaya. P — Russian 215 or 216. 

285. Recent Russian Fiction. (4) Readings of selected prose works from the 1970s to the 
present by such writers as Iksander, Voinovich, Bitov, Tolstaya, Petrushevskaya, and 
Viktor Erofeev. P — Russian 215 or 216. 



German and Russian j28 



290. The Language of Russian Commerce and Politics. (4) Readings in the contemporary 
Russian press. Intensive written and oral practice, emphasizing specialized vocabulary of 
business and government. P — Russian 221 or permission of instructor. 



German Studies 

(Foreign Area Study) 
Timothy F. Sellner (German/Russian), Coordinator 

Twelve or thirteen credits from German 153, 215, 216, 217, 220, 221, or 229 are 
required. In addition, the student must take at least one course from three of the follow- 
ing four groups. Selected courses taken overseas in German-speaking countries may count 
toward this concentration with the approval of the coordinator. (See course descriptions 
under appropriate listings.) 



Group i 
History 



Group z 
Politics 



318. Weimar Germany. (4) 
(Also listed as German 231) 

319. Germany to 1871. (4) 

320. Germany: Unification to Unification, 1871-1990. (4) 
333. European Diplomacy, 1848-1914. (4) 

231. Western European Politics. (4) 

233. The Politics of Modern Germany. (4) 

237. Comparative Public Policy in Selected Industrialized 

Democracies. (4) 
273. Radical Critiques of Political Society. (4) 



Group 3 

Economics and Business. 



Group 4 
Art 

Music 

Philosophy 

Religion 



(Selected courses taken in German-speaking 
countries with the approval of the coordinator. 



270. Northern Renaissance Art. (4) 

272. Baroque Art. (4) 

222. Seminar in Eighteenth Century Music. (4) 

223. Seminar in Nineteenth Century Music. (4) 
341. Kant. (4) 

352. Hegel, Kierkegaard, and Nietzsche. (4) 

368. The Protestant and Catholic Reformations. (4). 



129 



German Studies 



Health and Exercise Science 

Paul M. Ribisl, Chair 

Wake Forest Professor W. Jack Rejeski 

Professors Michael J. Berry, Stephen P. Messier, Paul M. Ribisl 

Professor Emeritus William L. Hottinger 

Associate Professors Peter H. Brubaker, Patricia A. Nixon 

Associate Professor Emeritus Leo Ellison 

Assistant Professors Anthony P. Marsh, Shannon L. Mihalko, Gary D. Miller 

Instructors Donald Bergey, Johnnie O. Foye, David H. Stroupe, Sharon K. Woodard 

The purpose of the Department of Health and Exercise Science is to organize, administer, and 
supervise (1) a health and exercise science curriculum and (2) a required/elective health and 
exercise science program consisting of conditioning activities and lifetime sport activities. 

Health and Exercise Science Requirement 

All students must complete Health and Exercise Science 100 and 101. This requirement 
must be met before enrollment in additional health and exercise science elective courses, 
and in any case by the end of the second year. 

Courses in Basic Instruction and Elective Health 
and Exercise Science 

All the 100-level courses listed below are for one credit each, and they can only be 
taken once for credit except Health and Exercise Science 180 and 183 which may be 
repeated once. 

100. Lifestyle and Health. A lecture course that deals with the effect of lifestyle behaviors 
on various health outcomes, including cardiovascular disease, cancer, and sexually-trans- 
mitted diseases. 

101. Exercise for Health. A laboratory course on physical fitness that covers weight con- 
trol, cardiovascular endurance, muscular strength, and flexibility. 

112. Sports Proficiency. (May be taken only one time.) 

116. Weight Training. 

150. Beginning Tennis. 

151. Intermediate Tennis. 
156. Racquetball. 

160. Beginning Golf. 

161. Intermediate Golf. 
163. Bowling. 

170. Volleyball. 



Health and Exercise Science jiq 



179. Beginning Horseback Riding. (P/F grade only) 

180. Intermediate/Advanced Horseback Riding. (P/F grade only. May be repeated once 
for credit.) 

181. Snow Skiing. (P/F grade only) 

182. Beginning Ice Figure Skating. 

183 Intermediate/ Advanced Ice Figure Skating. (May be repeated once for credit) 
190. Karate. 

Courses for the Major 

The department offers a program leading to the bachelor of science degree in health and 
exercise science. A major requires thirty-eight credits and must include Health and 
Exercise Science 262, 312, 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, and 370. Majors are not allowed to 
apply any Health and Exercise Science 100-level courses or Health and Exercise Science 
205 or 206 toward the thirty-eight hours required for graduation. A minimum grade 
point average of 2.0 is required for graduation in courses that comprise a major in the 
department. Students interested in majoring in health and exercise science should consult 
the coordinator of the department's undergraduate program as soon as possible after 
entering the University. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in health and exercise science by the second semester of the junior year. 
To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Health and Exercise Science," a student 
must have a minimum grade point average of 3.3 in the major, a minimum overall grade 
point average of 3.0, and complete an honors research project which includes a written 
and an oral report. Interested students should consult the coordinator of the department's 
honors program. For more information, please consult the department's Web site at 
www.wfu.edu/Academic-departments/Health-and-Exercise-Science/. 

201. Health Issues on College Campuses - 1. (2) Introduction to concepts and methods of 
peer health education; development of teaching and group facilitation skills. (P/F grade 
only.) P — Permission of instructor. 

202. Health Issues on College Campuses - II. (2) Development and delivery of educational 
programs on a variety of health issues relevant to college students. (P/F grade only.) 

P — Health and Exercise Science 201. 

205. Basic Skin and Scuba Diving and Open Water Certification. (2) A course in skin and 
SCUBA diving that offers international certification by the Professional Association of 
Diving Instructors (PADI). 

206. Lifeguard Training. (2) A lifeguard training course that offers American Red Cross 
certifications in CPR for the professional rescuer, community first aid, lifeguard training, 
and waterfront lifeguarding. 

232. Emergency Medical Training. (2) Lectures and practical experiences in prepara- 
tion for responding to medical emergencies, including: patient assessment; airway 



131 



Health and Exercise Science 



management; cardiopulmonary resuscitation; O2 therapy; management of shock; trau- 
ma and environmental emergencies; and head/spine/musculoskeletal injuries. North 
Carolina state exam for EMT certification is offered. (Credit not allowed for both 
Health and Exercise Science 230 and 232.) 

262. Statistics in the Health Sciences. (4) Basic statistics with an emphasis on application 
to research in the health sciences. Students are introduced to graphics and statistical soft- 
ware for statistical analysis. (A student receiving credit for this course may not also 
receive credit for Anthropology 380, Biology 380, Business 201, or Sociology 380.) 

310. Applied Field Study. {2) A course involving application of theory and methods of 
solving problems in a specialized area according to the student's immediate career goals. 
(P/F grade only, open only to majors.) P — Permission of instructor. 

311. Internship in Rehabilitation. (2) A semester experience in the campus rehabilitation 
programs. This experience includes written case study analyses of selected patients with a 
focus upon risk factor assessment and review of multiple intervention strategies, in con- 
junction with participation in physiologic monitoring of patients during therapeutic ses- 
sions. (Pass/fail only; open only to majors.) P — Permission of instructor. 

312. Exercise and Health Psychology. (4) A survey of the psychological antecedents of 
exercise and selected topics in health psychology with particular attention to wellness, 
stress, the biobehavioral basis of coronary heart disease, and the psychodynamics of reha- 
bilitative medicine. P — Health and Exercise Science 262 or permission of instructor. 

350. Human Physiology. (4) A lecture course which presents the basic principles and con- 
cepts of the function of selected systems of the human body, with emphasis on the muscu- 
lar, cardiovascular, pulmonary, and nervous systems. P — Biology 111, 112, or 214, or per- 
mission of instructor. 

351. Nutrition and Weight Control. (4) A lecture/laboratory course which presents the 
principles of proper nutrition including an understanding of the basic foodstuffs and 
nutrients as well as the influence of genetics, eating behavior, and activity patterns on 
energy balance and weight control. Laboratory experiences examine intervention in obesi- 
ty and coronary heart disease through diet analysis, methods of diet prescription, and 
behavior modification. P — Health and Exercise Science 350 or permission of instructor. 

352. Human Gross Anatomy. (4) A lecture/laboratory course in which the structure and 
function of the human body are studied. Laboratories are devoted to the dissection and 
study of the human musculoskeletal, neuromuscular, and vascular systems. 

353. Physiology of Exercise. (4) A lecture course which presents the concepts and applica- 
tions of the physiological response of the human body to physical activity. The acute and 
chronic responses of the muscular and cardiorespiratory systems to exercise are exam- 
ined. Other topics include exercise and coronary disease, nutrition and performance, 
strength and endurance training, body composition, sex-related differences, and environ- 
mental influences. P — Health and Exercise Science 350 or permission of instructor. 

354. Assessment Techniques in Health Sciences. (4) A lecture/laboratory course to devel- 
op clinical skills and knowledge in the assessment of health in areas of exercise physiolo- 
gy, nutrition/metabolism, biomechanics/neuromuscular function, and health psychology. 



Health and Exercise Science 1^2 



The laboratory will emphasize use of instrumentation and analysis/interpretation of data 
collected on human subjects. P — Health and Exercise Science 262, 350, and 352 or per- 
mission of instructor. 

355. Exercise Programming. (2) A lecture/laboratory course which presents the scientific 
principles of safe and effective exercise prescription for fitness programs. P — Health and 
Exercise Science 353 and 354, or permission of instructor. 

360. Epidemiology. (4) An introduction to basic determinants of the incidence of chronic 
disease in the population and development of an understanding of individual, community, 
and environmental approaches to promoting healthful lifestyles in youth, adults, and 
elderly populations. Issues will be analyzed by formal statistical modeling. P — An applied 
statistical methods course, such as Anthropology 380, Business 202, Biology 380, Health 
and Exercise Science 262, Psychology 211, Sociology 380, Math 358, or Math 256. 

370. Biomechanics of Human Movement. (4) Study of the mechanical principles which 
influence human movement, sport technique, and equipment design. P — Health and 
Exercise Science 352 or permission of instructor. 

375. Advanced Physiology of Exercise. (4) A lecture course which provides an in-depth 
examination of the physiological mechanisms responsible for both the acute and chronic 
changes which occur with exercise. Included are cellular changes in response to exercise, 
the ventilatory response to exercise and metabolic consequences of exercise. P — Health 
and Exercise Science 353 or permission of instructor. 

380. Physical Activity and Aging. (4) A lecture course which examines both normal/abnormal aging 
from a physiological perspective and explores how aging and chronic disease affect performance of 
activities of daily living, including vocational and recreational activities. The potential of regular physi- 
cal activity to delay or reverse the deleterious effects of aging and degenerative disease is investigated. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

382. Individual Study. (1-4) Independent study directed by a faculty adviser. The student 
must consult the adviser before registering for this course. P — Majors only and permission 
of instructor. 

386. Honors Research. (4) Directed study and research in preparation for a major paper 
on a subject of mutual interest to the student and faculty honors adviser. Taken only by 
candidates for departmental honors. P — Permission of instructor, approval of departmen- 
tal honors committee, and prior completion of a 2 credit Individual Study. 

Sports Medicine* 

201. Basic Athletic Training. (3) A study of the basic knowledge and skills in the preven- 
tion, treatment, and care of common athletic injuries. 

302. Advanced Athletic Training. (4) An in-depth analysis of preventive measures, thera- 
peutic modalities, and rehabilitative procedures employed in sports medicine. P — Health 
and Exercise Science 352. 

* Inquiries should be directed to the athletic trainer in Sports Medicine. 

122 Health and Exercise Science 



Health Policy and Administration 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Michael S. Lawlor (Economics), Director 

The health policy and administration minor is designed to give students a concentration in 
the area of public health policy and the study of health care delivery. It is open to all 
majors and places an emphasis on providing students with the analytical methods and 
knowledge of institutional complexity necessary to an understanding of the rapidly evolv- 
ing medical industry. Students interested in either public policy or administrative roles in 
health care could benefit from the minor. The course work requires the following five 
courses (four credits each), for a total of twenty credits, plus some notable prerequisites 
(see individual course descriptions for details): 

Required courses: 



Health Policy and Administration 

Health and Exercise Science 

Economics 

Elective 



150. Introduction to Public Health. (4) 
250. Internship in Health Policy and Admin. (4) 
360. Epidemiology of Physical Activity. (4) 
240. The Economics of Health and Medicine. (4) 



Choose one course from the following electives *: 



Anthropology 

Biology 

Humanities 

Philosophy 

Health and Exercise Science 

Sociology 



Women's Studies 
Psychology 



362. Medical Anthropology. (4) 

396. Biomedical Ethics. (4) 

390. Interdisciplinary Seminar on Aging. (4) 

161. Medical Ethics. (4) 

312. Exercise and Health Psychology. (4) 

380. Physical Activity and Aging. (4) 

335. Sociology of Health and Illness. (4) 

336. Sociology of Health Care. (4) 

337. Aging in Modern Society. (4) 

321. Interdisciplinary Seminar on Women's Health 
Issues. (4) 

322. Psychopharmacology. (4) 



* (Other electives may be added as the curriculum evolves. Check with the director of the 
program for a complete list. ) 



Health Policy and i^a 
Administration 



Since many of the required courses involve prerequisites students should plan ahead to 
ensure they can meet all of the requirements in four years. The following schedule sugges- 
tions may be helpful: 

Sophomore 



First Year 

Lower Division 
requirements, 

including 
Economics 1 50 



Economics 205, 

Accounting 1 10 or 

Business 295 (must be 

a junior or senior), 

Applied Statistics (various 

departmental courses) 



Junior 

Health Policy and 

Administration 150, 

Health and Exercise 

Science 360 



Senior 

Economics 240, 
Health Policy and 
Administration 250 



150. Introduction to Public Health. (4) Survey of the basic structure of the health care sys- 
tem in the United States. Includes discussion of current issues of public policy toward 
health, organization of health care delivery, and health system reform. Serves as the intro- 
duction to the interdisciplinary minor in health policy and administration. P — Accounting 
110 or Accounting 111 or Business 295. 

250. Internship in Health Policy and Administration. (4) A semester experience in a health 
care policy or health care administration organization. Students will work in conjunction 
with a director who is a researcher on a public health science research project or with an 
administrator in health care delivery. Students gain relevant practical experience that 
builds on prior coursework and provides insight into public health policy issues. P — 
Health Policy and Administration 150, permission of instructor. Open only to senior 
health policy and administration students. 



History 



Michael L. Hughes, Chair 

Reynolds Professor Paul D. Escott 

Wake Forest Professor James P. Barefield 

Professors J. Edwin Hendricks, Michael L. Hughes, Thomas E. Mullen, 

Michael L. Sinclair, J. Howell Smith, Alan J. Williams, Richard L. Zuber 

Associate Professors Simone M. Caron, Michele K. Gillespie, 

William K. Meyers, Anthony S. Parent Jr., Sarah L. Watts 

Assistant Professors Joanne Izbicki, Jeffrey D. Lerner, 

Susan Z. Rupp, Claire S. Schen 

Visiting Assistant Professors Robert Beachy, Jama Mohamed 

The major in history consists of a minimum of thirty-six credits and must include History 
288 or 310, one course in premodern history, and a minimum of seven credits in each of 
the following three fields: European history; Latin American, Asian, or African history; 
and United States history. Courses at the 100-level count toward the major but do not 
count toward the field distribution. 

Majors may include within the required thirty-six credits up to eight credits of 
advanced placement or comparable work and up to four credits of any combination of 
independent study and directed reading other than the credits earned in History 397. 



135 



History 



A minor in history requires twenty-four credits. Courses that the student elects to take 
pass/fail do not meet the requirements for the major or minor. 

Highly qualified majors should apply for admission to the honors program in history. 
To be graduated with the designation "Honors in History," the student must complete 
History 287, present an honors-quality research paper, successfully defend the paper in an 
oral examination, and earn an overall grade point average of 3.0 with an average of 3.3 
on work in history. For additional information, students should consult members of the 
department. 

Students contemplating graduate study should acquire a reading knowledge of one 
modern foreign language for the master of arts degree and two for the Ph.D. 

101. Western Civilization to 1700. (4) A survey of ancient, medieval, and early modern 
history to 1700. Focus varies with instructor. (Credit cannot be received for both 101 and 
103, or 102 and 104.) 

102. Europe and the World in the Modern Era. (4) A survey of modern Europe from 1700 
to the present. Focus varies with instructor. (Credit cannot be received for both 101 and 

103. or 102 and 104.) 

1027. Formation of Europe: Habsburg Empire and its Successor States. (4) The develop- 
ment of Central and East-central Europe as a multiethnic unity under the Habsburgs, 
1526-1918, and its dissolution into successor states and subsequent interactions, 1918- 
1989. (Meets Division III history requirement) Offered only in Vienna. 

103. World Civilizations to 1500. (4) A survey of the ancient, classical and medieval civi- 
lizations of Eurasia with a brief look at American and sub-Saharan societies. Focus varies 
with instructor. (Credit cannot be received for both 101 and 103, or 102 and 104.) 

104. World Civilizations since 1500. (4) A survey of the major civilizations of the world 
in the modern and contemporary periods. Focus varies with instructor. (Credit cannot be 
received for both 101 and 103, or 102 and 104.) 

131. European Historical Biography. (2) Study of biographies of men and women who 
have influenced the history and civilization of Europe. 

162. History of Wake Forest University. (2) A survey of the history of Wake Forest from 
its beginning, including its written and oral traditions. The course may include a visit to 
the town of Wake Forest. 

211. Colloquium. (1-4) 

222. The Renaissance and Reformation. (4) Europe from 1300 to 1600. Social, cultural, 
and intellectual developments stressed. 

2253. History of Venice. (4) The history of Venice from its origin to the fall of the 
Venetian Republic. Offered in Venice. 

2260. History of London. (2,4) Topographical, social, economic, and political history of 
London from the earliest times. Lectures, student papers and reports, museum visits and 
lectures, and on-site inspections. Offered in London. 



History 



I 3 6 



2262. The Golden Age of Burgundy. (2) Burgundian society, culture, and government in 
the reigns of Philip the Bold, John the Fearless, Philip the Good, and Charles the Rash, 
1384-1477. Offered in Dijon. 

2263. Venetian Society and Culture. (4) An examination of Venetian society, including the 
role within Venetian life of music, theatre, the church, and civic ritual. Offered in Venice. 

2280. Georgian and Victorian Society and Culture. (4) Social and economic transforma- 
tion of England in the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, with particular attention to the 
rise of professionalism and developments in the arts. Offered in London. 

232. European Historical Novels. (2) The role of the historical past in selected works of 
fiction. 

251, 252. The United States. (4,4) Political, social, economic, and intellectual aspects. 
251: Before 1865; 252: After 1865. Students who take History 253 may not take either of 
these courses for credit. 

253. The United States. (4) A topical survey combining 251 and 252. Not open to stu- 
dents who take either 251 or 252. 

287, 288. Honors in History. (4,4) 287: Seminar on problems of historical synthesis and 
interpretation. All honors students must take History 287; 288: Writing of a major 
research paper. Permission of instructor. 

301. The Beginnings of the Modern World- View. (4) A study of the transition from 
ancient views of the world to the perspective of modern science, with focus on the works 
of the Presocratic philosophers, Plato, and Aristotle. (Also listed as Natural Sciences 301 
and Philosophy 231.) 

302. The Mechanistic View of Nature. (4) An examination of the philosophical and scien- 
tific roots, in Descartes, Newton, and Leibniz, of the belief that the universe and human 
beings are "machines" subject to deterministic natural laws, and the relevance to this 
issue of modern scientific ideas. (Also listed as Interdisciplinary Honors 252, Natural 
Sciences 302, and Philosophy 242.) 

303. Revolutions in Modern Science. (4) An analysis of the ways in which radically new 
ideas are introduced and accepted in science. Cases studied are space and time in relativity 
theory, the nature of reality in quantum mechanics, evolution of species, and continental 
drift. P — At least one course in one of the relevant areas of science or permission of 
instructor. (Also listed as Interdisciplinary Honors 253 and Natural Sciences 303.) 

305. Modern Science and Human Values. (4) Four revolutionary developments in science 
and technology are studied with a focus on their potential to affect human values: 
biotechnology, cognitive science, recent primate research, and the search for extraterrestri- 
al life. (Also listed as Interdisciplinary Honors 256 and Natural Sciences 352.) 

306. The Early Middle Ages. (4) European history from the end of the Ancient World to 
the mid-twelfth century, stressing social and cultural developments. 

307. The High Middle Ages Through the Renaissance. (4) European history from the mid- 
twelfth through the early sixteenth centuries, stressing social and cultural developments. 



137 



History 



308. The World of Alexander the Great. (4) An examination of Alexander the Great's 
conquests and the fusion of Greek culture with those of the Near East, Central Asia, and 
India. Special emphasis placed on the creation of new political institutions and social cus- 
toms, modes of addressing philosophical and religious issues, as well as the achievements 
and limitations of Hellenistic Civilization. 

309. Europe: From Renaissance to Revolution. (4) A survey of European history from the 
fifteenth to the eighteenth century. Topics include the voyages of discovery, the military 
revolution, the formation of the modern state, religious reformation, witchcraft and the 
rise of modern science, and pre-industrial economic and social structures including 
women and the family. 

310. Seminar. (4) Offered by members of the faculty on topics of their choice. A paper is 
required. 

313, 314. European Economic and Social History, 1300-1990. (4,4) Changes in Europe's 
economic structures and how they affected Europeans' lives. Emphasizes how economic 
forces interacted with social and institutional factors. 313: 1300-1750; 314: 1750-1990. 

315. Greek History. (4) The development of ancient Greek civilization from the Bronze 
Age to the end of the Classical Period stressing social institutions, individual character, 
and freedom of social choice within the framework of cultural, political, and intellectu- 
al history. 

316. Rome: Republic & Empire. (4) A survey of Roman history and civilization from its 
beginning to about 500 C.E., with emphasis on the conquest of the Mediterranean world, 
the evolution of the Republican state, the growth of autocracy, the administration of the 
empire, and the interaction between Romans and non-Romans. 

317. The French Revolution and Napoleonic Empire. (4) The revolution and wars that 
constitute one of the pivotal points in modern history. 

318. Weimar Germany. (4) Art, literature, music, and film of Weimar Germany, 1919- 
1933, in historical context. German or history credit determined at registration. 

319. Germany to 1871. (4) Social, economic, and political forces leading to the cre- 
ation of a single German nation-state out of over 1,700 sovereign and semi-sovereign 
German states. 

320. Germany: Unification to Unification, 1871-1990. (4) The Germans' search for sta- 
bility and unity in a society riven by conflict and on a continent riven by nationalism. 

321. France to 1774. (4) The history of France from the Paleolithic period to the acces- 
sion of Louis XVI with particular attention to the early modern period. 

322. France since 1815. (4) The history of France from the restoration of the monarchy to 
the Fifth Republic. 

323. 324. Great Britain. (4,4) A survey of British history. Topics include religion, revolu- 
tion and reform, war, poverty and poor relief, women, social and economic change, and 
empire. 323: To eighteenth century; 324: Eighteenth century to present. 

3260. The Industrial Revolution in England. (4) A study of the social, economic, and 
political causes and effects of the Industrial Revolution in England. Offered in London. 

History i?8 



328. History of the English Common Law. (4) A study of the origins and development of 
the English common law and its legacy to modern legal processes and principles. 

330. Race, Religion, and Sex in Early Modern Europe. (4) This course explores issues of 
race, ethnicity, and gender in Europe between 1400 and 1800. Topics include contact and 
conflict among Jews, Muslims, and Christians; marriage, the family, and sexuality; migra- 
tion and immigration; and slavery and conquest in early European colonies and empires. 

331. Russia: Origins to 1865. (4) A survey of the political, social, and economic history of 
Russia, from its origins to the period of the Great Reforms under Alexander II. 

332. Russia and the Soviet Union: 1865 to the Present. (4) A survey of patterns of 
socioeconomic change from the late imperial period to the present, the emergence of the 
revolutionary movement, and the development of Soviet rule from its establishment to its 
collapse. 

333. European Diplomacy, 1848-1914. (4) The diplomacy of the great powers, with some 
attention given to the role of publicity in international affairs. Topics include the unifica- 
tion of Italy and of Germany, the Bismarckian system, and the coming of World War I. 

337. Gender in Early America. (4) The history of gender roles from the colonial period to 
the mid-nineteenth century. Examines the social constructions of femininity and masculin- 
ity and their political and cultural significance. 

338. Gender in Modern America. (4) The history of gender relations from the late-nine- 
teenth century to the present. Analyzes the varying definitions of femininity and masculin- 
ity, the changing notions of sexuality, and the continuity and diversity of gender roles with 
special attention to race, class, and ethnicity. 

339. The History of American Medicine. (4) Analysis of the changing approaches to heal- 
ing in American history. Examines indigenous systems, the introduction of European 
methods, the attempts to professionalize in the nineteenth century, the incorporation of 
modern techniques, and the reemergence of natural approaches in the twentieth century. 

340. African American History. (4) The role of African Americans in the development of 
the United States, with particular attention to African heritage, forced migration, 
Americanization, and influence. 

341. History of Women in Modern Asia. (4) A survey of the political, economic, and cul- 
tural experiences of women in China, Taiwan, Japan, Vietnam, India, Pakistan, and 
Bangladesh from the mid-nineteenth century to the present. 

342. The Middle East before 1500. (4) A survey of Middle Eastern history from the rise 
of Islam to the emergence of the last great Muslim unitary states. The course provides an 
overview of political history with more in-depth emphasis on the development of Islamic 
culture and society in the pre-modern era. 

343. Imperial China. (4) A study of traditional China to 1850, with emphasis on social, 
cultural, and political institutions. 

344. Modern China. (4) A study of China from 1644 to the present. 

345. The Middle East since 1500. (4) A survey of modern Middle Eastern history from 
the collapse of the last great Muslim unitary states to the present day. Topics include the 



139 



History 



rise and demise of the Ottoman and Safvid empires, socio-political reform, the impact of 
colonialism, Islamic reform, the development of nationalism, and contemporary social 
and economic challenges. 

346. Japan before 1600. (4) A survey of Japanese history from early origins to the begin- 
ning of the Tokugawa shogunate. Covers the rise of the Yamato state, the age of the 
Court, the ascendancy of samurai and shoguns, the period of the Warring States, and the 
rule of Hideyoshi. 

3471. Japan During the Tokugawa Era. (4) A study of the years 1600-1868 when the 
Tokugawa shogunate governed Japan. Topics include the relative domestic peace and cul- 
tural vitality of the 17th and 18th centuries, as well as the intellectual and political fer- 
ment of the early 19th century. Taught in Hiratsuka, Japan (Tokai University), the course 
will incorporate visits to sites and museums connected with the Tokugawa era. 

347. Japan since World War II. (4) A survey of Japanese history since the outbreak of the 
Pacific War, with emphasis on social and cultural developments. Topics may include occu- 
pation and recovery of independence, the "1955 System," high-growth economics, and 
the problems of prosperity in recent years. 

348. Japan since 1600. (4) Tokugawa era; Meiji Restoration; industrialization and 
urbanization; relations with the West; World War II; occupation; Japan in the contempo- 
rary world. 

350. Global Economic History. (4) An overview of the growth and development of the 
world economy from precapitalist organizations to the present system of developed and 
underdeveloped states. 

351. United States Social History I. (4) Examines various aspects of American social his- 
tory from the colonial period to the mid-nineteenth century, with emphasis on immigra- 
tion, ethnicity, race, gender, sexuality, the family, religion, and life and culture. 

352. United States Social History II. (4) Examines various aspects of American social his- 
tory from the late-nineteenth century to the present, with emphasis on immigration, eth- 
nicity, race, gender, sexuality, the family, religion, and life and culture. 

353. Colonial English America, 1582-1774. (4) Determinative episodes, figures, alle- 
giances, apperceptions, and results of the period, organically considered. 

354. Revolutionary and Early National America, 1763-1815. (4) The American 
Revolution, its causes and effects, the Confederation, the Constitution, and the new 
nation. 

356. Jacksonian America, 1815-1850. (4) The United States in the age of Jackson, Clay, 
Calhoun, and Webster. A biographical approach. 

357. The Civil War and Reconstruction. (4) The political and military events of the war 
and the economic, social, and political readjustments which followed. 

358. The United States from Reconstruction to World War I. (2,4) National progress and 
problems during an era of rapid industrialization. The course may be divided into halves 
for two credits each: (a) the Gilded Age; (b) the Progressive Era. 



History jaq 



359. The United States from World War I through World War II. (4) The transition of 
America from World War I to 1945, with special emphasis on the significance of the New 
Deal and World War II. 

360. The United States since World War II. (4) Trends and changes in the nation from 
World War II to the present. 

361. Economic History of the United States. (4) The economic development of the United 
States from colonial beginnings to the present. 

362. American Constitutional History. (4) Origins of the Constitution, the controversies 
involving the nature of the Union, and constitutional readjustments to meet the new 
American industrialism. 

363. 364. The South. (4,4) Geography, population elements, basic institutions, and select- 
ed events. 

366. Studies in Historic Preservation. (4) An analysis of history museums and agencies 
and of the techniques of preserving and interpreting history through artifacts, restora- 
tions, and reconstructions. P — Permission of instructor. 

367, 368. North Carolina. (4,4) Selected phases of the development of North Carolina 
from the colonial period to the present. 367: To 1850; 368: Since 1850. 

369. Modern Military History. (4) Making war in the modern era, with special attention 
to the social context of military activity. 

370. Topics in North Carolina History. (4) A general chronological survey of North 
Carolina with emphasis on selected topics. 

371. Winston-Salem/Forsyth County. (4) A history of the Winston-Salem/Forsyth County 
area using techniques of local history including archives, museums, and oral history. 
Lectures, readings, and class projects. 

372. Introduction to African History. (4) An introduction to African history from the per- 
spective of the continent as a whole. The historical unity of the African continent and its 
relation to other continents will be stressed. 

373. History of Mexico. (4) An examination of the history of Mexico from the colonial 
period to the present. 

374. Protest and Rebellion in Latin America. (4) A study of the history of protest move- 
ments and rebellions in Latin America from primitive and agrarian revolts to mass work- 
ing class and socialist organizations. 

375. Modern Latin America. (4) A survey of Latin-American history since independence, 
with emphasis on the twentieth century. The course will concentrate chiefly on economics, 
politics, and race. 

376. Civil Rights and Black Consciousness Movements. (4) A social and religious history 
of the African-American struggle for citizenship rights and freedom from World War II to 
the present. (Also listed as Religion 341.) 

3760. Anglo-American Relations since 1940. (4) A study of the relations between the 
United States and Britain from 1940 to the present. Offered in London. 



141 History 



377. American Diplomatic History. (4) An introduction to the history of American diplo- 
macy since 1776, emphasizing the effects of public opinion on fundamental policies. 

378. Struggles for Freedom in Southern Africa and the United States. (4) Comparison of 
the liberatory movements in Southern Africa and the United States during the twentieth 
century. (Also listed as Religion 348.) 

379. Origins of The Americas. (4) A unified, comparative history of North, Central, and 
South America from ancient times to the present. 

380. America at Work. (4) This course examines the people who built America from 1750 
to 1945. Themes include free labor versus slave labor, the impact of industrialization, the 
racial and gendered realities of work, and the growth of organized labor and its political 
repercussions. 

381. 382. Preservation Practicum I, II. (4,4) Training in the techniques and skills of 
historical preservation. Emphasis will vary according to the specific site(s) involved. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

393, 394. American Foundations I, II. (4,4) Interdisciplinary study of American art, histo- 
ry, literature, and music. Using its collection of American art as the basis for study, 
Reynolda House Museum of American Art, in cooperation with Wake Forest University, 
invites twenty students to study with five professors from various disciplines through lec- 
tures, discussions, and concerts, including a study tour to New York City. (Taught in the 
summer; students enroll for both courses.) 

397. Historical Writing Tutorial. (2) Individual supervision of historical writing to 
improve a project initiated in History 288 or History 310. P — Permission of instructor. 
(Does not count toward major or minor requirements.) 

398. Individual Study. (1-4) A project in an area of study not otherwise available in the 
department; permitted upon departmental approval of petition presented by a quali- 
fied student. 

399. Directed Reading. (1-4) Concentrated reading in an area of study not otherwise 
available. P — Permission of instructor. 



History j_az 



Humanities 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

William S. Hamilton, Coordinator 

W.R. Kenan Jr. Professor of Humanities Allen Mandelbaum 

Reynolds Professor of American Studies Maya Angelou 

Associate Professors Robert L. Utley Jr., Ulrike Wiethaus 

Assistant Professor Candyce Leonard 

In order to offer capable students a forum which encourages the pursuit of ideas across 
the disciplinary lines of such fields as history, philosophy, literature, politics, religion, 
and the arts, the minor is offered in humanities. It requires a total of twenty credits. 
Candidates for the minor are required to take Humanities 280, Reason and Revelation, 
and 290, Innovation and Inclusivity. When these have been passed, the student is 
assigned a minor adviser who assists in planning the rest of the student's curriculum. In 
accordance with the plan, eight more credits are selected from courses in the humanities 
or related disciplines other than those being used by the student to fulfill divisional 
requirements of the College or the requirements of the major. The minor concludes with 
a four-credit project in Humanities 396 supervised by a member of the humanities facul- 
ty and reviewed by a committee of relevant faculty appointed by the coordinator of 
humanities; the project must represent the further pursuit of an idea or topic studied in 
one of the courses of the minor, and must successfully reflect the synthesis of views from 
at least two traditional disciplines. 

170. Understanding Japan. (4) Understanding Japanese culture and behavior from the 
structure of social units such as family, educational institutions, and sports, artistic, and 
professional organizations. 

Humanities courses 213-222 are designed to introduce students to works of literature 
which would not be included in their normal course of study. Each course includes a read- 
ing in translation often to twelve representative authors. 

213. Studies in European Literature. (4) Texts studied are by such authors as Dante, 
Montaigne, Cervantes, Goethe, Dostoevsky, and Camus. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

214. Contemporary Fiction. (4) Texts studied are by such authors as Mann, Sartre, 
Unamuno, Fuentes, Moravia, and Voinovich. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

215. Germanic and Slavic Literature. (4) Texts studied are by such authors as Von 
Eschenbach, Hoffmann, Turgenev, Dostoevsky, Ibsen, and Kafka. Satisfies a Division I 
requirement. 

216. Romance Literature. (4) Texts studied are by such authors as Boccaccio, Calderon, 
Flaubert, Machado de Assis, Gide, and Lampedusa. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

217. European Drama. (4) Texts studied are by such authors as Moliere, Garcia Lorca, 
Pirandello, Schiller, Brecht, Ibsen, and Beckett. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

218. Eastern European Literature. (4) Texts studied are by such authors as Moricz, 
Hasek, Bulgakov, Andric, Gombrowicz, Kundera, Ugresic, and Erofeev. Satisfies a 
Division I requirement. 



143 



Humanities 



219. Introduction to Japanese Literature. (4) Major works of poetry, drama and fiction 
from the classical and modern periods. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

221. Introduction to Chinese Literature. (4) Readings and discussions in fiction, drama 
and poetry from the traditional and modern periods. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

222. African and Caribbean Literature. (4) An examination of the negritude movement 
and the negro-African novel. Texts studied are by such authors as Aime Cesaire, Leopold 
Senghor, Ousmane Sembene, and Manama Ba. Satisfies a Division I requirement. 

2287. Viennese Culture from 1860 to 1914. (4) A study of late nineteenth and early 
twentieth century Vienna as reflected in the matrix of the city's civic and artistic life. 
Offered in Vienna. 

230. Women Writers in Contemporary Italy. (4) Readings and discussions of texts by 
women writers in post-fascist Italy that reflect the feminine perspective on issues in con- 
temporary Italian society and society at large. Authors include Naraini, Morante, Fallaci, 
Ginzburg, deCespedes, and Ortese. (Qualifies, with modifications, for the minor in 
Italian.) 

235. After Auschwitz: Holocaust Literature, Art, and Theology. (4) A survey of the ways 
in which novelists, poets, theologians, and culture critics have struggled to come to terms 
with the cataclysmic events of the Shoah. The course will consider textual, visual, and 
architectural responses such as poetry, films, memorials, and paintings. 

245. Interdisciplinary Seminar in Critical Thinking. (2) An investigation of cross- 
disciplinary issues. Designed to encourage experimental, interdisciplinary thinking and 
writing. 

251. The Asian- American Experience: Literature and Personal Narratives. (4) An intro- 
duction to the writings and narratives of Asian-Americans, examining the process of 
assimilation, the effects of immigration and cultural conflict on literary forms of expres- 
sion, and the formation of new cultural identities. 

2561. Beijing: A Study of Chinese Religion and Politics. (4) A study of the religion and 
politics in the recent history of China, beginning with the founding of present Beijing in 
the early Ming Dynasty. 

265. Gender, Spirituality, and Art. (4) An introduction to the current discussion of the 
nature of art and spiritual experience, with special attention to definitions of femininity 
and masculinity in the construction of symbols and religious meaning. 

2661. The Politics of Transition in the People's Republic of China. (4) A study of the 
sociopolitical geography of China beginning wtih the Communist revolution. Includes an 
examination of several contemporary Chinese policy problems. Taught only in China, 
Fall, 1999. 

280. Reason and Revelation. (4) An investigation of the intellectual roots of Western civiliza- 
tion as they are found in the emergence of philosophical universalism and Biblical monothe- 
ism. These distinctive approaches will be considered through a reading of such authors as 
Plato, Hesiod, Aristophanes, and St. Thomas Aquinas, and of selections from the Bible. 

282. Public Life and the Liberal Arts. (4) The course is devoted to topics of abiding public 



Humanities 144 



significance. Fundamental dilemmas and resolutions associated with each topic are exam- 
ined through a consideration of their treatment in the liberal arts tradition. "Politics and 
the Arts" and "Theory and Practice in Public Life" are representative topics. 

283. Foundations of Revolution in Modernity. (4) The subject as viewed through such 
representative writers as Machiavelli, Spinoza, Pascal, Hobbes, Locke, Rousseau, 
Flaubert, Eckermann, Hegel, Nietzsche, and Conrad, each of whom in a different way 
participated in the rejection of the teachings of both the Socratic tradition and the 
Christian church. 

285. Culture and Religion in Modern Native America. (4) An interdisciplinary survey of 
American Indian cultures, including the arts and literature, religions, and historical 
changes. Special emphasis is placed on the impact of the Conquista, encounters with 
Northern Atlantic societies, and contemporary developments. 

2871. Twentieth-Century Japanese Fiction. (4) Readings of representative works, primari- 
ly novels, by several of Japan's foremost twentieth-century writers, including Soseki, 
Tanizaki, Kawabata, Dazai, Mishima, Oe, and others. To be taught in Tokai, Fall, 1999. 

290. Innovation and Inclusivity. (4) An introduction to cultural innovation in the 
Twentieth Century. Written texts, visual arts, and performance art are analyzed through 
the perspectives of (1) paradigms such as psychoanalysis, Marxism, feminism, and libera- 
tion theology, (2) debates about political correctness and multiculturalism, and (3) strate- 
gies used by minority and non-Western voices. 

320. Perspectives on the Middle Ages. (4) A team-taught interdisciplinary course using a 
variety of literary, historical, and theoretical materials to examine one of the following: 
a.) Medieval Women; b.) Medieval Constructs of Gender, Race, and Class; c.) Love and 
War in the Middle Ages; d.) The Medieval Environment: Landscape and Culture. May be 
repeated for credit with different sub-topics. 

325. Ethics and the Professions. (4) An examination of the nature of a profession, and of 
ways in which ethical issues arise in the practice of particular professions and how they 
can be dealt with. Focus will be on standards of professional conduct and ways in which 
they contribute to the solution of ethical problems. Specific issues arising in specific pro- 
fessions, such as law, medicine, and education, will serve as detailed case studies for the 
purpose of discussion. 

337. World Poetry in Dramatic Performance. (2) A study, in translation, of ancient and 
contemporary poetry ranging from Japanese to Irish, African American, Spanish, 
German, Scottish, and others. Students will be required, after eight class meetings, to per- 
form in a public presentation. Pass/fail only. 

338. Selected Readings in African and African American Cultural History. (4) This course 
provides opportunity for selected readings in and study of African and African American 
cultural history. Informed and active participation of students in discussion of the read- 
ings is required. 

343. The Philosophy of Liberation in Literature. (4) The concept of freedom as found in 
the works of such writers as Frederick Douglass, Kobo Abe, Wole Soyinka, Germaine 
Greer, Paule Marshall, Franz Fanon, Garcia Lorca, and James Baldwin. 



145 



Humanities 



344. African Culture and Its Impact on the United States. (2) The influence of African cul- 
ture on American life will be studied in such areas as dance, music, political approaches, 
grammatical patterns, literature, and culinary preferences. Pass/fail only. 

347. Women Writers in Japanese Culture. (4) Critical analysis of classical, modern, and 
contemporary writings by Japanese women, with an exploration of the cultural setting in 
which they occurred. 

353. African and Caribbean Women Writers. (4) Critical analysis of fiction by female 
authors whose works concern women in Africa and its Caribbean diaspora. 

355. Forms and Expressions of Love. (4) Philosophical, religious, and psychological delin- 
eations of the forms of love; literary, dramatic, musical, and visual portrayals of love in 
selected works of art. (Also listed as Interdisciplinary Honors 249.) 

357. Images of Aging in the Humanities. (4) A multidisciplinary presentation and discus- 
sion of portrayals of aging in selected materials from several of the liberal arts: philosoph- 
ical and religious perspectives; selections from literature and the visual arts; historical 
development of perceptions of aging; imaging of aging in contemporary culture. (Also list- 
ed as Honors 257.) 

358. Studies in Contemporary Leadership. (4) An examination of contemporary leader- 
ship theory and its various applications in society. Students will engage in practical leader- 
ship exercises, read on a variety of leadership topics, and develop their own philosophy of 
leadership. A twenty-five contact-hour internship is required. 

360. The Promise and Perils of the Nuclear Age. (4) Scientific, moral, religious, and politi- 
cal perspectives on issues associated with nuclear power and nuclear weaponry. (Also list- 
ed as Interdisciplinary Honors 254.) 

361. Dante I. (2) A study of the Vita Nuova as apprenticeship to the Divina Commedia, 
and of the first half of the Divina Commedia as epic, prophecy, autobiography, and poet- 
ry, relating it to antiquity, Christianity, Dante's European present (the birth of modern 
languages and new intellectual and poetic forms), and Dante's own afterlife in the West. 

362. Dante II. (2) A study of the second half of the Divina Commedia as epic, prophecy, 
autobiography, and poetry, relating it to antiquity, Christianity, Dante's European present 
(the birth of modern languages and new intellectual and poetic forms), and Dante's own 
afterlife in the West. P — Humanities 361 or permission of instructor. 

365. Humanity and Nature. (4) A multidisciplinary exploration of relations of human 
beings to nature, and of scientific, economic, and political factors in current environmen- 
tal concerns. Selected religious, classical, and philosophical tests; works of visual art; 
selected discussions of ecology and human responsibility. (Also listed as Honors 265.) 

380. Literature, Film, and Society. (4) A study of major selected works of literature, main- 
ly American; of the films which have been based upon them; and of the social and politi- 
cal context in which they were read and seen. Texts include novels, stories, and plays by 
such writers as Dreiser, Lewis, Warren, Steinbeck, Hellman, Harper Lee, Wright, and 
Walker. P — Junior standing. 



Humanities 



146 



381. Independent Research in Asian Studies. (2-4) Supervised independent research pro- 
ject on a topic related to Asia. Requires the approval of both the instructor and the coor- 
dinator of Asian Studies. May be repeated for credit, but no more than four credits may 
count toward East Asian Studies or a minor in Asian Studies. 

382. Italian Cinema and Society. (4) A survey of some of Italy's greatest postwar films, 
with special attention to issues and problems in Italian society as treated by major direc- 
tors such as Fellini, DeSica, Rossellini, Antonioni, and Olmi. 

383. Italian Fascism in Novels and Films. (4) Description in the coordinator's office. 

385. Legends of Troy. (4) An interdisciplinary investigation of translations and transfor- 
mations of the Trojan legend from the Greeks through the Middle Ages and the 
Renaissance to the present. Texts, studied in English translation, are by such authors as 
Homer, Virgil, Ovid, Chaucer, Racine, and Giraudoux. 

390. Interdisciplinary Seminar on Aging. (2 or 4) A study of aging in an interdisciplinary 
context, including the biological, psychological, neurobiological, cognitive, health status, 
and social structural and demographic aspects of aging. P — Permission of instructor. 

396. Individual Study. (2-4) Individual projects in the humanities which continue study 
begun in regular courses. By prearrangement. 

Interdisciplinary Honors 

James P. Barefield, Coordinator 

A series of seminar courses of an interdisciplinary nature is open to qualified undergradu- 
ates. Students interested in admission to any one of these seminars, supervised by the 
Committee on Honors, should consult the coordinator or a member of the committee. 

Students who choose to participate in as many as four interdisciplinary seminars and 
who have a superior record may elect Honors 281, directed study culminating in an hon- 
ors paper and an oral examination. Those whose work has been superior in this course 
and who have achieved an overall grade point average of at least 3.0 in all college work 
may be graduated with the distinction "Honors in the Arts and Sciences." Students who 
choose to be candidates for departmental honors may not also be candidates for "Honors 
in the Arts and Sciences." 

Able students are normally encouraged to choose a departmental honors program 
rather than "Honors in the Arts and Sciences." As a result, most students elect to partici- 
pate in only one or two interdisciplinary seminars in which they are particularly interest- 
ed. The faculty participants for these seminars represent diverse academic disciplines. 

131, 132. Approaches to Human Experience I. (4,4) An inquiry into the nature and inter- 
relationships of several approaches to man's experience, represented by the work of three 
such minds as Leonardo da Vinci, Dante, Klee, Lorenz, Confucius, Dostoevsky, Descartes, 
Goya, Mozart, Jefferson, and Bohr. Seminar discussion based on primary and secondary 
sources, including musical works and paintings. Written reports and a term paper 
required. Offered in alternate years. 



147 



Interdisciplinary Honors 



133, 134. Approaches to Human Experience II. (4,4) A parallel course to Honors 131, 
132, concentrating on the work of a different set of figures such as Einstein, Galileo, 
Keynes, Pascal, Camus, Picasso, Ibsen, Stravinsky, Sophocles, and Bach. Offered in alter- 
nate years. 

233. Darwinism and the Modern World. (4) A study of the Darwinian theory of evolution 
and the impact of evolution and evolutionary thought on fields such as economics, poli- 
tics, psychology, literature and the other arts, and philosophy. 

235. The Ideal Society. (4) Man's effort to establish or imagine the ideal community, state, 
or society; principles of political and social organization; changing goals and values. 

236. The Force of Impressionism. (4) Impressionism and its impact on modern painting 
and literature, with attention to origins and theories of style. Painters to include Manet, 
Monet, Renoir, Degas, and Cezanne. Writers to include Baudelaire, Flaubert, Mallarme, 
James, Pound, Joyce, and Woolf. 

237. The Scientific Outlook. (4) An exploration of the origins and development of the sci- 
entific method and some of its contemporary applications in the natural and social sci- 
ences and the humanities. 

238. Romanticism. (4) Romanticism as a recurrent characteristic of mind and art and as a 
specific historical movement in Europe and America in the late eighteenth and nineteenth 
centuries. Emphasis on primary materials in philosophy, literature, music, and painting. 

239. Man and the Irrational. (4) The phenomenon of the irrational, with emphasis on its 
twentieth century manifestations but with attention also to its presence in other centuries 
and cultures. Philosophy, religion, literature, psychology, politics, and the arts are explored. 

240. Adventures in Self-Understanding. (4) Examination and discussion of significant 
accounts of the quest for understanding of the self, in differing historical periods, cultural 
contexts, and genres. Among figures who may be discussed are Augustine, Dante, Gandhi, 
Montaigne, Descartes, Pascal, and selected modern writers. 

241. The Tragic View. (4) The theory of tragedy in ancient and modern times; the expres- 
sion of the tragic in literature, art, music, theatre, and film. 

242. The Comic View. (4) The theory of comedy in ancient and modern times; the expres- 
sion of the comic in literature, art, music, theatre, and film. 

244. Man and the Structure of the Universe. (4) An investigation of various conceptions 
of the universe and their implications for man. Study not necessarily limited to the cos- 
mologies of Ptolemy, Copernicus, and their modern successors, but may also include theo- 
ries such as the Babylonian, Mayan, and Taoist. 

246. Man and the Environment. (4) An interdisciplinary examination of man and society 
in relation to the environment. 

247. The Mythic View. (4) The nature of myth through creation and hero myths; the uses 
to which myths have been put in different historical periods; various modern explanations 
of myth (literary, religious, anthropological, psychoanalytic, social, and historical). 

248. The Ironic View. (4) An investigation of the ironic view of life in literature, art, histo- 
ry, theater, and film. 



Interdisciplinary Honors 



148 



249. Forms and Expressions of Love. (4) Philosophical, religious, and psychological delin- 
eations of the forms of love; literary, dramatic, musical, and visual portrayals of love in 
selected works of art. (Also listed as Humanities 355.) 

250. Ethical Dilemmas in the Arts and Sciences. (4) An exploration of contemporary 
issues and controversies in the sciences and art, particularly those involved with ethical 
questions resulting from new concepts and discoveries. 

254. The Promise and Perils of the Nuclear Age. (4) Scientific, moral, religious, and politi- 
cal perspectives on issues associated with nuclear power and nuclear weaponry. 

257. Images of Aging in the Humanities. (4) A multidisciplinary presentation and discus- 
sion of portrayals of aging in selected materials from several of the liberal arts: philosoph- 
ical and religious perspectives; selections from literature and the visual arts; historical 
development of perceptions of aging; imaging of aging in contemporary culture. (Also list- 
ed as Humanities 357.) 

258. Venice in Art and Literature. (4) An exploration of what Venice has meant to non- 
native artists and writers, and what they have made of it. Artists and writers include 
Byron, Turner, Ruskin, Henry James, Sargent, Whistler, Proust, Mann, and others. 

265. Humanity and Nature. (4) A multidisciplinary exploration of relations of human 
beings to nature, and of scientific, economic, and political factors in current environmen- 
tal concerns. Selected religious, classical, and philosophical texts; works of visual art; 
selected discussions of ecology and human responsibility. (Also listed as Humanities 365.) 

281. Directed Study. (4) Readings on an interdisciplinary topic approved by the 
Committee on Honors; presentation of a major research or interpretive paper based on 
these readings, under the direction of a faculty member; an oral examination on the topic, 
administered by the faculty supervisor and the Committee on Honors. Eligible students 
who wish to take this course must submit a written request to the Committee on Honors 
by the end of the junior year. Not open to candidates for departmental honors. 



149 



Interdisciplinary Honors 



International Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Pia Christina Wood, Coordinator 

Associate Professor Ian M. Taplin (Sociology) 

The minor in International Studies consists of a total of twenty credits. Candidates for the 
minor are required to take International Studies 150 and sixteen other credits in 
International Studies from an approved list available in the Center for International 
Studies. These may include any INS course other than INS 100* or 101*. No more than 
eight of the twenty credits for the minor can be taken in a single department. Study of a 
foreign language beyond the basic requirements is strongly recommended, as is study 
abroad. Students should consult with the Director of International Studies as soon as they 
declare the minor. For more information contact the Center for International Studies or 
the registrar's office. 

INS 150. Introduction to International Studies. (4) Applies theoretical assumptions and 
methods to the analysis of selected global issues. 

INS 210. Japanese and American Culture: A Cross-Cultural Comparison. (4) An explo- 
ration and comparison of values, behavior, and beliefs in Japanese and American culture, 
with special attention to such topics as education, gender differences, and social hierarchy. 

INS 220. Forms of Orientalism. (4) The history of the representational practices of 
Orientalism, the problem of cultural representation, and the relationship between Western 
intellectual constructions of the Orient and Western colonialism. Case studies, particular- 
ly of the Middle East and the Indian subcontinent. 

INS 221. The Causes of War and the Conditions of Peace. (4) An interdisciplinary exami- 
nation of the causes of violent international conflict and of the conditions for maintaining 
or restoring peace. Key concepts and issues will be explored through an extensive use of 
case studies of actual conflicts. 

INS 363/SOC 363. Global Capitalism. (4) An analysis of changing patterns of industrial 
organization, market, and labor relations, and institutional frameworks that have resulted 
from the growth of an integrated global capitalist economy. 

The following courses do not count for the minor but are designed to ensure that students 
who study overseas receive sufficient credit to make satisfactory progress toward gradua- 
tion: International Studies 100 and 101. 

*100. Study Abroad. (1-4) Credit awarded to ensure that students participating in a full- 
time overseas program, as verified by the Center for International Studies, receive credit 
equal to a full semester's work on campus. (A full semester's work at Wake Forest is 
defined, for this purpose, as sixteen credits.) P/F grade only. 

*101. Overseas Study. (1-3) Directed reading and/or field work as part of an approved 
overseas program under the supervision of the program director or the Center for 
International Studies. The keeping of a journal and submission of an end of program eval- 
uation are required. P — Permission of the instructor. 



International Studies i cq 



Italian Studies 

(Foreign Area Study) 

Antonio Vitti (Romance Languages), Coordinator 

A semester in Venice or another approved course of study in Italy (or summer program at 
Middlebury, Vermont) is required. Students must take Italian through the 215 level, plus 
three courses from the following groups, at least one each from Groups II and III. (See 
course descriptions under appropriate listings.) 

I. Literature 

Classics 264. Greek and Roman Comedy. (4) 

272. A Survey of Latin Literature. (4) 

Humanities 213. Studies in European Literature. (4) 

(appropriate topics and approval) 

214. Contemporary Fiction. (4) (appropriate topics and approval) 

216. Romance Literature. (4) 

217. European Drama. (4) (appropriate topics and approval) 
230. Women Writers in Contemporary Italy. (4) 

361, 362. Dante I and II. (2,2) 
Italian 216. Introduction to Italian Literature II. (4) 

(or any Italian course above 215) 

II. Fine Arts 

Art 245. Roman Art. (4) 

268. Italian Renaissance Art. (4) 

2693. Venetian Renaissance Art. (4) (offered in Venice) 
Humanities 382. Italian Cinema and Society. (4) 

383. Italian Fascism in Novels and Films. (4) 

Music 181. Music History I. (3) 

182. Music History II. (3) 

206. Survey of Opera. (4) 

220. Seminar in Medieval and Renaissance Music. (3,4) 

221. Seminar in Baroque Music. (3,4) 

III. History and the Social Sciences 
Classics 271. Roman Civilization. (3) 

History 222. The Renaissance and Reformation (4) 

2253. History of Venice. (4) (offered in Venice) 

2263. Venetian Society and Culture. (4) (offered in Venice) 

335, 336. Italy (4,4) 

398. Individual Study (1-4) (if directed toward Italy) 

Students may also take appropriate courses in anthropology, economics, politics, psychol- 
ogy, religion, and sociology in the Venice program, and appropriate individual study top- 
ics in these departments. To graduate with a Certificate in Italian studies, students must 
contact the registrar's office during the spring semester of the senior year. Request that a 
copy of your transcript be sent to the Department of Romance Languages for approval. 



151 



Italian Studies 



Accounting 


110. 


Communication 


115. 




211. 




245. 


Economics 


150. 




221. 



Journalism 

(Minor) 

Wayne King, Coordinator 

Adjunct Lecturers Justin Catanoso, Michael Horn 

The minor in journalism consists of twenty credits, including Journalism 270, 276, and 
either 272 or 280; Journalism 284 does not count toward the minor. In addition to the 
required twenty credits, minors in journalism are strongly advised to take Economics 150 
and 221. The remaining courses must be selected from among the following: 

Introduction to Financial and Management Accounting (4) 

Writing for Radio-TV Film (4) 

Media Production: Studio (4) 

Introduction to Mass Communication (4) 

Introduction to Economics (4) 

Public Finance (4) 

Journalism 272 or 280. (whichever was not chosen as a required course) 

278. History of Journalism (4) 
282. Investigative Reporting (4) 
Politics 217. Politics and the Mass Media (4) 

Journalism Courses 

270. Introduction to Journalism. (4) Fundamentals of news-writing, news judgment, and 
news gathering, including computer-assisted reporting and research. Intensive in-class 
writing. 

272. Editing. (4) A laboratory course in copy-editing, headline-writing, typography, and 
make-up; practice on video display terminal. P — English 270. 

273. Writing for Radio-TV-Film. (4) An introduction to writing for radio, television, and 
film. Emphasis will be on informational and persuasive writing (news, features, public ser- 
vice announcements, commercials, political announcements, news analyses, commen- 
taries, and editorials). (Also listed as Communication 115.) 

274. Media Production: Studio. (4) An introduction to the production of audio and video 
media projects. Multiple camera studio production emphasized. Lecture/laboratory. (Also 
listed as Communication 211.) 

275. Introduction to Mass Communication. (4) A historical survey of mass media and an 
examination of major contemporary media issues. (Also listed as Communication 245.) 

276. Advanced Journalism. (4) Intensive practice in writing various types of newspaper 
stories, including the feature article. Limited to students planning careers in journalism. 
P — English 270 or permission of instructor. 



Journalism 1^2 



277. Politics and the Mass Media. (4) Exploration of the relationship between the political 
system and the mass media. Two broad concerns will be the regulation of the mass media 
and the impact of media on political processes and events. (Also listed as Politics 217.) 

278. History of Journalism. (4) A study of the development of American journalism and 
its English origins, with attention to broad principles of mass communication from its 
beginnings through the Internet. 

280. Journalism, Ethics, and Law. (4) Explores ethical problems confronting journalists, 
including such things as the public's right to know, invasion of privacy, censorship, cover- 
age of politics and elections, objectivity, and race, gender, and bias in news reporting, 
against a background of laws pertaining to areas such as libel and national security. 
P — English 270 or permission of instructor. 

282. Investigative Reporting. (4) Explores the methods and resources used in investigative 
journalism — tracing individuals through public records, Freedom of Information Act 
requests, and specialized interview techniques. P — Permission of instructor. 

284. The Essay. (2) Primarily for those interested in writing for publication. Emphasis on 
writing techniques. 

286. Writing for Public Relations and Advertising. (2,4) Principles and techniques of pub- 
lic relations and applied advertising. Students use case studies to develop public relations 
and advertising strategies. Permission of Instructor. (Also listed as Communication 117.) 

298. Internship. (2) A course designed to assist students in gaining practical experience in 
news-related enterprises, under faculty supervision. 

299. Individual Study. (2-4) A course of independent study with faculty guidance. By pre- 
arrangement. 



Latin American Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 
Mary Friedman (Romance Languages), Coordinator 

The minor in Latin American studies provides an opportunity for students to undertake a 
multidisciplinary study of the history, geography, economics, politics, and culture of Latin 
America and the Caribbean. It consists of a total of twenty credits, only four of which 
may count toward the student's major. Candidates for the minor are required to take 
Latin American Studies 210, Introduction to Latin American Studies. In addition, candi- 
dates must elect at least sixteen credits of coursework on Latin America. No more than 
eight of these sixteen credits may be in a single discipline. 

Candidates should demonstrate proficiency in Spanish or Portuguese either by com- 
pleting Spanish courses through the 213 level or by undergoing an oral proficiency inter- 
view with a member of the faculty of the Department of Romance Languages. 

210. Introduction to Latin American Studies. (4) Introduction to the historical, economic, 
cultural, and social issues which shape Latin America. 



jf2 Latin American Studies 



220. Afro-Cuban Cultural Expressions. (4) A comprehensive study of Cuban culture with 
a concentration on the artistic manifestations of Afro-Cuban religions. Students study lit- 
erature, art, film, music, and popular culture to analyze how Afro-Cuban culture consti- 
tutes national culture. 

310. Special Topics in Latin American Studies. (4) Selected topics in Latin American 
Studies; topics vary from year to year. 

Students may choose from the following list of electives in designing their minor: 



Anthropology 


383, 




385, 


Economics 


251. 




252. 




258. 


History 


373. 




374. 




375. 


Music 


210. 


Politics 


236. 




242. 




292. 


Spanish 


218. 




219. 




223. 




319. 




329. 




351. 




353. 




354. 




361. 




362. 




363. 




364. 




365. 




367. 




369. 



384. Field Research in Cultural Anthropology. (4) 

386. Special Problems Seminar.* (4) 

International Trade. (4) 

International Finance. (4) 

Economic Growth and Development. (4) 

History of Mexico. (4) 

Protest and Rebellion in Latin America. (4) 

Modern Latin America. (4) 

Survey of Latin American Music. (4) 

Government and Politics in Latin America. (4) 

Problems in Comparative Politics.* (4) 

Seminar in Comparative Politics.* (4) 

Literary and Cultural Studies of Spanish America. (4) 

Grammar and Composition. (4) 

Latin American Civilization. (4) 

Advanced Grammar and Composition. (4) 

Introduction to Spanish for Business. (4) 

Transgressing Borders: Identity in Latin American and U.S. Latino 

Literature. (4) 

Indigenous Myth in Spanish American Literary Art. (4) 

The Social Canvas of Gabriel Garcia Marquez and Pablo 

Neruda. (4) 

Latin American Cinema. (4) 

Spanish American Poetry. (4) 

Contemporary Spanish American Theatre. (4) 

Spanish American Short Story. (4) 

Spanish American Novel. (4) 

Colonial Spanish America. (4) 

Imagined "White" Nations: Race and Color in Latin America. (4) 



Five-Year BA/MA Degree Program Option. Students who choose to minor in Latin 
American Studies have the opportunity to pursue a joint BA/MA program in conjunction 
with the Center for Latin American Studies at Georgetown University in Washington, D.C. 
This program allows outstanding students interested in Latin America to begin work 
towards an interdisciplinary master's degree in Latin American Studies while still under- 



Latin American Studies j<za 



graduates at Wake Forest, and to complete both degrees within a five-year period. The 
bachelor of arts degree is awarded by Wake Forest, while the master's degree is awarded by 
Georgetown. See pages 67 and 181 of the bulletin for complete details. Interested students 
should contact the five-year degree program coordinator, Peter Siavelis, assistant professor 
of politics. 



Linguistics 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 
M. Stanley Whitley (Romance Languages), Coordinator 

The interdisciplinary minor in linguistics requires Linguistics 150, Introduction to 
Linguistics, and sixteen additional credits. Students minoring in linguistics are strongly 
encouraged to study foreign languages, achieving proficiency in at least one, and social 
and behavioral sciences. The minor may be usefully combined with a major in a foreign 
language, English, anthropology (or other social science), philosophy, or communication. 

The sixteen credits in addition to Linguistics 150 may be chosen from the following 
three groups: linguistics courses, historical linguistics, and related topics. It is strongly rec- 
ommended that at least one course be from historical linguistics. 

Linguistics Courses 

150. Introduction to Linguistics. (4) The social phenomenon of language: how it originat- 
ed and developed, how it is learned and used, its relationship to other kinds of behavior; 
types of language (oral, written, signed) and language families; analysis of linguistic data; 
social issues of language use. 

231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) Analyses of social and psychological 
factors related to gender differences in Japanese language usage. (Also listed as Women's 
Studies 231.) 

301. Semantics and Language in Communication. (4) A study of how meaning is created 
by sign processes. Among the topics studied are language theory, semiotics, speech act the- 
ory, and pragmatics. (Also listed as Communication 301.) 

310. Sociolinguistics and Dialectology. (4) Study of variation in language: effects of 
regional background, social class, ethnic group, gender, and setting; social attitudes 
toward language; outcomes of linguistic conflicts in the community; evolution of research 
methods for investigating language differences and the diffusion of change. P — Linguistics 
150 or permission of instructor. 

330. Introduction to Psycholinguistics and Language Acquisition. (4) A psychological 
and linguistic study of the mental processes underlying the acquisition and use of lan- 
guage; how children acquire the structure of language and how adults make use of lin- 
guistic systems. 



ire Linguistics 



340. Topics in Linguistics. (4) An interdisciplinary study of selected topics, such as mor- 
phology, phonology/phonetics, syntax, historical linguistics, history of linguistic theory, 
semiotics, and ethnolinguistics, issues in Asian linguistics, language and gender. 
P — Linguistics 150 or permission of instructor. 

351. Comparative Communication. (2,4) A comparison of communicative and linguistic 
processes in one or more national cultures with those of the United States. (Also listed as 
Communication 351.) 

351 A Japan 

35 IB Russia 

351 C Great Britain 

35 ID Multiple Countries 

351 E China (Also listed as Linguistics 351) 

375. Philosophy of Language. (4) A study of such philosophical issues about language as 
truth and meaning, reference and description, proper names, indexicals, modality, tense, 
the semantic paradoxes, and the differences between languages and other sorts of sign sys- 
tems. P — Permission of instructor. (Also listed as Philosophy 375.) 

383. Language Engineering: Localization & Terminology. (4) Introduction to the process 
of making a product linguistically and culturally appropriate to the target locale, and to 
computer-assisted terminology management. Surveys applications in translation technolo- 
gy. Taught in English. P — Permission of instructor. 

398, 399. Individual Study. (1-4,1-4) A reading and research course designed to meet the 
needs of selected students, to be carried out under the supervision of a faculty member in 
the linguistics minor program. P — Linguistics 150 and permission of instructor. 

Historical Linguistics 

(See course descriptions under appropriate department listings.) 

English 304. History of the English Language. (4) 

Russian 232. The History of the Russian Language. (4) 

Spanish 321. History and Structure of the Spanish Language. (4) 

Related Topics 

(See course descriptions under appropriate department listings.) 

Classics 220. Greek and Latin in Current Use. (3) 

Com. 351. Comparative Communication. (2,4) 

English 390. The Structure of English. (4) 

French 222. French Phonetics. (4) 

Russian 230. The Structure of Russian. (4) 

Spanish 322. Spanish Phonology. 4) 

Students intending to minor in linguistics should consult the coordinator of linguistics in 
the Department of Romance Languages, preferably during their sophomore year. 



Linguistics jc£ 



Mathematics 

Richard D. Carmichael, Chair 

Reynolds Professor Robert J. Plemmons 

Wake Forest Professor John V. Baxley 

Professors Richard D. Carmichael, Elmer K. Hayashi, Fredric T. Howard, 

Ellen E. Kirkman, James Kuzmanovich, J. Gaylord May 

Associate Professors Edward E. Allen, James L. Norris III, Stephen B. Robinson 

Assistant Professors Hugh N. Howards, Miaohua Jiang 

Visiting Assistant Professors Richard H. Hammack, David W. Lyons 

Instructors Janice Blackburn, Jule M. Connolly, David C. Wilson 

A major in mathematics can be achieved by satisfying the requirements listed below for 
either the bachelor of arts or bachelor of science in mathematics. Lower division students 
are urged to consult a member of the departmental faculty before enrolling in courses 
other than those satisfying Division II requirements. 

The bachelor of arts in mathematics requires Mathematics 111, 112, 113, 121, 211 or 
311, and 221 with at least four additional four-credit courses numbered higher than 113 
(excluding 381), at least two of which must be numbered above 300. 

The bachelor of science in mathematics requires Mathematics 111, 112, 113, 121, 
221, 311, 391, and 392 with at least five additional four-credit courses numbered higher 
than 113 (excluding 381), at least three of which must be numbered above 300. 

A minor in mathematics requires Mathematics 111, 112, either 113 or 121, and three 
other courses of at least four credits each numbered higher than Mathematics 106, two of 
which must be numbered above 200. Neither Mathematics 301, 302, 303, or 304 can 
count as a course for this minor, but any pair may be so counted. Credit is not allowed for 
both Mathematics 113 and 301; for both Mathematics 121 and 302; or for both 
Mathematics 303 and 317. 

A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in courses which comprise a major or minor 
in the department is required for graduation with any major or minor which the depart- 
ment offers. 

The department regularly schedules activities in mathematics for students that 
enhance the course offerings. Examples are participation in the annual Putnam examina- 
tion and the COMAP contest in mathematical modeling; meetings of the mathematics 
club; seminars and courses which build upon the regularly scheduled course offerings; and 
student research with faculty. 

The Department of Mathematics and the Department of Economics offer a joint 
major leading to a bachelor of science degree in mathematical economics. This interdisci- 
plinary program, consisting of no more than fifty-six credits, offers the student an oppor- 
tunity to apply mathematical methods to the development of economic theory, models, 
and quantitative analysis. The major has the following course requirements: Mathematics 
111, 112, 113, 121, 254, 255; Economics 150, 205, 207, 210, 211, 215, 218; and three 
additional courses chosen with the approval of the program advisers. Students selecting 
the joint major must receive permission from both the Department of Mathematics and 
the Department of Economics. 



157 



Mathematics 



The Department of Mathematics and the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy offer a joint major leading to a bachelor of science degree in mathematical 
business. This interdisciplinary program, consisting of no more than fifty-six credits, pre- 
pares students for careers in business with a strong background in mathematics. The 
major has the following course requirements: Mathematics 253, 256, 301 (or 113), 302 
(or 121), 353; Business 211, 221, 231, 241, 251, 261, 292; and a minimum of two addi- 
tional four-credit courses chosen from among mathematics and business, not both courses 
chosen from business, with the mathematics courses being chosen from four-credit cours- 
es at the 300 level or higher, excluding 381. The following courses are prerequisites for 
admission into this major: Mathematics 111, 112, Accounting 111, 112, Business 100, 
Economics 150, and Communication 110. Computer Science 111, 112, and Mathematics 
251 are strongly recommended electives. Students electing this joint major must receive 
permission from both the Department of Mathematics and the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy. To graduate from Wake Forest University with a major in 
mathematical business, the student must satisfy the requirements for graduation of both 
the Department of Mathematics and the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy. Refer to the description in this bulletin for the admission, continuation, and 
graduation requirements of the Calloway School. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in mathematics or the joint majors. To be graduated with the designation 
"Honors in Mathematics," "Honors in Mathematical Business," or "Honors in 
Mathematical Economics," students must satisfactorily complete a senior research paper. 
To graduate with "Honors in Mathematics" or "Honors in Mathematical Business," 
majors must have a minimum grade point average of 3.5 in the major and 3.0 in all col- 
lege course work. For additional information, members of the departmental faculty 
should be consulted. 

Students who are enrolled at Wake Forest may not take courses in mathematics at 
other institutions to satisfy divisional requirements. 

105. Fundamentals of Algebra and Trigonometry. (2,3, or 4) A review of the essentials of 
algebra and trigonometry. Admission by permission only (generally, a student must have 
taken fewer than three years of high school mathematics to be eligible for admission). Not 
to be counted toward the major or minor in mathematics. 

106. Calculus Foundations. (5) Functions, the trigonometric functions, limits, continuity, 
derivatives, differentials, anti-derivatives, the fundamental theorem of calculus. Intended 
for students with no previous calculus experience; all others should take Mathematics 111 
or higher, as appropriate. In particular, credit is not allowed to students who have taken 
the AB, BC, or IB advanced placement calculus test. Course includes evaluation of pre-cal- 
culus skills. 

109. Elementary Probability and Statistics. (5 or 4) Probability and distribution functions, 
means and variances, and sampling distributions. Lab — two hours. 

111. Calculus with Analytic Geometry I. (5) A review of differential calculus, followed by 
a complete treatment of integral calculus, including applications, the transcendental 



Mathematics jcg 



functions, techniques of integration, indeterminate forms, improper integrals, and polar 
coordinates. Intended for students with previous calculus experience. 

112. Calculus with Analytic Geometry II. (5) Sequences, Taylor's formula, and infinite 
series, including power series. Basic multivariable calculus, including parametric equations, 
partial derivatives with applications to optimization problems, and double integrals. 

113. Multivariable Calculus. (4) The calculus of vector functions, including geometry of 
Euclidean space, differentiation, extrema, line integrals, multiple integrals, and Green's, 
Stokes', and divergence theorems. Credit not allowed for both Mathematics 113 and 301. 

117. Discrete Mathematics. (4) An introduction to various topics in discrete mathematics 
applicable to computer science including sets, relations, Boolean algebra, propositional logic, 
functions, computability, proof techniques, graph theory, and elementary combinatorics. 

121. Linear Algebra I. (4) Vectors and vector spaces, linear transformations and matrices, 
determinants, eigenvalues, and eigenvectors. Credit not allowed for both 121 and 302. 

165. Problem Solving Seminar. (1 or 2, P/F) A weekly seminar designed for students who 
wish to participate in mathematical competition such as the annual Putnam examination. 
Not to be counted toward any major or minor offered by the department. May be repeat- 
ed for credit. 

211. Advanced Calculus. (4) A rigorous proof-oriented development of important ideas in 
calculus. Limits and continuity, sequences and series, pointwise and uniform convergence, 
derivatives and integrals. Credit not allowed for both Mathematics 211 and 311. 

221. Modern Algebra I. (4) An introduction to modern abstract algebra through the study 
of groups, rings, integral domains, and fields. P — Mathematics 121. 

251. Ordinary Differential Equations. (4) Linear equations with constant coefficients, lin- 
ear equations with variable coefficients, and existence and uniqueness theorems for first 
order equations. P — Mathematics 112. 

253. Operations Research. (4) Mathematical models and optimization techniques. Studies 
in allocation, simulation, queuing, scheduling, and network analysis. P — Mathematics 111. 

254. Optimization Theory. (2) Unconstrained and constrained optimization problems; 
Lagrange multiplier methods; sufficient conditions involving bordered Hessians; inequali- 
ty constraints; Kuhn-Tucker conditions; applications primarily to problems in economics. 
P — Mathematics 113 and Mathematics 121. 

255. Dynamical Systems. (2) An introduction to optimal control, including the Pontryagin 
maximum principle, and systems of nonlinear differential equations, particularly phase 
space methods. Applications to problems in economics, including optimal management of 
renewable resources. P — Mathematics 113 and Mathematics 121. 

256. Statistical Methods. (4) A study of statistical methods that have proved useful in 
many different disciplines. These methods include tests of model assumptions, regression, 
general linear models, nonparametric alternatives, and analysis of data collected over 
time. Knowledge of matrix algebra is desirable but not necessary. 

301. Vector Analysis. (2) Vector functions, partial derivatives, line and multiple integrals, 
Green's theorem, Stokes' theorem, divergence theorem. Not to be counted toward any 



I co Mathematics 



major offered by the department except for the major in mathematical business. Credit 
not allowed for both Mathematics 113 and 301. P — Mathematics 112. 

302. Matrix Algebra. (2) Matrices, determinants, solutions of linear equations, special 
matrices, eigenvalues and eigenvectors of matrices. Not to be counted toward any major 
offered by the department except for the major in mathematical business. Credit not 
allowed for both 121 and 302. 

303. Complex Variables. (2) Topics in analytic function theory, Cauchy's theorem, Taylor 
and Laurent series, residues. Not to be counted toward any major offered by the depart- 
ment. Credit not allowed for both 303 and 317. P — Mathematics 112. 

304. Applied Partial Differential Equations. (2) The separation of variables technique for 
the solution of the wave, heat, Laplace, and other partial differential equations with the 
related study of special functions and Fourier series. Not to be counted toward any major 
offered by the department. P — Mathematics 251. 

311, 312. Introductory Real Analysis I, II. (4,4) Limits and continuity in metric spaces, 
sequences and series, differentiation and Riemann-Stieltjes integration, uniform conver- 
gence, power series and Fourier series, differentiation of vector functions, implicit and 
inverse function theorems. Credit not allowed for both Mathematics 211 and 311. 

317. Complex Analysis I. (4) Analytic functions, Cauchy's theorem and its consequences, 
power series, and residue calculus. Credit not allowed for both 303 and 317. P — 
Mathematics 113. 

322. Modern Algebra II. (4) A continuation of modern abstract algebra through the study 
of additional properties of groups, rings, and fields. P — Mathematics 221. 

324. Linear Algebra II. (4) A thorough treatment of vector spaces and linear transforma- 
tions over an arbitrary field, canonical forms, inner product spaces, and linear groups. 
P — Mathematics 121 and Mathematics 221. 

326. Numerical Linear Algebra. (4) Numerical methods for solving matrix and related 
problems in science and engineering. Topics will include systems of linear equations, least 
squares methods, and eigenvalue computations. Special emphasis given to parallel matrix 
computations. Beginning knowledge of a programming language, such as Pascal, FOR- 
TRAN, or C, is required. P — Mathematics 112 and Mathematics 121. 

331. Geometry. (4) An introduction to axiomatic geometry including a comparison of 
Euclidean and non-Euclidean geometries. 

334. Differential Geometry. (4) Introduction to the theory of curves and surfaces in two 
and three dimensional space, including such topics as curvature, geodesies, and minimal 
surfaces. P — Mathematics 113. 

345, 346. Elementary Theory of Numbers I, II. (4,4; Properties of integers, including con- 
gruences, primitive roots, quadratic residues, perfect numbers, Pythagorean triples, sums 
of squares, continued fractions, Fermat's Last Theorem, and the Prime Number Theorem. 

347. Graph Theory. (4) Paths, circuits, trees, planar graphs, spanning trees, graph color- 
ing, perfect graphs, Ramsey theory, directed graphs, enumeration of graphs, and graph 
theoretic algorithms. 



Mathematics \6q 



348, 349. Combinatorial Analysis I, II. (4,4) Enumeration techniques, generating func- 
tions, recurrence formulas, the principle of inclusion and exclusion, Polya theory, graph 
theory, combinatorial algorithms, partially ordered sets, designs, Ramsey theory, symmet- 
ric functions, and Schur functions. 

352. Partial Differential Equations. (4) A detailed study of partial differential equations, 
including the heat, wave, and Laplace equations, using methods such as separation of 
variables, characteristics, Green's functions, and the maximum principle. P — Mathematics 
113 and Mathematics 251. 

353. Mathematical Models. (4) Development and application of probabilistic and deter- 
ministic models. Emphasis given to constructing models which represent systems in the 
social, behavioral, and management sciences. 

355. Introduction to Numerical Methods. (4) Numerical computations on modern com- 
puter architectures; floating point arithmetic and round-off error. Programming in a scien- 
tific/engineering language (C or FORTRAN). Algorithms and computer techniques for 
the solution of problems such as roots of functions, approximation, integration, systems 
of linear equations and least squares methods. Credit not allowed for both Mathematics 
355 and Computer Science 355. P — Mathematics 112, Mathematics 121, and Computer 
Science 111. 

357, 358. Mathematical Statistics I, II. (4,4) Probability distributions, mathematical 
expectation, sampling distributions, estimation and testing of hypotheses, regression, cor- 
relation, and analysis of variance. C — Mathematics 112, or P — Permission of instructor. 

361. Selected Topics. (2,3, or 4) Topics in mathematics which are not considered in regu- 
lar courses or which continue study begun in regular courses. Content varies. 

381. Individual Study. (2,3, or 4) A course of independent study directed by a faculty 
adviser. By prearrangement. 

391. Senior Seminar Preparation. (1) Independent study or research directed by a faculty 
advisor by pre-arrangement with the adviser. 

392. Senior Seminar Presentation. (1) Preparation of a paper, followed by a one-hour oral 
presentation based upon work in Mathematics 391. 



l6l Mathematics 



Medieval Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Gillian Overing and Gale Sigal (English), Coordinators 

The interdisciplinary minor in medieval studies requires twenty-four credits, chosen from 
at least three different departments. Courses from the student's major may count in the 
minor. Students are encouraged, but not required, to attend the six-week Summer Medieval 
Program at Oxford University in England, for which they receive six credits (two courses) 
which count toward the minor. (For details about application to the Oxford program, and 
possible financial aid, consult Gale Sigal in the English department.) Courses may be cho- 
sen from the following list. (See course descriptions under appropriate listings.) 



Art 



English 



French 

German 
History 



Humanities 



Music 

Philosophy 

Religion 



Spanish 
Theatre 



252. Romanesque Art. (4) 

253. The Gothic Cathedral. (4) 

254. Luxury Arts in the Middle Ages. (4) 
267. Early Italian Renaissance Art. (4) 

296. Art History Seminar: b. Medieval Art. (2,4) 

305. Old English Language and Literature. (4) 

310. The Medieval World. (4) 

311. The Legend of Arthur. (4) 

312. Medieval Poetry. (4) 
315. Chaucer. (4) 

320. British Drama to 1642. (4) 
370. Seminar in French Studies. (4) 

Periodically offered in Medieval Studies 
249. German Literature before 1700. (4) 

306. The Early Middle Ages. (4) 

307. The High Middle Ages Through the Renaissance. (4) 
310. Seminar: Jersusalem. (4) 

335. Italy. Medieval and Renaissance. (4) 
342. The Middle East Before 1500. (4) 
320. Perspectives on the Middle Ages. (4) 

361. Dante I. (2) 

362. Dante II. (2) 

220. Seminar in Medieval and Renaissance Music. (3,4) 

232. Ancient and Medieval Philosophy. (4) 

367. The Mystics of the Church. (4) 

372. History of Christian Thought: b. Medieval and Reformation 

Thought. (2,4) 
331. Medieval Spain: A Cultural and Literary Perspective. (4) 
260. History of Western Theatre I (Beginnings to 1642). (4) 



Students intending to minor in medieval studies should consult one of the coordinators, 
preferably during the sophomore year. 



Medieval Studies 162 



Military Science 

Lieutenant Colonel James R. Page II, Professor 

Assistant Professors Major Joseph P. Colebaugh, 

Major Brian K. Coppersmith, Major Jimmy E. Hall, 

Major Dennis J. Scheuermann 

Instructor Master Sergeant Gregory Campbell 

Completion of Army Reserve Officers' Training Corps (AROTC) requirements and rec- 
ommendation for appointment by the professor of military science may result in commis- 
sioning as a second lieutenant in the active or reserve forces components of the Army of 
the United States, as determined by the Secretary of the Army. The AROTC program is 
composed of the Basic Course and the Advanced Course. The Basic Course is composed 
of four core courses (121, 122, 123, and 124), sometimes with either 117 or 118 taken 
each semester as a co-requisite. No military obligation is incurred by enrollment in the 
Basic Course, except by Army ROTC Scholarship cadets, and then only when beginning 
their sophomore year. The Basic Course may be completed, partially or fully, by various 
alternative methods (i.e., through credit for specific types of Junior ROTC or other mili- 
tary training, as determined by the professor of military science, or through completion of 
a six- week summer Basic Camp). The Advanced Course is composed of four core courses 
(225, 226, 227, and 228), with either 117 or 118 taken each semester as a co-requisite, 
and a five-week Advanced Camp, usually attended during the summer between the junior 
and senior years. Army ROTC scholarships are available to qualified applicants (both 
those already enrolled in the AROTC program and those not yet enrolled) through annual 
competition. 

114. Leadership. (2) An examination of the fundamentals contributing to the develop- 
ment of a personal style of leadership with emphasis on the dimensions of junior execu- 
tive management. 

116. Orienteering. (2) A study of navigational aids, linear time/distance relationships, and 
mapping techniques. Includes navigating in unfamiliar terrain. 

117, 118. Leadership Laboratory. (0,0) Basic military skills instruction designed to techni- 
cally and tactically qualify the student for assumption of an officer leadership position at 
the small-unit level. Either 117 (fall) or 118 (spring) is required each semester for con- 
tracted AROTC cadets (including those conditionally contracted), advance designee 
scholarship winners, and non-contracted AROTC cadets taking their third and fourth 
military science core courses. Pass/fail only. C — Any other military science core course. 
P — Permission of the professor of military science, except when required as explained 
above. 

121. Introduction to Army ROTC and the US Army. (2) An introduction to the Army 
Reserve Officers' Training Corps and to the United States Army, exploring roles, organi- 
zation, customs and traditions. C — Military Science 117 or 118, as appropriate. 

122. Introduction to Military Leadership. (2) Introduction to military leadership, plan- 
ning, organizing, communication skills and problem analysis. Techniques of motivation 



I6 3 



Military Science 



and management of subordinates. Examination of moral issues, requirements and dilem- 
ma of the military profession. P — Military Science 121 or permission of the professor of 
military science. C — Military Science 117 or 118, as appropriate. 

123. Land Navigation and Terrain Analysis. (2) A study of the methods of land naviga- 
tion and terrain analysis for military operations. P — Military Science 121 and 122, or 
permission of the professor of military science. C — Military Science 117 or 118, as 
appropriate. 

124. Tactics and Leadership in the US Army. (2) An introduction to planning, organizing, 
and conducting military ground operations, with a consideration of the principles of war. 
Focuses on current leadership doctrine within the Army. P — Military Science 121, 122, 
and 123, or permission of the professor of military science. C — Military Science 117 or 

1 18, as appropriate. 

225. Military Operations. (2) An in-depth study of the principles of combined arms oper- 
ations. P — Military Science 121 through 124 (or equivalent credit as determined by the 
professor of military science). C — Military Science 117. 

226. Advanced Military Operations. (2) A continuation of Military Science 225 with an 
emphasis on the leadership aspect of combined arms operations. Specific preparation for 
the AROTC Advanced Camp. P — Military Science 121 through 124 (or equivalent credit 
as determined by the professor of military science) and Military Science 225. C — Military 
Science 118. 

227. Leadership and Management in the US Army I. (2) The theory and practice of mili- 
tary leadership. Emphasis on the Uniform Code of Military Justice, the Manual for 
Courts-Martial, the Law of Land Warfare and the Army's personnel, training, and logisti- 
cal management systems. P — Military Science 121 through 124 (or equivalent credit as 
determined by the professor of military science) and Military Science 225 and 226. 

C — Military Science 117. 

228. Leadership and Management in the US Army II. (2) A continuation of Military 
Science 227 with emphasis on the transition from cadet to officer. P — Military Science 
121 through 124 (or equivalent credit as determined by the professor of military science) 
and Military Science 225 through 227. C — Military Science 118. 

229. American Military History. (4) The American military experience with emphasis on 
the ideas and activities contributing to the development of the United States' unique mili- 
tary establishment. Particular emphasis on civilian control of the military. P — Permission 
of the professor of military science. Credit not allowed for this course if credit has been 
earned for History 369. 



Military Science 



164 



Music 

David B. Levy, Chair 

Professors Susan Harden Borwick, Stewart Carter, Louis Goldstein, 

David B. Levy, Dan Locklair (Composer-in-Residence) 

Associate Professors Peter Kairoff, Teresa Radomski 

Assistant Professor and Director of Choral Ensembles Brian Gorelick 

Assistant Professors Jacqui Carrasco, Richard E. Heard 

Director of Bands C. Kevin Bowen 

Director of Orchestra David Hagy 

Instructor Patricia Dixon 

Part-time Instructor Kathryn Levy 

A major in music requires forty-eight credits. This includes a basic curriculum of thirty- 
six credits (Music Theory 171, 172, 173, and 174, sixteen credits; Music History 181, 
182, six credits; ten credits of individual instruction; and four credits of ensemble, 
taken in four semesters) plus six semesters of Music Recitals 100 and twelve credits of 
elective courses in music, excluding ensembles and Music 165-169, 175-179. In addi- 
tion to the course work, music majors are required to present a senior recital, lecture- 
recital, or project. 

Students anticipating a major in music are urged to begin their studies during their 
first year and are required to audition typically during the second semester of their sopho- 
more year before officially being admitted to the program. Students interested in majoring 
or minoring in music should consult the chair of the department as soon as possible after 
entering the University. 

Highly qualified majors may be invited by the music faculty to apply for admission to 
the honors program in music. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Music," a 
candidate must have a 3.0 overall grade point average and a 3.5 grade point average in 
courses in the major. In addition, the candidate must be nominated for this honor by a 
music faculty member and must complete one of the following requirements: (1) an hon- 
ors-level research paper, (2) an analysis project, (3) an original composition, (4) a lecture- 
recital, (5) a solo recital, (6) a chamber-music recital, (7) a solo concert with ensemble, or 
(8) a conducting project. More information is available from the music department. 

A minor in music requires twenty-four credits: Music 171, 172; 181, 182; two credits 
of ensemble, taken in two semesters; two semesters of individual instruction (performance 
level must be equal to the level expected of majors at the time of the audition); six credits 
of music electives (excluding ensemble); and four semesters of Music Recitals 100. Each 
minor will be assigned an adviser in the music department and is encouraged to begin 
individual lessons, Music 171, and Music 100 as early as possible. 

Regarding ensemble requirements for the major or minor in music, students who, 
upon the advice of their private instructor, take the audition in voice must fulfill the 
ensemble requirement by singing in Music 112, 115, and/or 116. Students who, upon the 
advice of their private instructor, take the audition on a band or orchestral instrument 
must fulfill the ensemble requirement by performing on that instrument in Music 113, 
117, 119, and/or 121. 



I6 5 



Music 



General Music 

100. Recitals. (0) Recitals, concerts, and guest lectures sponsored by the Department of 
Music and the Secrest Artists Series. (Specific attendance requirements will be established 
at the beginning of each semester.) Six semesters are required of music majors; four 
semesters are required of music minors. (P/F only) 

101. Introduction to the Language of Music. (4) Basic theoretical concepts and musical 
terminology. Survey of musical styles, composers, and selected works from the Middle 
Ages through the twentieth century. Satisfies the Division V requirement. For students not 
majoring in music. 

109. Introduction to the Music of World Cultures. (4) A survey of music in selected soci- 
eties around the world. Topics will be selected from the following areas of concentration: 
India, East Asia, sub-Sahara Africa, western Europe, Latin America, and vernacular music 
of the United States (including jazz). Satisfies the Division V requirement. 

110. Writing about the Arts. (4) Training in expository writing; frequent essays based on 
music and other arts experiences on campus and in the community, and on readings in 
music and the arts. Fulfills the basic requirement in English. P — Permission of instructor 
and the Department of English. 

Music Theory 

104. Basic Music Reading and Skills. (2) A study of the fundamentals of music theory 
including key signatures, scales, intervals, chords, and basic sight-singing and ear-training 
skills. Designed for students wishing to participate in University ensembles and those 
wishing to pursue vocal, instrumental, and compositional instruction. May not count 
toward the music major or minor. 

106. Electronic Music Lab. (2) Foundations of MIDI protocol, with particular attention 
to the study and application of sequencers, notational programs, and synthesizers. 
Development of skills in written notation through use of computerized programs. Taught 
in Music Computer Lab. P — Music 101, 104, or permission of instructor. 

171. Music Theory I. (4) Music fundamentals (key signatures, scales, modes, intervals, 
chords), simple part-writing, sight-singing, rhythmic skills, keyboard harmony. Fall. 
Designed for Music majors and minors. 

172. Music Theory II. (4) Seventh chords, secondary chords, mutated chords, part-writ- 
ing, basic counterpoint, basic musical forms, ear training, sight-singing, rhythmic skills, 
keyboard harmony. Spring. P — Music 171. 

173. Music Theory III. (4) Altered chords, continuation of part-writing, eighteenth and 
nineteenth century forms, ear training, sight-singing, rhythmic skills, keyboard harmony. 
Fall. P— Music 172. 

174. Music Theory IV. (4) Expanded harmonic system of Impressionism and the twenti- 
eth century. New concepts of style and form. Ear training, sight-singing, rhythmic skills, 
keyboard harmony. Spring. P — Music 173. 



Music i5£ 



272. Analysis Seminar. (2) A study of analytical writings of theorists and composers and 
the development of practical skills as they can be used in research and performance prepa- 
ration. P — Music 174 or permission of instructor. 

273. Composition. (1 or 2) Individual instruction in the craft of musical composition. 
May be repeated for credit. P — Permission of instructor. 

280. Orchestration. (4) A study of the orchestral and wind band instruments, how com- 
posers have used them throughout history, and the development of practical scoring and 
manuscript skills. Spring. P — Music 174, 182, or permission of instructor. 

Music History 

130. African-American Art Song. (4) A survey of the art songs of African-American com- 
posers of the nineteenth and twentieth century. The emphasis in the course will be on song 
for solo voice and piano, with some discussion of works for voice and orchestra or cham- 
ber ensemble. P — Permission of instructor. 

181. Music History I. (3) History of western art music from the ancient Greeks to 1750. 
Satisfies the Division V requirement. Fall. P — Music 171 or permission of instructor. 

182. Music History II. (3) History of western art music from 1750 to the present. Satisfies 
the Division V requirement. Spring. P — Music 171, 181, or permission of instructor. 

203. History of Jazz. (4) A survey of American jazz from its origin to the present. Open to 
majors and non-majors. P — Music 101 or 102 or permission of instructor. 

207. Music in America. (4) A study of the music and musical trends in America from 
1650 to the present. The course will survey sacred and secular music from the Pilgrims to 
the current trends of American composers. 

208. Women and Music. (4) A historical overview of women musicians in society. Counts 
toward a minor in women's studies. 

210. Survey of Latin American Music. (4) A survey of art, folk, and popular musical 
styles in Latin America and their impact on music of other cultures. Divided into three 
areas of study: the Caribbean, Central America, and South America. May count as a 
requirement towards the Latin American studies minor. 

212. Music in the Church. (4) Function of church musicians and the relationship of their 
work to the church program. Offers to musician and non-musician alike historical overview, 
hymnody survey and other church music related topics through class and guest lectures and 
practical seminars. Offered fall semester of odd years. P — Permission of instructor. 

213. Beethoven. (4) Compositional process, analysis, criticism, and performance practices 
in selected works by Ludwig van Beethoven. P — Music 101 or permission of instructor. 

215. Philosophy of Music. (4) A survey of philosophical writings about music. Musical 
aesthetics; social, religious, and political concerns. 

220. Seminar in Medieval and Renaissance Music. (3,4) A study of music before 1600, its 
theory, notation, and performance practices. P — Music 174, 182, or permission of instructor. 



167 



Music 



221. Seminar in Baroque Music. (3,4) Musical activity from about 1600 to Bach and 
Handel. Special emphasis on the development of national styles and their resolutions 
toward the end of the era. P — Music 174, 182, or permission of instructor. 

222. Seminar in Eighteenth Century Music. (3,4) Musical developments from the sons of 
Bach through the Viennese Classicism of Haydn, Mozart, and Beethoven. P — Music 174, 
182, or permission of instructor. 

223. Seminar in Nineteenth Century Music. (3,4) Music from the latter part of 
Beethoven's career through Wagner and Brahms. Special emphasis on the post-Beethoven 
schism and its ramifications. P — Music 174, 182, or permission of instructor. 

224. Seminar in Twentieth Century Music. (3,4) A study of the major musical styles, tech- 
niques, and media of contemporary music from Debussy to the present. P — Music 174, 

1 82, or permission of instructor. 

230. History of Musical Instruments. (4) Historical overview of the form and function of 
musical instruments from the Middle Ages to the present. Emphasis on instruments in art 
music of Western Europe and the United States. P — Music 101, 181, 182, or permission 
of instructor. 

284. Music Literature Seminar. (4) A survey of repertoire, including an examination of 
teaching materials in the student's special area of interest. P — Music 101 or permission of 
instructor. 

a. Orchestral Literature d. Guitar Literature 

b. Choral Literature e. Vocal Literature 
c. Piano Literature f. Opera 

Honors and Individual Study 

297. Senior Project. (1,2,3, or 4) A major project varying in format according to the stu- 
dent's area of concentration. By pre-arrangement. 

298. Individual Study. (1,2,3, or 4) A project in an area of study not otherwise available 
in the department. By pre-arrangement. 

299. Honors in Music. (1,2,3, or 4) Individual study for honors candidates who have ful- 
filled the specific requirements. 

Ensemble 

Departmental ensembles are open to all students. Credit is earned on the basis of one 
credit per semester of participation in each ensemble. 

111. Opera Workshop. Study, staging, and performance of standard and contemporary 
operatic works. P — Permission of instructor. 

112A. Collegium Musicum Vocal. An ensemble stressing the performance practices and 
the performance of music of the medieval, Renaissance, and Baroque eras. P — Audition. 

112B. Collegium Musicum Instrumental. An ensemble stressing the performance practices 
and the performance of music of the medieval, Renaissance, and Baroque eras. 

Music j^g 



113. Orchestra. Study and performance of orchestral works from the classical and con- 
temporary repertoire. P — Audition. 

114. Madrigal Singers. A vocal chamber ensemble which specializes in the performance 
of secular repertoire. P — Audition. 

115. Concert Choir. A select touring choir of forty-five voices which performs a variety 
of choral literature from all periods. P — Audition. 

116. Choral Union. A large, mixed chorus which performs a variety of choral literature 
from all periods. P — Audition. 

117. Marching Deacons Band. Performs for most football games. Meets twice weekly. 
Regular performances on and off campus. Fall. P — Permission of instructor. 

118. Wind Ensemble. Study and performance of music for mixed chamber ensembles of 
winds, brass, and percussion. P — Audition. 

119. Symphonic Band. Study and performance of music for symphonic band. Regular 
performances on and off campus. Spring. P — Permission of instructor. 

120. Small Chamber Ensemble. Study and performance of music for small ensemble. 
Performers are strongly urged to participate in a larger ensemble as well. P — Permission 
of instructor. 

a. percussion ensemble e. brass 

b. flute choir f. woodwind 

c. string g. guitar 

d. saxophone h. mixed 

121. Jazz Ensemble. Study and performance of written and improvised jazz for a twenty- 
member ensemble. P — Audition. 

Individual Instruction 

Courses in individual instruction are open to students with the permission of the instruc- 
tor on a space available basis. Credit is earned on the basis of lesson duration and weekly 
preparation. One credit per semester implies a half-hour of instruction weekly and a mini- 
mum of one hour of daily practice. Two credits per semester imply an hour of instruction 
weekly and a minimum of two hours daily practice. With the permission of the music fac- 
ulty and with a proportional increase in practice, a student may earn three or four credits 
per semester. Students in individual instruction who do not have basic knowledge of nota- 
tion and rhythm are advised to enroll in Music 101 or 104 either prior to or in conjunc- 
tion with individual instruction. An individual instruction music fee is charged for all indi- 
vidual instruction. (See page 23 of this bulletin for specific information regarding the fee.) 

108. Alexander Technique for Musical Performers. (1) An educational process that uses 
verbal and tactile feedback to teach improved use of the student's body by identifying and 
changing poor and inefficient habits that cause stress, fatigue, and pain in the musical per- 
former. This is a course designed to teach the musician how to perform with a minimum 
of physical effort and maximum expression. Meets two hours per week. Pass/fail. 



169 



Music 



161. Individual Instruction. (1) May be repeated for credit. Technical studies and reper- 
toire of progressive difficulty selected to meet the needs and abilities of the student. 



a. violin 


g. clarinet 


m. baritone 


t. electric bass 


b. viola 


h. bassoon 


n. tuba 


v. voice 


c. cello 


i. saxophone 


o. organ 


w. recorder 


d. bass 


j. trumpet 


p. piano 


x. viola da gamba 


e. flute 


k. French horn 


q. percussion 


y. harpsichord 


f. oboe 


I. trombone 


r. guitar 





261. Individual Instruction. (2,3, or 4) May be repeated for credit. P — Permission of instructor. 

165j. Class Brass. (1 ) Introduction to the fundamentals of playing brass instruments. 
Designed for students with musical experience as well as beginners with no prior musical 
training. Spring. P — Permission of instructor. 

165p. Class Piano. (1) Scales, chords, inversions, and appropriate repertoire, with empha- 
sis on sight-reading, harmonization, and simple transposition. Designed for the beginning 
piano student. 

165q. Class Percussion. (1) Introduction to the fundamentals of playing percussion instru- 
ments. Includes an introduction to reading music as well as basic techniques on instru- 
ments of the percussion family. P — Permission of instructor. 

165r. Class Guitar I. (1) Introduction to guitar techniques: strumming, plucking, arpeg- 
gios, and damping. Reading and playing from musical notation and guitar tablature. For 
beginning students. 

166r. Class Guitar II. (1) Continuation of guitar techniques. Emphasis on chordal pro- 
gressions, scales, accompanying patterns, and sight-reading. P — Music 165r. 

165v. Class Voice I. (1) Introduction to the fundamental principles of singing, concepts of 
breath control, tone, and resonance. Fall. 

166v. Class Voice II. (1) Continuation of fundamental vocal techniques. P — Music 165v 
or permission of instructor. 

167v. Theatrical Singing I: Class Voice. (1) Basic techniques of singing, breath control, 
phonation, and resonance, with emphasis on theatrical projection. Study and performance 
of musical theatre repertoire. (One hour per week.) Fall. 

168v. Theatrical Singing II: Class Voice. (1) Continuation of theatrical singing techniques 
with increased study and performance of musical theater repertoire. P — Music 167v or 
permission of instructor. (One hour per week.) 

169. Musical Theater Practicum. (1) For vocalists or instrumentalists who participate in a 
departmentally sponsored theatrical production. May not be counted toward a major or 
minor in music. Credit may be earned in a given semester for either Music 169 or Theatre 
283, but not both. Course may be repeated for no more than 4 credits. Pass/fail only. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

175v. Advanced Voice Class. (1) Development of advanced vocal technique and reper- 
toire. Limited to eight students. (Two hours per week; may be repeated.) P — Music 166v 
or permission of instructor. 



Music 



170 



177v. Advanced Theatrical Singing. (1) Development of advanced theatrical singing tech- 
nique and performance of musical theater repertoire. Limited to eight students. (Two 
hours per week; may be repeated.) P — Music 168v or permission of instructor. 

190. Diction for Singers. (2) Study of articulation in singing, with emphasis on modifica- 
tion of English; pronunciation of Italian, German, and French. Development of articula- 
tor and aural skills with use of the international phonetic alphabet. Individual perfor- 
mance and coaching in class. (Two hours per week.) 

282. Conducting. (4) A study of conducting techniques; practical experience with ensem- 
bles. Offered spring semester of odd years. P — Music 174 or permission of instructor. 

Natural Sciences 

Dudley Shapere, Reynolds Professor of 
Philosophy and History of Science 

301. The Beginnings of the Modern World-View. (4) A study of the transition from ancient 
views of the world to the perspective of modern science, with focus on the works of the pre- 
Socratic philosophers, Plato, and Aristotle. (Also listed as History 301 and Philosophy 231.) 

302. The Mechanistic View of Nature. (4) An examination of the philosophical and scien- 
tific roots, in Descartes, Newton, and Leibniz, of the belief that the universe and human 
beings are "machines" subject to deterministic natural laws, and the relevance to this 
issue of modern scientific ideas. (Also listed as History 302 and Philosophy 242.) 

303. Revolutions in Modern Science. (4) An analysis of the ways in which radically new 
ideas are introduced and accepted in science. Cases studied are space and time in relativity 
theory, the nature of reality in quantum mechanics, evolution of species, and continental 
drift. P — At least one course in one of the relevant areas of science or permission of 
instructor. (Also listed as History 303.) 

320. The Universe of Modern Science. (4) A survey of the contemporary scientific picture 
of the universe and its evolution, and of the major evidence for that picture. 

351. Philosophy of Science. (4) A systematic and critical examination of major views con- 
cerning the methods of scientific inquiry, and the bases, goals, and implications of the sci- 
entific conclusions which result from such inquiry. P — One 200-level course in philosophy 
or permission of the instructor. (Also listed as Philosophy 373.) 

352. Modern Science and Human Values. (4) Four revolutionary developments in science 
and technology are studied with a focus on their potential to affect human values: 
biotechnology, cognitive science, recent primate research, and the search for extraterrestri- 
al life. (Also listed as History 305.) 

396. Individual Study. (1-4) Individual projects in the philosophy and history of science. 
By invitation only. 



iyi Natural Sciences 



Neuroscience 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Wayne L. Silver (Biology), Coordinator 

The Neuroscience Minor provides an interdisciplinary approach to the study of the nervous 
system. Neuroscientists study how we learn, process and remember information from the 
molecular to the philosophical level and examine subjects, ranging from the molecular phar- 
macology of brain function to the mind-body problem. 

The minor requires a minimum of twenty credits, ten of which must include the 
Neuroscience courses (200, 300, 391) described below. At least one semester of research in 
neuroscience is required for the minor (Neuroscience 391). The research can be conducted on 
the Reynolda Campus or with investigators at the Wake Forest University School of 
Medicine. The research project must be approved by a member of the neuroscience minor 
faculty. Ten credits must come from the elective courses listed below. (See course descriptions 
under appropriate listings.) One of the elective courses must come from outside the student's 
major department. 

200. Introduction to Neuroscience. (4) An interdisciplinary course taught by faculty rep- 
resenting several fields. Topics include neurophysiology, sensory biology, motor mecha- 
nisms, neuropharmacology, cognitive neuroscience, perception, neural networks, and the 
philosophy of mind. 

300. Neuroscience Seminar. (4) Consideration of current neuroscience topics. 
Presentations by faculty on the Reynolda Campus or the Wake Forest University School 
of Medicine of current research are followed by student led discussions. Readings from 
the primary literature will accompany the presentations. P — Neuroscience 200. 

391. Research in Neuroscience. (2) Supervised independent laboratory investigation in 
neuroscience. 



Biology 



Psychology 



323. Animal Behavior (5) 

346. Neurobiology (5) 

364. Sensory Biology (5) 

354. Vertebrate Endocrinology (5) 

351. Vertebrate Physiology (5) 

320. Physiological Psychology (4) 

322. Psychopharmacology (4) 

323. Animal Behavior (4) 
329. Perception (4) 
331. Cognition (4) 

333. Motivation of Behavior (4) 



Neuroscience i-jz 



Physics 304. Physics of Medical Imaging (4) 

303. Biophysics (4) 
Philosophy 374. Philosophy of Mind (4) 

Health and Exercise Science 312. Exercise and Health Psychology (4) 
Computer Science 379. Artificial Intelligence (4) 

(Note that many of these courses have prerequisites, in some cases including introductory 
biology, psychology, or chemistry.) 



Philosophy 

Win-chiat Lee, Chair 

Worrell Professor Robert M. Helm 

Professors Thomas K. Hearn Jr., Marcus B. Hester, Charles M. Lewis 

Associate Professors Ralph C. Kennedy III, Win-chiat Lee 

Assistant Professors Andrew A. Cross, Josefine C. Nauckhoff 

Visiting Assistant Professors Michael V. Griffin, H. Lee Overton, N. Dane Scott 

Lecturer Hanna M. Hardgrave 
Instructor Eric E. Brandon 

The objective of the program in philosophy is to lead the student to an understanding of 
philosophical thinking — past and present — about such fundamental questions as what it 
is to exist, to know, to be good, right, true, beautiful, or sacred. In examining such mat- 
ters, philosophy may be said to investigate the presuppositions that inform all human 
action and inquiry and thus to be an essentially interdisciplinary kind of subject. The 
study of philosophy can, therefore, play a useful role in preparing the student for a career 
in almost any field, including law, politics, religion, medicine, business, the arts, and the 
natural and social sciences. 

The thirty-six credits in philosophy required for graduation with a major in the sub- 
ject must include a general introduction to philosophy (Philosophy 111), one course in 
logic (selected from Group II), three courses in the history of philosophy (one from each 
of Groups III, IV and V) and two 200-level or higher topics courses (Group VI), the total 
to include at least three courses at the 300-level. 

A minor in philosophy requires twenty credits in philosophy, which must include at 
least two 200-level or higher courses and one 300-level course. Philosophy being an 
intrinsically interdisciplinary subject, a minor in philosophy can be designed to comple- 
ment any major subject. Students interested in minoring in philosophy should consult 
with the department about choosing an appropriate sequence of courses. 

Highly qualified majors are invited to apply in the spring semester of their junior year 
to the honors program in philosophy. Candidates must have an overall grade point aver- 
age of at least 3.0 and a grade point average in philosophy courses of at least 3.3. 
Graduation with honors in philosophy requires successful completion of Honors I and II 



173 



Philosophy 



in the fall and spring semesters, respectively, of their senior year. The credits earned in 
these two courses do not count toward the thirty-six credits required of all majors. 

Group I — Introduction to Philosophy 

111. Basic Problems of Philosophy. (4) An examination of the basic concepts of several 
representative philosophers, including their accounts of the nature of knowledge, persons, 
God, mind, and matter. 

Group II — Logic 

121. Logic. (4) An elementary study of the laws of valid inference, recognition of fallacies, 
and logical analysis. 

221. Symbolic Logic. (4) Basic concepts and techniques of first-order logic; applications of 
first-order logic to arguments expressed in English; some discussion of such topics as the 
unsolvability of the decision problem for first-order logic, the completeness of first-order 
logic, and Godel's incompleteness theorem. 

Group III — Classical Ancient Philosophy 

231. Beginnings of the Modern World-View. (4) A study of the transition from ancient 
views of the world to the perspective of modern science, with focus on the works of the 
Presocratic philosophers, Plato, and Aristotle. (Also offered as History 301 and Natural 
Sciences 301.) 

232. Ancient and Medieval Philosophy. (4) A study of philosophical problems such as the 
nature of faith, reason, universals, and God in the thought of Plato, Aristotle, Augustine, 
Abelard, Anselm, Aquinas, and Ockham. P — Philosophy 111. 

331. Plato. (4) A detailed analysis of selected dialogues, covering Plato's most important 
contributions to moral and political philosophy, theory of knowledge, metaphysics, and 
theology. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

332. Aristotle. (4) A study of the major texts, with emphasis on metaphysics, ethics, and 
theory of knowledge. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

Group IV — Classical Modern Philosophy 

241. Modern Philosophy. (4) A survey of major philosophers from Descartes to Kant. 
IP— Philosophy 111. 

242. The Mechanistic View of Nature. (4) An examination of the philosophical and scien- 
tific roots, in Descartes, Newton, and Leibniz, of the belief that the universe and human 
beings are "machines" subject to deterministic natural laws, and the relevance to this 
issue of modern scientific ideas. (Also offered as History 302, Interdisciplinary Honors 
252, and Natural Sciences 302.) 



Philosophy ija 



341. Kant. (4) A detailed study of selected works covering Kant's most important contri- 
butions to theory of knowledge, metaphysics, ethics, religion, and aesthetics. P — One 
200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

342. Studies in Modern Philosophy. (4) Treatment of selected figures and/or themes in 
seventeenth- and eighteenth-century European philosophy. P — One 200-level course in 
philosophy or permission of instructor. 

Group V — Other History 

251. American Philosophy. (4) A study exploring the philosophies of Jonathan Edwards, 
Ralph Waldo Emerson, C.S. Peirce, William James, John Dewey, and others, examining 
their views on logic, experience, science, reality, nature, art, education, and God. 

P— Philosophy 111. 

252. Contemporary Philosophy. (4) A study of the principal works of several representa- 
tive twentieth-century philosophers. P — Philosophy 111. 

253. Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) An introduction to the most 
important traditions in Chinese philosophy and religion: Confucianism, Daoism (Taoism), 
and Chinese Buddhism or Chinese Chan (Zen) Buddhism. (Also offered as Religion 380.) 

254. Existentialism. (4) A study of existentialist treatment of such topics as the self, 
meaning, identity, nihilism, freedom, and commitment. Authors studied may include 
Kierkegaard, Dostoyevsky, Nietzsche, Kafka, Heidegger, Beckett, and Sartre. 

P— Philosophy 111. 

351. Early German Idealism. (4) An examination of the development of post-Kantian ide- 
alism through the works of Fichte, Schelling, and Schleiermacher, with particular empha- 
sis on their efforts to address the challenge of critical philosophy. P — One 200-level course 
in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

352. Hegel, Kierkegaard, and Nietzsche. (4) An examination of selected sources embody- 
ing the basic concepts of Hegel, Kierkegaard, and Nietzsche, especially as they relate to 
each other in terms of influence, development, and opposition. P — One 200-level course 
in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

353. Heidegger. (4) An examination of the structure and development of Heidegger's philos- 
ophy from the ontological analysis in Being and Time to his later work in the philosophy of 
language and poetry. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

354. Wittgenstein. (4) The work of Ludwig Wittgenstein on several central philosophical 
problems studied and compared with that of Frege, James, and Russell. Topics include the 
picture theory of meaning, truth, skepticism, private languages, thinking, feeling, the mys- 
tical, and the ethical. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 



iyr Philosophy 



Group VI — Topics in Philosophy 

161. Medical Ethics. (4) A study of moral problems in the practice of medicine, including 
informed consent, experimentation on human subjects, truthtelling, confidentiality, abor- 
tion, and the allocation of scarce medical resources. 

162. Ethics and Public Policy. (4) A critical examination of the ethical foundations of pub- 
lic policy issues. Topics may include: euthanasia, censorship, racial and gender equality, 
drugs, sexual conduct, and crime. 

163. Environmental Ethics. (4) An examination of ethical issues concerning the environ- 
ment as they arise in individual lives and public policy. These issues are discussed in the 
context of fundamental questions regarding the adequacy of traditional philosophical 
frameworks for thinking about the relationship between humans and the nonhuman 
world and the value and moral status of the nonhuman world. 

261. Ethics. (4) A critical study of selected problems and representative works in ethical 
theory. P — Philosophy 111. 

262. Philosophy of Law. (4) A philosophical inquiry into the nature of law and its relation 
to morality. Classroom discussions of readings from the works of classical and modern 
authors focus on issues of contemporary concern involving questions of legal principle, 
personal liberty, human rights, responsibility, justice, and punishment. P — Philosophy 111. 

361. Topics in Ethics. (2-4) P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of 
instructor. 

362. Social and Political Philosophy. (4) A systematic examination of selected social and 
political philosophers of different traditions, with concentration on Plato, Marx, Rawls, 
and Nozick. Topics include rights, justice, equality, private property, the state, the com- 
mon good, and the relation of individuals to society. P — One 200-level course in philoso- 
phy or permission of instructor. 

171. Space and Time in Fact and Fiction. (4) Are space and time fundamentally different? 
Are they properties of the physical world or of minds only? Are they finite or infinite in 
extension and duration? Other questions cover problems and paradoxes in the concept of 
space and in the concept of time travel. 

371. Philosophy of Art. (4) A critical examination of several philosophies of art, with 
emphasis upon the application of these theories to particular works of art. P — One 200- 
level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

372. Philosophy of Religion. (4) An analysis of the logic of religious language and belief, 
including an examination of religious experience, mysticism, revelation, and arguments 
for the nature and existence of God. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission 
of instructor. 

373. Philosophy of Science. (4) A systematic and critical examination of major views con- 
cerning the methods of scientific inquiry, and the bases, goals, and implications of the sci- 
entific conclusions which result from such inquiry. P — One 200-level course in philosophy 
or permission of instructor. 



Philosophy 



176 



374. Philosophy of Mind. (4) A selection from the following topics: the mind-body prob- 
lem; personal identity; the unity of consciousness; minds and machines; the nature of 
experience; action, intention, and the will. Readings from classical and contemporary 
sources. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. 

375. Philosophy of Language. (4) A study of such philosophical issues about language as 
truth and meaning, reference and description, proper names, indexicals, modality, tense, 
the semantical paradoxes, and the differences between languages and other sorts of sign- 
systems. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of instructor. (Also listed as 
Linguistics 375.) 

381. Topics in Epistemology. (4) The sources, scope and structure of human knowledge. 
Topics include: skepticism; perception, memory, and reason; the definition of knowledge; 
the nature of justification; theories of truth. P — One 200-level course in philosophy or 
permission of instructor. 

382. Topics in Metaphysics. (4) P — One 200-level course in philosophy or permission of 
instructor. 

Group VII — Honors and Independent Study 

385. Seminar. (2-4) Offered by members of the faculty on specialized topics of their 
choice. With permission, may be repeated for credit. P — Permission of instructor. 

391. Honors I. (2) Directed study and research in preparation for writing a major paper. 
Must be taken in the fall semester of the senior year. P — Admission to the honors program 
in philosophy. 

392. Honors II. (2) Completion of the project begun in Philosophy 391. Requires defense 
of the paper in an oral examination conducted by at least two members of the depart- 
ment. Taken in the spring semester of the senior year. P — Philosophy 391. 

395. Independent Study. (2-4) 



177 Philosophy 



Physics 

George Eric Matthews, Chair 

Reynolds Professor Richard T. Williams 

Professors Keith D. Bonin, George M. Holzwarth, Natalie A. W. Holzwarth, 

William C. Kerr, George Eric Matthews, Howard W. Shields 

Associate Professors Paul R. Anderson, Eric D. Carlson 

Assistant Professors Daniel B. Kim-Shapiro, Gregory B. Cook 

Adjunct Professors Monroe J. Cowan, George B. Cvijanovich 

Adjunct Associate Professors Frederic H. Fahey, Peter Santago 

Adjunct Assistant Professor John D. Bourland 

The program for each student majoring in physics is developed through consultation with 
the student's major adviser and may lead to either a bachelor of arts or a bachelor of sci- 
ence degree. The bachelor of science degree requires a minimum of basic physics courses 
and allows a wide selection of electives related to the student's interests in other disci- 
plines, such as medicine, law, and business. The BS degree is designed for students plan- 
ning careers in physics. 

The bachelor of science degree in physics requires thirty-two credits in physics and 
must include the following courses: 113, 114, 141, 162, 165, 166, and 230. The remain- 
ing eight credits may be satisfied with any other 300-level courses in the department. 
Mathematics 251 also is required. Depending on what other physics courses the student 
takes, additional mathematics courses may be required; e.g., Mathematics 301 is a prereq- 
uisite for Physics 339. The BS degree in physics requires forty-eight credits in physics and 
must include the following courses: 113, 114, 141, 162, 165, 166, 230, 301, 302, 343, 
344, 346, 337, 339, 340, and 351. The remaining credits may be satisfied with any other 
300-level course in the department. In addition, Mathematics 251, 301, 302, and 304 are 
required; Mathematics 303 and Computer Science 111 are strongly recommended. 
A typical schedule for the first two years: 

First Year Sophomore 

Basic and divisional requirements Basic and divisional requirements 

Physics 1 13, 1 14 Physics 141, 162, 165, 166 

Mathematics 111, 112 Mathematics 25 1 , 302, 304 
Foreign language 

If this sequence is followed, the physics major may be completed with considerable flexi- 
bility in exercising various options, such as the five year BS/MS program. This saves time, 
and the outstanding student may qualify for a tuition scholarship in the senior year of the 
five-year program. A candidate for the 3-2 engineering program would also complete 
three years of the bachelor of science physics major program prior to transfer. (Consult 
the chair of the department for additional information on these five-year programs.) 

A minor in physics requires twenty-two credits, which must include the courses 113, 
114, 141, and 162. A minor in astrophysics requires twenty-two credits and consists of 
the courses 113, 114, 141, 310, and 312. Students interested in either minor should so 



Physics 



I 7 8 



advise the faculty member responsible for advising physics majors (inquire in Olin 
Physical Laboratory Room 100). 

If physics is not taken in the first year, the degree requirements in physics may still be 
completed by the end of the senior year if a beginning course is taken in the sophomore 
year. No student may be a candidate for a degree with a major in physics with a grade 
less than C in General Physics without special permission of the department. 

Physics courses satisfying Division II requirements must be taken at Wake Forest. 

Satisfactory completion of the laboratory work is required for a passing grade in all 
courses with a laboratory. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in physics through the major adviser. To be graduated with the designa- 
tion "Honors in Physics," students must pass Physics 381, write a paper on the results of 
the research in that course, pass an oral exam on the research and related topics given by 
a committee of three physics faculty members, and obtain a grade point average of 3.5 in 
physics and 3.0 overall. 

105. Descriptive Astronomy. (4) An introductory study of the universe, from the solar 
system to the galaxies. No lab. Does not satisfy Division II requirements. 

109. Astronomy. (5) An introductory study of the universe consisting of descriptive 
astronomy, the historical development of astronomical theories, and astrophysics. 
Knowledge of basic algebra and trigonometry is required. Lab — two hours. 

110. Introductory Physics. (5) A conceptual, non-calculus one-semester survey of the 
essentials of physics, including mechanics, wave motion, heat, sound, electricity, mag- 
netism, optics, and modern physics. Not recommended for premedical, mathematics, or 
science students. Credit not allowed for both 110 and 113. Lab — two hours. 

113, 114. General Physics. (5,5) Essentials of mechanics, wave motion, heat, sound, elec- 
tricity, magnetism, optics, and modern physics treated with some use of calculus. 
Recommended for science, mathematics, and premedical students. C — Mathematics 111, 

106, or equivalent. P — 113 is prerequisite for 114. Lab — two hours. 

120. Physics and Chemistry of the Environment. (5) The course coheres the basic physical 
and chemical processes in the earth's atmosphere, biosphere, and the oceans. It consists of 
two parts: 1 ) chemical processes in the environment such as element cycles and the chem- 
istry of the pollutants in air and water and, 2) physical aspects of the environment such as 
solar energy and the atmosphere, and the physics of weather and climate. Lab — three 
hours. P — Chemistry 111 or Physics 113. (Also listed as Environmental Studies 225.) 

141. Elementary Modern Physics. (4) The development of twentieth century physics 
and an introduction to quantum ideas. P — Physics 114 and Mathematics 111. C — 
Physics 165. 

162. Mechanics. (4) A study of the equations of motion describing several kinds of 
physical systems: velocity-dependent forces; damped and forced simple harmonic 
motion; orbital motion; inertial and non-inertial reference frames; and relativistic 
mechanics. The course includes extensive use of computers. P — Physics 113 and 
Mathematics 111 or equivalent. 



179 



Physics 



165, 166. Intermediate Laboratory. (1,1) Experiments on mechanics, modern physics, 
electronics, and computer simulations. C — Physics 141 (for Physics 165); Physics 162 (for 
Physics 166). P— Physics 165 (for Physics 166). 

230. Electronics. (4) Introduction to the theory and application of transistors and elec- 
tronic circuits. Lab — three hours. P — Physics 114. 

301, 302. Physics Seminar. (0,0) Discussion of contemporary research, usually with visit- 
ing scientists. Attendance required of junior and senior physics majors. 

307. Biophysics. (4) An introduction to the structure, dynamic behavior, and function of 
DNA and proteins, and a survey of membrane biophysics. The physical principles of 
structure determination by X-ray, NMR, and optical methods will be emphasized. P — 
Physics 113, 114 as well as Biology 112 or 214 or permission of instructor. 

304. Physics of Medical Imaging. (4) Physical principles of x-ray computed tomography 
(CT), positron emission tomography (PET), single-photon emission computed tomogra- 
phy (SPECT), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), and ultrasonic imaging. P — Physics 
113, 114 as well as Math 111-112 or permission of instructor. 

310. Extragalactic Astronomy and Cosmology. (4) Topics covered include galactic struc- 
ture, models for galaxies and galaxy formation, the large scale structure of the universe, 
the big bang model of the universe, physical processes such as nucleosynthesis in the early 
universe, and observational cosmology. P — Physics 114, 141. 

312. Introduction to Stellar Astronomy. (4) The physics of stellar atmospheres and interi- 
ors. Topics covered include radiation transfer, absorption and emission of radiation, for- 
mation of spectra, models for stellar interiors, nuclear fusion reactions, and stellar evolu- 
tion. Methods of measuring distances to stars and interpretation of stellar spectra also 
will be included. P — Physics 114, 141, Mathematics 301. 

320. The Physics of Macromolecules. (4) The physics of polymers, especially proteins and 
nucleic acids, including the molecular basis for their secondary and tertiary structure. P — 
Physics 351 or Chemistry 341 or Biology 371. 

330. Data Acquisition and Analysis. (4) Advanced treatment of computer interfacing, sig- 
nal processing methods, non-ideal integrated circuit behavior, and data reduction and fit- 
ting procedures. P — Physics 130, 230. 

337. Analytical Mechanics. (2) The Lagrangian and Hamiltonian formulations of 
mechanics with applications. This course is taught in the first half of the fall semester. P — 
Physics 162, Mathematics 251. 

339, 340. Electricity and Magnetism. (2,3) Electrostatics, magnetostatics, dielectric and 
magnetic materials, Maxwell's equations and applications to radiation, relativistic formu- 
lation. Physics 339 is taught in the second half of the fall semester, following Physics 337. 
Physics 340 is taught in the first three-fourths of the spring semester. These should be 
taken in sequence. P — Physics 114, Mathematics 251 and 301. 

343, 344. Quantum Physics. (4,4) Application of the elementary principles of quantum 
mechanics to atomic, molecular, solid state, and nuclear physics. P — Physics 141 and 
Mathematics 251. 



Physics i8q 



346. Advanced Physics Laboratory. (1) Lab — three hours. P — Physics 166 and Physics 343. 

351. Thermodynamics and Statistical Mechanics. (4) Introduction to classical and statis- 
tical thermodynamics and distribution functions. 

352. Physical Optics and Optical Design. (5) Interaction of light with materials; diffrac- 
tion and coherent optics; ray trace methods of optical design. Lab — three hours. 

354. Introduction to Solid State Physics. (4) A survey of the structure, composition, physi- 
cal properties, and technological applications of condensed matter. P — Physics 343. 

381, 382. Research. (2-4, 2-4) Library, conference, computation, and laboratory work 
performed on an individual basis. 



Politics 

Kathy B. Smith, Chair 

Worrell Professor of Anglo-American Studies David Coates 

Professors David B. Broyles, Jack D. Fleer, Charles H. Kennedy, 

Richard D. Sears, Kathy B. Smith 

Associate Professors KatyJ. Harriger, Wei-chin Lee, 

David P. Weinstein, Helga A. Welsh 

Assistant Professors Andrew O. Rich, Peter M. Siavelis 

Visiting Professors Michael A. Gorkin, Jerry Pubantz 

Visiting Associate Professor Yomi Durotoye 

Visiting Assistant Professor John J. Dinan 

In its broadest conception, the aim of the study of politics is to understand the way in 
which policy for a society is formulated and executed and to understand the moral stan- 
dards by which policy is or ought to be set. This center of interest is often described alter- 
natively as the study of power, of government, of the state, or of human relations in their 
political context. For teaching purposes, the study of politics has been divided by the 
department into the following fields: (1) American politics, (2) comparative politics, (3) 
political philosophy, and (4) international politics. Introductory courses in these fields 
provide broad and flexible approaches to studying political life. 

The major in politics consists of thirty-six credits, at least two-thirds of which must be 
completed at Wake Forest University. The courses must include the following: (a) at least 
one non-seminar course in each of the four fields of politics listed above; (b) at least one 
politics seminar course (290s). No more than eight credits may be taken toward the major 
from introductory courses (100-level courses). Majors may not take the introductory 
courses during their senior year. No more than four credits for any one or any combina- 
tion of the following courses may be counted toward the major: Politics 287, 288, or 289. 
Transfer credits toward the major will be awarded on an individual case-by-case basis at 
the discretion of the chairperson. A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in all courses 
completed in politics at Wake Forest is required for graduation with the major. 



181 Politics 



To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Politics," a candidate must have a 
3.2 overall grade point average and a 3.5 Politics grade point average. In addition, the 
candidate's seminar paper upon the completion of Politics 291, 292, 293, or 294 must be 
accepted by the department honors committee. The candidate is required to take Politics 
285, which may not be counted toward the thirty-six-credit requirement for the major. 
For additional information, department faculty members should be consulted. 

Politics majors who minor in Latin American studies also have the opportunity to 
pursue a Five-Year Cooperative BA/MA Degree Program at Georgetown University in 
Washington, DC. See pages 67 and 153 for details. 

The minor in politics consists of twenty credits. No more than eight credits may be 
taken toward the minor from introductory courses (100-level courses). No more than 
four credits for any one or any combination of the following courses may be counted 
toward the minor: Politics 287, 288, or 289. Sixteen of the credits must be taken at Wake 
Forest. Transfer credits toward the minor will be awarded on an individual case-by-case 
basis at the discretion of the chairperson. A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in all 
courses completed in politics at Wake Forest is required for graduation with the minor. 

A student who selects politics to fulfill the Division IV requirement must take one of 
the following courses: Politics 113, 114, 115, or 116. Students who are not majors in pol- 
itics may take upper-level courses as electives without having had lower-level courses, 
unless a prerequisite is specified. 

American Politics 

113. American Government and Politics. (4) The nature of politics, political principles, 
and political institutions, with emphasis on their application to the United States. 

210. Major Topics in Public Policy. (2,3, or 4) A study of major policies on the current 
public agenda in the United States, including consideration of alternative policy responses 
and the politics which surround them. Possible topics include the politics of poverty and 
welfare, medical care, education, crime, and energy. Credit varies with the number of top- 
ics studied. 

211. Political Parties and Voting Behavior. (4) An examination of party competition, 
party organizations, the electorate and electoral activities of parties, and the responsibili- 
ties of parties for governing. 

213. Public Administration. (4) Introduction to the study of public administration 
emphasizing policymaking in government agencies. 

215. Citizen and Community. (4) An examination of the role and responsibilities of citi- 
zens in democratic policymaking. Includes discussion of democratic theory, emphasis on a 
policy issue of national importance (i.e. poverty, crime, environment), and involvement of 
students in projects that examine the dimension of the issue in their community. 

P — Permission of instructor. 

216. U.S. Social Welfare Policy. (4) An analysis of U.S. social policymaking and policy 
outcomes on issues such as welfare, education, health care, and Social Security, with an 
emphasis on historical development and cross-national comparison. 



Politics 182 



217. Politics and the Mass Media. (4) Exploration of the relationship between the politi- 
cal system and the mass media. Two broad concerns will be the regulation of the mass 
media and the impact of media on political processes and events. 

218. Congress and Policymaking. (4) An examination of the composition, authority struc- 
tures, external influences, and procedures of Congress with emphasis on their implica- 
tions for policymaking in the United States. 

220. The American Presidency. (4) Emphasis on the office and the role; contributions by 
contemporary presidents considered in perspective. 

222. Urban Politics. (4) Political structures and processes in American cities and suburbs 
as they relate to the social, economic, and political problems of the metropolis. 

223. Blacks in American Politics. (4) A survey of selected topics, including black political 
participation, political organizations, political leadership, and political issues. It will also 
show the relationship of these phenomena to American political institutions and processes 
as a whole. 

225. American Constitutional Law: Separation of Powers and the Federal System. (4) An 

analysis of Supreme Court decisions affecting the three branches of the national govern- 
ment and federal/state relations. 

226. American Constitutional Law: Civil Liberties. (4) Judicial interpretations of First 
Amendment freedoms, racial equality, and the rights of the criminally accused. Not open 
to first-year students. 

227. Politics, Law, and Courts. (4) Analysis of the nature and role of law in American 
society and the structure and procedure of American courts. Questions of judicial organi- 
zation, personnel, and decision-making, as well as the impact of law and court decisions 
on the social order, are explored at local, state, and national levels. 

229. Women and Politics. (4) The course examines classical and contemporary arguments 
regarding the participation of women in politics, as well as current policy issues and 
changes in women's political participation. 

Comparative Politics 

114. Comparative Government and Politics. (4) An analysis of political institutions, pro- 
cesses, and policy issues in selected countries. Case studies will be drawn from Africa, 
Asia, Europe, and Latin America. 

231. Western European Politics. (4) Comparative analysis of political institutions, pro- 
cesses, and policy issues in selected West European countries. Special attention will be 
given to case studies involving Great Britain, France, Germany, Italy and to the process of 
European integration. 

232. Politics in Russia and Eastern Europe. (4) Analysis of the political, economic, and 
social patterns of the region, emphasizing the internal dynamics of the political and eco- 
nomic transition processes currently underway. 



I8 3 



Politics 



233. The Politics of Modern Germany. (4) A study of the historical legacy, political behav- 
ior, and governmental institutions of contemporary Germany (newly unified Germany). 

234. United Kingdom Politics in a Global Age. (4) The purpose of this course is to intro- 
duce the nature and content of contemporary United Kingdom politics by placing those 
politics in a wider analysis of United Kingdom history, society, and international positions. 

236. Government and Politics in Latin America. (4) Comparative analysis of the institu- 
tions and processes of politics in the Latin American region. 

237. Comparative Public Policy in Selected Industrialized Democracies. (4) An analysis of 
public policy choices involving such matters as health care, education, environment, and 
immigration in Western Europe and the United States. 

238. Comparative Economic Development and Political Change. (4) An overview of the 
relationship between economic development, socio-structural change, and politics since 
the creation of the international capitalist system in the sixteenth century. The course is 
organized around case studies of what we now recognize as industrialized democracies, 
evolving Communist systems and command economies, and "Third World" countries. 

239. State, Economy, and International Competitiveness. (4) The purpose of this course is 
to introduce a range of important case studies of national economic performance, and to 
do so in such a manner as to illustrate the role of public policy in economic performance 
in a number of leading industrial economies (the United States, United Kingdom, 
Germany, Sweden, and Japan). 

242. Topics in Comparative Politics. (4) An intensive study of one or more major prob- 
lems in contemporary comparative politics. 

244. Politics and Literature. (4) An examination of how literature can extend our knowl- 
edge of politics and political systems. The course considers the insights of selected novelists. 

245. Ethnonationalism. (4) This course is concerned with the role of ethnicity in world 
politics. It focuses on both theoretical and substantive issues relating to: (a) the nature of 
ethnicity and ethnic group identity; (b) the sources of ethnic conflict; (c) the politics of 
ethnic conflict; (d) the policy management of ethnic conflict; and (e) international inter- 
vention in ethnic conflict. 

246. Politics and Policies in South Asia. (4) A survey of major issues relevant to politics 
and policy in India, Pakistan, Bangladesh, and Sri Lanka. 

247. Islam and Politics. (4) The course explores the interrelationship of Islam and politics 
in the contemporary world. The course has two main focuses. The first deals with Islam 
as a political ideology which shapes the structure of political institutions and behavior. 
The second looks at Islam in practice by examining the interaction between Islam and the 
political systems of Iran, Pakistan, Saudi Arabia and others. 

248. Government and Politics of China. (4) A survey of the political institutions and pro- 
cesses in China (People's Republic of China and Republic of China). Emphasis on group 
conflict, elites, ideology, as well as current policy changes in the process of modernization. 

249. Government and Politics of Japan. (4) A survey of the political institutions and pro- 
cesses in Japan. Attention also is given to the relationship between politics and economics. 



Politics 



184 



International Politics 

116. International Politics. (4) A survey of the forces which shape relations among states 
and some of the major problems of contemporary international politics. 

252. Topics in International Politics. (4) An intensive study of one or more major prob- 
lems of contemporary international politics. 

253. International Political Economy. (4) Analyzes major issues in the global political 
economy including theoretical approaches to understanding the tension between politics 
and economics, monetary and trade policy, North-South relations, environmentalism, 
human rights and democratization. 

254. American Foreign Policy: Contemporary Problems. (4) A critical examination of dif- 
ferent methods of studying American foreign policy and of selected policies followed by 
the United States since the early 1960s. 

256. Nuclear Weapons and National Security. (2 or 4) An analysis of the strategic, politi- 
cal, and moral implications of nuclear weapons as instruments of national policy. Both 
American and Soviet perspectives are considered and special attention is given to contem- 
porary debates over the possession and control of nuclear weapons. 

259. The Arab-Israeli Conflict. (4) An analysis of factors influencing the relationship 
between Israel and its neighbors relative to fundamental aspects of United States, Israeli, 
Palestinian, and Arab states policies. 

260. East Asian International Relations. (4) An analytical survey of the bilateral and mul- 
tilateral political relations of the East Asian states, with particular emphasis on the securi- 
ty relations and economic interactions. 

261. International Law and Organizations. (4) Examination of the theoretical and sub- 
stantive problems relating to the development and functioning of international law and 
international organizations and their contributions to international politics. Topics such 
as the United Nations system, human rights, and the law of the sea are considered. 

267. America in Vietnam: Myth and Reality. (4) An analysis of American policy toward 
Vietnam, with special emphasis on the period of 1954-75. The focus is on the relationship 
between American policies and the problems posed by Vietnamese and American cultures. 

Political Philosophy 

115. Political Philosophy. (4) A survey of major systematic statements of the rules and 
principles of political life. Representative writers are Tocqueville, Dahl, and Aristotle. 

270. Ethics and Politics. (4) A seminar on ethical reasoning and politics. Representative 
philosophers include Hume, Kant, Mill, Moore, Ayer, Hare, and Maclntyre. 

271. Plato, Aristotle, and Classical Political Philosophy. (4) An examination of the nature 
and goals of the classical position, with attention to its origins in ancient Athens and its 
diffusion through Rome. Representative writers are Plato, Aristotle, and Cicero. 



185 Politics 



273. Marx, Marxism and the Aftermath of Marxism. (4) An examination of Marx's 
indebtedness to Hegel, his early humanistic writings, and the vicissitudes of 20th century 
vulgar Marxism and neo-Marxism in the works of Lenin, Lukacs, Korsch, Horkeimer, 
Marcuse, and Sartre. 

274. Noble Greeks and Romans. (4) The good man and the good citizen as comprehend- 
ed in classical political philosophy. Representative writers are Aristotle, Plutarch, 
Aquinas, and Shakespeare. 

275. American Political Philosophy. (4) Critical examination of the nature of the 
American polity as expressed by its founders and leading statesmen. Representative writ- 
ers are the Federalists, Lincoln, modern political scientists, and radical critics. 

278. Modern Political Philosophy. (4) Political thought from Machiavelli to the present, 
including such topics as moral and natural rights, positive and negative freedom, social 
contract theory, alienation, and citizenship. Select writings, for example, include 
Machiavielli, Locke, Rousseau, Mill, Marx, and Rawls. 

279. Varieties of Philosophical Liberalism. (4) A study of varieties of 20th century philo- 
sophical liberalism such as libertarianism, utilitarianism, liberal utilitarianism, Rawlsian 
liberalism, and communitarianism, with special focus on rival conceptions of freedom and 
on utilitarianism and its critics. 

Honors and Additional Courses 

280. Political Science Methods. (4) An overview of the methods currently prominent in 
studying politics. Special attention is given to the relationships between theory, method, 
and findings by focusing on the need to make empirical observation systematic. 

281. Forms of Orientalism. (4) The politics of the representational practices of 
Orientalism, the problem of cultural representation, and the relationship between Western 
intellectual constructions of the Orient and Western colonialism. (Also listed as INS 220) 

285. Honors Study. (2) Directed study toward completion of the project begun in seminar 
courses (291, 292, 293, or 294) and oral defense of the paper. Taken in the spring semester of 
the senior year by all candidates for departmental honors. P — Politics 291, 292, 293, or 294. 

287. Individual Study. (2,3, or 4) Intensive research leading to the completion of an ana- 
lytical paper conducted under the direction of a faculty member. Students are responsible 
for initiating the project and securing the permission of an appropriate instructor. 

P — Permission of instructor. 

288. Directed Reading. (1-4) Concentrated reading in an area of study not otherwise 
available. Students are responsible for initiating the project and securing the permission of 
an appropriate instructor. P — Permission of instructor. 

289. Internship in Politics. (2,3, or 4) Field work in a public or private setting with related 
readings and an analytical paper under the direction of a faculty member. Students are 
responsible for initiating the project and securing the permission of an appropriate 
instructor. Normally one course in an appropriate subfield will have been taken prior to 
the internship. P — Permission of instructor. 

Politics j86 



Seminars 

291. Seminar in American Politics. (4) Readings, research, and independent study on 
selected topics. P — Permission of instructor. 

292. Seminar in Comparative Politics. (4) Readings, research, and independent study on 
selected topics. P — Permission of instructor. 

293. Seminar in International Politics. (4) Readings, research, and independent study on 
selected topics. P — Permission of instructor. 

294. Seminar in Political Philosophy. (4) Readings, research, and independent study on 
selected topics. P — Permission of instructor. 

Psychology 

Deborah L. Best, Chair 

Wake Forest Professors Deborah L. Best, Mark R. Leary 

Professors Robert C. Beck, Charles L. Richman 

Associate Professors Terry D. Blumenthal, Christy M. Buchanan, 

Dale Dagenbach, Catherine E. Seta, Cecilia H. Solano 

Assistant Professors William W. Fleeson, Batja Gomes De Mesquita, 

Karen L. Roper, James A. Schirillo, Eric R. Stone 

Visiting Assistant Professors Marie M. O'Hara, Mark V. Pezzo, Mary M. Roufail 

Adjunct Professors Jay R. Kaplan, W. Jack Rejeski Jr., Frank B. Wood 

Adjunct Associate Professors C. Drew Edwards, Carol A. Shively 

Adjunct Assistant Professors Phillip G. Batten, Jerry W. Noble, 

Marianne A. Schubert, William W. Sloan Jr., Elizabeth H. Taylor 

Adjunct Instructor Stephen W. Davis 

Psychology 151 is prerequisite to all courses of a higher number. Courses numbered below 
151 do not count toward Division IV requirements or toward the major in psychology. 
Psychology 210 or 211, or special permission of the instructor, is prerequisite for all 
300-level courses except 313, 322, 335, 344, 357, 359, 364, 367, and 374. 

It is recommended that students who are considering psychology as a major take 
Psychology 151 in their first year and Psychology 211 no later than the fall of their 
junior year. An average of C or higher in psychology courses is required at the time the 
major is elected. The major in psychology requires the completion of a minimum of forty 
credits in psychology, including 151, 211, 212, and 313. In addition, the major student 
must complete at least one course from each of the following groups: 320, 323, 326, 
329, 331, and 333; 341, 351, 355, and 362. No more than forty-eight psychology cred- 
its may be counted toward the graduation requirements of 144 credits. No more than 
four credits of directed study (280) or independent research (282) may be counted 
toward the forty credits required for the major; up to a maximum of six credits may be 
counted with more than forty credits in the major. 



l8y Psychology 



No more than twelve credits will be accepted for courses taken at other schools to be 
counted toward the major. With the exception of Psychology 151, specific courses 
required for the major must be taken at Wake Forest University. The guidelines regarding 
transfer and credit approval may be modified in rare and special circumstances at the dis- 
cretion of the psychology department chair. 

The minor in psychology requires twenty credits in psychology including: 151; 210 or 
21 1; at least two of the following courses, at least one of which must be at the 300-level — 
241, 245, 255, 260, 268, 320, 323, 326, 329, 331, 333, and 362. 

A minimum grade average of C on all courses attempted in psychology is required for 
graduation with either a major or minor in psychology. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to participate in the honors 
program in psychology. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Psychology," 
the student must complete satisfactorily a special sequence of courses (381, 383) and pass 
an oral or written examination. In addition, the honors student normally has a non-credit 
research apprenticeship with a faculty member. For more detailed information, members 
of the departmental faculty should be consulted. 

100. Learning to Learn. (2,3, or 4) A workshop designed primarily for first- and second- 
year students who wish to improve their academic skills through the application of basic 
principles of learning, memory, organization, etc. Third- and fourth-year students by per- 
mission of the instructor only. No prerequisites. Pass/fail only. 

151. Introductory Psychology. (4) A systematic survey of psychology as the scientific 
study of behavior. Prerequisite to all courses of a higher number. 

210. Methods in Psychological Research. (4) An introduction to statistics and research 
design for students minoring in psychology. P — Psychology 151 and permission of 
instructor. 

211, 212. Research Methods in Psychology. (5, 5) Introduction to the design and statisti- 
cal analysis of psychological research. Lab — twice weekly. P — Psychology 151 and 
permission of instructor. 

238. Emotion. (4) Survey of theory methods and research in the area of emotion. 
Developmental, cultural, social-psychological, physiological, personality, and clinical 
perspectives on emotions are given. P — Psychology 151. 

239. Altered States of Consciousness. (4) Examination of altered states of consciousness with 
special reference to sleep and dreams, meditation, hypnosis, and drugs. P — Psychology 151. 

241. Developmental Psychology. (4) Survey of physical, emotional, cognitive, and social 
development in humans from conception to death. P — Psychology 151. 

245. Survey of Abnormal Behavior. (4) Study of problem behaviors such as depression, 
alcoholism, antisocial personality, the schizophrenias, and pathogenic personality pat- 
terns, with emphasis on causes, prevention, and the relationships of these disorders to 
normal lifestyles. P — Psychology 151. 

250. Psychology Abroad. (4) The study of psychology in foreign countries. Content and 
travel plans vary from year to year depending upon interests of faculty and students. 
Usually offered in summer. P — Psychology 151. 

Psychology j8g 



255. Personality. (4) Survey of theory and research on the structure and function of 
human personality, with attention to the relationship to cognition, emotion, motivation, 
and behavior. P — Psychology 151. 

260. Social Psychology. (4) A survey of the field, including theories of social behavior, 
interpersonal attraction, attitudes and attitude change, and group behavior. 
P — Psychology 151. 

265. Human Sexuality. (4) An exploration of the psychological and physiological aspects 
of human sexuality, with attention to sexual mores, sexual deviances, sexual dysfunction, 
and sex-related roles. P — Psychology 151. 

268. Industrial/Organization Psychology. (4) Psychological principles and methods 
applied to problems commonly encountered in business and industry. P — Psychology 151. 

270. Topics in Psychology. (1,2, or 3) The student selects from among a group of short 
one-credit courses dealing with topics of special interest. The courses meet sequentially, 
not concurrently, and options are offered in each portion of the semester. 
P — Psychology 151. 

zyoA Child Development and zyoN Liking and Loving Relationships 

Social Policy zyoP Animal Flying Behavior 

zyoB Persuasion and Social zyoR The Human Factor: Designing 

Propaganda Your Own World 

zyoC Psychology and the Law zjoS Primate Cognition 

zyoE Emotion zyoU The Self and Social Behavior 

zyoF Social Psychology of zyoW Judgment and Decision Making 

Physical Activity zyoX Psychobiology 

zyoH Intelligence zyoY Women, Health, and Culture 

zyoj Memory zyoZ Primate Models of Human Disorder 

280. Directed Study. (1-4) Student research performed under faculty supervision. 
P — Psychology 151 and approval of faculty member prior to registration. 

282. Independent Research. (1-4) Independent reading or research conducted under facul- 
ty supervision. (P/F grade only.) P — Psychology 151 and approval of faculty member prior 
to registration. 

313. History and Systems of Psychology. (4) The development of psychological thought 
and research from ancient Greece to the present. P — Two psychology courses beyond 151 
or permission of instructor. 

320. Physiological Psychology. (4) Neurophysiological and neuroanatomical explanations 
of behavior. P — Psychology 210 or 211 or permission of instructor. 

322. Psychopharmacology. (4) A survey of the influences of a wide range of psychoactive 
drugs, both legal and illegal, on human physiology, cognition, and behavior. 

P — Psychology 151. 

323. Animal Behavior. (4) A survey of laboratory and field research on animal behavior. 
P — Psychology 210 or 211 or permission of instructor. 



189 Psychology 



326. Learning Theory and Research. (4) Survey of concepts and research in learning, with 
particular emphasis on recent developments. P — Psychology 210 or 211. 

329. Perception. (4) Survey of theory and research findings on various sensory systems 
(vision, hearing, touch, taste). P — Psychology 210 or 211. 

331. Cognition. (4) Current theory and research in cognitive processes. Emphasis on 
memory, attention, visual and auditory information processing, concept identification/ 
formation, and language. P — Psychology 210 or 211. 

333. Motivation of Behavior. (4) Survey of basic motivational concepts and related evi- 
dence. P — Psychology 210 or 211. 

335. Fundamentals of Human Motivation. (4) Description and analysis of some funda- 
mental motivational phenomena, with special reference to human problems; includes 
reward and punishment, conflict anxiety, affection, needs for achievement and power, 
aggression, creativity, and curiosity. P — Psychology 151. 

341. Research in Developmental Psychology. (4) Methodological issues and selected 
research in developmental psychology. Research projects required. P — Psychology 210 
or211. 

344. Abnormal Psychology. (4) Descriptive analysis of the major types of abnormal 
behavior with attention to organic, psychological, and cultural causes and major modes of 
therapy. Offered in the summer. P — Psychology 151. 

346. Psychological Disorders of Childhood. (4) Survey of problems including conduct 
disorders, attention deficits disorders, depression, and autism. Emphasis on causes, 
prevention, treatment, and the relationships of disorders to normal child development 
and family life. P — Psychology 245 or 344 or permission of instructor. 

351. Personality Research. (4) The application of a variety of research procedures to the 
study of human personality. Research projects required. P — Psychology 210 or 211. 

355. Research in Social Psychology. (4) Methodological issues and selected research in the 
study of the human as a social animal. Research projects required. P — Psychology 210 
or211. 

357. Cross-Cultural Psychology. (4) An examination of differences in psychological pro- 
cesses (e.g., attitudes, perception, mental health, organizational behavior) associated with 
cultural variation. P — Psychology 151. 

359. Psychology of Gender. (4) An exploration of the psychological similarities and 
differences between human males and females, including consideration of social, cog- 
nitive, motivational, biological, and developmental determinants of behavior. P — 
Psychology 151. 

362. Psychological Testing. (4) An overview of the development and nature of psychologi- 
cal tests with applications to school counseling, business, and clinical practice. Students 
have the opportunity to take a variety of psychological tests. P — Psychology 210 or 211. 

363. Survey of Clinical Psychology. (4) An overview of the field of clinical psychology. 
P — Psychology 245 and senior standing or permission of instructor. 



Psychology jqq 



364. Prejudice, Discrimination, and Racism. (4) A comparison of cross-cultural similari- 
ties and differences in the initiation, maintenance, and treatment of prejudice, discrimina- 
tion, and racism, with an emphasis on past and current trends in the United States. 
P — Psychology 151 or permission of instructor. 

367. Effectiveness in Parent/Child Relations. (4) A survey of popular approaches to child- 
rearing, with examination of the research literature on parent/child interaction and actual 
training in parental skills. P — Psychology 151. 

374. Judgment and Decision Making. (4) A theoretical and empirical examination of how 
people make decisions and judgments about their lives and the world, and how these 
processes can be improved. P — Psychology 151. 

381. Honors Seminar. (3) Seminar on selected problems in psychology. Intended primarily 
for students in the departmental honors program. P — Psychology 211 and permission of 
instructor. 

383. Honors Research. (3) Seminar in selected issues in research design, followed by 
independent empirical research under the supervision of a member of the departmental 
faculty. P — Psychology 211 and permission of instructor. 

392. Contemporary Problems in Psychology. (4) Seminar treatment of current theory and 
research in several "frontier" areas of psychology. Principally for senior majors planning 
to attend graduate school. P — Psychology 211 and senior standing. 



iqi Psychology 



Religion 

Charles A. Kimball, Chair 

Albritton Professor of the Bible Fred L. Horton Jr. 

Easley Professor of Religion Stephen B. Boyd 

University Professor James A. Martin Jr. 

Professors John E. Collins, Charles A. Kimball 

Adjunct Professor Bill J. Leonard 

Associate Professors Kenneth G. Hoglund, Simeon llesanmi 

Adjunct Associate Professor Mark Jensen 

Visiting Associate Professor Phyllis R. Pleasants 

Assistant Professors Mary F. Foskett, James Ford 

Visiting Assistant Professor Elaine Swartzentruber 

The department offers courses designed to give every student an opportunity to acquire at 
least an introduction to the field of religion. 

A major in religion requires a minimum of thirty-two credits, at least half of which 
must be in courses above the 100-level. 

A minor in religion requires twenty credits, eight of which must be above the 100- 
level. The required courses may include one pass/fail course if the course is offered on the 
pass/fail basis only. The department will provide advisers for students electing the minor 
in religion. 

Pre-seminary students should consult with a member of the department faculty in 
order to make optimal course selections in religion, psychology, history, communication, 
and other disciplines. Thoughtful planning will facilitate admission into the seminary 
program of their choice. 

Highly qualified majors are encouraged to apply for admission to the honors program 
in religion. To graduate with the designation, Honors in Religion," a student must apply 
to the department chair for admission to the honors program, normally by February of 
the junior year. Upon completion of all the requirements, the candidate may graduate 
with "Honors in Religion." For additional information, consult any member of the 
departmental faculty. 

101. Introduction to Religion. (4) A study of meaning and value as expressed in religious 
thought, experience, and practice. Focus varies with instructor. 

102. Introduction to the Bible. (4) A study of the forms, settings, contents, and themes of 
the Old and New Testaments. Focus varies with instructor. 

103. Introduction to the Christian Tradition. (4) A study of Christian experience, 
thought, and practice. Focus varies with instructor. 

111. Introduction to the Old Testament. (4) A survey of the Old Testament designed to 
introduce the student to the history, literature, and religion of the ancient Hebrews. 

173. Problems of Religious Thought. (4) An introduction to central themes and issues in 
the history of religious thought, with special emphasis on contemporary developments 
and world religions. 



Religion 192 



218. Seminar in the Mediterranean World. (4) Travel and study in such countries as 
Greece, Italy, Turkey, Egypt, Lebanon, Syria, and Israel. 

235. Passion, Mind, and Power. (4) An examination of the relation between emotion, rea- 
son, and will in Christian ethical theory, ancient to modern, including feminist. 

261. Foundations of Traditional Judaism. (2) A study of rabbinic and medieval Judaism, 
emphasizing the post-biblical codification of Jewish thought in the Mishnah, Talmud, and 
midrash. 

262. Contemporary Judaism. (2) A survey of Judaism today, including influences of the 
Enlightenment, Hasidism, Zionism, the Holocaust and feminism. 

263. Contemporary Catholicism. (2) An introduction to recent thought and practice in 
the Roman Catholic Church. 

266. Religious Sects and Cults. (4) An examination of certain religious sects in America, 
including such groups as Jehovah's Witnesses, communal groups, and contemporary 
movements. 

267. The Baptists. (2) A survey of Baptist history, thought, and polity, including an exam- 
ination of various Baptist groups and a study of important controversies. 

270. Theology and Modern Literature. (4) An introduction to such modern theologians as 
Karl Barth and Reinhold Niebuhr, and to literary figures who share their concerns, includ- 
ing Flannery O'Connor and Walker Percy. 

277. Faith and Imagination. (4) A study of modern writers, including C.S. Lewis and 
J.R.R. Tolkien, who seek to retell the Christian story in imaginative terms. 

282. Honors in Religion. (4) A conference course including directed reading and the writ- 
ing of a research project. 

285. Seminar in Early Christian Studies. (4) This seminar is designed specially to meet the 
needs of students earning the interdisciplinary minor in early Christian studies, but is not 
limited to them. It will explore from various points of view the culture of the 
Mediterranean world from which Christianity was born and grew: literature and art, his- 
tory and economics, religions and philosophies. May be repeated for credit. (Also listed as 
Classical Languages 285.) 

286, 287. Directed Reading. (1-4, 1-4) A project in an area of study not otherwise avail- 
able in the department. P — Permission of instructor. 

300. Meaning of Religion. (4) A phenomenological study of different ways of defining 
religion, including the views of representative philosophers, psychologists, sociologists, 
anthropologists, theologians, and historians of religion. 

301. Myth. (4) A study of the approaches to the interpretation of myth, with a focus on 
the meaning and values implicit in the myths of contemporary culture. 

302. Mysticism. (4) A study of mysticism from a multireligious perspective, with emphasis 
on the psychological and sociological aspects of the phenomenon. 



193 



Religion 



303. Religion and Science. (4) An examination of the ways in which religion and science 
have conflicted with, criticized, and complemented one another in the history of Western 
thought from Galileo to the present. 

310. The Prophetic Literature. (4) An examination of the development and theological 
contents of the literary products of Israel's prophetic movement. 

311. The Psalms. (2,4) A study of Hebrew poetry in English translation with special 
attention to its types, its literary and rhetorical characteristics, and its importance for our 
understanding of the religion and culture of ancient Israel. (The first half of the course 
may be taken for two credits and is a prerequisite for the second half.) 

312. The Critical Study of the Pentateuch. (4) A study of the five traditional books of 
Moses (the Torah) and the various lines of analysis that modern Biblical critics have used 
to interpret their composition and role in the development of Israelite theological thought. 

313. Near Eastern Archeology. (4) A survey of twentieth century archeology in the Near 
East with attention to its importance for Biblical studies. 

314. Ancient Israel and Her Neighbors. (2) A study of ancient Near Eastern archeology 
with special emphasis on Israel's relationships with surrounding peoples. 

315. 316. Field Research in Biblical Archeology. (4,4) A study of the religion and culture 
of the ancient Near East through the excavation and interpretation of an ancient site. 

317. The Wisdom Literature. (4) An examination of the development, literary characteris- 
tics and theological contents of the works of ancient Israel's sages. 

318. Feminist Interpretations of the Bible. (4) The application of feminist perspectives to 
the study of selected biblical texts. 

319. Visions of the End: Jewish and Christian Apocalyptic. (4) Reading and study of 
Daniel, Revelation, and certain non-Biblical apocalyptic texts. 

320. The Search for Jesus. (4) A study of issues, assumptions, evidence, and debate that 
shapes the continuing quest for the historical Jesus. 

321. Introduction to the New Testament. (4) An intensive introduction to the literature of 
the canonical New Testament along with methodologies for its study. 

322. The General Epistles. (4) An exegetical study of two or more of the general Epistles, 
with emphasis on the setting of the Epistles in the life of the Early Church. 

323. The Parables of Jesus. (4) An examination of the historical, social, cultural, and 
theological significance of the parables of Jesus as recorded in the synoptic gospels. 

324. Early Christian Literature. (4) An examination of various literatures and perspectives 
of the first three centuries of the Christian movement. 

326. Early Christian Theologians: Paul. (4) An introduction to the Pauline interpretation 
of Christianity and its place in the life of the Early Church. 

327. Early Christian Theologians: The Fourth Evangelist. (4) An examination of the 
Johannine interpretation of Jesus and the Christian faith. 

328. The New Testament and Ethics. (4) A study of selected ethical issues in the New 



Religion jqa 



Testament within the context of Mediterranean culture. 

329. New Testament and Theology. (4) A consideration of the implications of the critical 
study of the New Testament for theology. 

330. Comparative Religious Ethics. (4) A comparative study of the moral values and 
socio-ethical positions in the major religious traditions of the world, with particular focus 
on their various methods of reasoning and sources of authority. 

331. Christian Ethics and Social Justice. (4) An inquiry from a Christian perspective into 
different theoretical and practical responses to issues of justice in society. 

335. Christian Ethics and the Problem of War. (4) An examination of the causes and char- 
acteristics of war, various Christian responses to it, and approaches to peacemaking, with 
attention to selected contemporary issues. 

337. The Authority of Scripture for Ethics. (4) An examination of theological questions 
resulting from the claim that the biblical canon has primary authority among the sources 
of Christian ethics. 

339. Religion, Society, and Power in Africa. (4) An interdisciplinary study of the growth 
and transformations of Africa's major religious traditions (Christianity, Islam, and the 
indigenous religions), and of their relations with secular social changes. 

340. Men's Studies and Religion. (4) An examination of how masculine sex-role expecta- 
tions and male experiences have both shaped religious ideas, symbols, rituals, institutions, 
and forms of spirituality and been shaped by them. Attention is given to the ways in 
which race, class, and sexual orientation affect those dynamics. 

341. Civil Rights and Black Consciousness Movements. (4) A social and religious history 
of the African- American struggle for citizenship rights and freedom from World War II to 
the present. (Also listed as History 376.) 

342. Religion, Culture, and Modernity. (4) An inquiry into the origins and development 
of modernity as idea and ideology, with special emphasis on its significance for non- 
Western social and religious movements. 

343. The City as Symbol. (4) A study of the city, past and present, as a unique repository 
and symbol of human values and aspirations. 

345. The African-American Religious Experience. (4) An exploration of the religious 
dimensions of African-American life from its African antecedents to contemporary figures 
and movements. 

347. The Emerging Church in the Two-Thirds World. (4) An investigation of contempo- 
rary Christian communities in Africa, Asia, the Caribbean, and Latin America with spe- 
cial attention to theological, political, and economic activities. 

348. Struggles for Freedom in Southern Africa and the United States. (4) Comparison of 
the liberatory movements in Southern Africa and the United States during the twentieth 
century. (Also listed as History 378.) 

350. Psychology of Religion. (4) An examination of the psychological elements in the ori- 
gin, development, and expression of religious experience. 



195 



Religion 



351. Religion and Society. (4) A study of religion as a social phenomenon and its relation- 
ship to political, economic, and other structures of society. (Also listed as Sociology 301.) 

354. Religious Development of the Individual. (4) A study of growth and development 
through childhood and adolescence to adulthood, with emphasis on the role of the home 
and the church in religious education. 

355. Theology of Pastoral Care and Counseling. (4) A study of the relationship between 
theology and the purpose, theories, and methods of pastoral care. 

358. Twentieth Century Christian Theologians. (4) A study of the major exponents of the 
Catholic, Protestant, and Orthodox traditions. 

360. World Religions. (4) An examination of the ideas and practices of major religious 
traditions in their historical and cultural context. Focus varies with instructor. 

361. The Buddhist World of Thought and Practice. (4) A survey of the development of 
Buddhism from India to Southeast Asia, China, Tibet, Japan, and the West, focusing on 
the transformation of Buddhist teachings and practices in these different social and cultur- 
al contexts. 

362. Islam. (4) An examination of the origins and development of Islam. Particular atten- 
tion is given to the formation of Islamic faith and practice, as well as contemporary mani- 
festations of Islam in Asia, Africa, and North America. 

363. The Religions of Japan. (4) A study of the central religious traditions in Japan, from 
pre-history to the present including Shinto, Buddhism, Zen Buddhism, Christianity, and 
Confuciansim. 

364. Conceptions of the Afterlife. (4) An examination of the variety of answers given to 
the question: "What happens after death?" Particular attention is given to the views of 
Jews, Christians, Muslims, Hindus, and Buddhists and the ways their views relate to life 
in this world. 

365. History of Religions in America. (4) A study of American religions from colonial 
times until the present. 

366. Gender and Religion. (4) An examination of the historical and contemporary inter- 
action between religion and sex roles, sexism, and sexuality. 

367. The Mystics of the Church. (4) A historical study of the lives and thought of selected 
Christian mystics with special attention to their religious experience. 

368. The Protestant and Catholic Reformations. (4) A study of the origin and develop- 
ment of Reformation theology and ecclesiology. 

369. Radical Christian Movements. (4) A study of selected radical movements in the 
Christian tradition and their relation to contemporary issues. 

370. Women and Christianity. (4) A study of the roles and contributions of women 
within the Christian tradition throughout history and an analysis of the mechanisms of 
their oppression. 

371. Sexuality and Christian Thought. (4) A survey of theological responses to human 
sexuality with special emphasis on contemporary issues. 



Religion 



196 



372. History of Christian Thought. (2,4) A study of the history of Christian thought, 
beginning with its Hebraic and Greek backgrounds and tracing its rise and development 
to modern times. The course may be divided into halves for two credits each. 

3 jz (a) Patristic Thought 

3 72 (b) Medieval and Reformation Thought 

373. Cinema and the Sacred. (4) An investigation of select theological and religious 
themes in contemporary film. 

374. Contemporary Christian Thought. (4) An examination of the major issues and per- 
sonalities in modern theology. 

375. Major Themes in Catholic Theology. (4) A detailed examination of the central 
themes of Christian theology through the study of major Roman Catholic theologians. 

376. Christian Literary Classics. (4) A study of Christian texts which are masterpieces of 
literature as well as faith, including works by Augustine, Dante, Pascal, Bunyan, Milton, 
and Newman. 

377. The Problem of Evil from Job to Shakespeare. (4) A comparative analysis of the 
source and remedy of evil in Job, Aeschylus, Sophocles, Plato, Dante, and Shakespeare. 

378. Aesthetics and Religion. (4) An examination of aesthetic and religious theories of 
selected thinkers, noting what the arts and religion have in common as modes of percep- 
tion and expression. 

380. The Main Streams of Chinese Philosophy and Religion. (4) An introduction to the 
most important traditions in Chinese philosophy and religion: Confucianism, Daoism 
(Taoism), and Chinese Buddhism or Chinese Chan (Zen) Buddhism. (Also listed as 
Philosophy 253.) 

Near Eastern Languages and Literature 

111, 112. Elementary Hebrew. (4,4) A course for beginners in the classical Hebrew of the 
Bible, with emphasis on the principles of Hebrew grammar and the reading of Biblical 
texts. Both semesters must be completed. 

117. Akkadian I. (4) An analysis of the phonology, morphology, and syntax of the East 
Semitic languages of the ancient Near East as they relate to the larger family of Semitic 
languages. On demand. 

118. Akkadian II. (4) A continuation of Akkadian 117 with further emphasis on building 
expertise in vocabulary and syntax through the reading of texts from the Middle 
Babylonian period. On demand. 

153. Intermediate Hebrew. (4) Intensive work in Hebrew grammar and syntax based 
upon the readings of selected texts. Readings emphasize post-Biblical Hebrew. P — Hebrew 
111, 112, or the equivalent. 

211. Hebrew Literature. (4) The reading and discussion of significant Biblical Hebrew 
texts. P — Hebrew 153. 



197 



Religion 



212. Hebrew Literature II. (4) The reading and discussion of significant Biblical and post- 
Biblical texts. On demand. P — Hebrew 153. 

301. Introduction to Semitic Languages. (4) A study of the history and structure of four 
languages from the Hamito-Semitic family. 



Romance Languages 

Candelas S. Gala, Chair 

Professors Candelas S. Gala, Milorad Margitic, 

Antonio C. Vitti, Byron R. Wells, M. Stanley Whitley 

Associate Professors Jane W. Albrecht, Sarah E. Barbour, 

Mary L. Friedman, Judy K. Kem, 

Soledad Miguel-Prendes, Stephen Murphy, 

Assistant Professors Victoria E. Campos, Ola Furmanek, Luis Gonzalez, 

Patricia Heid, Linda S. Howe, Salvador Anton Pujol, 

Maria Teresa Sanhueza, Kendall B. Tarte 

Visiting Assistant Professors Elizabeth Mazza Anthony, 

Christina Ball,Shaul Bassi (Venice) 

Instructors Elizabeth Barron, Corrado Corradini, Elisabeth d'Empaire, 

Rebekah L. Morris, Violeta Padron-Bermejo, Jesus Pico-Argel, 

Justin R. Peterson, Maria Rodriguez, Leticia I. Romo, 

Christine E. Swain, Carlos Valencia 

Adjunct Instructors Michel Bourquin, Jenny Puckett, Florence M. Toy, 

Maria-Encarna Moreno Turner, Alicia M. Vitti 

Adjunct Assistant Professor Janet Joyner 

The major in French requires a minimum of nine four-credit French courses numbered 
above 213. French 215, 216, 219, 370, one of the genre courses (363, 364, or 365), and 
four other courses are required. Students are advised and encouraged to take related 
courses in other areas of the University curriculum, such as History 317, 321, and 322, 
and Humanities 222. Students must achieve at least a C average in courses comprising 
the major. 

The minor in French requires a minimum of six four-credit French courses numbered 
above 213. French 215, 216, 219, and three other courses are required. With departmen- 
tal approval, equivalent courses may be selected from the Dijon program, and certain 
other substitutions may be made. 

The major in Spanish requires a minimum of nine four-credit Spanish courses num- 
bered above 213. Spanish 217, 218, 219, plus three advanced courses in literature, of 
which one must be in Spanish literature and one in Spanish-American literature, and three 
electives are required. Students must achieve at least a C average in courses comprising 
the major. 

The minor in Spanish requires a minimum of six four-credit courses in Spanish num- 
bered above 213. Spanish 217, 218, 219, and one advanced course in literature are 



Romance Languages 



198 



required. With departmental approval, equivalent courses may be selected from the pro- 
grams in Salamanca or Burgos, and certain other substitutions may be made. 

Certificate in Spanish for Business requires sixteen credits above Spanish 219. It 
includes Spanish 329, 330, 381, and any course above Spanish 213 (excluding 219) in any 
area of Hispanic literature or culture. 

Certificate in Spanish Translation/Localization (STL) teaches strategies of Spanish 
into English translation and introduces students to various software language applica- 
tions; includes an internship in a professional translation environment (384). Credits: 18- 
20. Requirements include Spanish 380 and 381, Linguistics 383 and 384, and either 
Spanish 329 or 382. 

Certificate in Spanish Interpreting (SI) teaches strategies for different types of 
Spanish/English interpreting; includes an internship (384). Credits: 14-16. Requirements 
include one literature course above Spanish 213, 382, 384, and any one of the following: 
Spanish 329 or 380 or 381, or Linguistics 383. 

The minor in Italian language and culture requires twenty credits in Italian above 
Italian 153. It includes Italian 215, 216, 219, 220, and 224 or their equivalents. An aver- 
age of at least C must be earned in all courses taken in the minor. 

All majors, minors, and certificate students are strongly urged to take advantage of 
the department's study abroad programs. 

Highly qualified majors are invited by the department to apply for admission to the 
honors program in French or Spanish. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in 
French" or "Honors in Spanish," a candidate must complete French or Spanish 390 and 
391 and pass a comprehensive written and oral examination. The oral examination may 
be conducted, at least in part, in the major language. For additional information, mem- 
bers of the departmental faculty should be consulted. 

Intensive Summer Language Institute (ISLI) 

Purpose: ISLI is a language immersion program. It offers a curriculum that enables 
students to achieve the necessary proficiencies in the Spanish language at the beginning- 
intermediate level and be better prepared to perform in subsequent courses in which they 
may enroll. 

Characteristics: 

Classes will meet for six hours per day, Monday through Friday during 

five consecutive weeks. 
Students will have lunch together with one of their instructors in the 

target language. 
Required extracurricular activities two evenings per week and three 

of the six Saturdays. 
Living in the same floor/residence. 
Pledge to speak the target language. 

Information on courses offered as part of the Intensive Summer Language Institute are 
included in the course listings beginning on the next page. 



199 



Romance Languages 



French 

111, 112. Elementary French. (4,4) A two-semester sequence designed to help students 
develop the ability to understand and speak French and also learn to read and write 
French at the elementary level. Labs required. 

113. Intensive Elementary French. (5) A course reviewing the material of 111-112 in one 
semester, intended for students whose preparation for 153 is inadequate. Credit not given 
for both 113 and 111 or 112. Labs required. 

153. Intermediate French. (5) Intermediate-level course covering the structure of the lan- 
guage, developing students' reading, writing and conversation skills and preparing them 
for oral and written discussion of literary texts in French 213. Note that 153 is mutually 
exclusive of other 153-marked courses (153X). P — French 111-112, or placement. Labs 
required. 

153X. Intermediate French. (4) An intensive, intermediate-level course intended for stu- 
dents with a stronger background than required of 153 students. It offers the opportunity 
to develop further their reading, writing, and conversation skills and prepare for oral and 
written discussion of literary texts in French 213. Labs required. 

198. Internship in French Language. (2,4) Under faculty direction, a student undertakes a 
language project in conjunction with an off -campus service commitment or internship. 
Includes, but is not limited to, vocabulary building, keeping a journal, and reading profes- 
sional material. P — French 219 or permission of instructor. 

213. Introduction to French Literature. (4) Reading of selected texts in French. Particular 
periods, genres, and authors may vary from section to section. Parallel reading and 
reports. Does not count toward the major or the minor. P — French 153 or equivalent. 

213H. Introduction to French Literature (Honors). (4) In the honors section of 
Introduction to French Literature, texts covered are much the same as those presented in 
other French 213 sections, but coursework focuses more intensely on developing effective 
reading strategies and on improving written and oral expression in the language. Benefits 
include smaller class size and more opportunity for student involvement. Intended for stu- 
dents with a good background in French (shown, for example, by a 3, 4, or 5 on the AP 
French Language Exam, by a high WFU placement exam score, or by completion of 
French 153X). P — French 153 or equivalent. 

215. Introduction to French Studies. (4) An orientation in French and Francophone cul- 
tures through their historical development and their various forms. Includes the study of 
literary, historical, and social texts, and possibly films, art, and music. Required for major. 
(A student taking 2152 as part of the Dijon program would receive credit for this course. 
Please see the description of the Dijon program for details.) 

216. Studies in French Literature and Culture. (4) Study of the ways in which various 
aspects of French culture appear in different literary genres over certain periods of time. 
Emphasis is placed on reading and discussion of selected representative texts. Topics vary 
from section to section. May be repeated for credit when topics vary. Required for major. 
(Fulfills Division I requirement.) P — French 213 or permission of instructor. 



Romance Languages 200 



219. Composition and Review of Grammar. (4) A systematic review of the fundamental 
principles of comparative grammar, with practical training in writing idiomatic French. 
Required for major. P — French 153 or equivalent. 

220. French Conversation. (4) A language course based on cultural materials. Designed to 
perfect students' aural skills and oral proficiency by systematically increasing their vocab- 
ulary and reinforcing their command of specific grammatical points. Short written works 
will be assigned. Includes a regularly scheduled language lab one hour per week. 

P — French 153 or equivalent. 

221. Introduction to Translation. (4) Introduction to translation strategies through theory 
and practice. Emphasis is placed on translation of a broad variety of texts, including dif- 
ferent literary and journalistic modes. Attention is given to accuracy in vocabulary, struc- 
tures, forms, and to cultural concerns. P — French 219 or permission of instructor. 

222. French Phonetics. (4) A study of the principles of standard French pronunciation, 
with emphasis on their practical application as well as on their theoretical basis. 

281. French Independent Study. (2-4) P — Permission of the department. 

319. Advanced Grammar and Stylistics. (4) Review and application of grammatical struc- 
tures for the refinement of writing techniques. Emphasis is placed on the use of French in 
a variety of discourse types. Attention is given to accuracy and fluency of usage in the 
written language. P — French 219 or equivalent or permission of instructor. Graduate-level 
students will conduct and present in-depth research projects. 

329. Introduction to Business French. (4) An introduction to the use of French in busi- 
ness. This course emphasizes oral and written practices, reading, and French business cul- 
ture, as well as a comprehensive analysis of different business topics and areas. P — French 
219 or permission of instructor. 

330. Advanced Business French. (4) Development of advanced skills in French for busi- 
ness. Emphasis is placed on oral and written business presentations, reading comprehen- 
sion of case studies related to the French business world, and cross-cultural awareness. 

P — French 229 or permission of instructor. 

360. Cinema and Society. (4) A study of French and Francophone cultures through cine- 
ma. Readings and films may include film as artifact, film theory, and film history. 
P — French 215 or permission of instructor. 

363. Trends in French Poetry. (4) A study of the development of the poetic genre with analy- 
sis and interpretation of works from each period. P — French 215 or permission of instructor. 

364. French Prose Fiction. (4) A broad survey of French prose fiction, with critical study 
of several masterpieces in the field. P — French 215 or permission of instructor. 

365. French Drama. (4) A study of the chief trends in French dramatic art, with reading 
and discussion of representative plays from selected periods: Baroque, Classicism, and 
Romanticism, among others. P — French 215 or permission of instructor. 

370. Seminar in French Studies. (4) An in-depth study of particular aspects of selected liter- 
ary and cultural works from different genres and/or periods. Topics vary from semester to 



201 Romance Languages 



semester. Required for major. Graduate-level students will conduct and present in-depth 
research projects. Can be repeated for credit. P — French 215 or permission of instructor. 

375. Special Topics. (2 or 4) Selected themes and approaches to French literature tran- 
scending boundaries of time and genre. Topics to be chosen by staff in consultation with 
majors prior to the term the course is offered. May be repeated once for credit. P — French 
215 or permission of instructor. 

390. Directed Reading. (2) Required for honors in French. 

391. Directed Research. (2,4) Extensive reading and/or research to meet individual needs. 
Required for departmental honors. P — Permission of the department. 

Semester in France 

The department sponsors a semester in Dijon, France, the site of a well-established French 
university. Students go as a group in the fall semester, accompanied by a departmental fac- 
ulty member. 

No particular major is required for eligibility. However, a student (1) should be of 
junior standing and (2) should have taken as prerequisite French 219 or its equivalent or 
at least one French course beyond the intermediate level. 

Students are placed in language courses according to their level of ability in French, as 
ascertained by a test given at Dijon. Courses are taught by native French professors. The 
resident director supervises academic, residential, and extracurricular affairs and has gen- 
eral oversight of independent study projects. 

2152. Studies in French Language and Culture. (8) Familiarization with the language and 
culture of France and its people. Courses in conversational and idiomatic French, practice 
in writing, participation in French family life, lectures on selected topics, and excursions 
to points of historical and cultural significance. Satisfies French 215 requirement for 
major or minor. 

2202. Advanced Oral and Written French. (4) Study of grammar, composition, pronunci- 
ation, and phonetics, with extensive practice in oral and written French. 

2232. Contemporary France. (4) A study of present-day France, including aspects of geog- 
raphy and consideration of social, political, and educational factors in French life today. 

2402. Independent Study. (2-4) One of several fields; scholar's journal and research paper. 
Supervision by the director of the semester in France. Work may be supplemented by lectures 
on the subject given at the Universite de Bourgogne Faculte des Lettres et Sciences Humaines. 

2742. Special Topics in French Literature. (2) Selected topics in French literature; topics 
vary from year to year. 

Art 2712. Studies in French Art. (2) Lectures and field trips in French painting, sculpture, 
and architecture, concentrating on the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. 



Romance Languages 202 



Spanish 

111-112. Elementary Spanish. (4,4) A two-semester sequence designed to help students 
develop the ability to understand and speak Spanish and also learn to read and write 
Spanish at the elementary level. Labs required. 

113. Intensive Elementary Spanish. (5) A course reviewing the material of 111-112 in one 
semester, intended for students whose preparation for 153 is inadequate. Credit not given 
for both 113 and 111 or 112. Labs required. 

113E. Intensive Elementary Spanish in an Immersion Setting. (10) A six-week intensive 
course designed for students with a maximum of one semester of previous study in 
Spanish. Classes meet five hours daily and cover speaking, listening, reading, writing, and 
the cultures of the Spanish-speaking world. Special activities include day trips to sites of 
cultural interest. Students wishing to register must complete an application early in the 
preceding spring semester in the Department of Romance Languages and be admitted to 
the course. Credit not given for both Spanish 113 and 111 or 112. 

153. Intermediate Spanish. (5) Intermediate-level course covering the structure of the lan- 
guage, developing students' reading, writing, and conversation skills and preparing them 
for oral and written discussion of literary texts in Spanish 213. Note that 153 is mutually 
exclusive of other 153-marked courses (153X, 153E). P — Spanish 111-112, or 113, or 
placement. Labs required. 

153E. Intensive Intermediate Spanish in an Immersion Setting. (10) A six-week intensive 
course in Spanish, taught during the summer in Quito, Ecuador. Classes meet five hours 
a day and cover speaking, listening, reading, writing and the cultures of the Spanish- 
speaking world. Special activities include day-trips to sites of cultural interest. P — 
Spanish 112, 113 or two or three years of high school Spanish. No student may receive 
credit for both 153 and 153E. Students wishing to register must complete an application 
early in the preceding spring semester in the Department of Romance Languages and be 
admitted to the course. 

153S. Intensive Beginning and Intermediate Spanish in an Immersion Setting. (10) An 
intensive course designed to enable students to achieve proficiency in Spanish language 
at the beginning-intermediate level developing students' reading, writing, and conversa- 
tion skills and preparing them for oral and written discussion of literary texts. Offered 
only in the summer. P — Spanish 111 (112 strongly recommended) or permission of 
instructor. (ISLI) 

153X. Intermediate Spanish. (4) An intensive, intermediate-level course intended for stu- 
dents with a stronger background than 153 students'. It offers the opportunity to develop 
further their reading, writing, and conversation skills and prepare for oral and written dis- 
cussion of literary texts in Spanish 213. Labs required. 

198. Internship in Spanish Language. (2 or 4) Under faculty direction, a student under- 
takes a language project in conjunction with an off-campus service commitment or intern- 
ship. Includes, but is not limited to: vocabulary building, keeping a journal, and reading 
professional material. P — Spanish 219 and permission of instructor. 



203 



Romance Languages 



213. Introduction to Hispanic Literature. (4) Selected readings in Spanish and Spanish 
American literature. Does not count toward the major or the minor. P — Spanish 153 or 
equivalent. 

213H. Introduction to Hispanic Literature (Honors). (4) In the honors section of 
Introduction to Spanish Literature, texts covered are much the same as those presented in 
other Spanish 213 sections, but coursework focuses more intensely on developing effec- 
tive reading strategies and on improving written and oral expression in the language. 
Benefits include smaller class size and more opportunity for student involvement. 
Intended for students with a good background in Spanish (shown, for example, by a 3, 4, 
or 5 on the AP Spanish Language Exam, a high WFU placement exam score, or by com- 
pletion of 153X). P — Spanish 153 or equivalent. 

217. Literary and Cultural Studies of Spain. (4) A study of the cultural pluralism of Spain 
through selected literary and artistic works to promote understanding of Spain's historical 
development. P — Spanish 213 or permission of instructor. 

218. Literary and Cultural Studies of Spanish America. (4) Study of selected major works 
of Spanish-American literature within their historical and cultural contexts. Special 
emphasis is placed on these contexts, including political structures, intellectual currents, 
art, music, and film, to promote understanding of Spanish America's historical develop- 
ment. P — Spanish 213 or permission of instructor. 

219. Grammar and Composition. (4) A systematic study of Spanish morphology, sentence 
structure, and expository usage applied to various kinds of composition: description, nar- 
ration, argumentation, etc. P — Spanish 213 or equivalent. 

220. Spanish Conversation. (4) A language course based on cultural material intended to 
increase students' aural skills and oral proficiency by systematically increasing their 
vocabulary and reinforcing their command of specific grammatical points. Counts toward 
the major. P — Spanish 213 or equivalent. 

228. Spanish for the Professions. (2 or 4) Spanish usage of a selected professional area. 
Emphasis on communication in typical situations and interactions, specialized vocabulary, 
cultural differences, and related technical readings in the subject matter. Topics offered 
from following list: a. Health Occupations; b. Social Work; c. Law and Law Enforcement; 
d. Other (on demand). P — Spanish 219, 220, and permission of instructor. 

281. Spanish Independent Study. (2-4) P — Permission of the department. 

319. Advanced Grammar and Composition. (4) Advanced-level review of Spanish mor- 
phology and syntax applied to the refinement of writing techniques. P — Spanish 219 or 
permission of instructor. 

320. Advanced Conversation. (4) Intensive immersion in the situations and skills of 
advanced and superior levels of oral proficiency. P — Spanish 219 and 220 or permission 
of instructor. 

321. History and Structure of the Spanish Language. (4) Study of the historical develop- 
ment of Spanish in a cultural and linguistic context from its earliest stages to the pre- 
sent. Analysis of its current and internal changes. P — Spanish 219 and 220 or permis- 
sion of instructor. 



Romance Languages 204 



322. Spanish Phonology. (4) Description of, and practice with, the sound system of 
Spanish. Systematic analysis of the phonemes, allophones, and stress and intonation pat- 
terns of the language, and discussion of dialectal and stylistic variation. Lab required. P — 
Spanish 219 and 220 or permission of instructor. 

323. Topics in Hispanic Civilization. (4) Exploration of themes and trends in Hispanic 
society and culture, such as cross-national questions, and the exile experience. P — 
Permission of instructor. 

329. Introduction to Spanish for Business. (4) Introduction to Spanish vocabulary and 
discourse in business. This course emphasizes oral and written practices, reading and 
Hispanic business culture as well as a comprehensive analysis of different business topics 
and areas. P — Spanish 219 or permission of instructor. 

330. Advanced Spanish for Business. (4) Intensive immersion in the situations and skills 
of advanced Spanish for Business. Emphasis on oral and written business presentations, 
reading comprehension of case studies related to the Hispanic business world. Cross-cul- 
tural awareness of the Hispanic business world. P — 329 or permission of instructor. 

331. Medieval Spain: A Cultural and Literary Perspective. (4) An examination of the liter- 
ary, social, and cultural themes, such as: Quests and Discoveries, Pilgrimage and the Act 
of Reading, Images of Islam, The Judaic Tradition in Spanish Literature, and Spiritual Life 
and Ideal. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

332. The Golden Age of Spain. (4) Close analysis of literary texts, such as Lazarillo de 
Tormes, and study of the history, art, politics, and economics of the sixteenth and seven- 
teenth centuries, with emphasis on themes such as the writer and society, humanism, the 
picaresque, Catholic mysticism, and power and politics. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or per- 
mission of instructor. 

333. Eighteenth and Nineteenth Century Spanish Culture. (4) A study of the major intel- 
lectual movements of the period, Enlightenment, Romanticism, Realism, and Naturalism 
in Spain through literary texts, essays, painting, and music. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or per- 
mission of instructor. 

341. Golden Age Drama and Society. (4) Study of the theatre and social milieu of seven- 
teenth-century Madrid, where the works of playwrights such as Lope de Vega, Tirso de 
Molina, and Calderon de la Barca were performed. Includes analysis of texts and modern 
stagings of the plays. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

343. Cervantes: The Birth of the Novel. (4) Study of Don Quijote, the first modern 
novel, and several exemplary novels, and contemporary theoretical approaches to them. 
Also considers related art, music, and film. Includes discussion of themes such as the 
development of prose fiction, the novel as self-conscious genre, women and society, reli- 
gion and humanism, nationalism, and imperialism. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission 
of instructor. 

348. Transatlantic Renaissance. (4) Study of the Spanish Golden Age period by reading and 
analyzing relevant peninsular and Colonial texts within the broader political, social, and cul- 
tural contexts of the Spanish presence in the New World. Exposure to recent critical perspec- 
tives in early modern cultural studies. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 



205 



Romance Languages 



349. Contemporary Women Novelists and their Female Characters. (4) A study of repre- 
sentative novels by women writers from Spain and Latin America, with special emphasis 
on the representation of the female protagonist within her cultural context. P — Spanish 

217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

351. Transgressing Borders: Identity in the Literature of Latin American and U.S. Latino 
Literatures. (4) A socio-historical study of theories on culture, sexual politics, and race in 
relation to literary texts, lyrics of popular music, and art of Latin America and the diaspo- 
ra. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

352. Love, Death, and Poetry. (4) A study of the representation of universal themes in 
Spanish poetry from different historical periods. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of 
instructor. 

353. Indigenous Myth in Spanish American Literary Art. (4) A study of Spanish American 
writers' incorporation of Amerindian myths in twentieth-century narrative art. Includes 
works by Miguel Angel Asturias, Mario Vargas Llosa, and Jose Donoso. P — Spanish 217 
or 218 or permission of instructor. 

354. The Social Canvas of Gabriel Garcia Marquez and Pablo Neruda. (4) Exploration of 
the techniques used by two Novel Prize winning writers to create a literary vision of Latin 
America. Special attention to humor, surrealism and the grotesque, and both writers' 
assimilation of personal anxieties to their portrayal of a social world. P — Spanish 217 or 

218 or permission of instructor. 

361. Latin American Cinema and Ideology. (4) An examination of major Latin American 
films as cinematographic expressions of social and political issues. P — Spanish 217 or 218 
or permission of instructor. 

362. Romantic Nationalism, Avant-garde Nihilism, and the Deconstruction of Utopia. (4) 

A study of Latin American poetry, including symbolist, surrealist, and conversational 
poetry, "happenings," and artistic manifestoes. Politics, nation-building, liberation theol- 
ogy, and love are common themes. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

363. Contemporary Spanish-American Theatre. (4) A study of the Spanish-American dra- 
matic production from the end of the nineteenth century to the present. The course 
focuses on the development of some of the main dramatic movements of the twentieth 
century: realism, absurdism, avant garde, and collective theatre. P — Spanish 217 or 218 
or permission of instructor. 

364. Spanish-American Short Story. (4) Intensive study of the twentieth century Spanish- 
American short story with emphasis on major trends and representative authors, such as 
Quiroga, Rulfo, Borges, Cortazar, Donoso, and Garcia Marquez. P — Spanish 217 or 218 
or permission of instructor. 

365. Spanish-American Novel. (4) A study of the novel in Spanish America from its 
beginning through the contemporary period. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of 
instructor. 



Romance Languages 206 



366. Seminar in Spanish American Novel. (2 or 4) A study of one or more categories of 
Spanish-American novels, such as romantic, indianista, realistic, gauchesca, and social 
protest. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

367. Colonial Spanish America. (4) This course explores the early Spanish American colo- 
nial period alongside contemporary intellectuals' attempt to return to and recover this his- 
torical past. Readings include fifteenth- and sixteenth-century codices, post-conquest 
indigenous writings, Iberian chronicles and letters, as well as twentieth century docu- 
ments. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

369. Imagined "White" Nations: Race and Color in Latin America. (4) A study of anti- 
slavery narratives, nineteenth-century scientific racism, and twentieth-century Negritude 
and "negrismo" movements. An exploration of race, the stratification of color, and ethnic 
images in Latin American literature and culture. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of 
instructor. 

370. Film Adaptations of Literary Works. (4) A study of the cinematic and literary dis- 
courses through major Spanish literary works from different historical periods and their 
film adaptation. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

371. Lorca, Dali, Bunuel: An Artistic Exploration. (4) A study of the relationship of these 
three Spanish artists through their writings, paintings, and films, respectively, and of their 
impact on the twentieth century. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

372. Lorca in the Twentieth Century. (4) A study of the life and works of poet, play- 
wright, painter, and lecturer Federico Garcia Lorca, within the social, cultural, literary, 
and artistic realities of the twentieth century, including Modernism and Surrealism. 
Special emphasis is placed on Lorca 's treatment of minority cultures, including the Gypsy, 
the Arab, and homosexuals. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

373. Modern Spanish Novel. (4) A study of representative Spanish novels from the 
Generation of 1898 through the contemporary period. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permis- 
sion of instructor. 

374. Voices of Modern Spain. (4) A study of the multifaceted cultural identity of contem- 
porary Spain through different literary genres, art, and film. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or 
permission of instructor. 

375. Special Topics. (2 or 4) Selected special topics in Spanish literature. P — Spanish 217 
or permission of instructor. 

380. Contrastive Spanish/English Grammar and Stylistics. (4) Advanced study of structure 
and style in a variety of Spanish texts, with an in-depth approach to idiomatic expressions 
and some back/cross translation exercises. P — Spanish 219 or permission of instructor. 

381. Spanish Translation. (4) Introduction to translation strategies through practice, with 
strong emphasis on Spanish into English. Focus is on translating in domains such as social 
science, computing, economics, the entertainment industry, banking, journalism, etc. 

P — Spanish 380 or permission of instructor. 

382. Spanish/English Interpreting. (4) Introduction to strategies of interpreting from 
Spanish into English, primarily. Intensive laboratory practice course to develop basic skills 



207 



Romance Languages 



in consecutive/escort/simultaneous interpreting. Some voice-over talent training is also 
included. P — Spanish 220 or permission of instructor. 

384. Internships for STL & SI. (2-4) Under faculty supervision, a student undertakes a 
translation/interpreting project at a translation bureau or translation department of a 
company/public organization. A community service-oriented internship is preferred for 
interpreting. P — Spanish 381 or 382. 

387. Special Topics. (2 or 4) Selected special topics in Spanish-American literature. 
P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

388. Special Topics in Hispanic Linguistics. (4) Investigation of key areas in Spanish 
languages research, such as dialectology, history, language acquisition, and usage. 

P — Spanish 222 or 321, or the combination of 219 or 220 and Linguistics 150, or 
permission of instructor. 

390. Directed Reading. (2) Required for honors in Spanish. P — Permission of instructor. 

391. Directed Research. (2,4) Extensive reading and/or research, to meet individual needs. 
Required for departmental honors. P — Permission of the department. 

3689. Cuban Literature. (4) A study of Cuban literature from the eighteenth century to 
the present: romanticism, modernism, naturalism, the avant garde movement, and the 
post-Revolutionary period. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of director of the Cuba 
program. 

Linguistics 383 Language Engineering: Localization & Terminology. (4) An introduction 
to the process of making a product linguistically and culturally appropriate to the target 
locale, and to computer-assisted terminology management. Surveys applications in trans- 
lation technology. Taught in English. P — Permission of instructor. 

Semester in Spain 

The department offers a semester in Spain at Salamanca, the site of a well-established 
Spanish university. Students go as a group in the spring semester, accompanied by a 
professor from the College. 

No particular major is required for eligibility. However, students (1) should be of 
junior standing, (2) must have completed Spanish 220, and (3) should be approved by 
both their major department and the Department of Romance Languages. Interested stu- 
dents should contact Professor Candelas S. Gala in the Romance Languages department. 

2019. Intensive Spanish. (2, P/F) Intensive study and practice of the oral and written lan- 
guage. Familiarization with the Spanish culture and daily life. Classes in conversational 
and idiomatic Spanish, excursions to points of interest and lectures on selected topics. 

2179. Literary and Cultural Studies of Spain. (4) A study of the cultural pluralism of 
Spanish through selected literary and artistic works to promote understanding of Spain's 
historical development. P — Spanish 213 or permission of instructor. 

2189. Literary and Cultural Studies of Spanish America. (4) Study of selected major 
works of Spanish American literature within their historical and cultural contexts. Special 
emphasis is placed on these contexts, including political structures, intellectual currents, 



Romance Languages 208 



art, music, and film, to promote understanding of Spanish America's historical develop- 
ment. P — Spanish 213 or permission of instructor. 

2199. Advanced Spanish. (4) Study of grammar, composition, and pronunciation, with 
extensive practice of the written and oral language. P — Permission of instructor. 

3329. The Golden Age of Spain. (4) Close analysis of literary texts, such as Lazarillo de 
Tormes, and study of the history, art, politics, and economics of the sixteenth and seven- 
teenth centuries, with emphasis on themes such as the writer and society, humanism, the 
picaresque, Catholic mysticism, and power and politics. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or 
permission of instructor. 

3749. Voices of Modern Spain. (4) A study of the multifaceted cultural identity of con- 
temporary Spain through different literary genres, art, and film. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or 
permission of instructor. 

3759. Special Topics in Spanish Literature and Culture. (2 or 4) Topics vary from year to 
year. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

3879. Special Topics in Spanish-American Literature and Culture. (2 or 4) Topics vary 
from year to year. P — Spanish 217 or 218 or permission of instructor. 

History 2019. General History of Spain. (4) History of Spain from the pre-Roman period 
to the present day. 

Art 2029. Spanish Art and Architecture. (4) A study of the development and uniqueness 
of Spanish art and architecture within the framework of Mediterranean and Western art 
in general. 

Politics 2029. Political Structures of Present-day Spain. (4) A study of the various political 
elements which affect the modern Spanish state. 

Italian 

111, 112. Elementary Italian. (4,4) A course for beginners, covering grammar essentials 
and emphasizing speaking, writing, and the reading of elementary texts. Lab required. 
These two courses count for students in the Venice program. 

113. Intensive Elementary Italian. (5) Intensive course for beginners, emphasizing the 
structure of the language and oral practice. Recommended for students in the Venice pro- 
gram and for language minors. Credit not given for both 113 and 111 or 112. Lab 
required. Lecture — five hours. Offered every semester. 

127. Basic Conversation. (2) Brief review of grammar; emphasis on vocabulary building 
and conversation for everyday survival while discovering Italy and Italian culture through 
film, TV, documentaries, and literature. P — Italian 113 or equivalent. Does not satisfy 
requirements for minor or certification in Italian studies. 

152S. Intensive Beginning and Intermediate Italian in an Immersion Setting. (10) An 
intensive course designed to enable students to achieve proficiency in Italian language at 
the beginning-intermediate level, developing students' reading, writing, and conversation 



209 



Romance Languages 



skills and preparing them for oral and written discussion of literary texts. P — Italian 111 
or permission of instructor. Offered only in the second summer session. 

153. Intermediate Italian. (5) Continuation of 113, with emphasis on reading and 
speaking. Lab required. P — Italian 113 or 111-112 sequence, or two years of high 
school Italian. 

1534. Italian in Venice. (4) Intensive exposure to speaking, listening, reading, and writing 
at the intermediate level while discovering Italy through immersion in Italian culture in 
Venice. Counts as equivalent to Italian 153. P — Italian 113 or 111-112 sequence. Taught 
in Venice. 

215. Introduction to Italian Literature I. (4) Reading of selected texts in Italian. Satisfies 
basic requirement in foreign language. P — Italian 153 or equivalent. A/50 offered in 
Venice. 

216. Introduction to Italian Literature II. (4) Satisfies basic requirement in foreign lan- 
guage. P — Italian 215 or equivalent. 

219. Advanced Grammar and Composition. (4) Review of the basics of structure and 
vocabulary; detailed examination of complex syntax and idiomatic expressions; practice 
in translation of texts of diverse styles and from varied sources; and free composition. 

P — Italian 215 or 216 or equivalent. 

220. Advanced Conversation and Composition. (4) Practice in speaking and writing 
Italian, stressing correctness of sentence structure, and emphasis on phonetics, pronuncia- 
tion, fluency, and vocabulary for everyday situations. P — Italian 215 or 216 or 275. 

224. Italian Civilization I. (4) The culture and its historical development from 
Charlemagne to the Risorgimento; emphasis on intellectual, artistic, political, social, and 
economic life. P — Italian 219 or 215 or 216 or 275. 

225. Italian Civilization II. (4) The historical development of modern Italian culture from 
the Risorgimento to the present. Use of newspapers, magazines, TV broadcasts, films, and 
literary readings to stimulate oral and written responses to the problems of contemporary 
Italy. P — Italian 224. 

226. Comedy in Italian Cinema. (4) A study of modern Italian society through the analy- 
sis of films from the 1950s to the present. Taught in Italian. P — Italian 215 or 216 or per- 
mission of instructor. 

227. Modern Italian Cinema. (4) A study of the major developments of modern Italian 
cinema. Full-length feature films by Federico Fellini, Ettore Scola, Pier Paolo Pasolinia, 
Bernardo Bertolucci, Marco Bellocchio, Gianni Amelio, Nanni MOretti, Gabriele 
Salvatores, Guiseppe Tornatore, Massimo Troisi, Roberto Benigni, and other Italian film- 
makers will be studied and discussed from different perspectives. P — Italian 215 or 216 or 
permission of instructor. 

228. Dante's Divine Comedy. (4) An introduction to Italian medieval literature and cul- 
ture through a selected, critical reading of Dante's masterpiece and other medieval texts. 
This course introduces students to the intellectual and social context of the Italian Middle 



Romance Languages 210 



Ages by relating the texts to the cultural, political, social, and philosophical concerns of 
the period. P — Italian 219 or permission of instructor. 

229. Introduction to Renaissance Literature and Culture. (4) An examination of the cul- 
ture of the Italian Renaissance. Topics include the ideal of the artist, the ideal of the 
courtier, the epic genre, the political debates in Florence, the figure of the artist/scientist 
Leonardo da Vinci, the figure of the navigator, and daily life in Italian cities studied from 
different social classes and perspectives. P — Italian 215 or 216 or permission of instructor. 

230. Cinematic Adaptation and Literary Inspiration. (4) Studens in this course examine 
cinematic adaptations of literary works by reading closely the literary texts and viewing 
their visual counterparts. Students investigate the strategies of adaptation, as well as the 
criteria by which we can evaluate films based on novels as works of art in their own right. 
P — Italian 216 or 219 or permission of instructor. 

275. Special Topics. (4) Selected special topics in Italian literature. P — Italian 215 or 216. 

281. Italian Independent Study. (2-4) P — Permission of department. 

2213. Spoken Italian. (4) Course in oral Italian, offered only in Venice. Students are 
placed in small groups according to their levels of fluency. Elective credit. 

Semester in Venice 

2153. Introduction to Italian Literature I. (4) 
2163. Introduction to Italian Literature II. (4) 
2213. Spoken Italian. (4) 

See the course listings under Italian (above) for descriptions and prerequisites. 



211 Romance Languages 



Russian and East European Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 

Susan Zayer Rupp (History), Coordinator 

Russian 215 or 216 or equivalent proficiency in another East European language is 
required, plus twenty credits from the following list. (See course descriptions under appro- 
priate listings.) Four of these twenty credits must be REE 298, the Research Project in 
Russian and East European Studies. 

Communication 351B. Comparative Communication: Russia. (2) 
Economics 252. International Finance. (4) 

253. Economies in Transition. (4) 
History 331. Russia: Origins to 1865. (4) 

332. Russia and the Soviet Union: 1865 to the Present. (4) 
Humanities 215. Germanic and Slavic Literature. (4) 

(Satisfies a Division 1 1 requirement.) 

218. Eastern European Literature. (4) 

(Satisfies a Division I requirement.) 
Politics 232. Politics in Russia and Eastern Europe. (4) 

Russian Four additional credits at the 200-level. 

REE 298 Course description to follow. (4) 

With the approval of the coordinator, students may fulfill the language requirement by 
equivalent study of another East European language (to be pursued independently under 
the auspices of the German and Russian department). Students may apply all relevant 
seminars, colloquia, or independent studies in any of the above departments to the minor. 

REE 298. Research Project in Russian and East European Studies. (4) A semester-long 
research project pursued independently by a student (generally in the senior year) under 
the guidance of a faculty member in the relevant field of study. A second faculty member 
will consult with the student regarding his or her project as well as serving as a second 
reader. The course culminates in the completion of a seminar-length paper based upon pri- 
mary research. 



Russian and East 212 
European Studies 



Sociology 

Earl Smith, Chair 

Wake Forest Professors Charles F. Longino, Willie Pearson Jr. 

Rubin Professor of American Ethnic Studies Earl Smith 

Professors John R. Earle, Catherine T. Harris, Philip J. Perricone 

Associate Professors H. Kenneth Bechtel, Cheryl B. Leggon, Ian M. Taplin 

Assistant Professor Angela Hattery 

A major in sociology requires forty-one credits and must include Sociology 151, 370, 371, 
and 372. A minimum average of 2.0 in sociology courses is required at the time the major 
is declared. A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in all sociology courses is required for 
graduation. 

A minor in sociology requires twenty credits and must include Sociology 151 and 370. 
A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in sociology courses is required at the time the 
minor is declared. A minimum grade point average of 2.0 in sociology courses is required 
for certification as a minor. Students who intend to pursue a sociology minor are encour- 
aged to notify the department early in their junior year, and they are invited to participate 
in all departmental functions. 

The program in sociology provides majors with several options. In addition to pursu- 
ing a regular major in sociology, students may choose to specialize in any of four concen- 
trations: 1) family studies, 2) crime, law, and social control, 3) health and society, and 4) 
business and society. These concentrations are described in detail in the Handbook for 
Sociology Students, a copy of which may be obtained from the sociology office or any 
member of the departmental faculty. 

To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Sociology," highly qualified majors 
are invited to apply to the department for admission to the honors program. They must 
complete a senior research project, document their research, and satisfactorily defend 
their work in an oral examination. For additional information members of the depart- 
mental faculty should be consulted. 

A student who selects sociology to fulfill the Division IV requirement must take one of 
the following courses: Sociology 151, 152, 153, or 154. No introductory-level course is 
required for students taking a sociology course as an elective unless specified in the course 
description. 

151. Principles of Sociology. (4) General introduction to the field; social organization and 
disorganization, socialization, culture, social change, and other aspects. Required for all 
sociology majors and minors. 

152. Social Problems. (4) Survey of contemporary American social problems. 

153. Marriage and the Family. (4) The social basis of the family, emphasizing the prob- 
lems growing out of modern conditions and social change. 

154. The Sociology of Deviant Behavior. (4) A sociological analysis of the nature and 
causes of and societal reaction to deviant behavior patterns such as mental illness, suicide, 
drug and alcohol addiction, sexual deviation, and criminal behavior. 



213 



Sociology 



205. Photography in the Social Sciences. (4) Explores the use of photography as a 
research technique for the social sciences; camera and darkroom instruction included. Lab 
to be arranged. Not open to students who have had Art 119. P — Permission of instructor. 

206. Concerned Photographers and Their Works. (4) Explores the contributions of con- 
cerned photographers in the identification and understanding of social issues. Advanced 
camera and darkroom instruction is included. P — Sociology 205 and/or permission of 
instructor. 

301. Religion and Society. (4) Study of religion as a social phenomenon and its relation- 
ship to political, economic and other structures of society. (Also offered as Religion 351.) 

302. Bureaucracy and Society. (4) The sociological analysis of complex organizations 
focusing on bureaucracy, power, authority, decision making, and change. Attention will be 
given to business as well as government and other non-profit organizations. 

303. Business and Society. (4) Historical development, organization, and current prob- 
lems of business enterprises in American society. 

305. Male and Female Roles in Society. (4) Changing male and female roles in the con- 
text of societal institutions and sociological theories that explain such changes. 
Consideration of feminism as a social movement and of consequences of changing roles 
for human interaction. 

308. Sociology of Art. (2) Art as an institution, its functions, organization, relationship to 
social change and to the communication of meanings. 

309. Sexuality and Society. (4) Study of the societal forces that impinge on human sexual 
behavior, emphasizing the effects of social change, the implications of changing gender 
roles, cross-cultural and subcultural variations, and the influence of the mass media. 

310. Death and Dying. (2) Study of some of the basic issues and problems of modern man 
in accepting and facing death. 

311. Women in Professions. (4) Emphasis on the status of women in professional occupa- 
tions (e.g., law, medicine, science, business, etc.) in socio-historical perspective. 

316. Conflict and Social Control. (4) An historical and cross-cultural examination of con- 
flict management and social control, including discipline, rebellion, negotiation, media- 
tion, and adjudication. 

317. Mental Illness and Society. (4) An examination of the sociological aspects of mental 
health and mental illness. Includes the social epidemiology of mental disorders, cross-cul- 
tural variation in societal responses to the mentally ill; the development of the psychiatric 
profession, and the evolution of the mental hospital. 

325. Self and Society. An Interactionist Perspective. (4) An analysis of the effects of social 
relationships upon self-development, self-preservation, and the learning of social roles and 
norms, with special emphasis on language and symbolic interaction. 

332. Social Epidemiology. (2) This course integrates sociology and epidemiology, paying 
particular attention to such variables as age, gender, race and ethnicity as they bear on 
health, illness and medical services, including the risk factors of chronic disease. It does 
not presuppose advanced knowledge of epidemiological methods. 

Sociology 214 



333. The Sociology of Cities. (4) An examination of the patterns of urbanization world- 
wide. Explores the dynamics of urban growth resulting from economic, social, political 
and ecological processes. 

334. Society and Higher Education. (4) An analysis of the social forces that shape educa- 
tional policies in the United States. Assessment of significant contemporary writings on 
the manifest and latent functions of education. 

335. Sociology of Health and Illness. (4) Analysis of the social variables associated with 
health and illness. 

336. Sociology of Health Care. (4) An analysis of health care systems, including the social 
organization of medical practice, health care payment, the education of medical practi- 
tioners, and the division of the labor in health care. 

337. Aging in Modern Society. (4) Basic social problems and processes of aging. Social 
and psychological issues discussed. Course requirements will include field placement in a 
nursing home or similar institution. P — Permission of instructor. 

338. Sociological Issues in Criminal Justice. (4) Introduction to the structure, organization 
and operation of the various components of the criminal justice system with emphasis on 
the police and correctional institutions. 

339. Sociology of Violence. (4) A survey of the societal factors associated with individual 
and collective violence. Discussion will focus on the contemporary and historical condi- 
tions which have contributed to various patterns of violence in American society. 

340. Sociological Issues in Human Development. (4) Socialization through the life span in 
the light of contemporary behavioral science, emphasizing the significance of changes in 
contemporary society. 

341. Criminology. (4) Crime, its nature, causes, consequences, methods of treatment, and 
prevention. 

342. Juvenile Delinquency. (4) The nature and extent of juvenile delinquency; an exami- 
nation of prevention, control, and treatment problems. 

343. Sociology of Law. (4) Consideration is given to a variety of special issues: conditions 
under which laws develop and change, relationships between the legal and political sys- 
tem, and the impact of social class and stratification upon the legal order. 

344. Women and Crime. (4) Course focuses on four major areas related to women and 
crime: women as offenders, the processing of women by the criminal justice system, 
women as victims, and women as criminal justice professionals. P — Sociology 341 and 
permission of instructor. 

345. Advanced Topics Seminar in Criminology. (4) Emphasis on current topics in the field 
of criminology and criminal justice such as measurement issues, ethical issues, history, 
crime and mass media, and theoretical debates. P — Sociology 341 and permission of 
instructor. 

347. Society, Culture, and Sport. (4) An examination of the interrelationship of sport and 
other social institutions. Emphasis on the study of both the structure of sport and the 
functions of sport for society. 



2I 5 



Sociology 



348. Sociology of the Family. (4) The family as a field of sociological study. Assessment of 
significant historical and contemporary writings. An analysis of the structure, organiza- 
tion, and function of the family in America. 

349. Sociology of Science and Technology. (4) Explores the reciprocal impact of science 
and technology on society. Issues include the impact of science and technology on various 
populations (including underparticipating groups, such as women and racial/ethnic 
minorities) and the environment, the talent pool, and the workplace. 

350. Mass Communications and Public Opinion. (4) The study of the increasing impor- 
tance of collective behavior, emphasizing the relationship between the media and a chang- 
ing society. 

351. Management and Organizations. (4) A study of macro organizational processes and 
changes in contemporary industrial societies and their effects upon managerial systems, 
managerial ideologies and managers in firms. 

352. White-collar Crime. (4) Study of criminal activity committed in the course of legiti- 
mate occupations including workplace crime, graft, and business crime. P — Sociology 341. 

353. Families in Later Life. (2,4) Analysis of current issues affecting later-life families, 
including the unmarried, marital relations, divorce, widowhood, remarriage, kinship, 
family caregiving, and institutional care. 

357. The Italian Experience in America. (4) Explores issues of ethnicity and identity in the 
Italian American experience. A central goal of this course is to understand the interrela- 
tionship of social, economic and political factors that impinge on this large European 
ethnic group. 

358. Population and Society. (4) Techniques used in the study of population data. 
Reciprocal relationship of social and demographic variables. 

359. Race and Ethnic Relations. (4) Racial and ethnic group prejudice and discrimination 
and their effect on social relationships. Emphasis on psychological and sociological theo- 
ries of prejudice. 

360. Social Stratification. (4) The study of structured social inequality with particular 
emphasis on economic class, social status, and political power. 

361. Sociology of the Black Experience. (4) A survey and an analysis of contemporary 
writings on the status of black Americans in various American social institutions (e.g., 
education, sports, entertainment, science, politics, etc.). 

362. Sociology of Work. (4) Changing trends in the United States labor force. The individ- 
ual's view of work and the effect of large organizations on white and blue collar workers. 
Use of some cross-cultural data. 

363. Markets and Industry. (4) An analysis of industrial organization, including discus- 
sion of market relations and the behavior of firms, the structure of industrial develop- 
ment, and labor relations and the growth of trade unions. 

364. Political Sociology. (4) Examination of the structure and organization of power in 
society with emphasis on political socialization, political ideology, and the growth of the 
welfare state. 

Sociology 216 



370. Sociological Theory. (4) A survey of the history and development of sociological the- 
ory, emphasizing the critical reading of primary source materials and the evaluation of the 
current status of sociological theory. P — Sociology 151 or permission of instructor. 

371. Social Statistics. (5) A computer-based survey of basic statistics utilized in sociologi- 
cal research. Lab — 1 hour. P — Sociology 151 or permission of instructor. 

372. Research Methods in Sociology. (4) An overview of both quantitative and qualitative 
research methods. Research projects required. P — Sociology 371. 

373. Honors Seminar. (4) Seminar on selected problems in sociology. Intended for students 
in the departmental honors program. P — Sociology 372 and permission of instructor. 

374. Honors Research. (2) Directed study toward completion of the project begun in 
Sociology 373 and to the writing and defense of an honors paper. P — Sociology 373 and 
permission of instructor. 

385, 386. Special Problems Seminar. (4) Intensive investigation of current scientific 
research within the discipline which concentrates on problems of contemporary interest. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

398, 399. Individual Study. (1-4, 1-4) Reading, research, or internship courses designed to 
meet the needs and interests of selected students, to be carried out under the supervision 
of a departmental faculty member. 



Spanish Studies 

(Foreign Area Study) 
Candelas S. Gala (Romance Languages), Coordinator 

Students are required to participate in the semester in Spain program at Salamanca. They 
also are required to take History 2019, General History of Spain (4) taught in Salamanca; 
Politics 2029, Political Structures of Present Day Spain (4) taught in Salamanca; Art 
2029, Spanish Art and Architecture (4) taught in Salamanca; and Spanish 217, Literary 
and Cultural Studies of Spain (4), also taught in Salamanca as Spanish 2179. 

Students must take twelve additional credits from the advanced courses in Spanish 
language and the literature and culture of Spain offered by the Department of Romance 
Languages, or from those offered at the University of Salamanca. 



217 



Spanish Studies 



Theatre 

Donald H. Wolfe, Chair 

Professors James H. Dodding, Donald H. Wolfe 

Adjunct Professor Darwin R. Payne 

Assistant Professors Sharon Andrews, Jane Kathleen Curry, 

Cynthia M. Gendrich, Nina M. Lucas (Director of Dance), 

Mary R. Wayne-Thomas 

Visiting Assistant Professor Brook M. Davis 
Lecturers Zanna Beswick (London), Jonathan H. Christman, 
John E. R. Friedenberg 

A major in theatre consists of a minimum of forty credits, including Theatre 110 or 112, 
130, 140, 150, 250, 260, 261, 340, 381, and 385. (Students interested in a theatre major 
should elect Theatre 112.) Four semesters of Theatre 100 (0 credits) also are required. 
Majors may choose their remaining courses from the offerings listed under the 
Department of Theatre. A minimum grade of 2.0 in all theatre courses attempted is 
required for graduation. Majors should consult with their advisers about additional regu- 
lations. Theatre majors are required to take two courses in dramatic literature from the 
Departments of English or Classical Languages or from Humanities. 

Those who plan to be theatre majors are urged to begin their studies during their 
first year. 

Highly qualified majors (departmental grade point average of 3.3, overall grade point 
average of 3.0) are invited by the department to apply for admission to the honors pro- 
gram in theatre. To be graduated with the designation "Honors in Theatre," a student 
must successfully complete Theatre 292 (4). Honors projects may consist of a) a research 
paper of exceptional quality; b) a creative project in playwriting or design; or c) a direct- 
ing or acting project. The theatre honors project must be presented and defended before 
the departmental Honors Committee. The department can furnish honors candidates with 
complete information on preparation and completion of projects. 

A minor in theatre requires twenty-four credits: Theatre 110 or 112, 140, 150, 260 or 
261, two theatre electives and two semesters of Theatre 100 participation. Theatre minors 
are required to take one course in dramatic literature from the Departments of English or 
Classical Languages or from Humanities. 

Any person who is interested in a theatre major or minor should contact the chair of 
the department soon after arrival on the campus. 

100. Participation. (0) Attendance/participation in Mainstage and Studio performances; 
and other events as established by the department. (Specific attendance/participation 
requirements will be established at the beginning of each semester.) Four semesters, or a 
minimum of eight University Theatre productions, are required of theatre majors. 
Participation in at least two of the eight productions must be in technical production. Two 
semesters, or a minimum of four University Theatre productions, are required of theatre 
minors. Participation in one of the four productions must be in technical production. 
Assignments for technical production are made through consultation with the technical 
and design faculty. 



Theatre 218 



110. Introduction to the Theatre. (4) For the theatre novice. A survey of the theory and 
practice of the major disciplines of theatre art: acting, directing, playwriting, and design. 
Participation in Studio and Mainstage productions. Students planning to major in theatre 
are encouraged to take Theatre 112. Credit will not be given for both Theatre 110 and 
112. May be used to satisfy a requirement in Division V. 

112. Introduction to the Theatre. (4) For the experienced theatre student. A survey of the 
theory and practice of the major disciplines of theatre art: acting, directing, playwriting, 
and design. Students planning to major in theatre are encouraged to take Theatre 112. 
Credit will not be given for both Theatre 110 and 112. Experience in Studio and 
Mainstage productions. May be used to satisfy a requirement in Division V. 

126. Stage Makeup. (2) A study of the design and application of theatrical makeup in 
relationship to historical period and character development. 

130. Dynamics of Voice and Movement. (4) Building awareness of the actor's instrument 
through the development of basic vocal and physical skills, emphasizing relaxation, clari- 
ty, expressiveness, and commitment, along with spontaneity, centering, and basic techni- 
cal skills. 

140. Acting I. (4) Fundamental acting theory and techniques including exercises, mono- 
logues and scene work. 

141. On-camera Performance. (4) Introduction to the theory and practice of performing 
for the camera. May include basic method acting, newscasting, commercials, and film act- 
ing. (Also listed as Communication 116.) 

144. Mime. (2) An introductory study of basic mime forms. The student will gain skills 
and understanding of this theatrical form through practical exercises, readings, rehearsals, 
and performances. 

146. Performance Techniques. (4) A course focusing on acting styles appropriate to vari- 
ous modes of theatrical production. Specialized techniques such as dance, stage combat, 
etc., may also be included. (Suitable for non-majors.) 

150. Introduction to Design & Production. (4) An introduction to the architecture and 
technology of the theatre, including the essentials of the operation of the scene shop, stage 
equipment, and occupational health and safety. The course stresses the collaborative art 
of the theatre through an introduction to theatre design including script analysis, visual 
research, communication of the design, drafting, and color. 

155. Stagecraft. (4) This introductory course focuses on contemporary materials, con- 
struction methods, and rigging practices employed in the planning, fabrication and instal- 
lation of stage scenery. Emphasis on using current technologies for problem solving. 

1880. The Contemporary English Theatre. (2) An exploration of the English theatre 
through theatre attendance in London and other English theatre centers. Readings, lec- 
tures. Participants submit reviews of the plays and complete a journal of informal reac- 
tions to the plays, the sites and the variety of cultural differences observed. Two weeks. 
Offered in London before spring term. P — Permission of instructor. Pass/Fail grade only. 



219 



Theatre 



230. Advanced Dynamics. (4) Focus on opening and strengthening the actor's instrument 
by building on work done in Theatre 130. P — Theatre 130. 

245. Acting II. (4) Advanced study and practice of the skills introduced in Acting I. 
P— Theatre 130 and 140. 

246. Period and Style. (4) A study of social customs, movement, dances, and theatrical 
styles relating to the performance of drama in historical settings as well as in period plays. 
The course includes performances in class. P — Theatre 130 or 241 andl40 . 

250. Theatrical Scene Design. (4) A study of the fundamental principles and techniques of 
stage design. Drafting, model building, perspective rendering, historical research, and 
scene painting will be emphasized. P — Theatre 150. 

251. Costume and Makeup Design. (4) A study of the fundamental principles and tech- 
niques of costume and makeup design with an emphasis on historical research. The basics 
of costume rendering, costume construction and stage makeup will be explored. 

P— Theatre 150. 

252. Lighting and Sound Design. (4) An exploration of the lighting and sound designer's 
process from script to production. A variety of staging situations will be studied, includ- 
ing proscenium, thrust and arena production. P — Theatre 150. 

259. Theatre Management: Principles and Practices. (4) This course reviews the develop- 
ment of theatre management in the United States, with emphasis on the role of the pro- 
ducer; explores commercial and not-for-profit theatre with attention to planning, person- 
nel, and the economics of theatre. Includes readings, lectures, and reports. 

260. History of Western Theatre I (Beginnings to 1642). (4) A survey of the development 
of Western theatre and drama through the Greek, Roman, medieval, and Renaissance the- 
atres to 1642; includes lectures, readings and reports. (Suitable for non-majors.) 

261. History of Western Theatre II (1642 to the Present). (4) A survey of Western theatre 
and drama from the French Neoclassic theatre through the English Restoration, the eigh- 
teenth century, Romanticism, Realism, the revolts against Realism and the post-modern 
theatre; includes lectures, readings and reports. (Suitable for non-majors.) 

281. Acting Workshop. (2) Scene work with student directors utilizing realistic texts. 
Offered pass/fail only. P — Theatre 140 or permission of instructor. 

283. Practicum. (1-2) Projects under faculty supervision. May be repeated for no more 
than four credits. P — Permission of the department. 

290. Special Seminar. (2-4) The intensive study of selected topics in theatre. May be 
repeated. 

292. Theatre Honors. (4) A tutorial involving intensive work in the area of special interest 
for qualified seniors who wish to graduate with departmental honors. P — Permission of 
department. 

294. Individual Study. (1-4) Special research and readings in an area of interest to be 
approved and supervised by a faculty adviser. May be taken for no more than four 
credits. P — Permission of department. 



Theatre 2 20 



2650. The English Theatre, 1660-1940. (4) A study of the major developments in the 
English theatre from the Restoration to World War II, including the plays, playwrights, 
actors, audiences, theatre architecture, theatre management, costumes and sets. Field trips 
include visits to theatres, museums, and performances. Offered in London. 

340. Directing. (4) An introduction to the theory and practice of play directing. 
P— Theatre 110/112,140 and 150. C— Theatre 381 and 250. (For majors only) 

344. Acting Shakespeare. (4) A practical study of varying styles in interpreting and acting 
Shakespeare's plays from the time of the Elizabethans to the present day. P — Theatre 130 
and 140. 

381. Directing Workshop. (2) The practical application of directing techniques in realistic 
scene study utilizing student actors. This course is a co-requisite of Theatre 340. 

385. Studio Production. (2) The organization, techniques and problems encountered in 
the production of a play for the public. P — Theatre 340 and permission of department. 

390, 391. Special Seminar. (2-4) The intensive study of selected topics in the theatre. May 
be repeated. 

Dance 

A dance minor requires twenty-four credits and must include Dance 120 (2); Dance 221 
(2) or Dance 222 (2); Dance 123 (2); Dance 126 (2); Dance 226 (2); Dance 127 (2); 
Dance 128 (1) — must be repeated for a maximum of four credits; Dance 229 (2) or Dance 
231 (2); Dance 200 (2); and Dance 202 (4). 

120. Beginning Modern Dance Technique. (2) Fundamentals of modern dance technique, 
with an emphasis placed on movement concepts, vocabulary, technique, alignment, place- 
ment, and flexibility. May be repeated four times for credit. 

122. Special Topics in Dance. (2) An intensive study of selected topics in dance. May be 
repeated. 

123. Dance Composition. (2) Fundamental study of improvisation, composition and 
choreography. 

124. Social Dance. (1) Fundamental techniques of social dance, providing basic skills, 
concepts of movement, style and fundamental step patterns found in social dance 
rhythms. Students will learn basic smooth dances, rhythm dances, Latin American dances 
and Cuban dances. 

125. Folk and Social Dance. (1) Fundamentals of folk and social dance, providing the 
basic skills, concepts of movement, style and fundamental step patterns of folk and social 
dance. Emphasis is on the development of fundamental dance skills and practice in utiliz- 
ing dance techniques. 

126. Beginning Jazz Dance. (2) Fundamental of jazz technique with an emphasis on align- 
ment, isolations, flexibility, basic turns, jumps, and combinations. May be repeated four 
times for credit. 



221 Theatre 



127. Beginning Classical Ballet Techniques. (2) Fundamentals of classical ballet technique 
with an emphasis on alignment, placement, flexibility, barre work, adagio and petite alle- 
gro. May be repeated four times for credit. 

128. Dance Performance. (1) A practical experience in the areas of rehearsal, choreographing, 
production and performance, as a choreographer, and/or performer in the Fall Faculty/Guest 
Artist Concert and/or Spring Dance Concert. May be repeated eight times for credit. 

128A. Performance 
128B. Choreography 

200. Senior Dance Project. (2) An investigation of selected semi-professional problems involv- 
ing the creative process of choreography, study of notation, research idea, or production. 

202. History of Dance. (4) A survey of American dance from the 1600s to the present 
with emphasis on scope, style, and function. Satisfies a Division V requirement. 

221. Intermediate Modern Dance Technique. (2) A progressive development of movement 
concepts and vocabulary from Dance 120, with an emphasis on exploring both the classi- 
cal and contemporary techniques of modern dance. May be repeated four times for credit. 
P — Dance 120 or permission of instructor. 

222. Advanced Modern Dance Technique. (2) A progressive development of the concepts 
of Dance 221 with an emphasis on qualitative performance, virtuosity and versatility in a 
variety of technical forms within the modern dance discipline. May be repeated four times 
for credit. P — Dance 221 or permission of instructor. 

226. Intermediate Jazz Dance. (2) This course pursues the mastery of basic jazz technique 
along with more complex center floor combinations. Emphasis is placed on performance 
qualities and musicality. May be repeated four times for credit. P — Dance 126 or permis- 
sion of the instructor. 

227. Advanced Jazz Dance. (2) Pursues the mastery of jazz technique along with more 
complex center floor combinations. Emphasis is placed on performance qualities, musical- 
ity, technique, virtuosity, and creativity. May be repeated four times for credit. P — Dance 
226 or permission of instructor. 

229 Intermediate Classical Ballet. (2) Pursues the mastery of basic ballet technique along 
with more complex barre and center combinations, performance qualities, and musicality. 
May be repeated four times for credit. P — Dance 127 or permission of instructor. 

231. Advanced Classical Ballet. (2) Continues the mastery of basic ballet technique along 
with more complex barre and center combinations, performance qualities, musicality 
and pointe work. May be repeated four times for credit. P — Dance 229 or permission of 
instructor. 



Theatre 222 



Urban Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 
Donald E. Frey (Economics), Coordinator 

The interdisciplinary minor in Urban Studies requires twenty credits, of which at least 
twelve must be chosen from the following courses. (See course descriptions under appro- 
priate listings.) 

Art 296. Art History Seminar. J. Special Topics: Urbanism. (4) 

Economics 246. Urban Economics. (4) P — Economics 150. 

Politics 222. Urban Politics. (4) 

Religion 343. The City as Symbol. (4) 

Sociology 333. The Sociology of Cities. (4) 

Courses needed to complete twenty credits may be chosen from among the following 
courses. (See course descriptions under appropriate listings.) 

Education 271. Geography: The Human Environment. (4) 

History 2253. History of Venice. (4) Offered in Venice. 

2260. History of London. (4) Offered in London. 

352. U.S. Social History since 1850. (4) 
Politics 289. Internship in Politics. (2,3,4)* 

Sociology 152. Social Problems. (4) 

To count toward the Urban Studies minor, an internship 
must be overseen by the instructor of Politics ziz. 

Students intending to minor in Urban Studies should consult with the coordinator as early 
as possible to discuss scheduling of courses not offered annually, careers in urban studies, 
and other issues. In exceptional cases, the coordinator may approve limited substitutions 
for the listed courses. 



Women's Studies 

(Interdisciplinary Minor) 
Susan Harden Borwick (Music), Director 

The interdisciplinary minor in Women's Studies requires the core course, Women's Studies 
221, and a minimum of twenty additional credits, for a total of twenty-four credits. It is 
recommended that the upper division seminar, Women's Studies 321, be included. If 
courses not designated Women's Studies are taken, they must be from an approved list on 
file with the director and stated below. Such courses must be balanced between a) the 
humanities and b) the social and natural sciences. This structure gives students an under- 
standing of the interdisciplinary nature of Women's Studies within the context of the tra- 
ditional liberal arts curriculum. 



223 



Urban Studies 



A student minoring in Women's Studies might take Women's Studies 221 as a sopho- 
more, eight to twelve credits as a junior, and the remaining eight to twelve credits, includ- 
ing the Interdisciplinary Seminar, as a senior. 

111. Writing and Women's Issues. (4) This writing-intensive seminar explores special top- 
ics that include women, such as: women and creativity; women, work, and family; 
Womanist literature; reproductive rights; violence against women; women and the arts; 
the emergence of feminist thought. Emphasis on expository writing, critical thinking, and 
exchange of ideas in a discussion and workshop setting. Satisfies the basic composition 
but not the minor requirement. 

221. Women's Issues. (4) An interdisciplinary course, taught by women's studies faculty 
representing at least two fields, that integrates materials from the humanities and the 
social sciences. Topics include critical methods and practical solutions, gender issues in 
the twenty-first century, and women in culture and society. 

231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) Analyses of social and psychological fac- 
tors related to gender differences in Japanese language usage. (Also listed as Linguistics 231.) 

321. Interdisciplinary Seminar. (4) A research-centered study of questions raised by 
women's studies on an interdisciplinary topic, such as women's health issues, war and 
peace, international women's issues, perspectives on women and aging, lesbian and gay 
culture and theory, and women and the arts. 

350. Biocultural Perspectives on Women and Aging. (4) A course that examines biologi- 
cal, sociopsychological, and cultural issues affecting older women. 

358. Mothers and Daughters. (4) A course that examines literature, psychology, and femi- 
nist theories on motherhood and the mother-daughter relationship. 

359. Fathers and Daughters. (4) The ways in which fathers influence their daughters' 
emotional, psychological, and intellectual development. Selected materials from psycholo- 
gy, mythology, film, and contemporary literature. 

377. Special Topics. (2, 3, 4) Includes such women's studies topics as gender issues in the 
twenty-first century, Jewish-American women writers, African- American women writers, 
women and aging, critical approaches to women's issues, the emergence of feminist thought. 

396. Independent Study. (1-4) Independent projects in women's studies which either con- 
tinue study begun in regular courses or develop new areas of interest. By prearrangement. 

397. Internships in Women's Studies. (2-4) Practicum opportunities for work and for 
research in conjunction with a local women's or justice organization: Winston-Salem 
Family Services, NOW, Council on the Status of Women, the North Carolina Center for 
Laws Affecting Women, the AIDS Care Service, etc. Pass/fail only. 



Women's Studies 2.24 



In addition to the Women's Studies courses listed on page 222, the following courses may 
be included in the minor. (See course descriptions under appropriate listings.) 

Courses in the Humanities 



American 
Ethnic Studies 
Art 

Classics 
English 



History 



Humanities 



^Linguistics 

Music 

Religion 



232. American Jewish Experiences. (4) 

251. Women and Art. (4) 

252. Women in Antiquity. (3,4) 

340. Studies in Women and Literature. (4) 

a. The woman writer in society 

b. Feminist critical approaches to literature 
377. American Jewish Literature. (4) 

381. Studies in Black American Literature. (4) 

310. Race, Class, and Gender in American History. (4,3) 

341. History of Women in Modern Asia. (4) 

365. Women in American History. (4) 

230. Women Writers in Contemporary Italy. (4) 
320. Perspectives on the Middle Ages. (4) 

a. Medieval women 

b. Medieval constructs of gender, race, and class 
347. Women Writers in Japanese Culture. (4) 

353. African and Caribbean Women Writers. (4) 

231. Language and Gender in Japanese Culture. (4) 
208. Women and Music. (4) 

340. Men's Studies and Religion. (4) 

366. Gender and Religion. (4) 

370. Women and Christianity. (4) 

371. Sexuality and Christian Thought. (4) 



Courses in the Social and Natural Sciences 

Politics 229. Women and Politics. (4) 

Psychology 265. Human Sexuality. (4) 

359. Psychology of Gender. (4) 
Sociology 153. Marriage and the Family. (4) 

305. Male and Female Roles in Society. (4) 

309. Sexuality and Society. (4) 

311. Women in Professions. (4) 

348. Sociology of the Family. (4) 

359. Race and Ethnic Relations. (4) 

361. Sociology of the Black Experience. (4) 

Students intending to minor in Women's Studies should consult the director of Women's 
Studies in Tribble Hall A-106B, preferably during their first or early in their second year. 



225 



Women's Studies 



Overseas Courses 



.«v .■;'■- 



WFU COURSES TAUGHT ON OVERSEAS 
CAMPUSES DURING THE LAST FIVE 
SCHOOL YEARS* 

Fall 1994-FALL 1999 



Beijing, China 

ASI 3111. Special Topics: Lit. Chinese Writing (4) 

CHI 1131. Elementary Chinese ( 1 ) 

CHI 1141. Elementary Chinese: Written ( 5 ) 

CHI 1151. Elementary Chinese: Spoken (5) 

CHI 1991. Chinese Individual Study (2) 

HMN2431. China in Perspective (2) 

HMN 2461. Selected Contemp. Chinese Fie. (4) 

HMN 2561. Beijing: A Study of Chinese 

Religion and Politics (4) 
HST 344 1 . Modern China (4) 



Berlin, Germany 



Semesters Taught 

Fall, 1997 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1998, 1997, 1996 

Fall, 1998, 1997, 1996 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1998, 1997, 

1995 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1998 
Fall, 1996 



ART 5007. German Art & Arch, in 20th Cent. (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2167. Theatre in Berlin (4) Spring, 1995 

GER2187. Topics in Adv. Comp. & Conv. II (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Ger. Art & Arch, in 20th Century (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Germany and European Unification (4) Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Theatre in Berlin (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Topics in Ger. Soc. Hist. Since 1945 (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Adv. Comp. and Conversation (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Germans and Jews (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Ger. Lit. from 1945 to Present (4) Fall, 1997 

The listing of overseas courses may not be complete. 



Overseas Courses 226 



HMN 5007. Geo. Time: Dev. Geo. His. 1700/1830 (4) Spring, 1995 

HMN5017. Mentopolis (4) Spring, 1995 

Dijon, France 

ART 2712. Studies in French Art (2) Fall, 1999, 1998 1997, 

1996,1995 
FRH 1992. Independent Study (2) Fall, 1998 

FRH 2192. Advanced Oral & Written French (4) Fall, 1998, 1997, 

1996, 1995 
FRH 2202. Advanced French Conversation (4) Fall, 1999, 1998 

FRH 2232. Contemporary France (4) Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996, 1995 
FRH 2242. French Civilization (4) Fall, 1999, 1998,1997, 

1996, 1995 
FRH 2402. Independent Study (2) Fall, 1998, 1996 

FRH 2752. French Literature (2) Fall, 1998, 1997, 

1996, 1995 
FRH 2802. Directed Study (2) Fall, 1998 

INS 100. Study Abroad (2) Fall, 1998,1997 

Freiburg-im-Breisgau, Germany 

ART 5007. Classic Mod. Art in Ger. 1900/30 (4) Fall, 1997 

ART 5007. Contemporary Ger. Stage II (4) Spring, 1995 

ART 5017. Velazquez (4) Spring, 1995 

BUS 5007. Eur. Bus. Law & Legal Aspects (4) Spring, 1996 

Fall, 1997 
BUS 5007. Internat. Bus. Strategies & Eu (4) Fall, 1997 

BUS 5207. Internat. Bus. Strategies & Eu (4) Spring, 1998 

ECN 1687. Environmental Eco. Ger/Eu Contx (2) Fall, 1997 

ECN 2177. Internat. Eco. Relat. Eur. Union (4) Fall, 1997 

ECN 2487. Economy and Environment (4) Fall, 997 

ECN 2517. European Market Integration (4) Spring, 1998, 1995 

ECN 2587. Intern. Econ. Relations of Eur. Union (4) Fall, 1997 

Spring, 1998 
ECN 2707. European Econ. Policies (4) Spring, 1996 

ECN 2717. European Market Integration (4) Spring, 1996 

Fall, 1997 
ECN 2727. European Economic Policies (4) Fall, 1997 

ECN 5007. Intro, to the European Union (1,.5) Spring, 1996 

Fall, 1997 
ECN 5007. Intro, to Eur. Union: Market Intg. (.5) Spring, 1996 

Fall, 1997 
EDU2037. Supervised Teaching Internship (4) Spring, 1998 



227 Overseas Courses 



GER 2157. Contemporary German Lit. I (4) Spring, 1998 

GER 2167. Contemporary German Lit. I (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2167. Contemporary German Lit. II (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2177. Adv. Comp. Read. & Conv. (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2177. Advanced German (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2197. Adv. Comp. Read, and Conv. (4) Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Auth. & Dem. Tradition of Ger. (4) Spring, 1998 

GER 2707. Advanced German (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Classic Mod. Art in Ger. 1900-30 (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Contemporary Ger. Lit. (4) Spring, 1998 

GER 2707. Contemporary Ger. Stage I (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Contemporary Ger. Stage II (4) Spring, 1996 

GER 2707. Environmental Eco. Ger./Eur. Contx. (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. For Pol./Ger. Unificat./Eur. Int. (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Ger. Art & Architec. in 20th Cen. (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Ger. Art Between Conform. & Provcat. (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Ger. Art Conform./Provocat. (4) Spring, 1996 

GER 2707. Ger. History & Ger. Nation (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Germany as an Econ. Power (4) Spring, 1996 

GER 2707. Individual Study (2) Spring, 1996 

GER 2707. Intermediate German II (4) Spring, 1998, 1996 

GER 2707. Kurzprosa des 20.Jahrhunderts Spring, 1998 

GER 2707. Media, Society, and Politics Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Nationalsoz Konzertrat 1933-45 Spring, 1998 

GER 2707. Philosophy & Political Theory ( 1 ) Fall, 1997 

GER 2857. Contemporary German Liter. I (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2857. Contemporary German Stage (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2857. Ger. Short Prose Lit. AR/1900 (4) Fall, 1997 

HST 5007. Authorit. & Dem. Trad, of Germany (4) Spring, 1998 

HST 5007. Intro. Hst. of Habsburg Monar. (4) Spring, 1995 

HST 5007. Germ. History & Germ. Nation Fall, 1997 

POL 2317. European Political Cultures (4) Spring, 1996 

POL 2427. Pol. Institutions of the Eur. Community: Spring, 1996 

Policies of European Integration (4) 

POL 2527. Europe in Transition (4) Spring, 1996 

Fall, 1997 

POL 2527. Policies of Eur. Integration (4) Spring, 1996 

POL 5007. European Political Cultures (4) Spring, 1998 

POL 5007. Media, Society, and Politics (4) Fall, 1998, 1997 

THE 5007. The Contemporary German Stage (4) Fall, 1997 



Overseas Courses 228 



Havana, Cuba 



LAS 220. Afro-Caribbean Rel. & Culture (4) 

SPA 3689/6689. Cuban Literature (4) 

Hiratsuka, Japan (Tokai University) 



HMN2121. 
HMN2471. 
HMN2911. 
HMN3421. 

HST3471. 
JPN1121. 



JPN1131 
JPN1131 

JPN 1521 
JPN 1531 
JPN 1531 

JPN 1991 
JPN 2191 
JPN 3421 



Orientalism and Western Tradition (4) 
Mus. & Edu.: Japan & West 1900-Pre. (4) 
Food, Diet & Health in Japan (4) 
Japan in Perspective (2,4) 

Japan During Tokugawa Era (4) 
Beginning Japanese: Written (5) 

Beginning Japanese (10) 
Beginning Japanese: Spoken (5) 

Intermediate Japanese: Written (5) 
Intermediate Japanese (10) 
Intermediate Japanese: Spoken (5) 

Individual Study (2) 
Advanced Japanese (10) 
Japan in Perspective (2) 



London, England 

ART 2320. English Art, Hogarth to Present (2,4) 

ART 2320. English Art, Hogarth to Present (2,3,4) 

ENG 2790. English Drama Lit. & London Theatre (4) 

ENG 3020. Spirit of Place in British Literature (4) 

ENG 3240. Eng. Drama Lit. & London Theatre (4) 

ENG 3300. British Lit. of the Eighteenth Century (4) 

ENG 3630. Mod. Traditions of Eng. Poetry (4) 

ENG 3650. British Fiction of 20th Century (4) 

ENG 6020. Spirit of Place in British Literature (3) 

ENG 6240. Eng. Drama Lit. & London Theatre (4) 

HST2110. Colloquium (4) 

HST 2260. History of London (2,3,4) 

SOC 2040. Social Institutions of Britain (4) 

SOC 3370. Aging in Mod. Soc: Great Britain (4) 



Summer, 1998 
Summer, 1998 



Fall, 1996 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1997 

Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996 

Fall, 1998 

Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996 

Fall, 1998, 1997, 1996 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1995 



Fall, 1997, 1996, 1995 

Spring, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1998 

Fall, 1998 

Fall, 1997 

Fall, 1997, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1995 

Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1996 

Fall, 1995 

Fall, 1997 

Fall, 1997, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1995 

Spring, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1997, 1996, 1995, 

Spring, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1998 

Fall, 1998 



229 



Overseas Courses 



SOC 3650. 
THE 2650. 

THE 2790. 



European Business & Society (4) 
The English Theatre, 1660-1940 

Eng. Drama Lit. & London Theatre (4) 



Moscow, Russia 

ECN 2088.* Intermediate Macroeconomics II (4) 

RUS 2288.* Advanced Grammar (4) 

RUS 2708.* Independent Study (2,4,6,8,12) 

Quito, Ecuador 

SPA 113E. Elem. Spanish: Immersion Setting (10 

SPA 153E. Int. Elem. Spanish: Immersion Setting (10) 

SPA 153E. Int. Interm. Spanish: Immersion Setting (10) 

Salamanca, Spain 

ART 2029. Spanish Art & Architecture (2,3,4) 

HST 2019. General History of Spain (4) 

SOC 2029. Social and Political Structures of 

Present-Day Spain (4) 
SPA 1829. Introduction to Spain (2,4) 

SPA 2019. Intensive Spanish (2) 

SPA 2179. Masterpieces of Spanish Literature (4) 

SPA 2199. Advanced Spanish (4) 

SPA 2249. Spanish Civilization (4) 

SPA 2419. Literature of the Golden Age I (4) 

SPA 2739. 20th Century Spanish Novel (4) 

SPA 2879. Spec. Topic: Cult. ID in Lat. Am. & US (4) 

SPA 3759. Special Topics in Spanish Literature 

and Culture (2 or 4) 
SPA 3879. Special Topics in Spanish-American 

Literature and Culture (2 or 4) 



Spring, 1996, 1995 
Fall, 1995, 1993 
Spring, 1995 
Fall, 1998 



Spring, 1995 
Spring, 1998 
Spring, 1998, 1996, 1995 



Summer 1999 
Summer, 1999, 1998 
Summer, 1999, 
1998 



Spring, 
1997, 1 
Spring, 
1997, 1 
Spring, 
1997, 1 
Spring, 
Spring, 
1997, 1 
Spring, 
Spring, 
Spring, 
Spring, 
1997, 1 
Spring, 
Spring, 
Spring, 



1999, 1998, 
996, 1995 
1999, 1998, 
996, 1995 
1999, 1998, 
996, 1995 
1996, 1995 
1999, 1998, 
996, 1995 
1999 

1996, 1995 
1999 

1999, 1998, 
996, 1995 
1995 

1996, 1995 
1999 



Spring, 1999 



* Moscow State 



Overseas Courses 230 



Venice, Italy 

ART 2693. Venetian Renaissance Art (4) Spring, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1998, 1997, 1996, 
1995 
CLA 2553. World of Myth in Virgil & Ovid (4) Spring, 1996, 1995 

CLA 2713. The Roman Civiliz. of Ancient Venetia (4, 3) Spring, 1996, 1995 

CLA 2883. Individual Study - Venice (2,4) Spring, 1996, 1995 

ENG 3653. Twentieth-Century British Fiction (4) Fall, 1997 

HON 1353. Approaches to Human Experience (4) Fall, 1997 

HON 2433. Literature, Travel & Discovery (4) Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1999 
HSS 1153. Physical Conditioning (1) Fall, 1995 

HSS 3703. Biomechanics of Human Movement (4) Fall, 1995 

HST2163. Ancient World II Fall, 1998 

HST 2223. Renaissance & Reformation (4) Fall, 1996 

HST 2253. History of Venice (4) Fall, 1998, 1996, 1995 

ITA 1533. Intermediate Italian (4) Fall, 1999 

ITA 2153. Introduction to Italian Literature I (4) Spring, 1996, 1995 

Fall, 1998, 1997, 
1996, 1995 
ITA 2163. Introduction to Italian Literature II (4) Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996, 1995, 1994 
Spring, 1999, 1998, 
1997, 1995 
ITA 2213. Spoken Italian: Venice (4) Fall, 1999, 1998, 1997, 

1996, 1995, 1994 
Spring, 1999, 1998, 
1997, 1995 
MUS 2143. The Language of Music in Italy (4) Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1999 
PHI 2853. Philosophy of Art (4) Fall, 1996 

Vienna, Austria 

ANT 5007. Hist, of E. Eur. Jews: Coex. & Con. (4) Spring, 1995 

ANT 5007. Reemerg. of Ethnic Idem in East Eur. (4) Fall, 1996 

ART 1037. Austria: Art & Architecture (4) Spring, 1998, 1995 

Fall, 1996 
ART 2727. Baroque Art (4) Spring, 1996 

ART 5007. Austria: Art & Architecture (4) Spring, 1996 

Fall, 1997, 1996, 1995 
ART 5007. Critical Approach to Modern Art (4) Fall, 1996 

BUS 2157. International Bus.: European Approach (4) Fall, 1997 

BUS 2237. International Trade & Marketing (4) Spring, 1995 



22i Overseas Courses 



BUS 2237. Business and Marketing in East (4) Spring, 1998 

BUS 2247. Euromoney: The Evolution of Tod (4) Spring, 1998 

BUS 2347. Euromoney: The Evolution of Tod (4) Spring, 1998 

BUS 2297. Business German (4) Fall, 1997 

BUS 2347. Multinational Bus. Enterprises (4) Fall, 1997, 1996 

BUS 5007. Business Internship (4) Fall, 1997, 1996 

Spring, 1998 

BUS 5007. Multinational Bus. Enterprises (4) Fall, 1996 

BUS 5007. Internal. Bus.: A European Approach (4) Fall, 1997 

BUS 5017. EMoney: Evol. Today's Eurcur. Sys. (4) Fall, 1996 

BUS 5207. Supervised Bus. Internship (4) Fall, 1997 

ECN 2537. Trans, to Market Eco.: E. Central Europe (4) Fall, 1997 

ECN 2717. EMoney: Evol. Today's Eurcur. Sys. (4) Fall, 1996 

EDU 2027. Supervised Teaching Internship (4,2) Spring, 1996, 1995 

EDU 2037. Supervised Teaching Internship (2) Spring, 1995 

EDU 3627. Supervised Teaching Internship (2) Fall, 1996 

EDU 3637. Supervised Teaching Internship (2) Fall, 1996 

ENG3027. Comp. Cen. European Lit. I (4) Fall, 1996 

GER 1117. Elementary German I (4) Fall, 1997, 1996 

Spring, 1998, 1995 

GER 1127. Elementary German II (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 1127. Intermediate German I (4) Spring, 1996 

GER 1537. Intermediate German I (4) Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1997, 1996 

GER 2177. Conversation and Composition (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2157. Vienna Theatre I (in German) (4) Fall, 1996 

GER 2187. Conversation & Composition (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2197. Conversation and Composition (4) Fall, 1996 

GER 2197. Business German (4) Spring, 1998 

GER 2297. Business German (4) Spring, 1995 

Fall, 1996 

GER 2707. Advanced German (4) Spring, 1998, 1996 

Fall, 1996 

GER 2707. Conversation & Composition (1, 4) Spring, 1998, 1995 

Fall, 1997, 1996 

GER 2707. Intermediate German I (4) Fall, 1996 

GER 2707. Intermediate German II (4) Fall, 1997, 1996, 1993 

GER 2707. Finde Seicle: Vienna 1865-1914 (4) Fall, 1997 

GER 2707. Osterreich in Text & Film I (4) Fall, 1 997, 1 996 

GER 2707. Osterreich in Text & Film II (4) Spring, 1995 

GER 2707. Vienna Theatre I (in German) (4) Fall, 1997, 1996 

GER 2707. Theater in Vienna II (in German) (4) Spring, 1998, 1995 

GER 2707. Vienna Theatre II (4) Spring, 1996 

GER 2707. Vienna: Growth of an Urban Civ. (4) Spring, 1998 

GER 2857. Vienna Theatre II (4) Spring, 1998 



Overseas Courses 232 



GER 3007. Vienna Theatre I (in German) (4) 

HMN 2157 Aus. Lit. in a Comp. Eur. Persp. 

HMN 2157. Comparative Cen. Eur. Lit. II (4) 

HMN 2187. Comparative Cen. Eur. Lit. I (4) 

HMN 5007. Comparative Cen. Eur. Lit. II (4) 

HST 1017. History of Habsburg Empire (4) 

HST 5007. Coexistence & Conflict (4) 

HST 5007. East Eur: WWII to Present (4) 

HST 5007. Fin de Siecle: Vienna 1865-1914 (4) 

HST 5007. History of Habsburg Empire (4) 

HST 5007 Modern Austria in Central Europe 

HST 5007. Nations and Religions: Maj/Min (4) 

HST 5007. Vienna: Growth of an Urban Civil. (4) 

HST 5007. Vienna 1 900: Le Fin de Siecle (4) 

HST 5017. East Europe: World War II to Present (4) 

HMN 2157 Comparative Cen. Eur. Lit. I (4) 

HMN 2187 Comparative Cen. Eur. Lit. I (4) 

MUS 1017 Music in Performance (4) 

MUS 2227. Music from Mozart to Mahler (4) 

MUS 2237. Music from Mozart to Mahler (4) 

MUS 5007. Music in Performance (4) 

POL 2327. Political Reform in E. Eur. (4) 

POL 2527. Cen. Eur. Pol. in Age of Upheaval (4) 

POL 2527. Internat. Law & Trans. Corp. (4) 

POL 2617. Internat. Organ. I: Eur. Integration (4) 

POL 5007. Internat. Organ. I: Eur. Integration (4) 

PSY 2557. Personality & Psychopathology (4) 

PSY 3337. Motiviation & Aggression (4) 

PSY 5007. Psychoanal. & Existential. Psy. (4) 

PSY 5007. Personality & Psychopathology (4) 



Fall, 1997 
Spring, 1998 
Spring, 1996 
Fall, 1996 
Spring, 1996, 1995 
Fall, 1 997 
Spring, 1998 
Spring, 1996 
Fall, 1997 
Fall, 1997 
Spring, 1998 
Fall, 1997 
Fall, 1996 
Spring, 1995 
Spring, 1995 
Fall, 1997 
Fall, 1997 
Spring, 1995 
Spring, 1996 
Spring, 1995 
Fall, 1997, 1996 
Spring, 1995 
Fall, 1996 
Spring, 1995 
Fall, 1996 
Fall, 1997 
Fall, 1996 
Fall, 1996 
Spring, 1995 
Fall, 1996 



Courses on Other Sites 



Africa 

HMN 225S. 



The Sahel Encounter (3) (Niger 
Republic, Burkina Faso, Senegal) 



Summer, 1995 



Asia, Pacific Rim 

POL 242. Topics in Bangladesh (4) 



Summer, 1996 



2 33 



Overseas Courses 



Europe 

ACC 290. 

ANT381B. 
382B. 
BUS 208S. 
BUS 290. 

EDU 272A. 

ENG 31010. 

HMN241S. 
HMN 50010. 

Middle East 



International Accounting (4) (Belgium, 
France, Germany, Switzerland, UK) 
Archeological Research I, II (4,4) 
(Ceredo, Italy) 

European Business Environment (4) 
International Business Study Tour (4) 

Geography Study Tour (4) 

Death, Nature & Change in Med. 
Liter. (4) (Oxford, England) 
Arts and Sciences Tour of Europe (4) 
Interdisciplinary Sem. Assessment (2) 
(Oxford, England) 



Summer, 1999, 1998, 
1997, 1996, 1995 
Summer, 1996 

Summer, 1995 
Summer, 1999, 1998, 
1997, 1996 
Summer, 1999, 1998, 
1997, 1996, 1995 
Summer, 1995 

Summer, 1996, 1995 
Summer, 1995 



REL102. Introduction to the Bible (4) Summer, 1997, 1996 

315., 316. Field Research in Biblical Archeology (4,3;4,3) 



Carribean 

ANT 381 A. 

382A. 
ANT 383. 

384. 
ANT 384. 



Archeological Research (4,4) 

(San Salvador, the Bahamas) 

Field Research in Cultural Anthropology 

(4,3;4,3) (Roatan Island, Honduras) 

Field Research in Cultural Anthropology 

(4,3) (Roatan Island, Honduras) 



Summer, 1997, 1996, 
1995 

Summer, 1997, 1996, 
1995 
Summer, 1999 



Overseas Courses 2.7.A 



Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy 






Jack E. Wilkerson Jr., Dean 

Associate Dean for Curriculum and Administration J. Kline Harrison 

Associate Dean for Academic Programs and Resources Dale R. Martin 

Assistant Dean for Student Professional Affairs Helen W. Akinc 

Assistant Dean for Student Academic Affairs Katherine S. Hoppe 

Thomas H. Davis Professor of Business Umit Akinc 

The Hylton Professor of Accountancy Thomas C. Taylor 

F.M. Kirby Chair of Business Excellence Roger L. Jenkins 

J. Tylee Wilson Professor of Business Ethics Donald P. Robin 

Kemper Professor John S. Dunkelberg 

Wayne Calloway Professor of Accountancy Dale R. Martin 

Wayne Calloway Professor of Taxation Ralph B. Tower 

Benson-Pruitt Associate Professor Thomas S. Goho 

BellSouth Mobility Technology Faculty Fellow and Assistant Professor Gordon E. McCray 

PricewaterhouseCoopers Faculty Fellow and Assistant Professor Audrey A. Gramling 

PricewaterhouseCoopers Faculty Fellow, Assistant Professor and Director of the Arthur 

Andersen Center Yvonne H. Stewart 

Exxon-Wayne Calloway Faculty Fellow and Assistant Professor Annette L. Ranft 

Director of the Risk Management Faculty Fellow Program William M. Marcum 

Professor Emeritus Eddie V. Easley 

Professors Stephen Ewing, Jack E. Wilkerson Jr. 

Associate Professors S. Douglas Beets, Arun P. Dewasthali, Jonathan E. Duchac, J. Kline 

Harrison, Paul E. Juras 

Assistant Professors Terry A. Baker, Sheri A. Bridges, Debra R. Jessup, William M. 

Marcum, Patricia A. Lobingier, Amy E. Randel, G. Page West III 

Senior Lecturer in Business Clayton E. Hipp Jr. 

Lecturer in Business David K. Isbister 

Instructors Helen W. Akinc, Katherine A. Baker, John Bennett, Tamara M. Greenwood, 

Katherine S. Hoppe, Mary Martha McKinley 

Visiting Instructors James W. Eynon, Karen Mishra 

Core Purpose 

We are a community of teacher-scholars committed to providing an intimate educational 
environment and an intellectually challenging educational experience in which our stu- 
dents prepare for successful leadership roles in business and society. 



2ic Calloway School 



Shared Values 

Wi? are committed to: 

Excellence in teaching and learning; 
the growth and development of each of our students; 
intellectual curiosity and the pursuit of knowledge; and 
personal and professional integrity. 



Programs 

Four four-year programs of study leading to the bachelor of science degree are offered. 
Students may choose a major in either business, analytical finance, information systems, 
or mathematical business (in cooperation with the Department of Mathematics). A five- 
year program of study is offered which combines a master of science in accountancy with 
a bachelor of science in accounting, a bachelor of science in analytical finance, or a bache- 
lor of science in information systems. 

The five-year program is an integrated BS/MS program. Interested students will 
declare an accountancy, analytical finance, or information systems major during their 
sophomore year and will apply to the master's program during their third year. Students 
will receive both the bachelor of science and the master of science degrees upon comple- 
tion of the program. 

Objectives 

The business program of the Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy pre- 
pares students for success in today's business world with a challenging and high quality 
curriculum. The program is intentionally general and facilitates the integration of the vari- 
ous business disciplines with the liberal arts core. It also emphasizes flexibility by allowing 
the opportunity for specialized career paths and for minors outside the Calloway School. 

The analytical finance program in the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy prepares students for success in careers in financial services, including 
investment and commercial banking and financial consulting. The program emphasizes a 
strong concentration in finance, supported by accounting concepts beyond the introduc- 
tory level, which is critical in a global environment. 

The mathematical business program, offered by the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy jointly with the Department of Mathematics, prepares students 
for careers in business and government that require model-based, advanced quantitative 
approaches to problem solving. The program responds to today's complex global environ- 
ment, where problems in business administration and public policy making are becoming 
more intricate, requiring the use of such an approach. 



Calloway School 



236 



The information systems program in the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy prepares students for challenging careers in information systems and tech- 
nology management. The program emphasizes the leveraging effects of information tech- 
nology toward competitive advantage, while also developing the requisite technical skill 
base to effectively serve leadership roles in information systems organizations. 

The bachelor of science in accountancy (BSA) degree program of the Wayne Calloway 
School of Business and Accountancy, which is only offered in conjunction with the MSA 
program, is geared to providing a foundation for the MSA degree. The program includes 
the opportunity for broad exposure to undergraduate concepts to prepare students to suc- 
cessfully complete the MSA degree. 

The master of science in accountancy (MSA) degree program of the Wayne Calloway 
School of Business and Accountancy prepares students to make sustained contributions to 
the discipline and practice of accounting. The program can be tailored to meet the needs 
of students with a variety of undergraduate majors, including liberal arts and sciences, 
business, and accounting. All students participate in intensive course work to prepare for 
a career in auditing, tax consulting, investment banking, or financial consulting. 

All programs in the Calloway School are accredited by the AACSB — The International 
Association for Management Education. 

Admission 

Admission to the Calloway School is by formal application, and applicants will be 
screened by the Committee on Admissions, Continuation, and Scholarships of the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy. Before being considered for admission to 
the Calloway School, the applicant first must have been admitted to Wake Forest College. 
Minimum requirements for admission to the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy are completion of sixty-five credits with an overall grade-point average of 
2.2, completion of Economics 150, Mathematics 106 or 111 (Mathematics 111 for the 
mathematical business major), Accounting 111 and 112, and a 2.0 average in these four 
courses. In addition, students should have completed Business 100 and Communication 
110. Students who have not met fully the above requirements may request a one-semester 
provisional acceptance. 

The number of students who can be accommodated is limited. Meeting the minimum 
requirements is not a guarantee of admission. Therefore, the Calloway School reserves the 
right to grant or deny admission or readmission to any student even though he or she 
meets the minimum requirements. Readmission to the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy first requires readmission to Wake Forest College, require- 
ments for which are discussed on page 32. 

Transfer of Credit from Other Schools 

It is expected that most work toward degrees offered by the Wayne Calloway School of 
Business and Accountancy will be taken in the Calloway School. For students wishing to 
transfer credit from other schools, the following general guidelines apply: 



237 Calloway School 



(a) Courses at another school passed with the minimum passing grade at that school may 

not be transferred. 

(b) Courses transferred in business and accountancy may be subject to validating 

examinations. 

(c) No work in courses numbered zoo and above will be accepted from two-year schools. 

(d) Courses taken elsewhere in subjects not offered at the Wayne Calloway School of 

Business and Accountancy will not necessarily count towards the credits 
required in the Calloway School. 

(e) Only one course so transferred may be an elective unless such course is from an inter- 

national program approved by Wake Forest University, in which case two such 
electives may be so transferred. 

(f) Business jji cannot be transferred from another institution; it must be taken in the 

Calloway School. 

For the bachelor of science in business, a minimum of forty credits must be earned in the 
Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy at Wake Forest University; for the 
bachelor of science in analytical finance, the minimum credits earned in the Calloway 
School must total fifty-four; for the bachelor of science in information systems, the mini- 
mum credits earned in the Calloway School must total fifty-two; for the BS/MS in profes- 
sional accountancy, a minimum of fifty-four credits and thirty graduate semester hours 
must be earned in the Calloway School; and for the bachelor of science in mathematical 
business, a minimum of forty credits must be earned in the Calloway School and/or the 
mathematics department at Wake Forest University. 

Requirements for Continuation 

In addition to the requirements stated on page 32, a student must be academically respon- 
sible and must show satisfactory progress toward completing the requirements for the 
degree. The administration of the Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy 
will notify the student if satisfactory progress is not being made and, after consultation 
with the Committee on Admission, Continuation, and Scholarships, will decide if the stu- 
dent may continue as a major in the Calloway School. 

Requirements for Graduation 

The Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy confers the bachelor of science 
degree with a major in either business, analytical finance, information systems, or mathe- 
matical business. The Calloway School also confers the master of science in professional 
accountancy concurrently with the bachelor of science in accountancy, the bachelor of sci- 
ence in analytical finance, or the bachelor of science in information systems. The require- 
ments for completion of the degrees are those in effect at the time the student enters the 
Calloway School. For the major in business, a student must complete the following course 
work: Accounting 111 and 112; Business 100, 201, 202, 211, 221, 231, 241, 251, 261, 
and 371; Economics 150; Mathematics 106 or 111; Communication 110; and a minimum 
of twelve credits from Business 209, 212, 213, 215, 216, 222, 223, 224, 225, 226, 227, 



Calloway School 



238 



228, 232, 233, 234, 235, 236, 237, 242, 243, 252, 253, 262, 265, 281, 290, 293, 294, 
338 or accounting courses numbered 200 or above. One elective may be taken from eco- 
nomics courses numbered 200 or above. 

The analytical finance major requires the following courses: Accounting 111, 112, 
211, and 212; Business 100, 201, 202, 211, 221, 231, 232, 236, 241, 251, 261, 371; 
Economics 150; Mathematics 106 or 111; Communication 110 and a minimum of eight 
credits from Business 233, 234, 235, 237, 281, 290 (or Accounting 290), 293, 294, 338, 
or any accounting course above Accounting 212. 

The information systems major requires the following courses: Accounting 111 and 
112; Computer Science 111 and 111L; Business 100, 201, 202, 211, 221, 231, 241, 251, 
255, 256, 257, 258, 259, 261, 371; Economics 150; Communications 110; and 
Mathematics 106 or 111. 

Prerequisites for the mathematical business major include the following courses: 
Accounting 111 and 112; Mathematics 111 and 112; Economics 150; Communication 

110, and Business 100. Computer Science 111 and 112 are strongly recommended. 
Requirements for the mathematical business major are: Mathematics 253, 256, 301 (or 
113), 302 (or 121), 353; Business 211, 221, 231, 241, 251, 261, 292; and a minimum of 
eight additional credits — only four of which can be in Business. Mathematics electives 
must be at the 300 level or above, excluding 381. 

For the combined bachelor of science/master of science degree in professional accoun- 
tancy, the following course work must be completed: Accounting 111, 112, 211, 212, 
331, 351, 352, 621, 714, 730, 754, 780, 791; Business 100, 201, 211, 221, 231, 237, 
241, 251, 671, 762, an approved international course, and eight credits of approved elec- 
tives; Economics 150; Mathematics 106 or 111; and Communication 110. 

For the combined bachelor of science in analytical finance/master of science in profes- 
sional accountancy, the following course work must be completed: Accounting 111, 112, 
211, 212, 331, 351, 352, 621, 714, 730, 754, 780, 791; Business 100, 201, 202, 211, 
221, 231, 232, 236, 237, 241, 251, 671, 762, and an approved international course; 
Economics 150; Mathematics 106 or 111; and Communication 110. 

For the combined bachelor of science in information systems/ master of science degree 
in professional accountancy the following coursework must be completed: Accounting 

111, 112, 211, 212, 351,352, 621, 714, 754, 780, 791; Computer Science 111 and 111L; 
Business 100, 201, 211, 221, 231, 237, 241, 251, 255, 257, 658, 659, 671, 762; 
Economics 150; Mathematics 106 or 111; and Communications 110. 

In addition to the courses stipulated above, the student in business and accountancy 
also must meet the following requirements for graduation: 

(a) a minimum of 144 credits for the four-year programs and 144 credits plus 3 graduate 

semester hours for the five-year program, including the basic and divisional 
requirements established by Wake Forest College; 

(b) a minimum grade-point average of 2.0 on all work attempted at Wake Forest; 

(c) a minimum grade-point average of 2.0 on all work attempted at other institutions; and 

(d) an overall 2.0 grade-point average on all business and accountancy courses. 



239 



Calloway School 



Senior Honors Program 

Calloway School students (exclusive of mathematical business majors) with a grade point 
average of at least 3.0 on all college work and who are eligible for membership in Beta 
Gamma Sigma are invited to apply for admission to the honors program in business and 
accountancy. A project, paper, or readings, and an oral presentation or examination are 
required. Those who successfully complete the requirements specified by the school are 
graduated with the designation "Honors in Business," "Honors in Accountancy," 
"Honors in Analytical Finance," or "Honors in Information Systems." For additional 
information, interested students should consult a member of the faculty of the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy 

Mathematical business majors with a grade point average of at least 3.0 on all college 
work and a minimum grade point average of 3.5 in the major are invited to apply for 
admission to the honors program in mathematical business. A project, paper, or readings, 
and an oral presentation or examination are required. Those who successfully complete 
the requirements specified by the school and the mathematics department are graduated 
with the designation "Honors in Mathematical Business." For additional information, 
interested students should consult a member of the faculty of the mathematics department 
or the Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy. 

Beta Gamma Sigma, National Honor Society 

Membership in Beta Gamma Sigma is the highest national recognition a student can 
receive in an undergraduate program in accounting or business. To be eligible for 
membership, a student must rank in the upper 7 percent of the junior class or the upper 
10 percent of the senior class. 

Courses of Instruction 

Business 

100. Calloway Requisite Integrated Study Program. (2) Provides students with an aware- 
ness of the fundamental objectives of business organizations and the environments in 
which they operate, in order to provide a common foundation for an integrated study of 
business disciplines. In addition, students develop knowledge and basic skills of business 
software applications including the operating system and windows, spreadsheets, business 
presentation graphics, and databases. C — Accounting 111 or P — Accounting 111. Closed 
to freshmen and seniors. 

181. Field Study. (1) Directed field study in specialized areas of business. P — Business 100 
and Accounting 111. Permission of instructor. 

201. Quantitative Analysis I. (4) This course emphasizes the understanding and application 
of quantitative tools used in the business decision-making process. Specific issues covered 
include collection and presentation of data, sampling, and inferences. P — Business 100. 



Calloway School 240 



202. Quantitative Analysis II. (4) This course is a continuation of Business 201. 
Additional statistical analysis tools are covered including linear programming. 
P — Business 201. 

209. Seminar: Contemporary Issues in Business. (2,4) The course examines current busi- 
ness issues using the theory and practices covered in the core courses. Topics may include 
recent global business events and policies, corporate takeovers and restructurings, busi- 
ness aspects of health care, workplace issues, the relationship of government and business 
decisions, among others. The topics discussed will change each semester reflecting the 
important issues at that time. P — Senior status and permission of instructor. 

211. Organizational Theory and Behavior. (4) This course focuses on the behavior, struc- 
ture, and processes within organizations. Emphasis is on developing knowledge and skills 
regarding the role of individuals and groups within organizations, as well as the functions 
of organizational systems and dynamics. 

212. Human Resource Management. (4) This course focuses on important human 
resources management (HRM) skills that are frequently used by line managers. Upon 
completion of the course, students should be literate in basic HRM concepts, knowledge- 
able of line managers' HRM responsibilities, and skilled in HRM applications as 
prospective line managers. P — Business 211. 

213. Entrepreneurship. (4) The course is designed to acquaint students with entrepreneur- 
ship in practice, and to help students assess whether an entrepreneurial path makes sense 
for them. Students will define their own new business opportunities and will design a 
business plan for a new business start-up. Topics covered will include marketing research 
and screening new venture ideas, the qualities which successful entrepreneurs and their 
management teams possess, growth and transition issues for new ventures, legal and 
financial issues in start-ups, and raising capital. P — Business 211, 221, and 231, or 
permission of the instructor. 

215. Seminar in Comparative Management. (2,4) This course deals with the global issues 
in management. Particular emphasis is placed on the different management philosophies 
and styles employed by managers in an international context. The course is conducted in 
a seminar format and focuses on the complexities involved in operating in different 
cultures and the implications which these cultural differences have on managing organiza- 
tions and their employees' behavior. P — Business 211. 

216. Management in the Non-profit and Public Sectors. (2) This seminar focuses on the 
comparisons and contrasts of management across the non-profit, public, and private sec- 
tors. The course uses a seminar format and a "real-world" approach. P — Senior standing. 
(One-half of enrollment spaces are available for non-CSBA students.) 

221. Principles of Marketing. (4) A study of the role of marketing in business and the 
economy. Emphasis is on the examination of marketing concepts, functions, institutions, 
and methods. P — Economics 150 and Business 100. 

222. Marketing Strategy. (4) This course focuses on marketing strategy development 
through intensive analysis of a diverse selection of cases from consumer, industrial, and 



241 Calloway School 



technological markets; product and service businesses; and for-profit and nonprofit sec- 
tions. Building upon tools, frameworks, and concepts of Business 221, this course pursues 
key strategic issues in-depth. Topics covered include product development, promotional 
strategy, physical distribution, and pricing in planning and controlling marketing opera- 
tion. P — Business 221. 

223. International Marketing. (4) Study of problems and opportunities in marketing over- 
seas, analysis of cultural, economic, and political environment of foreign marketing oper- 
ations, organization, and control of the multinational company. P — Business 221. 

224. Marketing Research. (4) Introduction to fundamentals of research methodology and 
use of research information in marketing decision-making. Topics include research design, 
data collection methods, scaling, sampling, and alternate methods of statistical data anal- 
ysis. Students design and execute their own research projects. P — Business 201 and 221. 

225. Consumer Behavior. (4) Study of interdisciplinary behavioral science findings in buy- 
ing decision processes and application of this knowledge to the design of marketing strate- 
gies and to the development of creative communication programs. P — Business 221. 

226. Retail Management. (4) This course is designed to acquaint the student with the 
scope, current trends and elements of retail management. Topics covered include market 
structure of retailing, consumer behavior and retail strategy, changing retail institution 
types, merchandising strategies, basic financial tools essential to retail profitability and 
current research in retailing. P — Business 221. 

227. Marketing Communications. (4) Marketing communications — the "promotion" part 
of the four Ps — is designed for students who want to pursue careers in marketing. The 
overall course objective is to improve students' ability to communicate with consumers by 
helping them determine whom to talk to, what to say, and how to say it. In addition to 
advertising, the course addresses such elements of a marketing communications program 
as consumer and trade promotions, direct mail, publicity, packaging, point of sale materi- 
al, and event sponsorship. Discussions, cases, in-class exercises, short oral presentations, 
and a marketing communications campaign project are among the instructional methods 
used in the course. P — Business 221. 

228. Sports Marketing. (4) This course focuses on the application of the strategic market- 
ing process to the rapidly growing sports industry. Varied elements of the industry are 
examined: understanding the sports consumer; marketing and media; advertising and 
communication; promotion and special events; licensing; and corporate sponsorships. 
Current research, including gender-specific marketing, using athletes as endorsers, seg- 
menting the sports market, measuring value of sponsorship, and globalization of sports 
products are covered. P — Economics 150 or equivalent. 

231. Principles of Finance. (4) An introduction to the field of finance including financial 
management, investment analysis, and financial institutions and markets. Emphasis is 
placed on financial management at the level of the business entity or nonprofit organiza- 
tion. P — Business 100, Accounting 112, and Economics 150. 

232. Advanced Financial Management. (4) Management decision-making applied to the 
financial function, including investment, financing, dividend, and working capital deci- 
sions and their impact on the value of the firm. P — Business 231. 

Calloway School 242 



233. Investment Analysis. (4) Study of investment alternatives, expected returns, and cor- 
responding risks; valuation of stocks and bonds applying both fundamental and technical 
analysis; survey of past and current methods of stock selection techniques, including port- 
folio considerations. P — Business 231. 

234. Multinational Financial Management. (2,4) Analysis of the international aspects of 
managerial finance. Emphasis upon institutional and environmental factors influencing 
capital acquisition and allocation. P — Business 231. 

235. Financial Institutions & Markets. (2) A thorough examination of the role of finan- 
cial intermediaries in a free market economy and the functions of financial institutions 
within money and capital institutions. Topics include asset, liability, and capital manage- 
ment, the regulatory environment, and special topics. Special topics may include risk man- 
agement techniques utilizing proprietary insurance to neutralize the effects of risk inher- 
ent in daily life: termination or suspension of earnings, liability exposures, and potential 
losses of real and personal property values. P — Business 231. 

236. Financial Derivatives. (4) Futures, options, and swaps are the three most important 
types of financial derivatives and they are linked by a common pricing framework. This 
course emphasizes the use of these derivatives in risk management but includes speculative 
strategies that can be implemented with them. P — Business 231. 

237. Taxes and Their Role in Business and Personal Decisions. (4) Study of basic concepts 
of federal and state income taxation with an introduction to sales, property, and payroll 
taxes. Emphasis on the impact of taxation on business and personal tax planning and on 
the importance of compliance. P or C — Accounting 21 1 or permission of instructor. 

241. Production and Operations Management. (4) A study of the problems of the opera- 
tions function in organizations, their interfaces with other functional areas, and the meth- 
ods of their solutions. Topics include process selection, forecasting, aggregate planning, 
job shop scheduling, project management, MRP inventory management, facilities location 
and design, quality planning and control. P — Business 201. 

242. International Operations Management. (2) This course represents a relatively new 
dimension in the field of production and operations management. It is intended to intro- 
duce the student to the international aspects of managing manufacturing service opera- 
tions drawing on relatively modest amount of literature — books, articles, and cases that 
have recently accumulated. The following topics will be covered: international exchange 
rates, international logistics, international facility location decisions, international sourc- 
ing, joint manufacturing ventures and their strategic implications and performance analy- 
sis of multinational production systems. P — Business 241. 

243. Management of Innovation-Based Enterprises. (4) This course explores the unique 
challenges and opportunities of businesses which have technology or innovation as a driv- 
ing force of the firm. Major themes of the course include: the development of product line 
and technology strategy as the basis for competition; evaluating the need and demand for 
a new product, product line extension or service; developing and marketing new products 
and services; and regulatory and ethical issues in innovation. P — Business 211, 221, 231 
and 251. 



243 Calloway School 



251. Management Information Systems. (4) An introduction to the business issues associ- 
ated with information technology, designed to provide a broad perspective for managing 
an organization's information resources. The course begins with an overview of comput- 
ing technology currently used in business organizations, including hardware, software, 
telecommunications and networking technology and database management systems. 
Techniques for developing and implementing corporate information systems are 
addressed, as are advanced applications of information technology. Frameworks are 
developed for contemplating when the use of such technologies is appropriate. Finally, the 
strategic, ethical and international implications of information systems is examined. 

P— Business 100. 

252. Electronic Commerce. (2) Explosive growth in business-to-consumer and business- 
to-business electronic commerce has been witnessed in recent years. The e-commerce 
arena is rapidly evolving around new technologies and innovative business models. This 
course explores the many facets of electronic commerce including infrastructure, global, 
advertising, retailing, and legal and privacy issues. P — Business 251. 

253. Advanced Topics in Information Technology. (2) At any point in time, contemporary 
organizations face several imposing information technology-based management chal- 
lenges. This course provides an in-depth analysis of these issues, with an emphasis on con- 
sidering the alignment between information technology and the goals and strategies of the 
firm. A high degree of currency is maintained with regard to the topics addressed. P — 
Business 251. 

256. Systems Analysis and Design. (4) The course addresses structured approaches to the 
development of computer-based information systems in business. Specifically, structured 
methodologies are addressed, as are approaches to representing information and data 
flows and requirements. The fundamentals of design are also addressed. Structured soft- 
ware engineering and documentation techniques are explored as approaches to imple- 
menting quality systems. P — Business 251 and P or C — Computer Science 111. 

261. Legal Environment of Business. (4) A study of the legal environment in which busi- 
ness decisions are made in profit and nonprofit organizations. Emphasis is put upon how 
the law develops and how economic, political, social, international, and ethical considera- 
tions influence this development. Includes substantive areas such as torts and government 
regulation of the employment relationship, the competitive marketplace and the environ- 
ment. P — Accounting 111. 

262. Business Law. (4) A study of substantive law topics applicable to business transac- 
tions including contracts, agency, property, the UCC and business organizations with an 
emphasis on how these subjects intersect with the functional areas of business and affect 
managerial decision-making. P — Business 261. 

265. Ethics and Business Leadership. (4) An interdisciplinary exploration of ethics applied 
to business. The lecture, readings, and case-based approach introduces the necessary back- 
ground information and then utilizes examples of ethical and unethical situations to devel- 
op an understanding of how an efficient and effective business can also be ethical. 
P — Junior or senior standing. (One-half of enrollment spaces are available for non-CSBA 
students.) 



Calloway School 244 



281. Individualized Reading and Research. (2,3, or 4) Directed study in specialized areas 
of business. P — Permission of instructor. 

290. International Business Study Tour. (4) An experiential learning course which pro- 
vides students with an exposure to and understanding of the distinctive characteristics of 
global versus domestic operations in foreign settings. Each of the functional areas of busi- 
ness (marketing, operations, finance, human resources management, information systems, 
and strategic management) are covered through various site visits and presentations in 
selected foreign countries. Background readings and assignments appropriate to business 
or analytical finance majors are required. P — Permission of instructor. Taught overseas in 
the summer. 

292. Seminar in Mathematical Business Analysis. (4) This seminar provides mathematical 
business majors with a forum where they can actually see how the mathematical, statisti- 
cal and computer techniques can be brought to bear on many business problems from a 
variety of business functions. Emphasis will be more on studying the process of modeling 
and implementation issues of the solutions and less on the algorithmic details devised for 
effective model solution. Critical and reflective thinking about models and translation of 
their results into management action that will add value to a process system will be a 
major objective. Another objective of the seminar will be to foster group work and the 
sharpening of presentation skills. P — Business 211, 221, 231, 241, and Mathematics 256, 
353. 

293. Principles of Risk Management and Insurance. (2) Risk management continues to 
evolve as an important area of study within the field of finance. This course is intended to 
assist the student in identifying an analyzing risk and in managing it through insurance 
and alternative tools. Techniques such as loss control, risk retention, and risk transfer are 
discussed. Insurance is discussed as one of many tools used to manage the risks of individ- 
uals and firms. P — Junior or senior standing. 

294. Applied Risk Management. (2) Professional risk management field work, under the 
direction of a faculty member. Students gain relevant practical experience that is integrat- 
ed with casework and risk management theory. Emphasis is placed upon analysis, deci- 
sion making in a global environment, teamwork, written and verbal skills, presentation 
skills, and using technology to solve problems. P — Permission of instructor, Business 293, 
and senior standing. 

295. Summer Management Program. (8) A study of the various functions of business 
including accounting, finance, information systems, management, marketing, production, 
and strategic planning. Offered only in the summer and open only to junior and senior 
liberal arts majors. Special application and admission procedures. 

296. Seminar in Fundamentals of Business. (6) A study of the various functional areas of 
business, including finance, information systems, management, marketing, production, 
and strategic planning. Offered only in the summer. P — Admission to master of science in 
accountancy program. 

338. Financial Statement Analysis. (2) A study of the techniques used to analyze and 
interpret the information in corporate financial statements. Emphasis is placed on (1) 
accounting methods used in the preparation of financial statements, (2) implications of 



24c Calloway School 



management's accounting choices for evaluation of corporate performance by creditors 
and investors, and (3) linkages among financial statement items. P — Business 231 and 
Accounting 212. 

371. Strategic Management. (4) This course focuses on the derivation of competitive 
advantage by organizations. The course emphasizes the activities of general managers 
who are responsible for the shape, character, and overall direction of the total enterprise. 
Course content includes analyzing the effects of industry and competitive environments 
on the firm, determining the strategic basis upon which the firm should compete, formu- 
lating and implementing integrative action plans which enhance performance, and strate- 
gic leadership. Emphasis is placed on applying principles of competitive analysis and 
strategic planning to case studies of domestic situations, diversification, globalization, 
corporate turnaround, and in the use of computerized business simulations. P — Business 
211, 221, 231, and 241. 

671. Strategic Management. (5) This course focuses on the intersection between funda- 
mental concepts in strategic management and contemporary issues in accounting. A foun- 
dation is built in strategic management theory relating to the various ways in which firms 
plan and organize value — adding activities, derive competitive advantage, and achieve 
superior performance. The relation between fundamental strategy issues and related 
accounting treatments are then examined. P — Bus 211, 221, 231, 241 and Accounting 
414,454,480. 

762. Business Law for Accountants. (4) An introduction to the process of law and study 
of the substantive law applicable to contracts, the Uniform Commercial Code, and 
debt/creditor relations. P — Admission to MS program. 

Accountancy 

110. Introduction to Financial and Management Accounting. (4) Basic accounting con- 
cepts and procedures used in the preparation of financial reports issued to stockholders, 
creditors, and managers of business enterprises. Open only to juniors and seniors not 
majoring in business or accountancy. Cannot be substituted for Accounting 111. 

111. Introductory Financial Accounting. (4) An introduction to financial accounting and 
reporting, including the role of financial information in business decisions, the basic 
financial statements, and the processes used to prepare these financial statements. 
Students are introduced to the accounting and reporting issues associated with an organi- 
zation's financing, investing, and operating activities. Sophomore standing. 

112. Introductory Management Accounting. (4) A study of the concepts fundamental to 
management accounting which aid in decision making, performance evaluation, and plan- 
ning and control. The topics covered in the course include product costing systems, bud- 
geting, differential and breakeven analysis, responsibility accounting, cost allocation, and 
management accounting reports. P — Minimum of C in Accounting 111. 

211. Financial Accounting Theory and Problems I. (5) A study of the conceptual frame- 
work underlying financial accounting in the United States as well as the financial account- 
ing standards setting process and the basic corporate financial statements. Financial 



Calloway School 



246 



accounting and reporting issues associated with receivables, inventories, property, plant, 
and equipment, and intangible assets are also examined. P — Business 100 and minimum 
of C in Accounting 112. 

212. Financial Accounting Theory and Problems II. (5) An examination of financial 
accounting and reporting issues associated with current liabilities and contingencies, long- 
term liabilities, partners' and stockholders' equity, investments in debt and equity securi- 
ties, business combinations, and consolidated and multinational enterprises. P — Minimum 
of C in Accounting 211. 

280. Contemporary Issues in Accounting and Finance. (2) This course focuses on the role 
of management in the formulation of financial reporting policies and practices with an 
emphasis on the impact of these policies and practices on financial reports, decisions, and 
markets. Contemporary accounting and finance topics such as earnings management, 
lease capitalization, cash flow vs. earnings reporting, foreign currency translation, debt 
extinguishment, oil and gas accounting, among other issues, are analyzed in the course. 
P — Permission of instructor. 

290. International Accounting. (4) An experiential learning course that provides students 
with an opportunity to learn about international and transnational accounting standards, 
policies, and practices. Students will participate in a study tour of several selected coun- 
tries and will gain an international accounting and business perspective through meetings 
with individuals in government, professional accounting firms, financial institutions, and 
manufacturing companies. Background readings and assignments appropriate to account- 
ing or analytical finance majors are required. P — Accounting 211 and permission of the 
instructor. Taught overseas in the summer. 

331. Federal Taxation of Corporations, Partnerships, Estates, and Trusts. (4) A review of 
federal taxation principles associated with the organization, operation, and dissolution of 
corporate, partnership and tax-exempt organizations. Introduction to federal estate and 
gift taxes and to income taxation of trusts and estates. P — Admission to MS program or 
permission of instructor. 

332. Selected Topics in Taxation. (4) A review of advanced tax topics including consoli- 
dated tax returns, international transactions, multistate corporate taxation and family tax 
planning. P — Accounting 331. 

351. Accounting Information Systems. (2) A study of the design and operation of 
accounting systems including the revenue, expenditure, and administrative transaction 
cycles. Emphasis is placed upon the necessary controls for reliable data. P — Accounting 
112 and Business 251. 

352. Introduction to Auditing. (5) An examination of basic auditing concepts and prac- 
tices, and the auditor's professional responsibilities. Emphasis is placed upon auditing 
standards and the auditing procedures commonly used in public accounting. 

P — Admission to the MS program, C or above in Accounting 212; C — Accounting 351. 

378. Individualized Reading and Research. (2,3, or 4) Directed study in specialized areas 
of accountancy. P — Permission of instructor. 

390. Professional Accounting Internship. (4) Professional accounting field work, under 



247 



Calloway School 



the direction of a faculty member, in a public accounting firm, corporate enterprise, or 
not-for-profit organization. Students gain relevant practical experience which builds on 
prior coursework and provides an experiential knowledge base for coursework in the fifth 
year. P — Admission to MS program and permission of the instructor. Pass/Fail. 

621. Advanced Management Accounting. (4) Advanced study of management accounting 
topics including strategic and operational decisions, behavioral issues related to budget- 
ing, transfer pricing, performance measurement, and contemporary issues in accounting 
for management planning and control. P — Minimum of C in Accounting 112. 

632. Selected Topics in Taxation. (4) A review of advance tax topics associated with fed- 
eral taxation of flow through entities and international transactions, and state and local 
taxation. P — Accounting 631. 

633. Tax Policy and Planning. (2) An examination of current tax policy issues and the 
effects of taxes on investment alternatives. P — Business 237. 

714. Seminar in Financial Reporting. (5) An examination of a variety of financial report- 
ing topics, including revenue recognition, income taxes, pensions and postretirement ben- 
efits, leases, accounting changes and error analysis, interim and segment reporting, and 
the statement of cash flows. P — Admission to MS program and minimum of C in 
Accounting 212. 

730. Tax Research Methods. (1) A survey of the methods and resources used by tax prac- 
titioners in researching compliance and planning issues. P — Business 237 or permission of 
instructor. 

734. Estate and Gift Taxation. (2) A review of taxation of gratuitous transfers under the 
federal estate and gift tax code and under state inheritance gift tax law. Analysis of tax 
planning and compliance issues. P — Business 237. 

754. Advanced Auditing and Assurance Services. (5) A study of current issues, practices, 
and techniques related to auditing. Students will utilize available research materials, 
databases, personal auditing experience, and practitioner sources to address auditing 
issues. Emphasis is placed upon analysis, teamwork, writing, and presentation skills. 
P — Admission to MS program, Accounting 352 or permission of the instructor. 

780. Accounting Research Methods and Resources. (2) An introduction to research meth- 
ods and resources used to investigate issues and problems arising in a professional 
accounting environment. P — Admission to master of science program. 

790. Integrated Study of Critical Issues in Accounting and Taxation. (6) An examination 
of contemporary accounting and tax issues using an integrative case approach. In this 
capstone course, students analyze cases, prepare written reports, and make oral presenta- 
tions, all on both an individual basis and in teams. P — Accounting 480. 

791. Professional Accountancy Colloquium. (2) A seminar course that reflects back on the 
internship experience and examines current issues facing the accountancy profession. The 
course would allow students to share and discuss issues and problems faced during the 
internship and would utilize speakers and readings to stimulate discussions. 

P — Admission to the master of science program. 



Calloway School 



248 



All Schools — Fall 1999 



Enrollment 






Men 



Women 



Total 



Undergraduate Schools* 
The Graduate School (Reynolda Campus) 
The Graduate School (Bowman Gray Campus) 
The School of Law 
Divinity School 

Babcock Graduate School of Management 
The Wake Forest School of Medicine 
(Includes Allied Health) 

University Totals 



1,871 


1,986 


3,857 


166 


234 


400 


83 


92 


175 


281 


191 


472 


7 


21 


28 


410 


238 


648 


224 


350 


574 



3,108 



3,046 



6,154 



Geographic Distribution — Undergraduates 

By State (1999-2000 Academic Year) 



Alabama 


33 


Kentucky 


39 


North Dakota 


1 


Alaska 


1 


Louisiana 


25 


Ohio 


95 


Arizona 


8 


Maine 


12 


Oklahoma 


14 


Arkansas 


11 


Maryland 


164 


Oregon 


8 


California 


66 


Massachusetts 


108 


Pennsylvania 


211 


Colorado 


19 


Michigan 


26 


Rhode Island 


20 


Connecticut 


107 


Minnesota 


15 


South Carolina 


167 


Delaware 


19 


Mississippi 


9 


South Dakota 


2 


District of Columbia 


10 


Missouri 


30 


Tennessee 


119 


Florida 


208 


Montana 





Texas 


142 


Georgia 


207 


Nebraska 


7 


Utah 


1 


Hawaii 


2 


Nevada 


1 


Vermont 


14 


Idaho 


1 


New Hampshire 


18 


Virginia 


218 


Illinois 


68 


New Jersey 


207 


Washington 


11 


Indiana 


27 


New Mexico 


3 


West Virginia 


35 


Iowa 


9 


New York 


163 


Wisconsin 


14 


Kansas 


16 


North Carolina 


1,091 


Wyoming 






Countries Represented (1999-2000 Academic Year): 



Australia 

Barbados 

Bermuda 

Bolivia 

Canada 

China (PRC) 

Colombia 

Costa Rica 

Dubai 



Ecuador 

France 

Germany 

India 

Indonesia 

Ivory Coast 

Lithuanian Republic 

Mexico 

Netherlands 



Russia 

Senegal 

South Africa 

Spain 

Sweden 

Ukraine 

United Arab Emirates 

United Kingdom 



Total International Students: 54 

*Note: Undergraduate data taken from IPEDS — fall enrollment 1 999. All other data taken from the 

Office of the Registrar. 



249 



Enrollment 



Governing and Advisory Boards 






-c 



l 






The Board of Trustees 

1996-2000 

W. Louis Bissette Jr., Asheville, NC 
Libba C. Evans, Winston-Salem, NC 
Victor I. Flow Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Murray C. Greason Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Harvey R. Holding, Ponte Vedra Beach, FL 
Lawrence D. Hopkins, Winston-Salem, NC 

1997-2001 

Jerry H. Baker, Atlanta, GA 
James S. Boshart III, New York, NY 
Jocelyn Burton, San Francisco, CA 
O. Burton Gupton, Gordonsville, VA 
Alice Kirby Horton, Hillsborough, NC 

1998-2002 

L. M. Baker Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Carlyn J. Bowden, Greensboro, NC 
Ronald E. Deal, Hickory, NC 
James R. Helvey III, Winston-Salem, NC 
Jeanette W. Hyde, Raleigh, NC 

1999-2003 

Diana Moon Adams, Bartlesville, OK 
J. Donald Cowan Jr., Greensboro, NC 
Marvin D. Gentry, King, NC 
William B. Greene Jr., Elizabethton, TN 
Deborah D. Lambert, Arlington, VA 



James W. Johnston, Winston-Salem, NC 
John G. Medlin Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Sheereen A. Miller, Charlotte, NC 
Frances R Pugh, Raleigh, NC 
K. Wayne Smith, Newton, NC 



Hubert Humphrey, Greensboro, NC 
Albert R. Hunt, Washington, DC 
Joseph W Luter III, Smithfield, VA 
J. Lanny Wadkins Jr., Dallas, TX 
Kyle Allen Young, Greensboro, NC 

Dee Hughes LeRoy, Charleston, SC 

L. Glenn Orr Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 

Adelaide A. Sink, Tampa, FL 

Roy J. Smith, Raleigh, NC 

John C. Whitaker Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 

William L. Marks, New Orleans, LA 

Louis B. Meyer, Wilson* 

J. Donald Nichols, Nashville, TN 

Celeste Mason Pittman, Rocky Mount, NC 

Charles Jeffrey Young, Winston-Salem, NC 



Life Trustees 

Bert L. Bennett, Winston-Salem, NC 
Henry L. Bridges, Raleigh, NC 
Louise Broyhill, Winston-Salem, NC 
C. C. Cameron, Charlotte, NC 
Charles W. Cheek, Greensboro, NC 
Egbert L. Davis Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Thomas H. Davis* 
Floyd Fletcher, Durham, NC 
Jean H. Gaskin, Charlotte, NC 



Weston P. Hatfield, Winston-Salem, NC 
Petro Kulynych, Wilkesboro, NC 
James W Mason, Southern Pines, NC 
W Boyd Owen, Waynesville, NC 
Arnold D. Palmer, Youngstown, PA 
Zachary T. Smith, Winston-Salem, NC 
D. E. Ward Jr., Lumberton, NC 
T. Eugene Worrell, Charlottesville, VA 
J. Smith Young Sr., Lexington, NC 



Deceased 



Board of Trustees 



250 



Officers - 1999-2000 

Hubert Humphrey, Greensboro, NC, Chair 

Murray C. Greason Jr., Winston-Salem, NC, Vice Chair 

Adelaide A. Sink, Tampa, FL, Vice Chair 

Louis R. Morrell, Winston-Salem, NC, Treasurer 

Leon H. Corbett Jr., Winston-Salem, NC, Secretary 

J. Reid Morgan, Winston-Salem, NC, Assistant Secretary 

Irene A. Comito, Clemmons, NC, Assistant Treasurer 



The Board of Visitors 

Dale R. Walker, Chair, Board of Visitors 

Wake Forest College and Graduate School 



Terms Expiring June 30, 2000 

Catherine B. Burroughs, Aurora, NY 
Clifford H. Clarke, Kamuela, HI 

E. Ray Cope, Winston-Salem, NC 
Wilbur S. Doyle Sr., Martinsville, VA 
Noel L. Dunn, Winston-Salem, NC 
Stanley Frank, Greensboro, NC 
Beverly Freeman, Atlanta, GA 
Stephen W Gilbert, Washington, DC 
Thomas C. Griscom, New York, NY 
Nancy L. Ingram, Winston-Salem, NC 

Terms Expiring June 30,2001 

F. Hudnall Christopher Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Robert M. Frehse Jr., New York, NY 
Beverly B. Lambert, Roanoke, VA 

Terms Expiring June 30, 2002 

Peter J. Bondy, Ft. Lauderdale, FL 
Stewart Taylor Butler, Winston-Salem, NC 
Jane F. Crosthwaite, South Hadley, MA 
Evelyn P. Foote, Accokeek, MD 
Shirley T. Frye, Greensboro, NC 
Stanhope A. Kelly, Winston-Salem, NC 
Albert D. McCulloch, Bryn Mawr, PA 



Timothy See Yiu Lam, Vienna, VA 
Randall D. Ledford, St. Louis, MO 
Dennis Manning, Surrey, England 
James A. Martin Jr., Winston-Salem, NC 
Penelope E. Niven, Winston-Salem, NC 
John Holden Parrish, Lajolla, CA 
Howard A. Rollins Jr., Atlanta, GA 
Lloyd P. Tate, Raleigh, NC 
Janet P. Wheeler, Winston-Salem, NC 
Mary Helen Young, Malibu, CA 



William L. Salter, Hoffman Estates, IL 
William W Webb, Chapel Hill, NC 



Christoph Nostitz, Clemmons, NC 
Drewry H. Nostitz, Clemmons, NC 
Patricia V Rogers, Natural Bridge, VA 
Dale R. Walker, New York, NY 
Douglas C. Waller, Washington, DC 
Jeanne P. Whitman, Dallas, TX 



251 Board of Visitors 



Terms Expiring June 30, 2003 

Bruce M. Babcock, Winston-Salem, NC 
Frank Bragg, Charlotte, NC 
Homer Brookshire, Bridgewater, VA 
Callie Anne Clark, Hinsdale, IL 
Graham Denton, Charlotte, NC 
Brenda E. B. Dunson, Washington, DC 
Karen L. Elkins, Silver Spring, MD 
Kathleen B. French, Fairfax, VA 
Lucy Gordon, New York, NY 
t. 
Ex-Officio Members 

Sammy Rothrock, President, Alumni Council, 
Celeste M. Pittman, Board of Trustees Liaison 



Charlotte Hanes, Winston-Salem, NC 
Sandra R. Kahle, Vero Beach, FL 
Thomas W Lambeth, Winston-Salem, NC 
Martin Mayer, Washington, DC 
James A. Perdue, Salisbury, MD 
Michael G. Riley, Roanoke, VA 
Janice K. Story, Atlanta, GA 
Rick Lee Tarleton, Athens, GA 
John W Wagster, Nashville, TN 



Winston-Salem, NC 
, Rocky Mount, NC 



The Board of Visitors 

Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy 



David Barger, Greensboro 
James David Barlett Jr., Louisville, CO 
Janice W Calloway, Greenwich, CT 
Ashby M. Cook Jr., Greensboro 
Frederick E. Cooper, Atlanta, GA 
Victor N. Daley, Des Moines, IA 
Edwin A. Dalrymple Jr., Charlotte 
Frederick W. Eubank, Charlotte 
W. Chester Evans III, Greensboro 
John J. Fosina, New York, NY 
Jeffry D. Frisby, Clemmons 
Thomas P. Gibbons, New York, NY 
C. Stanley Hamm, Atlanta, GA 
Dennis Hatchell, Winston-Salem 
Gregory B. Hunter, Winston-Salem 
A. Dale Jenkins, Raleigh 
M. Benjamin Jones, New York, NY 
Meg Jones, Charlotte 
Richard Kauffeld Jr., Camden, NJ 



John Keener, Charlotte 

Gary B. Lambert, Washington, DC 

James R. Lattanzi, Greensboro 

Susan R. Leadem, London 

George L. Lovett, Charlotte 

John B. Maier II, New York, NY 

Morris D. Marley, Winston-Salem 

Dennis R. Reigle, Chicago, IL 

Richard A. Riley, Chicago, IL 

Larry P. Scott, Florham Park, NJ 

H. Dean Sellers, Charlotte 

Clay Small, Piano, TX 

Patricia G. Stiles, Chicago, IL 

Peter M. Stiles, Chicago, IL 

June K. Stroh, New York, NY 

Porter B. Thompson, Greensboro 

Michael J. Wilk, Iselin, NJ 

Jackson D. Wilson Jr., Winston-Salem 



Board of Visitors 



252 



The Administration 



Date following name indicates 
year of appointment 



University 

Thomas K. Hearn Jr. (1983) 

BA, Birmingham-Southern; BD, Southern 
Baptist Theo. Seminary; PhD, Vanderbilt 

John P. Anderson (1984) 

BS, MS, PhD, Georgia Tech.; 
MBA, Alabama (Birmingham) 

Russell E. Armistead Jr. (1976) 
BS, Virginia Poly. Inst, and SU; 
MBA, Wake Forest 

Sandra Combs Boyette (1981) 

BA, UNC-Charlotte; MEd, Converse; 
MBA, Wake Forest 

LeonH. Corbettjr. (1968) 
BA, JD, Wake Forest 

Richard H. Dean (1986) 

BA, Virginia Military Institute; 
MD, Medical College of Virginia 

Samuel T. Gladding (1990) 
BA, MAEd, Wake Forest; 
MAR, Yale; PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Louis R.Morrell (1995) 

BS, Babson College; MBA, Massachusetts 

Edwin G. Wilson (1946, 1951) 

BA, Wake Forest; AM, PhD, Harvard 

Kenneth A. Zick ( 1975) 

BA, Albion; JD, Wayne State; 
MLS, Michigan 



President 

Vice President for Finance and Administration 

Vice President for 
Health Services Administration 

Vice President for University Advancement 

Vice President and Counsel 
Senior Vice President for Health Affairs 

Associate Provost 



Vice President for Investments 
and Treasurer 

Senior Vice President 



Vice President for Student Life and 
Instructional Resources 



2 53 



The Administration 



College 

PaulD. Escott(1988) 

BA, Harvard; MA, PhD, Duke 

Toby A. Hale (1970) 

BA, Wake Forest; MDiv, Duke; EdD, Indiana 

WilliamS. Hamilton (1983) 
BA, MA, PhD, Yale 

Claudia Thomas Kairoff (1986) 

BA, College of Notre Dame of Maryland; 
MA, Virginia; PhD, Brandeis 

Paul N. Orser (1989) 

BS, Wake Forest; MS, PhD, Emory 

JerylPrescott(1994) 

BS, Clemson; MA, NCA&T; PhD, South Florida 

W Douglas Bland (1975) 
BA, MA, Wake Forest 

Provost 

Edwin G. Wilson (1946, 1951) 

BA, Wake Forest; AM, PhD, Harvard 

Samuel T. Gladding (1990) 
BA, MAEd, Wake Forest; 
MAR, Yale; PhD, UNC-Greensboro 



Dean of the College 
Associate Dean 
Associate Dean 
Associate Dean 

Associate Dean and Dean of Freshmen 

Associate Dean 

Director of Academic Services and 
Assistant to the Dean of the College 



Sr. Vice President and 
Provost Emeritus 

Associate Provost 



Graduate School 

Gordon A. Melson ( 1991) 

BS, PhD, Sheffield (England) 

School of Law 

Robert K.Walsh (1989) 

BA, Providence; JD, Harvard 

Ralph A. Peeples( 1979) 

BA, Davidson; JD, New York University 

James Taylor Jr. (1983) 

BA, JD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

William T.Barrett (1994) 

BA, JD, Washington and Lee 

James C.Cook (1992) 

BS, South Carolina; JD, Wake Forest 

Jean K.Holmes (1985) 

Margaret C. Lankford (1990) 
BS, UNC-Greensboro 

Linda J. Michalski (1983) 
BS, UNC-Greensboro 

MelanieE. Nutt(1969) 



Dean of the Graduate School 

Dean of the School of Law 

Associate Dean, Academic Affairs 

Associate Dean, External Affairs 

Director of Career Services 

Director of Continuing Legal Education 

Activities Coordinator 
Budget Director 

Director of Professional and Public Relations 

Director of Admissions and Financial Aid 



The Administration 



2 54 



EdwardS. Raliski ( 1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

LeAnn P. Steele (1977) 
BMu, Salem 



Babcock Graduate School of Management 



R. Charles Moyer (1988) 

BA, Howard; MBA, PhD, Pittsburgh 

Charles R. Kennedy Jr. (1989) 
BA, PhD, Texas (Austin) 

J. Kendall Middaugh II (1987) 

BBA, George Washington University; 
PhD, Ohio State University 

Robin Roy Ganzert (1988) 
BS, MBA, Wake Forest 

Mary C. Goss ( 1992) 

BS, Southern Illinois; MBA, Pepperdine 

Jamie Barnes (1998) 

AA, Wesley, Delaware; 
MBA, Wake Forest 

Melissa N. Combes (1996) 

BA, Washington College; MBA, Wake Forest 

Patricia B. Divine (1988) 

BS, Virginia, MALS, Wake Forest 

LeslyeA. Gervasi (1997) 

BS, Nazareth College; MA, State University 
of New York 

Steve Price (1995) 

BS, UNC-Chapel Hill; MBA, Wake Forest 



Wake Forest School of Medicine 

Richard H. Dean (1986) 

BA, Virginia Military Institute; 
MD, Medical College of Virginia 

James N. Thompson (1979) 

BA, DePauw; MD, Ohio State 

Russell E. Armistead Jr. (1976) 
BS, Virginia Poly. Inst, and SU; 
MBA, Wake Forest 

Timothy C. Pennell (1966) 
BS, MD, Wake Forest 

J. Scott Gibson (1991) 

BS, UNC-Chapel Hill; MBA, Duke 

Ronald L. Hoth ( 1992) 
BS, Loyola College 

Joanne Ruhland (1988) 

BS, Gardner Webb; MBA, Appalachian 



Director of Educational Technology 
Registrar 

Dean and Integon Chair of Finance 



Associate Dean for Academic Affairs 
and Director of Flow Institute 

Associate Dean for Management Education 
Director, Full-time MBA Program 

Assistant Dean of Administration and 
Human Resources 

Assistant Dean of Admissions, 
Career Services, and Student Services 

Director of Evening and Executive MBA 

Programs in Winston-Salem and 

Family Business Initiative 

Director of MBA Development and 
Alumni Relations 

Assistant Dean of External Relations and 
Program Development 

Director, MBA Program-Charlotte 



Assistant Dean of Management Education 



Senior Vice President for Health Affairs 



Vice President and Dean 



Vice President for Health Services Administration 
and Senior Associate Dean, Administrative Services 

Chief of Professional Services and 
Director, International Health Affairs 

Assistant Dean for Finance 

Assistant Dean for Human Resources 

Assistant Dean for Governmental Relations 



*55 



The Administration 



Eugene W.Adcock III (1989) 

BS, Davidson; MD, Wake Forest 

G. Douglas Atkinson (1994) 
BS, Drake; MBA, Xavier 

Cam E. Enarson( 1990) 

BA, Concordia; BMS, MD, Alberta; 
MBA, Pennsylvania 

Lewis H.Nelson III (1976) 

BS, North Carolina State; MD, Wake Forest 

Patricia L.Adams (1979) 

BA, Duke; MD, Wake Forest 

VelmaG. Watts (1982) 

BS, MS, North Carolina A&T; 
MEd, UNC-Chapel Hill; PhD, Duke 

J. Mac Ernest III (1982) 

BA, William Carey College; 
MD, Mississippi 

Johannes M. Boehme II (1978) 

MBA, WFU; PHD, Kennedy Western 

Elizabeth F. Sherertz (1988) 

BS, Wake Forest; MD, Virginia 

Frank M.James III (1968) 
BA, Swarthmore College; 
MD, Hahnemann 

Jay Moskowitz (1995) 

BS, Queens College (CUNY); PhD, Brown 

Lawrence D.Smith (1983) 
BS, MS, Illinois 

RicardoDavila(1999) 
MD, Minnesota 

George P. Sartiano (1996) 

BA, Brooklyn College; MD, New York 

Michael J. Poston(1993) 
BS, MS, Indiana 

Mark A. Oliveira (1994) 
BA, Texas (Austin) 

Edward Carter (1993) 
BS, Western Michigan; 
MS, San Diego State 

Paul M. LoRusso( 1987) 

BS, Syracuse; MBA, Florida State 

E. Parks Welch III (1991) 

BS, UNC-Chapel Hill; MBA, Wake 
Forest; MLS, UNC-Greensboro 

Joel M. Landreth( 1978) 
BA, Catawba College 



Associate Dean for Professional Affairs 



Associate Dean for Networks 



Associate Dean for Medical Education 



Associate Dean for Student Services 
and Admissions 

Associate Dean for Student Affairs 



Assistant Dean for Student Affairs and 
Director of Minority Affairs 

Deputy Assistant Dean for Student Affairs 



Associate Dean for Academic Computing 
and Information Services 

Associate Dean for Faculty Services 



Associate Dean for Graduate Medical Education 



Senior Associate Dean, Science and Technology 

Associate Dean for Research 

Associate Dean for Veterans Affairs 

Assistant Dean for Veterans Affairs 

Associate Dean for Development 
and Alumni Affairs 

Assistant Dean for Development 
and Alumni Affairs 

Associate Dean for Facilities 
Planning and Construction 

Associate Dean for Information Services 

Interim Director, Coy C. Carpenter Library 



Controller and Director, Accounting 
and Resource Acquisition 



The Administration 



256 



W. Roger Poston II (1991) 

AB, Mercer; BS, MS, Medical College 
of Georgia; EdD, West Virginia 

Denise Fetters (1998) 

BS, Washington National 



Director, Biomedical Communications 



Director for Business Operations, 
Wake Forest University Physicians 



Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy 



Jack E.Wilkerson Jr. (1989) 

BS, Bob Jones University; PhD, Texas 

J. Kline Harrison (1990) 

BS, Virginia; PhD, Maryland 

Dale R. Martin (1982) 

BS, MS, Illinois State; DBA, Kentucky 

Helen Akinc (1987) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MBA, SUNY (Binghamton 

KatherineS. Hoppe(1993) 

BA, Duke; MBA, Texas Christian 

Terry A. Baker (1998) 

BA, Miami of Ohio; MS, MBA, Illinois; 
PhD, Kentucky 

Umit Akinc (1982) 

BS, Middle East Tech. Univ. (Ankara); 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 



Dean of the Wayne Calloway School 
of Business and Accountancy 

Associate Dean for 
Curriculum and Administration 

Associate Dean for 
Academic Programs and Resources 

Assistant Dean for 
i Student Professional Affairs 

Assistant Dean for 
Student Academic Affairs 

Director of MS Program in Accountancy 



Advisor, Mathematical Business Program 



Divinity School, Wake Forest University 

Bill J. Leonard (1996) 

BA, Texas Wesleyan; MDiv., Southwestern Baptist 
Theo. Seminary; PhD, Boston University 

Scott Hudgins (1997) 
BA, Richmond; 
MDiv, Union Theological Seminary, New York 

Jill Crainshaw (1999) 

BA, Wake Forest; MDiv, Southeastern Baptist 
Theological Seminary; PhD, Union Theological Seminary 



Dean of the Divinity School 



Director of Admissions 



Director of Vocational Development 



Admissions and Financial Aid 

William G. Starling (1958) 
BBA, Wake Forest 

Thomas O.Phillips (1982) 
BA, MA, Wake Forest; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Martha Blevins Allman (1982) 
BA, MBA, Wake Forest 

Colin L. Creel (1996) 
BS, Wake Forest 



Director of Admissions and Financial Aid 

Associate Director of Admissions 
and Scholarship Officer 

Associate Director of Admissions 

Assistant Director of Admissions 



257 



The Administration 



Randal L.Hall (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 
MA, PhD, Rice 

Marcus R.Ingram (1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Tamara L. Blocker 

BS, Florida State University; 
MA, University of Central Florida 

William T.Wells (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest * 
MAT, MEd, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Milton W King (1992) 
BA, MBA, Wake Forest 

Neville G. Watkins ( 1998) 

BA, Randolph-Macon Women's College; 
MA, Virginia 

Julia D.Williams (1998) 
BA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Jonathan H. Hartness (1998) 
BA, Southern Mississippi 

Shannon James (1999) 
BA, Salem College 

Christia H.Fisher (1991) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MA, Wake Forest 

F.Nicole Baldwin (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Dawn Calhoun (1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

K.Nikki Warren (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Athletics 

Ron Wellman (1992) 

BS, MS, Bowling Green State University 

Barbara Walker (1999) 

BS, MAEd, Central Missouri State 

Mike Pratapas (1989) 

BA, MAEd, Wake Forest 

Joel Nielsen (1993) 

BS, MA, Mankato State 

William M. Faircloth( 1978) 

BS, Wake Forest; MA, Alabama 

Charlie Davis (1989) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Craig Keilitz (1996) 

BS, Central Michigan; MA, Ohio 



Assistant Director of Admissions 



Assistant Director of Admissions 
Coordinator of Multicultural Recruitment 

Assistant Director of Admissions 
Coordinator of Admissions Technology 

Director of Financial Aid 



Associate Director of Financial Aid 
Assistant Director of Financial Aid 

Assistant Director of Financial Aid 

Assistant Director of Financial Aid 

Assistant Financial Aid Officer 

Assistant Scholarship Officer 

Admissions Counselor 

Admissions Counselor 

Admissions Counselor 

Director of Athletics 

Associate Athletic Director 
for Olympic Sports/SWA 

Associate Athletic Director for Development 

Associate Athletic Director 
for Marketing and Promotions 

Assistant Athletic Director for Football 

Assistant Athletic Director 
for Student-Athlete Enhancement 

Assistant Athletic Director for Compliance 



The Administration 



258 



Dianne Dailey (1988) Associate Athletic Director 

BA, Salem College; 
MEd, North Carolina State 

Career Services 

William C. Currin (1988) Director of Career Services 

BA, Wake Forest; 
BD, Southeastern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Carolyn A. Couch (1997) Assistant Director of Career Services 

BS, Meredith College; MA, Appalachian State 

Patrick Sullivan (1997) Director of Internships and Experential Education 

BA, Wake Forest University 

Allison F. Corkey (1998) Career Counselor 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; 
MS, North Carolina State 

Chaplains Office 

Edgar D. Christman ( 1 954, 1961) Chaplain 

BA, JD, Wake Forest; MDiv, Southeastern Baptist 
Theo. Seminary; STM, Union Theo. Seminary 

Rebecca G. Hartzog (1999) Associate Chaplain and 

BA, Samford University; MDiv, Southern Baptist Campus Minister 

Baptist Theological Seminary 

Finance and Administration 

John P. Anderson (1984) Vice President for Finance and Administration 

BS, MS, PhD, Georgia Tech.; 
MBA, Alabama (Birmingham) 

Louis R. Morrell (1995) Vice President for Investments 

BS, Babson College; MBA, Massachusetts and Treasurer 

Maureen L. Carpenter (1997) Controller 

BS, St. John Fisher College; 
MBA, Wake Forest 

Irene A. Comito (1986) Assistant Treasurer 

BS, Kent State 

F. Thomas King (1991) Assistant Director, Real Estate Management 

THB, Piedmont College 

William C. Sides Jr. (1994) Director of Facilities Management 

BS, North Carolina State 

Graylyn International Conference Center 

Troy M. Grooms (1996) General Manager 

Gregory D. Fulton (1995) Director of Sales 

BA, UNC-Greensboro 



2 5 9 



The Administration 



Information Systems 

Jay L.Dominick( 1991) 
BS, UNC-Chapel Hill; 
MA, Georgetown; MBA, Wake Forest 

C. Lee Norris (1995) 

BA, MA, South Carolina 

Nancy R. Crouch (1992) 
BA, Virginia Tech; 
MAEd, Wake Forest' 

Ronald W. Rimmer Jr. (1995) 
BS, Appalachian State 

Tim Covey (1988) 

BA, MBA, Wake Forest 

Lynda Goff (1991) 

BA, Southern California (Fullerton) 

Thomas F. Jackson (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 

John D.Henderson (1998) 
BBA, Campbell 

Anne Yandell Bishop (1981) 

BA, MA, UNC-Greensboro; MBA, Wake Forest 

Institutional Research 

Ross A. Griffith (1966) 

BS, Wake Forest; MEd, UNC-Greensboro 

Ursula G.Singh (1997) 

BS, Lynchburg College; MS, Wake Forest 

Registrar 

Dorothy A. Sugden ( 1987) 

BA, Salem College; MA, Wake Forest 

HalheS. Arrington (1977) 
BA, MAEd, Wake Forest 

Investments and Treasurer 

Louis R.Morrell( 1995) 

BS, Babson College; MBA, Massachusetts 

Irene A. Comito ( 1986) 
BS, Kent State 



Assistant Vice President for Information 
Systems and Chief Information Officer 

Director of Systems Support 

Director of Technology Outreach and 
Special Assistant to the Vice President 

Director of Business Computing 

Technology Manager 

Director of Information Systems 
Support Services 

Director of Telecommunications 

Director of Administration 

Director of Intranet Development 



Director of Institutional Research 
and Academic Administration 

Assistant Director of 
Institutional Research 



Registrar 
Senior Associate Registrar 



Vice President for Investments 
and Treasurer 

Assistant Treasurer 



Legal Department 



J. Reid Morgan (1980) 
BA, JD, Wake Forest 

Donna H.Hamilton (1988) 
AB, Drury; JD, Wake Forest 



University Counsel 
Counsel 



The Administration 260 



Anita M.Conrad (1999) 

BA, University of Akron; JD, Wake Forest 

LeonH. Corbettjr. (1968) 
BA, JD, Wake Forest 



Counsel 

Senior Counsel 
Secretary of the Board of Trustees 



Libraries 

Rhoda K. Channing (1989) 

BA, Brooklyn; MS in LS, Columbia; 
MBA, Boston College 

Deborah N. Lambert (1997) 

BA, Wittenberg; MLS, Pittsburgh 

Marian F. Parker (1999) 

BA, UNC-Greensboro, MSLS, 
UNC-Chapel Hill; JD, Wake Forest 



Director of the Z. Smith Reynolds Library 



Assistant Director of the 
Z. Smith Reynolds Library 

Director of the Professional Center Library 
and Professor of Law 



Student Life 

Kenneth A. Zick ( 1975) 

BA, Albion; JD, Wayne State; MLS, Michigan 

Harold R.Holmes (1987) 

BS, Hampton; MBA, Fordham 

Mary T. Gerardy (1985) 

BA, Hiram; MEd, Kent State; MBA, Wake Forest 

Joanna M. Iwata (1995) 

BA, University of Southern California 
(Los Angeles); MA, University of the Pacific 

James R. Buckley (1996) 
BS, MEd, Clemson 

Edgar D. Christman (1954, 1961) 

BA, JD, Wake Forest; BD, Southeastern Baptist 
Theo. Seminary; STM, Union Theo. Seminary 

William C. Currin ( 198 8) 
BA, Wake Forest; 
BD, Southeastern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Carolyn A. Couch (1997) 

BS, Meredith College; MA, Appalachian State 

Barbee Myers Oakes (1989) 

BS, MA, Wake Forest; PhD, Tennessee 

Connie L. Carson (1986) 

BS, MEd, North Carolina State; MBA, Wake Forest 

Tim Burton (1993) 

BS, MEd, University of Maryland-College Park 

Michael Ford (1981) 
BA, Wake Forest; 
MDiv, Gordon-Conwell Theo. Seminary 

M. Paige Wilbanks (1996) Assistant Director of Student Development/ 

BA, Furman, MEd, South Carolina Coordinator of Volunteer Services 



Vice President for Student Life 
and Instructional Resources 

Associate Vice President and 
Dean of Student Services 

Assistant Vice President 
for Student Life 

Director of the Benson University Center 



Associate Director of the Benson 
University Center 

University Chaplain 



Director of Career Services 

Assistant Director of Career Services 

Director of Multicultural Affairs 

Director of Residence Life and Housing 

Associate Director of Residence 
Life and Housing 

Director of Student Development 



261 The Administration 



Cecil D.Price (1991) 
BS, MD, Wake Forest 

Sylvia T.Bell (1981) 

RNC, N.C. Baptist Hosp. School of Nursing 

Natascha L. Romeo (1990) 
BS, South Carolina; 
MEd, UNC-Greensboro 

ReginaG. Lawson (1989) 
BS, UNC- Wilmington 

Kenneth W Overholt (1997) 

BS, Michigan State; MA, Central Michigan 

Marianne A. Schubert (1977) 
BA, Dayton; 
MA, PhD, Southern Illinois 



Director of the Student Health Service 

Associate Director for Administration, 
Student Health Service 

Health Educator 



Chief of University Police 

Assistant Chief of University Police 

Director of the University Counseling Center 



Johnne W Armentrout (1989) 
BA, William and Mary; 
MAEd, Wake Forest 

Van D.Westervelt (1998) 

BS, University of Maryland (College Park); 
MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Summer Session 

Toby A. Hale (1970) 

BA, Wake Forest; MDiv, Duke; EdD, Indiana 

University Advancement 

Sandra Combs Boyette (1981) 

BA, UNC-Charlotte; MEd, Converse; 
MBA, Wake Forest 

Mark Lee Aust (1994) 
BS, Wake Forest 

Tracy Baginski (1999) 

BA, University of Buffalo 

Robert T Baker (1978) 

BA, MS, George Peabody (Vanderbilt) 

KennethS. Bennett (1997) 
BA, William and Mary 

James R.Bullock (1985) 
BA, MBA, Wake Forest 

Betsy Chapman (1999) 
BA, MA, Wake Forest 

Cathy B.Chinlundf 1986) 
BS, East Carolina 

Mary Dawne Clark (1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Melissa N. Combes (1996) 

BA, Washington College; MBA, Wake Forest 



Assistant Director of the University Counseling Center 



Director of the Learning Assistance Center 



Dean of Summer Sessions 
Associate Dean of the College 



Vice President for University Advancement 

Director of Wake Forest Clubs 
Prospect Research Analyst 

Assistant Vice President and 
Director of Development 

University Photographer 

Assistant Vice President/ 
Major Gifts and Annual Support 

Director of Alumni Programs 

Director of Advancement Records and 
Technology Operations 

Major Gifts Officer 

Director of Development/ 
Babcock School 



The Administration 262 



Julius H. Corpening (1969) 
BA, Wake Forest; BD, 
Southern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Kevin P. Cox (1990) 

BA, East Texas State; MA, Wake Forest 

David Davis (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Robert Kriss Dinkins (1990) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Lori Dishman (1999) 

BS, Meredith; MA, Wake Forest 

Vada Lou Earle (1999) 

BA, Wake Forest; MS, Russell Sage College 

MarthaS. Edwards (1993) 
BA, MA, UNC-Chapel Hill; 
MBA, Vanderbilt 

David W. Fyten (1991) 
BA, Minnesota 
MA, MFA, Iowa 

Kimberly S. Griffing Gentry (1996) 

BA, Wake Forest; MS, Virginia Commonwealth 

Melody A. Graham (1987) 
BS, Appalachian State 

Samantha H.E. Hand (1997) 

BA, Virginia Tech, MFA, Radford 

Anne K.Hodges (1987) 

Amelia Hummel (1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

William J. "Josh" Kellett (1998) 
BS, Wake Forest 

Paul J. Kennedy III (1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Kerry M. King (1989) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Julie Leonard (1998) 

BS, Appalachian State 
MS, Tennessee 

Bryan Link (1999) 

BA, Austin Peay State 

Leigh Makitka (1999) 
BS, UNC-Charlotte 

Tracy Matthews (1999) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MA, UNC-Greensboro 

David M. McConnell (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 



Assistant Vice President for 
University Relations 

Assistant Vice President for Public Affairs and 
Director of Media Relations 



Technical Development Manager 

Assistant Director of Development 

Director of Gift Stewardship 

Assistant Director of Alumni Programs 

Director of Foundation Relations 



Assistant Vice President for Public Affairs and 
University Editor 



Media Relations Officer 

Director of Special Events and 
Summer Conferences 

Art Director 

Director of Campaign Administration 
Law Development Officer 

Assistant Director Wake Forest Clubs 

Major Gifts Officer 

Director of Communications 

Media Relations Officer 



Director of Law Alumni and Development 

Major Gifts Officer 

Development Officer 

Assistant Director of College Fund/ 
Parents Reunion Program 



263 



The Administration 



Brad Mcllwain (1999) 
BA, Guilford 

MintaA. McNally (1978) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Robert D.Mills (1972) 
BA, MBA, Wake Forest 

Allen H. Patterson Jr. (1987) 
BS, Wake Forest 

Cherin C. Poovey (1987) 
BA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Jennifer Richwine (1999) 
BA, Wake Forest 

William T.Snyder (1989) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Loyd Wade Stokes Jr. (1997) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Elizabeth Switzer (1999) 

BA, University of Kentucky 

Christine Underwood (1999) 
BS, Appalachian State 

Cheryl V.Walker (1989) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Anna D. Harris Ward (1998) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Lloyd A. Whitehead (1995) 
BA, Central Florida 

Tammy Wiles (1991) 
BS, High Point 

Wake Forest University Theatre 

John E. R. Friedenberg (1988) 

BA, Wake Forest; MFA, Carnegie-Mellon 

Donald H.Wolfe (1968) 

BS, MS, Southern Illinois; PhD, Cornell 

Mary R. Wayne-Thomas (1980) 

BFA, Pennsylvania State; MFA, Ohio State 

Jonathan H. Christman (1983) 
AB, Franklin and Marshall; 
MFA, Massachusetts 

Harold C. Tedford ( 1965) 

BA, Ouachita; MA, Arkansas; 
PhD, Louisiana State 

Doug Brown (1994) 
BA, West Florida 

Nina Maria Lucas (1996) 

BFA, Ohio State; MFA, UCLA 



Major Gifts Officer 

Assistant Vice President and Director of 
Alumni Activities and Volunteer Programs 

Associate Vice President for Capital Support 
and Advancement Technologies 

Director of Planned Giving 

Associate University Editor and 
Director of Publications 

Director of Campaign Programs 

Director of Emerging Technologies 

Director of Divinity School Development 

Director of Campaign Communications 

Assistant University Editor 

Associate Director of Media Relations 

Assistant Director College Fund 
Reunion Programs 

Director of Electronic Communication 

Assistant Director Advancement Records and 
Technology Operations 

Director of the University Theatre 

Associate Director of Theatre 

Theatre Designer 

Lighting Designer/Production Manager 

Director of Theatre Emeritus 

Technical Director 
Director of Dance 



The Administration 



264 



Shanda Smith (1991) 

Lisa Weller (1993) 

BFA, North Carolina School of the Arts 

Other Administrative Offices 

Mary Jane Berman (1986) 
BA, Harpur; MA, 
PhD, SUNY (Binghamton) 

C. Kevin Bowen ( 1994) 

BS, Tennessee Tech; MM, Louisville 

Julie Cole (1988) 

BS, MA, Appalachian 

Victor Faccinto (1978) 

BA, MA, California State (Sacramento) 

Katherine R. Fansler (1996) 

BA, Tennessee Technological University 

Richard P. Faude (1986) 

BA, Wake Forest; MFA, Montana State 

Samuel T. Gladding (1990) 

BA, MAEd, Wake Forest; MA, Yale; 
PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Mark E. Good (1995) 
BS, Wake Forest 

Brian Gorelick (1984) 

BA, Yale; MM, Wisconsin (Madison); 
DMA, Illinois 

Peter D. Kairoff (1988) 

BA, California (San Diego); 
MM, DMA, Southern California 

Nina M. Lucas (1996) 

BFA, Ohio State; MFA, California (Los Angeles) 

Paul N. Orser (1989) 

BS, Wake Forest; MS, PhD, Emory 

Lillian Shelton (1985) 

BA, St. Andrews College 

MartineSherrill(1985) 

BFA, MLF, UNC-Greensboro 

Ross Smith (1984) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Jody L. Walker (1986, 1998) 
BS, Virginia Tech 

Pia Christina Wood (1999) 

BA, College of William and Mary; 
MIBS, University of South Carolina; 
MA, University of New Mexico; 
PhD, Graduate Institute for International 
Studies, Geneva, Switzerland 



Audience Services Coordinator 
Costume Shop Manager 



Director/Curator of the 
Museum of Anthropology 

Director of Bands 

Director of Research and Sponsored Programs 

Director of the Art Gallery 

Director of Operations, Human Resources 

Head of Information Technology Center 
(Z. Smith Reynolds Library) 

Director of Counseling Program 

Internal Auditor 

ft 

Director of Choral Ensembles 

Coordinator of the Venice Program 

Director of Dance 

Coordinator of the London Program 

Director of the Secrest Artists Series 

Curator of Slides and Prints 

Debate Coach 



Coordinator of Study Abroad 
and International Students 

Director of International Studies 



265 



The Administration 



The Undergraduate Faculties 






Date following name indicates year of appointment. 



Instructor in Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Thomas H. Davis Chair of Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



Associate Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Lecturer in Art History (London) 
(Department of Art, Part-time) 

Associate Professor of Mathematics 



Helen W. Akinc ( 1987) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; 
MBA, SUNY (Binghamton) 

Umit Akinc (1982) 

BS, Middle East Tech. University 
(Ankara); MBA, Florida State; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Jane W.Albrecht (1987) 

BA, Wright State; MA, PhD, Indiana 

Brian Allen (1977) 

BA, East Anglia; MA, PhD, London 

Edward E.Allen (1991) 

BS, Brigham Young; MA, PhD, 
California (San Diego) 

David J. Anderson (1992) 

BA, Denison; MS, Michigan; 
PhD, Pennsylvania 

Paul R. Anderson (1990) 

BS, Wisconsin (Madison); MA, PhD, 
California (Santa Barbara) 

Sharon Andrews (1994) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill , MFA, UNC-Greensboro 

John L. Andronicaf 1969) 

BA, Holy Cross; MA, Boston College; 
PhD, Johns Hopkins 

Maya Angelou (1982) 

LittD, Smith, Lawrence, Columbia College 
(Chicago), Atlanta, Wheaton; LHD, Mills, Wake 
Forest, Occidental, Arkansas, Claremont, Kean 

Elizabeth M. Anthony ( 1 998) Visiting Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

BA, Duke; MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill (French) 

Johnne Armentrout (1989) Instructor in Education 

BA, William & Mary; MAEd, Wake Forest 

Miriam A. Ashley-Ross (1997) Assistant Professor of Biology 

BS, Northern Arizona; 
PhD, University of California (Irvine) 

Katherine A. Baker (2000) Instructor in Marketing 

BS, Illinois; MBA, DePaul (W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



Associate Professor of Biology 



Associate Professor of Physics 



Assistant Professor of Theatre 



Professor of Classical Languages 



Reynolds Professor of American Studies 



The Undergraduate Faculties 266 



Terry A. Baker (1998) 
BA, Miami of Ohio 
MS, MBA, Illinois 
PhD, Kentucky 

Christina Ball (1998) 

BA, Bowdoin College; 

MA, University of Georgia; PhD, Yale 

Sarah E.Barbour (1985) 

BA, Maryville; Diplome de Langue et 
de Civilisation Franchises, Paris; 
MA, PhD, Cornell 

James P. Barefield ( 1963) 

BA, MA, Rice; PhD, Johns Hopkins 

Bernadine Barnes (1989) 

BA, Illinois (Urbana-Champaign); 
MA, Pittsburgh; PhD, Virginia 

Elizabeth Barron (1999) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, UNC-Chapel Hil 

ShaulBassi(1998) 

MA, University of Venice (Italy); 
PhD, University of Pisa (Italy) 

Phillip G. Batten (1991) 

BA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill; MA, Yale 
Divinity School; MA, Wake Forest 

JohnV. Baxley(1968) 

BS, MS, Georgia Tech; PhD, Wisconsin 

Robert Beachy (1998) 

BA, Earlham, Richmond, IN; 
MA, PhD, Chicago 

H. Kenneth Bechtel ( 1981) 

BA, MA, North Dakota; PhD, Southern 
Illinois (Carbondale) 

Robert C. Beck (1959) 
BA, PhD, Illinois 

S.Douglas Beets (1987) 
BS, Tennessee; 
MAcc, PhD, Virginia Poly. Inst. & SU 

Barbara Bennett (1999) 

BA, Brigham-Young University; 
MA, PhD, Arizona State University 

John R.Bennett III (1999) 

BA, University of the South; 
MBA, Darden-University of Virginia; 
JD, WFU; LLM, University of Florida 

Donald B. Bergey (1978) 
BS, MA, Wake Forest 



Assistant Professor of Accounting 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



Visiting Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Italian) 

Associate Professor of Romance Languages 



Wake Forest Professor of History 

McCulloch Family Fellow and 
Associate Professor of Art 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(French) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Italian, Venice) 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Psychology 
(Part-time) 

Wake Forest Professor of Mathematics 

Visiting Assistant Professor of History 

Associate Professor of Sociology 



Professor of Psychology 

Associate Professor of Accounting 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of English 



Instructor in Accounting 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



Instructor in Health and Exercise Science 
(Part-time) 



267 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Mary Jane Berman (1986) 
BA, Harpur; 
MA, PhD, SUNY (Binghamton) 

Michael J. Berry (1985) 
BS, Jacksonville State; 
MA, Southeastern Louisiana; 
PhD, Texas A&M 

Deborah L. Best (1972, 1978) 
BA, MA, Wake Forest; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

ZannaBeswick(1987) 

BA, Hons, Bristol (England) 

UlrichBierbach(1999) 

MS, PhD, University of Oldenbug (Germany) 

Ralph Black (1996) 

BA, Oregon; MA, NYU; 
PhD New York University 

Janice Blackburn (1996) 

BS, Campbell; MA, Wake Forest 

Terry D. Blumenthal (1987) 

BS, Alberta (Edmonton); MS, PhD, Florida 

SylvainH. Boko (1997) 

BA, Grinnell; PhD, Iowa State 

Keith D.Bonin( 1992) 

BS, Loyola; PhD, Maryland 

Anne Boozell (1998) 

BA, Clarke College; MA, Iowa 

Susan Harden Borwick (1982) 

BM, BME, Baylor; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

John D.Bourland (1996) 

BS, MS, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

C. Kevin Bowen ( 1994) 

BS, Tennessee Tech; MM, Louisville 
PhD, Florida State 

Stephen B.Boyd (1985) 

BA, Tennessee; MDiv, ThD, Harvard 
Divinity School 

Katharine Boyes (1997) 
DMA, Cincinnati; 

MM, San Francisco Conservatory of Music; 
GRSM (Honors), Royal Academy of Music (England) 

Anne Boyle (1986) 

BA, Wilkes College; MA, PhD, Rochester 

Eric E.Brandon (1999) 

BA, California (Irvine); MA, Chicago 



Director/Curator of the Museum of Anthropology 

and Associate Professor of Anthropology 

(Leave, fall 1999) 

Professor of Health and Exercise Science 



Wake Forest Professor of Psychology 



Lecturer in Theatre (London) 
(Department of Theatre, Part-time) 

Assistant Professor of Chemistry 
Visiting Assistant Professor of English 



Instructor in Mathematics 
(Part-time) 

Associate Professor of Psychology 

Assistant Professor of Economics 

Professor of Physics 

Adjunct Instructor of Communication 

Professor of Music and 
Director of Women's Studies 

Adjunct Associate Professor of Physics 

Director of Bands 
(Department of Music) 

Professor of Religion 
Visiting Assistant Professor of Music 



Associate Professor of English 
Instructor in Philosophy 



The Undergraduate Faculties 268 



Sheri A. Bridges (1996) 
BA, South Florida; 
MA, Texas (Dallas); PhD, Stanford 

David G.Brown (1990) 

AB, Denison; PhD, Princeton 

Carole L.Browne (1980) 

BS, Hartford; PhD, Syracuse 

Robert A. Browne (1980) 

BS, MS, Dayton; PhD, Syracuse 

David B. Broyles( 1966) 

BA, Chicago; BA, Florida; MA, PhD, 
California (Los Angeles) 

Peter H. Brubaker ( 1994) 

BS, E. Stroudsburg University; 
MA, Wake Forest; PhD, Temple 

Christy M. Buchanan (1992) 

BA, Seattle Pacific; PhD, Michigan 

Jennifer J. Burg (1993) 

BA, Elizabethtown College; MA (English), 
MA (French), Florida; PhD, Central Florida 

Janis Caldwell (1997) 

BS, Whitworth College; MD, Northwestern 
University; MA, PhD, University of Washington 

Alan Cameron (1990) 

BA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill; 
MAEd, Wake Forest 

Victoria E. Campos (1997) 

BA, Texas; MA, PhD, Princeton 

Daniel A. Cafias ( 1987) 

BS, Tecnologico de Monterrey (Mexico); 
MS, Georgia Tech; PhD, Texas (Austin) 

Eric D.Carlson (1995) 

BS, Michigan State; MA, PhD, Harvard 

Richard D. Carmichael (1971) 

BS, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Duke 

ChristaG. Carollo (1985) 

BA, UNC-Greensboro; MA, Duke 

Simone M. Caron (1991) 

BA, Bridgewater State; MA, Northeastern; 
PhD, Clark 

Jacqui Carrasco (1999) 

BA, University of California-Los Angeles; 
MM, DMA, SUNY at Stony Brook 

Stewart Carter (1982) 

BME, Kansas; MS, Illinois; PhD, Stanford 

Justin Catanoso (1993) 

BA, Pennsylvania State; MA, Wake Forest 



Assistant Professor of Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



Professor of Economics 

Professor of Biology 

Professor of Biology 

Professor of Politics 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Associate Professor of 
Health and Exercise Science 

Associate Professor of Psychology 

Assistant Professor of Computer Science 



Assistant Professor of English 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Assistant Professor of Education 



Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 
(Spanish) (Leave, 1999-2000) 

Associate Professor of Computer Science 



Associate Professor of Physics 



Professor of Mathematics 



Senior Lecturer in German 



Associate Professor of History 



Assistant Professor of Music 



Professor of Music 

Adjunct Lecturer in Journalism 
(Department of English, Part-time) 



269 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Maria A. Chiari ( 1981) 

Arts degree, PhD, Universita degli 
Studi di Venezia (Padova e Trieste); 
Diploma, Scuola di Archivistica, Palio- 
grafia e Diplomatica dell'Archivio di 
Stato di Venezia 

Jonathan H. Christman (1983) 

AB, Franklin and Marshall; MFA, Massachusetts 

David Coates (1999) 

BA, York; PhD, Oxford 

Joseph P. Colebaugh (1998) 
BS, Marshall University 

John E.Collins (1970) 

BS, MS, Tennessee; MDiv, Southeastern Baptist 
Theo. Seminary; MA, PhD, Princeton 

ChristaL. Colyer(1997) 

BSc, Trent University (Canada); 
MSc, University of Guelph (Canada); 
PhD, Queen's University (Canada) 

William E.Conner (1988) 

BA, Notre Dame; MS, PhD, Cornell 

JuleM. Connolly (1985) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MEd, South Carolina 

Brian K. Coppersmith (1998) 

BS, United States Military Academy 

FanchonCordell(1986) 



Corrado Corradini (1998) 

Licenciatura, Universidad de Alcala de Henares (Spain) 

Nancy J. Cotton (1977) 

BA, Texas; MA, Wisconsin; PhD, Columbia 

AllinF. Cottrell(1989) 

BA, Oxford (Merton College); PhD, Edinburgh 

Monroe J. Cowan (1994) 

BS, Maryland; PhD, Duke 

Andrew A. Cross (1993, 1998) 

BA, Oberlin; PhD, California (Berkeley) 

Ann C. Cunningham (1999) 
BA, Erskine College; 
MAT, PhD, University of South Carolina 

Patricia M. Cunningham (1978) 

BA, Rhode Island; MS, Florida State; 
EdS, Indiana State; PhD, Georgia 

James F. Curran ( 1988) 

BAAS, Delaware; MA, PhD, Rice 

Jane Kathleen Curry (1998) 

BFA, Illinois (Urbana-Champaign); MA, Brown; 
PhD, City University of New York 



Lecturer in Art History (Venice) 
(Department of Art, Part-time) 



Lecturer in Theatre 

Worrell Professor of Anglo-American Studies 

Assistant Professor of Military Science 

Professor of Religion 



Assistant Professor of Chemistry 



Professor of Biology 

Instructor in Mathematics 
(Part-time) 

Assistant Professor of Military Science 

Adjunct Instructor of Dance 
(Ballet, Part-time) 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Professor of English 

Professor of Economics 

Adjunct Professor of Physics 

Assistant Professor of Philosophy 
(Leave, spring 2000) 

Assistant Professor of Education 



Wake Forest Professor of Education 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Associate Professor of Biology 

Assistant Professor of Theatre 



The Undergraduate Faculties 270 



George B. Cvijanovich (1989) 
PhD, Bern (Switzerland) 

Elisabeth d'Empaire (1999) 
BA, MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Dale Dagenbach (1990) 

BA, New College; MA, PhD, Michigan State 

Mary M. Dalton ( 1986) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Brook M.Davis (1997) 

BA, Wake Forest, MFA, Virginia Commonwealth; 
PhD, Maryland (College Park) 

Stephen W.Davis (1991) 
BA, MA, Wake Forest 

Richard DePolt (1998) 
BA, Connecticut 

Mary K. DeShazer (1982, 1987) 
BA, Western Kentucky; 
MA, Louisville; PhD, Oregon 

Arun P. Dewasthali (1975) 

BS, Bombay; MS, PhD, Delaware 

Ronald V. Dimock Jr. (1970) 

BA, New Hampshire; MS, Florida State; 
PhD, California (Santa Barbara) 

John J. Dinan(1996) 

BA, MA, PhD, Virginia 

Patricia Dixon (1986) 

BM, North Carolina School of the Arts; 
MM, UNC-Greensboro 

James H. Dodding ( 1979) 

Diploma, Rose Bruford College of Speech and 
Drama (London); Cert., Birmingham University; 
Cert., Westhill Training College (Birmingham); 
Diploma, Theatre on the Balustrade (Prague) 

Jonathan E. Duchac (1993) 

BBA, MAcc, Wisconsin (Madison); 
PhD, Georgia 

John S. Dunkelberg (1983) 
BS, Clemson; 
MBA, PhD, South Carolina 

YomiDurotoye(1994) 

BS, University of Ibadan; 
MA, Georgia State; PhD, Duke 

John R. Earle( 1963) 
BA, Wake Forest; 
MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Eddie V. Easley ( 1984) 
BS, Virginia State; 
MS, PhD, Iowa State 



Adjunct Professor of Physics 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Associate Professor of Psychology 

Visiting Assistant Professor 
of Communication 

Visiting Assistant Professor in Theatre 



Adjunct Instructor in Psychology 
(Part-time) 

Instructor of Economics 

Professor of English 
and Women's Studies 

Associate Professor of Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of Biology 
(London, fall 2000) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Politics 

Instructor in Music 



Professor of Theatre 



Associate Professor of Accounting 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Kemper Professor of Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Visiting Associate Professor of Politics 



Professor of Sociology 



Professor Emeritus of Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



271 The Undergraduate Faculties 



Julie Edelson (1998) 

BA, Sarah Lawrence College; PhD, Cornell 

C.Drew Edwards (1980) 

BA, Furman; MA, Wake Forest; 
PhD, Florida State 

BashirEl-Beshti(1990) 

BA, Tripoli University (Libya); MA, 
Colorado State; PhD, California (Berkeley) 

Gerald W. Esch ( 1965) 

BS, Colorado College; MS, PhD, Oklahoma 

Paul D.Escott( 1988) 

BA, Harvard; MA, PhD, Duke 

Andrew V. Ettin ( 1977) 

BA, Rutgers; MA, PhD, Washington (St. Louis) 

Herman E. Eure ( 1974) 

BS, Maryland State; PhD, Wake Forest 

Robert H. Evans (1983) 

BA, Ohio Wesleyan; MS, New Hampshire; 
PhD, Colorado 

Stephen Ewing (1971) 
BS, Howard Payne; 
MBA, Baylor; PhD, Texas Tech. 

James W Eynon ( 1998) 

BA, Illinois; MBA, Southern Illinois 

David L. Faber( 1984) 

AA, Elgin; BFA, Northern Illinois; 
MFA, Southern Illinois 

Frederic H. Fahey ( 1996) 

BS, Massachusetts; MS, DSc, Harvard 

Susan L.Faust (1992) 

BA, MA, Arkansas (Fayetteville) 

David Finn (1988, 1995) 

BS, Cornell; MFA, Massachusetts College of Art 

Jack D. Fleer (1964) 

BA, Oklahoma Baptist; MS, Florida State; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

William WFleeson( 1996) 

BA, Wisconsin; PhD, Michigan 

Steven Folmar (1992) 

BA, MA, PhD, Case Western Reserve 

James L.Ford (1998) 

MTS, Vanderbilt; MA, PhD, Princeton 

Mary F. Foskett ( 1997) 

BA, New York University; 

MDiv, Union Theo. Seminary; PhD, Emory 

Johnnie Foye (1995) 

BA, Virginia Union; MSS, US Sports Academy 



Adjunct Assistant Professor of English 

Adjunct Associate Professor of Psychology 

(Part-time) 

Associate Professor of English 



Wake Forest Professor of Biology 
(Leave, fall 2000) 

Reynolds Professor of History 

Professor of English 

Professor of Biology 

Associate Professor of Education 



Professor of Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Visiting Instructor in Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Associate Professor of Art 



Adjunct Associate Professor of Physics 

Adjunct Instructor in Communication 
(Part-time) 

Assistant Professor of Art 

Professor of Politics 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Anthropology 
Assistant Professor of Religion 
Assistant Professor of Religion 

Instructor in Health and Exercise Science 



The Undergraduate Faculties 272 



Denise Franklin (1994) 

BA, Wichita State University 

Donald E. Frey ( 1972) 

BA, Wesleyan; MDiv, Yale; PhD, Princeton 

John E. R. Friedenberg (1988) 

BA, Wake Forest; MFA, Carnegie Mellon 

Mary L.Friedman (1987) 

BA, Weilesley; MA, PhD, Columbia 

Ola Furmanek (1999) 

BA, MA, Jagiello University, Cracow Poland; 
PhD, University of Nebraska, Lincoln 

CandelasS. Gala (1978) 

BA, Salamanca (Spain); MA, PhD, Pittsburgh 

Alex Garganigo (1999) 
BA, Yale University; 
MA, PhD, Washington University 

YaorongGe(1995) 

BS, Zhejiang University (China); 
MS, PhD, Vanderbilt 

Cynthia M. Gendrich (1998) 

BFA, Illinois Wesleyan; MA, PhD, Missouri 

J. Whitfield Gibbons (1971) 

BS, MA, Alabama; PhD, Michigan State 

Steven M.Giles (1999) 

BA, Northern Kentucky; 

MA, Bowling Green State; PhD, Kentucky 

Michele K.Gillespie (1999) 

BA, Rice University; PhD, Princeton 

Samuel T. Gladding (1990) 

BA, MAEd, Wake Forest; MA, Yale; 
PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Loren Glass (1999) 

BA, Berkeley; MA, U.C. Davis; 
PhD, Duke University 

Thomas S. Goho ( 1977) 

BS, MBA, Penn State; (W. 

PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Louis R.Goldstein (1979) 

BM, Oberlin; MFA, California 
Inst, of the Arts; DMA, Eastman 

Batja Gomes De Mesquita (1997) 

BA, MA, PhD, Amsterdam (The Netherlands) 

Brian L. Gorelick ( 1984) 

BA, Yale; MM, Wisconsin (Madison); 
DMA, Illinois 

Luis Gonzalez (1997) 

BA, U de Medellin (Colombia); 

MA, West Virginia; PhD, California-Davis 



Adjunct Instructor in Communication 

Professor of Economics 

Lecturer in Theatre 

Associate Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Professor of Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Visiting Instructor of English 

Assistant Professor of Computer Science 

Assistant Professor of Theatre 

Adjunct Professor of Biology 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Communication 

Associate Professor of History 
Professor of Education 

Visiting Assistant Professor of English 



Benson-Pruitt Associate Professor of Business 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of Music 



Assistant Professor of Psychology 

Associate Professor of Music 
and Director of Choral Ensembles 

Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 



2 7 3 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Visiting Professor of Politics 



Michael A. Gorkin ( 1998) 

BA, Oberlin; MA, PhD, Adelphi 

Audrey A. Gramling (1998) 
BBA, Toledo; 
MPA, Georgia State; PhD, Arizona 

Tamara M. Greenwood (1996) 
BS, MSB, UNC-Greensboro 

Michael V. Griffin (1999) 

BA, Vermont; MA, PhD, Illinois (Chicago) 

Steven C. Haefner ( 1996) 

BS, California (Los Angeles); PhD, Michigan State 

David Hagy (1995) 

B M, Indiana; MM, MMA, DMA, Yale 

Jimmy E.Hall (1998) 

BS, Mississippi Valley State 

WilliamS. Hamilton (1983) 
BA, MA, PhD, Yale 

Richard H. Hammack (1997) 

BFA, Rhode Island School of Design; 
MS, Virginia Commonwealth; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Claire Holton Hammond (1978) 

BA, Mary Washington; PhD, Virginia 

J. Daniel Hammond (1978) 

BA, Wake Forest; PhD, Virginia 

Beverlye H. Hancock (1996) 

AB, Meredith; MA, Wake Forest 

James S.Hans (1982) 

BA, MA, Southern Illinois; PhD, Washington 

Hanna M. Hardgrave (1985) 

BA, Brown; MA, PhD, Chicago 

Walter Harrelson (1994) 
AB, UNC-Chapel Hill; 
BD, ThD, Union Theo. Seminary 

KatyJ. Harriger(1985) 

BA, Edinboro State; MA, PhD, Connecticut 

Catherine T. Harris (1980) 

BA, Lenoir-Rhyne; MA, Duke: PhD, Georgia 

J. Kline Harrison (1990) Associate Professor of Business 

BS, Virginia; PhD, Maryland (W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Angela Hattery (1998) Assistant Professor of Sociology 

BA, Carleton College; MS, PhD, Wisconsin 

Elmer K. Hayashi (1973) Professor of Mathematics and 

BA, California (Davis); Computer Science 

MS, San Diego State; PhD, Illinois 



PricewaterhouseCoopers Faculty Fellow and 

Assistant Professor of Accounting 

(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Instructor in Business 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Philosophy 
Assistant Professor of Chemistry 



Director of Orchestra 
(Department of Music) 

Assistant Professor of Military Science 

Professor of Russian 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Mathematics 



Professor of Economics 

Professor of Economics 

Adjunct Instructor in Anthropology 

Wake Forest Professor of English 

Lecturer in Philosophy 

University Professor 



Associate Professor of Politics 
(London, spring 2000) 

Professor of Sociology 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



274 



Michael David Hazen (1974) 
BA, Seattle Pacific; 
MA, Wake Forest; PhD, Kansas 

Terry C. Hazen (1988) 

BS, MS, Michigan State; PhD, Wake Forest 

Tina Heafner (1999) 

BA, MAEd, Wake Forest 

Richard E.Heard (1996) 

BM, Southern Methodist; 
MA, California (Santa Barbara) 

Thomas K. Hearnjr. (1983) 

BA, Birmingham-Southern; BD, Southern 
Baptist Theo. Seminary; PhD, Vanderbilt 

JacC. Heckelman(1996) 

BA, Texas; PhD, Maryland 

Roger A. Hegstrom (1969) 

BA, St. Olaf; AM, PhD, Harvard 

Patricia Heid (1999) 

BA, Northwestern University; 

MA, PhD, University of California, Berkley 

Robert M. Helm (1940) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Duke 

Paul F.Hemler (1995) 

BS, Villanova; MS, Lehigh; 
PhD, North Carolina State 

Donna A. Henderson (1996) 

BA, Meredith; MAT, James Madison; 
PhD, Tennessee 

J. Edwin Hendricks (1961) 

BA, Furman; MA, PhD, Virginia 

Marcus B.Hester (1963) 

BA, Wake Forest; PhD, Vanderbilt 

Willie L. Hinze( 1975) 

BS, MA, Sam Houston State; 
PhD, Texas A&M 

E.Clayton Hipp Jr. (1991) 

BA, Wofford; (W 

MBA, JD, South Carolina 

Alix Hitchcock (1989) 

BFA, UNC-Greensboro; MA, New York 

Kenneth G. Hoglund (1990) 

BA, Wheaton; MA, PhD, Duke 

George M. Holzwarth (1983) 

BA, Wesleyan; MS, PhD, Harvard 

Natalie A. W. Holzwarth (1983) 

BS, Massachusetts Inst, of Tech.; 
PhD, Chicago 



Professor of Communication 

Adjunct Professor of Biology 

Visiting Instructor of Education 

Assistant Professor of Music 

Professor of Philosophy 

Assistant Professor of Economics 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Wake Forest Professor of Chemistry 

Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Worrell Professor of Philosophy 

Assistant Professor of Computer Science 

Associate Professor of Education 

Professor of History 

Professor of Philosophy 

Wake Forest Professor of Chemistry 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Senior Lecturer in Business 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Visiting Instructor in Art 
(Part-time) 

Associate Professor of Religion 
Professor of Physics 
Professor of Physics 



275 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



KatherineS. Hoppe (1993) 

BA, Duke; MBA, Texas Christian 

Michael Horn (1998) 
BS, Florida 

FredL. Hortonjr. (1970) 
BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; 



Instructor in Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Adjunct Lecturer in Journalism 
(Department of English, Part-time) 

Albritton Professor of the Bible 
(Department of Religion) 



BD, Union Theological Seminary; PhD, Duke 



(Leave, fall 1999) 



William L. Hottinger (1970) 

BS, Slippery Rock; MS, PhD, Illinois 

Fredric T.Howard (1966) 

BA, MA, Vanderbilt; PhD, Duke 

Hugh N. Howards (1997) 
BA, Williams; 
MA, PhD, California (San Diego) 

Linda S.Howe (1993) 

BA, MA, PhD, Wisconsin 

Joanna F.Hudson (1997) 

BFA, Virginia Commonwealth; 
MFA, UNC-Greensboro 

Michael L.Hughes (1984) 

BA, Claremont McKenna; MA, PhD, 
California (Berkeley) 

Michael J. Hyde (1994) 

BS, Pittsburgh; MA, PhD, Purdue 



Simeon O. Ilesanmi (1993) 

BA, University of Ife (Nigeria); 
PhD, Southern Methodist 

David K.Isbister( 1994) 

BS, Michigan State; MBA, Harvard 

Joanne Izbicki (1995) 

BA, Stonehill College; MA, PhD, Cornell 

Ernest S. Jarrett (1996) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MA, UNC-Greensboro 

Mark Jensen (1993) 

BA, Houston Baptist; MDiv, PhD, 
Southern Baptist Theological Seminary 

Roger L.Jenkins (1998) 
BS, Berea College 
MBA, East Tennessee State 
PhD, Ohio State 

DebraR.Jessup(1996) 

BA, Georgetown; JD, Wake Forest 

Miaohua Jiang (1998) 

BS, Wuhan University (China); 

MS, East China Normal University (China) 

PhD, Pennsylvania State 



Professor Emeritus of Health and Exercise Science 

(Part-time) 

Professor of Mathematics 

Assistant Professor of Mathematics 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Adjunct Instructor in Women's Studies 



Professor of History 



University Distinguished Chair in Communication Ethics 

and Professor of Communication 

(Leave, fall 1999) 

Associate Professor of Religion 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 



Lecturer in Business 
(W. Calloway School of Business & Accountancy) 

Assistant Professor of History 

Adjunct Instructor in Communication 

Adjunct Associate Professor of Religion 



F.M. Kirby Chair of Business Excellence 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



Assistant Professor of Business 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Assistant Professor of Mathematics 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



276 



David J. John (1982) 

BS, Emory and Henry; MS, PhD, Emory 

A. Daniel Johnson (1998) 

BS, UNC-Charlotte, PhD, Wake Forest 

W.Dillon Johnston (1973) 

BA, Vanderbilt; MA, Columbia; PhD, Virginia 

Bradley T.Jones (1989) 

BS, Wake Forest; PhD, Florida 



Janet Joyner (1999) Adj 

BA, Converse College; MA, 
University of Georgia; PhD, Florida State 

Paul E.Juras (1991) 

BBA, MBA, Pace; PhD, Syracuse (W 

Claudia Thomas Kairoff (1986) 

BA, College of Notre Dame of Maryland; 
MA, Virginia; PhD, Brandeis 

Peter D. Kairoff (1988) 

BA, California (San Diego); 
MM, DMA, Southern California 

Jay R. Kaplan (1981) 

BA, Swarthmore; MA, PhD, Northwestern 

Judy K. Kern (1987) 

BA, Western Kentucky; MA, Louisville; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Charles H.Kennedy (1985) 

BA, Eckerd; AM, MPP, PhD, Duke 

Ralph C.Kennedy III (1976) 

BA, PhD, California (Berkeley) 

William C.Kerr (1970) 

BS, Wooster; PhD, Cornell 

Daniel B. Kim-Shapiro (1996) 

BA, Carleton College; MS, Southern 
Illinois; PhD, California (Berkeley) 

Charles A. Kimball (1996) 

BS, Oklahoma State; MDiv, Southern 
Baptist Theo. Seminary; ThD, Harvard 

Angela Glisan King (1995) 

BA, Pennsylvania; PhD, Cornell 

S.Bruce King (1995) 

BS, West Virginia; PhD, Cornell 

Wayne King (1993) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Ellen E. Kirkman( 1975) 

BA, Wooster; MA, MS, PhD, Michigan State 

Scott W. Klein (1991) 

AB, Harvard; BA, MA, Cambridge; 
MA, MPhil., PhD, Yale 



Associate Professor of Mathematics and 
Computer Science 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology 

Professor of English 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Associate Professor of Chemistry 

unct Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 
(French; Part-time) 

Associate Professor of Accounting 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Associate Professor of English 
(Venice, fall 1999) 

Associate Professor of Music 
(Venice, fall 1999) 

Professor of Anthropology and 
Adjunct Professor of Psychology 

Associate Professor of Romance Languages 

(French) 

Professor of Politics 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Associate Professor of Philosophy 

Professor of Physics 

Assistant Professor of Physics 



Professor of Religion 
(Leave, spring 2000) 

Senior Lecturer in Chemistry 

Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

Associate Professor of Journalism 
(Department of English) 

Professor of Mathematics 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Associate Professor of English 



277 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



BorislavKnezevic(1998) 

BA, MA, Zagreb University (Croatia) 
PhD, Duke 

Robert Knott (1975) 

BA, Stanford; MA, Illinois; PhD, Pennsylvania 

DilipK. Kondepudi (1987) 

BS, Madras (India); MS, Indian Institute 
of Technology (Bombay); PhD, Texas 

Kathleen A. Kron ( 1991) 

BS, MS, Michigan State; PhD, Florida 

Philip F. Kuberski (1989) 

BA, MA, PhD, California (Irvine) 

Raymond E. Kuhn ( 1968) 

BS, Carson-Newman; PhD, Tennessee 

James Kuzmanovich (1972) 

BS, Rose Polytechnic; PhD, Wisconsin 

Abdessadek Lachgar (1991) 

BS, MS, PhD, University of Nantes (France) 

Betty H. LaFrancef 1998) 
BS, Grand Valley State; 
MA, PhD, Michigan State 

Hugo C.Lane (1973) 

Licenciate of the Biological Sciences, 
Doctorate of the Biological Sciences, Geneva 

Page H. Laughlin( 1987) 
BA, Virginia; MFA, 
Rhode Island School of Design 

MichaelS. Lawlor (1986) 

BA, Texas (Austin); PhD, Iowa State 

Mark R. Leary (1985) 

BA, West Virginia Wesleyan; MA, PhD, Florida 

Wei-chin Lee (1987) 

BA, National Taiwan University; 
MA, PhD, Oregon 

Win-chiat Lee (1983) 

BA, Cornell; PhD, Princeton 

Cheryl B. Leggon ( 1993) 

BA, Columbia; MA, PhD, Chicago 

Bill J. Leonard (1996) 

BA, Texas Wesleyan; MDiv., Southwestern 
Baptist Theo. Seminary; PhD, Boston University 

Candyce Leonard (1996) 

BA, Texas Wesleyan; MEd, Louisville; 
PhD, Indiana 

Jeffrey D. Lerner ( 1994) 

BA, MA, PhD, Wisconsin (Madison) 



Visiting Assistant Professor of English 

Professor of Art 
Professor of Chemistry 

Associate Professor of Biology 

Professor of English 

Wake Forest Professor of Biology 

Professor of Mathematics 

Associate Professor of Chemistry 

Assistant Professor of Communication 

Professor of Biology 

Associate Professor of Art 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Professor of Economics 

Wake Forest Professor of Psychology 

Associate Professor of Politics 

Associate Professor of Philosophy 

Associate Professor of Sociology 

Adjunct Professor of Religion 

Assistant Professor of Humanities 

Assistant Professor of History 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



278 



Andrew W.Leslie (1997) 

BA, Virginia; PhD, Northwestern 

David B.Levy (1976) 

BM, MA, Eastman; PhD, Rochester 

Kathryn Levy (1988) 
BM, Eastman 

Charles M.Lewis (1968) 

BA, Wake Forest; ThM, Harvard; PhD, Vanderbilt 

John H. Litcher( 1973) 

BS, Winona State; MA, PhD, Minnesota 

John T.Llewellyn (1990) 

AB, UNC-Chapel Hill; MA, Arkansas; 
PhD, Texas 

Patricia A. Lobingier (1995) 

BBA, Radford; MAcc, PhD, 
Virginia Poly. Inst. 8c SU 

Dan S.Locklair (1982) 

BM, Mars Hill; SMM, Union 
Theo. Seminary; DMA, Eastman 

Charles F. Longino Jr. (1991) 

BA, Mississippi; MA, Colorado; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Pat C. W. Lord (2000) 

BS, North Carolina State University; 
PhD, Wake Forest 

Allan D. Louden (1985) 

BA, Montana State; MA, Montana; 
PhD, Southern California 

Robert W Lovett (1962, 1968) 

BA, Oglethorpe; MAT, PhD, Emory 

David M.Lubin( 1999) 

BA, Ohio State University; 
MA, PhD, Yale 

Nina Maria Lucas (1996) 

BFA, Ohio State; MFA, UCLA 

David W.Lyons (1997) 

BS, Davidson; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Barry G.Maine (1981) 

BA, Virginia; MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Allen Mandelbaum (1989) 

BA, Yeshiva; MA, PhD, Columbia 

Richard A. Manderville (1995) 

BS, PhD, Queen's University (Canada) 

William M. Marcum (1996) 

BA, Furman; MA, UNC-Greensboro; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 



Adjunct Assistant Professor 
of Communication 

Professor of Music 
(Vienna, spring 2000) 

Part-time Instructor in Music 

Professor of Philosophy 

Professor of Education 

Associate Professor of Communication 



Assistant Professor of Accounting 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of Music 
and Composer-in-Residence 

Wake Forest Professor of Sociology 



Visiting Assistant Professor of Biology 

Associate Professor of Communication 

Professor of English 
Charlotte C. Weber Professor of Art 

Assistant Professor of Dance 
(Department of Theatre) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Mathematics 

Professor of English 

W.R. Kenan Jr. Professor of Humanities 

Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

Assistant Professor of Business 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



279 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Milorad R. Margitic' (1978) 

MA, Leiden (Netherlands); PhD, Wayne State 



Professor of Romance Languages 
(French) 



Anthony P. Marsh (1996) 

BPE, MED, Western Australia; 
PhD, Arizona State 

Patricia Marshall (1999) 

BA, Smith College; MA, Harvard; 
PhD, Duke 

Dale R.Martin (1982) 
BS, MS, Illinois State; 
DBA, Kentucky 

James A. Martin Jr. (1983) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, Duke; PhD, Columbia 

George E. Matthews Jr. (1979) 
BS, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

J. Gaylord May (1961) 

BS, Wofford; MA, PhD, Virginia 

JoWhittenMay(1972) 

BS, Virginia; MA, PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Leah P. McCoy (1990) 

BS, West Virginia Inst, of Tech.; MA, 
Maryland; EdD, Virginia Poly. Inst. & SU 

Gordon E. McCray (1994) 
BS, Wake Forest; 
MBA, Stetson; PhD, Florida State 

Thomas W McGohey (1990) 
BA, MA, Michigan State; 
MFA, UNC-Greensboro 

Mary Martha McKinley (1999) 
BA, Tulane; CPA 

Jill Jordan McMillan (1983) 

BA, Baylor; MA, Arkansas; PhD, Texas 

Dolly A. McPherson (1974) 

BA, Southern; MA, Boston University; 
PhD, Iowa 

Jane Mead (1996) 

BA, Vassar; MA, Syracuse; 
MFA, Iowa 

Gordon A. Melson ( 1991) 

BS, PhD, Sheffield (England) 

Stephen P. Messier (1981) 

BS, MS, Rhode Island; PhD, Temple 

William K.Meyers (1988) 

BA, Washington; MA, PhD, Chicago 

Allen Michie (1999) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MA, Trinity 
College, Oxford; PhD, Emory University 



Assistant Professor of Health and Exercise Science 



Adjunct Assistant Professor of Classical Languages 



Wayne Calloway Professor of Accountancy 
(W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 



University Professor 
(Department of Religion) 

Professor of Physics 

Professor of Mathematics 

Adjunct Professor of Communication 
(Part-time) 

Associate Professor of Education 



BellSouth Mobility Technology Faculty Fellow and 

Assistant Professor of Business 

(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Instructor in English 



Instructor in Accounting 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of Communication 
Professor of English 



Poet-in-Residence 

(Department of English) 

(Leave, spring 2000) 

Professor of Chemistry 

Professor of Health and Exercise Science 

Associate Professor of History 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of English 



The Undergraduate Faculties 280 



Associate Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Assistant Professor of Health and Exercise Science 

Assistant Professor of Health and Exercise Science 



Soledad Miguel-Prendes (1993) 
Licenciatura, Oviedo; 
MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Shannon L. Mihalko (1999) 

BS, Wake Forest; MS, PhD, Illinois 

Gary D.Miller (1996) 

BS, Kansas; MS, Kansas State; 
PhD, California (Davis) 

Joseph O. Milner (1969) Professor of Education 

BA, Davidson; MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill (London, fall 1999) 

Karen E. Mishra (1998) Lecturer in Business 

BA, Albion College (W. Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

MBA, Michigan 

Ananda Mitra (1994) 

B Tech, Indian Inst, of Technology (Kharagpur); 
MA, Wake Forest; PhD, Illinois (Urbana) 

Madhuparna Mitra (1999) 



Assistant Professor of Communication 



BA, MA, University of Delhi, India; 
MA, PhD, Washington University 

Jama Mohamed (1998) 

BA, Amherst; MA, McGill; 
PhD, Toronto 

John C. Moorhouse (1969) 

BA, Wabash; PhD, Northwestern 

Patrick E. Moran ( 1989) 

BA, MA, Stanford; MA, National 
Taiwan University; PhD, Pennsylvania 

Rebekah L.Morris (1997) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, Virginia 

Mardene G. Morykwas (1992) 
AB, MA, Michigan 

William M. Moss (1971) 

BA, Davidson; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Gloria K. Muday ( 1991) 

BS, Virginia Poly. Inst, and SU; PhD, Purdue 

Thomas E.Mullen (1957) 

BA, Rollins; MA, PhD, Emory 

Stephen Murphy (1987) 

BA, Canisius; MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Josefine C. Nauckhoff (1994) 

BA, Stanford; PhD, Pennsylvania 

Christopher Neumann (1999) 
BA, Middlebury College; 
MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Debbie W Newsome (1999) 

BA, Oklahoma Baptist University; 

MEd, Wake Forest; PhD, UNC-Greensboro 



Visiting Assistant Professor of English 



Visiting Assistant Professor of History 



Archie Carroll Professor of Ethical Leadership 
(Department of Economics) 

Associate Professor of Chinese 
(East Asian Languages and Literatures) 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Adjunct Instructor in Communication 
(Part-time) 

Professor of English 

Associate Professor of Biology 
(Leave, spring 2000) 

Professor of History 

Associate Professor of Romance Languages 

(French) 

Assistant Professor of Philosophy 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Visiting Instructor in English 



Visiting Assistant Professor of Education 



281 The Undergraduate Faculties 



Linda N.Nielsen (1974) 

BA, MS, EdD, Tennessee 

Patricia A. Nixon (1999) 
BS, Boston University; 
MA, PhD, University of Pittsburgh 

Jerry W. Noble (1995) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; MS, PhD, Ohio 

Ronald E.Noftle (1967) 

BS, New Hampshire; PhD, Washington 

James L. Norris III (1989) 

BS, MS (Science), MS (Statistics), 
North Carolina State; PhD, Florida State 

Marie M. O'Hara ( 1997) 

BA, Clemson; MA, Wichita State; 
PhD, Georgia 

Beatrice Ottersbock 

BA, Chatham College; 
MA, PhD, Pittsburgh 

Dee Oseroff-Varnell (1996) 

BA, MA, PhD, Washington 

Gillian Rose Overing (1979) 
BA, Lancaster (England); 
MA, PhD, SUNY (Buffalo) 

H.Lee Overton (1995) 

BA, Houston; MA, Washington 
(Seattle); MA, PhD, Princeton 

Karen L. Oxendine ( 1986) 
BS, Wayne State; MEd, 
UNC-Greensboro 

James R.Page II (1999) 

BS, University of Tennessee — Knoxville; 
MEd, Middle Tennessee State University 

Anthony S. Parent Jr. (1989) 

BA, Loyola; MA, PhD, California 
(Los Angeles) 

Perry L.Patterson (1986) 

BA, Indiana; MA, PhD, Northwestern 

Violeta Padron-Bermejo (1998) 

BA, University of Sevilla; MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Darwin R.Payne (1984) 

BS, MFA, Southern Illinois 

Willie Pearson Jr. (1980) 

BA, Wiley; MA, Atlanta; 

PhD, Southern Illinois (Carbondale) 

Mary L. B. Pendergraft (1988) 
BA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 



Professor of Education 



Associate Professor of Health and Exercise Science 



Adjunct Assistant Professor of Psychology 
(Part-time) 

Professor of Chemistry 
Associate Professor of Mathematics 



Adjunct Assistant Professor of Psychology 



Lecturer in Art History (Vienna) 
(Department of Art, Part-time) 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Communication 

(Part-time) 

Professor of English 



Visiting Assistant Professor of Philosophy 



Adjunct Instructor in Communication 
(Part-time) 

Professor of Military Science 



Associate Professor of History 



Professor of Economics 
and Lecturer in Russian 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) (Salamanca, spring 2000) 

Adjunct Professor of Theatre 
(Part-time) 

Wake Forest Professor of Sociology 



Associate Professor of Classical Languages 



The Undergraduate Faculties 282 



Philip J. Perricone(1967) 

BS, MA, Florida; PhD, Kentucky 

Justin R.Peterson (1998) 

BA, Washington & Lee; MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Mark V. Pezzo ( 1995) 

BS, SUNY (Fredonia); MS, PhD, Ohio 

David P. Phillips (1994) 

BA, Cornell; M.Arch., Washington; 
MA, PhD, Pennsylvania 

John R.Pickelf 1997) 
BFA, Indiana State; 
MFA, Cranbrook Academy of Art 

Jesus Pico- Argel (1999) 

BA, Universidad del Atlantico (Columbia); 
MA, Arkansas 

Terisio Pignatti (1971) 
PhD, Padua 



Professor of Sociology 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Psychology 

Assistant Professor of Japanese 
(East Asian Languages and Literatures) 

Assistant Professor of Art 



Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Reynolds Professor of Art History (Venice) 
(Department of Art, Part-time) 

Visiting Associate Professor of Religion 



Phyllis R.Pleasants (1998) 

BA, Mary Washington College; 

MDiv, PhD, Southern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Robert J. Plemmons (1990) 

BS, Wake Forest; PhD, Auburn 

James T.Powell (1988) 

BA, Emory; M Phil, MA, PhD, Yale 

JerylJ. Prescott (1994) 

BS, Clemson; MA, North Carolina A&T; 
PhD, South Florida 

Jerry Pubantz (1999) 

BSFS, Georgetown (School of Foreign Service); 
MA, PhD, Duke 

Jenny Puckett (1995) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, Middlebury 

Salvador Anton Pujol (1997) 

BA, Universitat Autonoma de Barcelona (Spain); 
MA, South Carolina; PhD, Kansas 

Sara A. Quandt (1994) Adjunct Associate Professor of Anthropology 

BA, Lawrence; MA, PhD, Michigan State 



Reynolds Professor of Mathematics 
and Computer Science 

Associate Professor of Classical Languages 
Assistant Professor of English 



Visiting Professor of Politics 
(Part-time, fall 1999) 

Adjunct Instructor in Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 

Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(Spanish) 



Teresa Radomski (1977) 

BM, Eastman; MM, Colorado 

Amy E.Randel( 1999) 

BA, Brown University; 

PhD, University of California-Irvine 

Annette L. Ranft (1999) 

BS, Appalachian State; MS, Georgia 
Tech.; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Mary Lynn B. Redmond (1989) 
BA, EdD, UNC-Greensboro; 
MEd, UNC-Chapel Hill 



Associate Professor of Music 

Assistant Professor of Business 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Exxon-Wayne Calloway Faculty Fellow and 

Assistant Professor of Business 

(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Associate Professor of Education 



283 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



W. Jack Rejeski Jr. (1978) 

BS, Norwich; MA, PhD, Connecticut 

Paul M.Ribisl (1973) 

BS, Pittsburgh; MA, Kent State; 
PhD, Illinois 

Andrew Rich (1999) 

BA, Richmond; MA, PhD, Yale 

Charles L. Richman ( 1968) 

BA, Virginia; MA, Yeshiva; 
PhD, Cincinnati 

Leonard P. Roberge (1974) 

BA, New Hampshire; MA, Atlanta; 
EdD, Maine 

Donald P. Robin (1997) 

BS, MBA, PhD, Louisiana State 

Stephen B. Robinson (1991) 

BA, PhD, California (Santa Cruz) 



Wake Forest Professor of Health and Exercise Science; 
Adjunct Professor of Psychology 

Professor of Health and Exercise Science 



Assistant Professor of Politics 
Professor of Psychology 



(W. 



Maria Rodriguez ( 1 ! 

BA, Universidad de Costa Rica; 
MA, Syracuse 

Randall G. Rogan ( 1990) 

BA, St. John Fisher College; 
MS, PhD, Michigan State 

LeticiaRomo(1998) 

BA, Sweet Briar College; 
MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Karen L. Roper (1999) 

BA, Southwestern University; 
MA, PhD, University of Kentucky 

Mary M. Roufail ( 1997) 
BA, Salem College; 
MA, PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Susan Z. Rupp( 1993) 

BA, Grinnell; AM, Harvard; 
MA, PhD, Stanford 

Maria Teresa Sanhueza (1996) 
BA, MA, Concepcion (Chile); 
PhD, Michigan (Ann Arbor) 

Peter Santago (1989) 

BS, Virginia Poly. Inst, and SU; 
PhD, North Carolina State 

Claire S. Schen ( 1997) 

AB, Brown; PhD, Brandeis 

James A. Schirillo ( 1996) 

BA, Franklin &: Marshall; PhD, Northeastern 

Dennis J. Scheuermann (1998) 
BS, Illinois 



Professor of Education 



J. Tylee Wilson Chair of Business Ethics 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Associate Professor of Mathematics 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Associate Professor of Communication 



Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 



Visiting Assistant Professor of Psychology 



Assistant Professor of History 



Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 
(Spanish) (Leave, 1999-2000) 

Adjunct Associate Professor of Physics 



Assistant Professor of History 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 

Assistant Professor of Military Science 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



284 



Marianne A. Schubert (1977) 
BA, Dayton; 
MA, PhD, Southern Illinois 

Katie Scott (1985) 

BA Hons., London 

N.Dane Scott (1995) 

BS, California (Riverside); 

MA, Graduate Theological Union (Berkeley); 

PhD, Vanderbilt 

Richard D. Sears (1964) 

BA, Clark; MA, PhD, Indiana 

Timothy F. Sellner ( 1970) 

BA, PhD, Michigan; MA, Wayne State 

Catherine E. Seta (1987) 

BA, MA, PhD, UNC-Greensboro 

Dudley Shapere (1984) 

BA, MA, PhD, Harvard 

Brantly Bright Shapiro (1984) 



Kurt C.Shaw (1987) 

AB, Missouri; MA, PhD, Kansas 

Howard W. Shields (1958) 

BS, UNC-Chapel Hill; MS, 
Pennsylvania State; PhD, Duke 

Carol A. Shively ( 1990) 

BA, Hiram; MA, PhD, California (Davis) 

Steven Shoemaker (1997) 

BS, Maryland; MA, PhD, Virginia 

Peter M. Siavelis ( 1996) 

BA, Bradley; MA, PhD, Georgetown 

Gale Sigal (1987) 

BA, City College (New York); MA, 
Fordham; PhD, CUNY (Graduate Center) 

Miles R.Silman (1998) 

BA, Missouri; PhD, Duke University 

Wayne L. Silver (1985) 

BA, Pennsylvania; PhD, Florida State 

Jeanne M. Simonelli 

BA, MA, PhD, University of Oklahoma; 

MPH, Oklahoma University Health Sciences Center 

Robert Simpson (1997) 

Michael L. Sinclair (1968) 

BA, Wake Forest; AM, PhD, Stanford 

William W Sloan Jr. (1994) 

BA, Davidson; MA, Wake Forest; 
PhD, Miami (Ohio) 



Adjunct Assistant Professor of Psychology 

and Lecturer in Education 

(Part-time) 

Lecturer in Art History (London) 
(Department of Art, Part-time) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Philosophy 



Professor of Politics 
(Leave, spring 2000) 

Professor of German 

Associate Professor of Psychology 

Reynolds Professor of Philosophy and 
History of Science 

Adjunct Instructor of Dance 
(Ballet, Part-time) 

Associate Professor of German and Russian 
(Tokai, fall 1999) 

Professor of Physics 



Adjunct Associate Professor of Psychology 

Visiting Assistant Professor of English 

Assistant Professor of Politics 

Professor of English 

Assistant Professor of Biology 

Associate Professor of Biology 

Professor of Anthropology 



Adjunct Instructor of Dance 
(Social Dance, Part-time) 

Professor of History 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Psychology 
(Part-time) 



285 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Earl Smith (1996) 

BA, SUNY (Stony Brook); 
MA, PhD, Connecticut 

J. Howell Smith (1965) 

BA, Baylor; MA, Tulane; PhD, Wisconsin 

Kathy B.Smith (1981) 

BA, Baldwin- Wallace; MA, PhD, Purdue 

Margaret Supplee Smith (1979) 

BS, Missouri; MA, Case Western Reserve; 
PhD, Brown 

Teresa R. Smith (1993) 

BS, MA, Florida; PhD, Florida 

William K.Smith (1998) 

BS, MS, California State; 
PhD, California (Los Angeles) 

Cecilia H.Solano (1977) 

BA, Harvard; MA, PhD, Johns Hopkins 

Lisa Sternlieb (1997) 

BA, Vassar College; MA, New York University; 
PhD, Princeton 

Nanette A. Stevens (1999) 

BS, Jacksonville; PhD, Duke 

Loraine Moses Stewart (1991) 

BA, MA, North Carolina Central; 
EdD, UNC-Greensboro 

Yvonne H. Stewart (1997) 

BS, MBA, UNC-Charlotte; 
PhD, Tennesee 

Eric R.Stone (1994) 

BA, Delaware; MA, PhD, Michigan 

David H.Stroupe( 1990) 

BS, Wake Forest; MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Michael Strysick (1999) 

BA, University of Minnesota; 
MA, PhD, Binghamton University 

Christine E.Swain (1996) 

BA, Middlebury; MA, Cornell 

Elaine K. Swartzentruber (1999) 

BA, University of Colorado; MA, Chicago 
Theological Seminary; PhD, Emory University 

Robert L. Swofford ( 1993) 

BS, Furman; PhD, California (Berkeley) 

Brian Tague (1995) 

ScB, AB, Brown; PhD, California (San Diego) 

Yasuko Takata 

BA, Seinan Gakuin University, Fukuoka, Japan; 
MA, Ohio University) 



Rubin Professor of American Ethnic Studies 
and Professor of Sociology 

Professor of History 

Professor of Politics 

Professor of Art 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Sociology 
Charles H. Babcock Chair of Botany 

Associate Professor of Psychology 

Assistant Professor of English 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Chemistry 

Associate Professor of Education 



PricewaterhouseCoopers Faculty Fellow and 

Assistant Professor of Accountancy 

(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Assistant Professor of Psychology 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Instructor in Health and Exercise Science 
Visiting Assistant Professor of English 



Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) (Salamanca, spring 1999) 

Visiting Assistant Professor of Religion 



Professor of Chemistry 

Assistant Professor of Biology 

Visiting Professor of East Asian 
Languages and Literatures 



The Undergraduate Faculties 286 



StefanieH. Tanis(1986) 

Ian M.Taplin (1985) 

The College of Architecture, Oxford (England) 
BA, York (England); MPhil, Leicester 
(England); PhD, Brown 

Kendall B. Tarte ( 1996) 

BA, MA, PhD, Virginia 

Elizabeth H.Taylor (1992) 

BA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Thomas C.Taylor (1971) 

BS, MA, UNC-Chapel Hill; (W. 

PhD, Louisiana State 

Stanton K. Tefft ( 1964) 

BA, Michigan State; MS, Wisconsin; 
PhD, Minnesota 

Rebecca Thomas (1993) 

BA, MA, California (Los Angeles); 
PhD, Ohio State 

Stan J. Thomas (1983) 

BS, Davidson; PhD, Vanderbilt 

Harry B.Titus Jr. (1981) 

BA, Wisconsin (Milwaukee); MFA, 
PhD, Princeton 

Todd C.Torgersen( 1989) 

BS, MS, Syracuse; PhD, Delaware 

Ralph B. Tower (1980) 

BA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill; (W. 

MBA, Cornell 

Florence Toy (1998) 

MA, Michigan State; 
MFA, UNC-Greensboro 

E. Frank Tupper ( 1997) 

BA, Mississippi College; 

MDiv, Southwestern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

PhD, Southern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Maria-Encarna Moreno Turner (1999) 
BA, MA Brigham Young University 

Robert W.Ulery Jr. (1971) 
BA, MA, PhD, Yale 

Patricia Y. Underhill ( 1997) 

BS, Eckerd; MS, Wake Forest 

Robert L. Utleyjr. (1978) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Duke 

01gaValbuena(1996) 

BA, Irvine; MA, PhD, SUNY (Buffalo) 



Lecturer in German 

Zachary T Smith Associate Professor 
of Sociology (Leave, fall 1999) 



Assistant Professor of Romance Languages 

(French) 

Assistant Professor of Education and 
Adjunct Assistant Professor of Psychology 

Hylton Professor of Accountancy 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of Anthropology 
(Leave, 1999-2000) 

Assistant Professor of German 



Associate Professor of Computer Science 
Associate Professor of Art 



Dana Faculty Fellow and 

Associate Professor of Computer Science 

(Leave, spring 2000) 

Wayne Calloway Professor of Taxation 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Adjunct Instructor in Romance Languages 
(French, Part-time) 

Visiting Professor of Religion 



Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish; Part-time) 

Professor of Classical Languages 

Instructor in Computer Science 

Associate Professor of Humanities 

Assistant Professor of English 
(Venice, spring 2000) 



287 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Carlos Valencia (1999) 

BA, UNC-Asheville; MA, UNC-Chapel Hil 

Laura J. Veach (1999) 

BA, MEd, Wake Forest; 

PhD, University of New Orleans 

Alicia Vitti (1996) 

BA, Salem; MA, UNC-Greensboro 

Antonio Carlo Vitti (1986) 
BA, MA, Wayne State; 
PhD, Michigan 

Jennifer C. Waters-Shuler (1998) 

BS, State University of New York; 
PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Eric K. Watts (1996) 

BA, MA, Cincinnati; PhD, Northwestern 

Sarah L. Watts (1987) 

BA, Oklahoma College of Liberal Arts; 
MA, PhD, Oklahoma 

Mary R. Wayne-Thomas (1980) 

BFA, Pennsylvania State; MFA, Ohio State 

DavidS. Weaver (1977) 

BA, MA, Arizona; PhD, New Mexico 

Peter D.Weigl (1968) 

BA, Williams; PhD, Duke 

David P. Weinstein( 1989) 

BA, Colorado College; MA, Connecticut; 
PhD, Johns Hopkins 

Catherine O. Welder (1998) 
BS, Wake Forest; 
PhD, Georgia Institute of Technology 

Mark E. Welker ( 1987) 

BS, UNC-Chapel Hill; PhD, Florida State 

Byron R.Wells (1981) 

BA, MA, Georgia; PhD, Columbia 

Helga A. Welsh (1993) 

MA, PhD, University of Munich 

G.Page West III (1995) 

BA, Hamilton; MBA, Dartmouth; 
PhD, Colorado (Boulder) 

Larry E. West (1969) 

BA, Berea; PhD, Vanderbilt 

Robert M. Whaples ( 1991) 

BA, Maryland; PhD, Pennsylvania 

M.Stanley Whitley (1990) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Cornell 



Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 

Assistant Professor of Education 



Adjunct Instructor in Romance Languages 
(Italian; Part-time) 

Dana Faculty Fellow and 

Professor of Romance Languages 

(Italian) 

Adjunct Assistant Professor of Biology 
and Director of the Imaging Facility 

Assistant Professor of Communication 

Associate Professor of History 

Assistant Professor of Theatre 

Professor of Anthropology 

Professor of Biology 

Associate Professor of Politics 

Visiting Professor of Chemistry 

Wake Forest Professor of Chemistry 

Professor of Romance Languages 
(French) 

Associate Professor of Politics 
(Leave, fall 1999) 

Assistant Professor of Business 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of German 

Associate Professor of Economics 

Professor of Romance Languages 
(Spanish) 



The Undergraduate Faculties 288 



UlrikeWiethaus(1991) 

Colloquium at Kirchliche Hochschule 
(Berlin, Germany); MA, PhD, Temple 

Jack E. Wilkerson Jr. (1989) 
BS, Bob Jones University; 
PhD, Texas 

Alan J. Williams (1974) 

BA, Stanford; PhD, Yale 

Richard T.Williams (1985) 

BS, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Princeton 

David C. Wilson (1984, 1987) 

BS, Wake Forest; MAT, Emory 

Edwin G. Wilson (1946, 1951) 

BA, Wake Forest; AM, PhD, Harvard 

Eric Wilson (1998) 

BA, Appalachian State; MA, Wake Forest; 

PhD, The Graduate School and University Center, CUNY 

Donald H.Wolfe (1968) 

BS, MS, Southern Illinois; PhD, Cornell 

Frank B.Wood (1971) 

BA, MA, Wake Forest; MDiv, South- 
eastern Baptist Theo. Seminary; PhD, Duke 

John H.Wood (1985) 

BS, Ohio; MA, Michigan State; PhD, Purdue 

J. Ned Woodall (1969) 

BA, MA, Texas; PhD, Southern Methodist 

Sharon K. Woodard (1998) 

BS, Central Michigan; MS, Wake Forest 

Suzanne Young (1997) 
BA, Wofford College; 
MA, PhD, University of Virginia 

Clifford W Zeyl( 1997) 

BSc, University of Guelph; 
MSc, PhD, McGill University 

Richard L. Zuber ( 1962) 

BS, Appalachian; MA, Emory; PhD, Duke 

Margaret D. Zulick ( 1991) 

BM, Westminster Choir College; 
MA, Earlham School of Religion; 
MTS, Garrett-Evangelical Theological 
Seminary; PhD, Northwestern 



Associate Professor of Humanities 

Professor of Accounting 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor of History 

Reynolds Professor of Physics 

Instructor in Mathematics 
(Part-time) 

Professor of English 
Assistant Professor of English 

Professor of Theatre 

Adjunct Professor of Psychology 
(Part-time) 

Reynolds Professor of Economics 

Professor of Anthropology 

Instructor in Health and Exercise Science 

Visiting Assistant Professor 
of English 

Assistant Professor of Biology 
(Leave, fall 2000) 

Professor of History 

Associate Professor of Communication 



289 



The Undergraduate Faculties 



Emeriti 



-'. -A",.-' 
■ 



Dates following names indicate period of service. 



Charles M. Allen (1941-1989) 

BS, MS, Wake Forest; PhD, Duke 

Ralph D. Amen (1962-1993) 

BA, MA, Northern Colorado; 
MBS, PhD, Colorado 

John William Angell (1955-1990) 

BA, Wake Forest; STM, Andover Newton; 
ThM, PhD, Southern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Richard C. Barnett (1961-1994) 

BA, Wake Forest; MEd, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Harold M. Barrow (1948-1977) 

BA, Westminster; MA, Missouri; PED, Indiana 

Merrill G. Berthrong (1964-1989) 

BA, Tufts; MA, Fletcher; PhD, Pennsylvania 

Russell H. Brantley Jr. (1953-1987) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Germaine Bree (1973-1985) 

Licence, EES, Agregation, Paris; LittD, Smith, 
Mount Holyoke, Alleghany, Duke, Oberlin, 
Dickinson, Rutgers, Wake Forest, Brown, 
Wisconsin (Milwaukee), New York, Massachusetts, 
Kalamazoo, Washington (St. Louis), University of the 
South, Boston, Wisconsin (Madison); LHD, Wilson, 
Colby, Michigan, Davis and Elkins; LLD, Middlebury 

Robert W. Brehme (1959-1995) 

BS, Roanoke; MS, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

George McLeod Bryan (1956-1987) 

BA, MA, Wake Forest; BD, PhD, Yale 

Shasta M. Bryant (1966-1987) 

BA, MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Julian C. Burroughs Jr. (1958-1994) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Michigan 



Professor Emeritus of Biology 
Professor Emeritus of Biology 

Easley Professor Emeritus of Religion 

Professor Emeritus of History 

Professor Emeritus of Physical Education 

Director Emeritus of Libraries 

Director Emeritus of Communication 

Kenan Professor Emerita of Humanities 



Professor Emeritus of Physics 

Professor Emeritus of Religion 

Professor Emeritus of Romance Languages 

Professor Emeritus of Speech Communication 



Emeriti 



290 



Robert L. Carlson (1969-1987) 

BS, Massachusetts Institute of Technology; 
MBA, PhD, Stanford 

John A. Carter Jr. (1961-1997) 

BA, Virginia; MA, PhD, Princeton 

Dorothy Casey (1949-1988) 
BS, UNC-Greensboro; 
MA, UNC-Chapel Hill 

David W. Catron (1963-1994) 

BA, Furman; PhD, George Peabody 

Leon P. Cook Jr. (1957-1993) 

BS, Virginia Poly. Inst. & Su; 
MS, Tennessee 

Cyclone Covey (1968-1988) 
BA, PhD, Stanford 

Marjorie Crisp (1947-1977) 

BS, Appalachian; MA, George Peabody 

Hugh William Divine (1954-1979) 

BS, Georgia; MA, Louisiana State; 
JD, Emory; LLM, SJD, Michigan 

Robert H. Dufort (1961-1999) 
BA, PhD, Duke 

Robert Allen Dyer (1956-1983) 
BA, Louisiana State; 
ThM, PhD, Southern Baptist Theo. Seminary 

Eddie V. Easley (1984-1999) 
BS, Virginia State; 
MS, PhD, Iowa State 

Leo Ellison Jr. (1957-1999) 

BS, MS, Northwestern State 

Thomas M. Elmore (1962-1996) 
BA, Wake Forest; 
MA, George Peabody; PhD, Ohio State 

David K. Evans (1966-1998) 

BS, Tulane; PhD, California (Berkeley) 

Doyle R. Fosso (1964-1995) 

AB, PhD, Harvard; MA, Michigan 

Ralph S. Fraser (1962-1988) 

BA, Boston University; MA, Syracuse; 
PhD, Illinois 

Caroline Sandlin Fullerton (1969-1990) 

BA, Rollins; MFA, Texas Christian 



Professor Emeritus of Management 



Professor Emeritus of English 

Associate Professor Emerita of 
Health and Sport Science 

Professor Emeritus of Psychology 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Accounting 
(School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor Emeritus of History 

Associate Professor Emerita 
of Physical Education 

Professor Emeritus of Law 



Professor Emeritus of Psychology 
Professor Emeritus of Religion 



Professor Emeritus of Business 
(W Calloway School of Business and Accountancy) 

Associate Professor Emeritus of Health 
and Exercise Science 

Professor Emeritus of Education 



Professor Emeritus of Anthropology 
Professor Emeritus of English 
Professor Emeritus of German 



Lecturer Emerita in SCTA 
(Theatre Arts) 



Kathleen M. Glenn (1974-1998) 
BA, MA, PhD, Stanford 

Balkrishna G. Gokhale (1960-1990) 
BA, MA, PhD, Bombay 



Wake Forest Professor Emerita of Romance Languages 

Professor Emeritus of History 
and Asian Studies 



291 



Emeriti 



Professor Emeritus of English 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

Professor Emeritus of Sociology 

Albritton Professor Emeritus of Religion 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

Professor Emeritus of Classical Languages 

Instructor Emerita in Music 

Professor Emeritus of Psychology 



Thomas F. Gossett (1967-1987) 

BA, MA, Southern Methodist; PhD, Minnesota 

PaulM. Gross Jr. (1959-1987) 
BS, Duke; PhD, Brown 

William H. Gulley (1966-1987) 

BA, MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Emmett Willard Hamrick (1952-1988) 

BA, UNC-Chapel Hill; PhD, Duke 

Phillip J. Hamrick Jr. (1956-1995) 

BS, Morris Harvey; PhD, Duke 

Carl V.Harris (1956-1989) 

BA, Wake Forest; BD, STM, Yale; PhD, Duke 

Lucille S.Harris (1957-1991) 
BA, BM, Meredith 

David A. Hills (1960-1996) 

BA, Kansas; MA, PhD, Iowa 

William L. Hottinger (1970-1996) Professor Emeritus of Health and Exercise Science 

BS, Slippery Rock; MS, PhD, Illinois 

Delmer P. Hylton (1949-1991) 
BS, MBA, Indiana 

Mordecai J. Jaffe (1980-1998) 

BS, City College (New York); PhD, Cornell 

Patricia Adams Johansson (1969-1998) 
BA, Winston-Salem State; 
MA, Wake Forest 

Alonzo W Kenion (1956-1983) 
BA, MA, PhD, Duke 

Harry L. King Jr. (1960-1981) 

BA, Richmond; MA, PhD, 
UNC-Chapel Hill 

Lula M.Leake (1964-1997) 
BS, Louisiana State; 
MRE, Southern Baptist Theological Seminary 

Harry B. Miller (1947-1983) 



BS, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Carlton T. Mitchell (1961-1991) 

BA, Wake Forest; BD, Yale; STM, 
Union Theo. Seminary; PhD, New York 

Carl C.Moses (1964-1991) 

AB, William and Mary; MA, PhD, 
UNC-Chapel Hill 

John W. Nowell (1945-1987) 

BS, Wake Forest; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

James C. O'Flaherty (1947-1984) 

BA, Georgetown; MA, Kentucky; PhD, Chicago 



Professor Emeritus of Accounting 
(School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor Emeritus of Biology 

Associate Dean of the College 
and Lecturer Emerita in English 

Professor Emeritus of English 

Professor Emeritus of Romance Languages 

Associate Vice President Emerita for 
Academic Affairs 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 

Professor Emeritus of Religion 

Professor Emeritus of Politics 

Professor Emeritus of Chemistry 
Professor Emeritus of German 



Emeriti 



292 



A. Thomas Olive (1961-1988) 

BS, Wake Forest; MS, PhD, 
North Carolina State 

F. Jeanne Owen (1956-1991) 
BS, UNC-Greensboro; 
MCS, Indiana; JD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

John E. Parker Jr. (1950-1987) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Syracuse 

Margaret R. Perry (1947-1998) 
BS, South Carolina 

Percival Perry (1939, 1947-1987) 

BA, Wake Forest; MA, Rutgers; PhD, Duke 

Elizabeth Phillips (1957-1989) 

BA, UNC-Greensboro; MA, Iowa; 
PhD, Pennsylvania 

Lee Harris Potter (1965-1989) 

BA, MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Herman J. Preseren (1953-1983) 

BS, California State (Pennsylvania); 
MA, Columbia; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Gregory D. Pritchard (1968-1994) 

BA, Oklahoma Baptist; BD, Southern 
Baptist Theo. Seminary; PhD, Columbia 

Beulah L. Raynor (1946-1979) 

BA, East Carolina; MA, Wake Forest 

J. Don Reeves (1967-1994) 

BA, Mercer; BD, ThM, Southern Baptist 
Theo. Seminary; EdD, Columbia 

C. H. Richards Jr. (1952-1985) 

BA, Texas Christian; MA, PhD, Duke 

Mary Frances Robinson (1952-1989) 

BA, Wilson; MA, PhD, Syracuse 

Paul S. Robinson (1952-1977) 

BA, Westminster; BM, Curtis; 

MSM, DSM, Union Seminary- 
Eva M. Rodtwitt (1966-1997) 

Cand Philol, Oslo (Norway) 

Wilmer D. Sanders (1954-1957, 1964-1992) 
BA, Muhlenberg; MA, PhD, Indiana 

John W Sawyer (1956-1988) 

BA, MA, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, Missouri 

John D. Scarlett (1955-1994; 1979-1989) 
BA, Catawba; LLB, Harvard 

Ben M. Seelbinder (1959-1988) 

BA, Mississippi Delta State; 
MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 



Associate Professor Emeritus of Biology 

Professor Emerita of Business Law 
(School of Business and Accountancy) 

Professor Emeritus of Education 
and Romance Languages 

Registrar Emerita 

Professor Emeritus of History 

Professor Emerita of English 

Professor Emeritus of English 
Professor Emeritus of Education 

Professor Emeritus of Philosophy 

Associate Professor Emerita of English 
Professor Emeritus of Education 

Professor Emeritus of Politics 

Professor Emerita of Romance Languages 

Professor Emeritus of Music 

Lecturer Emerita in Romance Languages 

Professor Emeritus of German 

Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 
and Computer Science 

Professor Emeritus of Law and 
Dean Emeritus of the School of Law 

Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 



293 



Emeriti 



Bynum G. Shaw (1965-1993) 
BA, Wake Forest 

Richard L. Shoemaker (1950-1982) 
BA, Colgate; MA, Syracuse; 
PhD, Virginia 

Robert N. Shorter (1958-1999) 

BA, Union; MA, PhD, Duke 

David L. Smiley (1950-1991) 

BA, MA, Baylor; PhD, Wisconsin 

Blanche C. Speer (1972-1984) 

BA, Howard Payne; MA, PhD, Colorado 

Henry Smith Stroupe (1937-1984) 

BS, MA, Wake Forest; PhD, Duke 

Harold C. Tedford (1965-1998) 

BA, Ouachita; MA, Arkansas; 
PhD, Louisiana State 

Anne S. Tillett (1956-1986) 

BA, Carson-Newman; MA, Vanderbilt; 
PhD, Northwestern 

George W. Trautwein (1983-1996) 

BMus, Oberlin; MMus, Cleveland 
Institute; MusD, Indiana 

Marcellus E. Waddill (1962-1997) 

BA, Hampden-Sydney; MA, PhD, Pittsburgh 

J. Van Wagstaff (1964-1992) 

BA, Randolph-Macon; MBA, Rutgers; 
PhD, Virginia 

George P. Williams Jr. (1958-1999) 

BS, Richmond; MS, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

John E. Williams (1959-1996) 

BA, Richmond; MA, PhD, Iowa 

John G. Williard (1958-1994) 
BS, UNC-Chapel Hill 

Raymond L. Wyatt (1956-1992) 

BS, Wake Forest; MA, PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 

W Buck Yearns Jr. (1945-1988) 

BA, Duke; MA, Georgia; PhD, UNC-Chapel Hill 



Professor Emeritus of Journalism 
(Department of English) 

Professor Emeritus of Romance Languages 



Professor Emeritus of English 
Professor Emeritus of History 
Associate Professor Emerita of Linguistics 
Professor Emeritus of History 
Professor Emeritus of Theatre 

Professor Emerita of Romance Languages 



Director Emeritus of Instrumental Ensembles 
(Department of Music) 

Professor Emeritus of Mathematics 

Professor Emeritus of Economics 



Professor Emeritus of Physics 

Wake Forest Professor Emeritus of Psychology 

Vice President and Treasurer Emeritus 

Professor Emeritus of Biology 

Professor Emeritus of History 



Emeriti 



294 



The Committees of the Faculty 



The committees listed represent 
those in effect during the academ- 
IC year 1999-zooo. Each committee 

SELECTS ITS OWN CHAIR EXCEPT WHERE 
THE CHAIR IS DESIGNATED. 



Executive Committees 

The Committee on Academic Affairs 

Non-voting. Dean of student services, associate deans of the College, and one undergraduate 
student. Voting. Dean of the College; 2002 Robert Beck, Howell Smith; 2001 Don Frey, Simone 
Caron; and 2000 Jack Fleer, Dilip Kondepudi; and one graduate student. 

The Committee on Admissions 

Non-voting. Director of admissions and financial aid, two members from the administrative 
staff of the Office of the Dean of the College, and one undergraduate student. Voting. Dean of 
the College; 2002 Anthony Parent, Mary Wayne-Thomas; 2001 Allan Louden, Steve Robinson; 
2000 Leah McCoy, Dolly McPherson; and one undergraduate student. 

The Committee on Scholarships and Student Aid 

Non-voting. One undergraduate student. Voting. Dean of the College, director of admissions 
and financial aid, two members from the administrative staff of the Office of the Dean of the 
College; 2002 Gillian Overing, David Weinstein; 2001 Robert Browne, Rebecca Thomas; 2000 
David John, Loraine Stewart; and one undergraduate student. 

The Committee on Curriculum 

Voting. Provost, dean of the College, dean of the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy, registrar, and the chairs of each department of the College as follows: Division I. 
Classical Languages, English, German and Russian, Romance Languages. Division II. Biology, 
Chemistry, Health and Exercise Science, Mathematics and Computer Science, Physics. Division 
III. Education, History, Military Science, Philosophy, Religion. Division IV. Anthropology, 
Communication, Economics, Politics, Psychology, Sociology. Division V Art, Music, Theater. 
(The Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy is included in Division IV.) 



295 



Committees of the Faculty 



Advisory Committees 



The Committee on Academic Planning 

Non-voting. Provost, dean of the Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy, and one 
undergraduate student. Voting. Dean of the College, director of the Z. Smith Reynolds Library, 
one undergraduate student, and 2003 Christy Buchanan; 2002 Rob Ulery, James Kuzmanovich; 
2001 Charles Kimball; 2000 Stewart Carter; and one graduate student. 

The Committee on Athletics 

Non-voting. Director of athletics. Voting. Vice president for investments and treasurer, dean of 
the College, faculty representative to the Atlantic Coast Conference; one undergraduate student; 
and 2004 Steve Messier, Randall Rogan; 2003 Katy Harriger, Terry Blumenthal; 2002 Eric 
Carlson, Gale Sigal; 2001 William K. Meyers, Phillip J. Perricone; 2000 Donald E. Frey, Robert 
J. Plemmons. 

The Committee on Nominations 

Voting. 2002 Mary Friedman, Jill McMillan; 2001 Kathy Smith, Ralph Tower; 2000 Susan 
Borwick, Paul Ribisl. 

The Committee on Library Planning 

Non-voting. Provost, dean of the Graduate School, one undergraduate student, and one graduate 
student. Voting. One faculty representative from each academic department of the College, dean 
of the College, one faculty representative from the Wayne Calloway School of Business and 
Accountancy, the director of the Z. Smith Reynolds Library, one undergraduate student, and one 
graduate student. 

The Committee on Information Technology 

Non-voting. Provost, dean of the Graduate School, vice president for student life and instruction- 
al resources, vice president for finance and administration. Voting. Dean of the College, dean of 
the Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy, the director of the Z. Smith Reynolds 
Library, the director of Information Systems; one undergraduate student; and 2003 Wayne King, 
Leah McCoy; 2001 Eric Matthews, Gordon McCray; 2000 Allin Cottrell, Harry Titus. 

The Committee on First-Year Seminars 

Non-voting. Dean of freshmen. Voting. Dean of the College, and 2002 Sylvain Boko, Louis 
Goldstein; 2001 Anne Boyle, Susan Rupp; 2000 Paul Anderson, Debra Jessup. 



Committees of the Faculty 



296 



Special Committees 



The Committee on Publications 

Voting. Dean of the College, vice president for investments and treasurer, university editor, three 
faculty advisers of Old Gold and Black, The Student, and the Howler; and 2002 Catherine Seta; 
2001 James Martin; 2000 Gale Sigal. 

The Committee for Teacher Education 

Voting. Dean of the College, dean of the Graduate School, chair of the Department of Education; 
and 2002 Brian Gorelick, Angela King, John Collins; 2000 Charles Bowen, Brad Jones, Jeff 
Lerner. 

The Committee for the ROTC 

Voting. Dean of the College, ROTC coordinator, professor of military science; and 2002 David 
Weaver; 2001 Gaylord May; 2000 Kenneth Bechtel. 

The Committee on Honors 

Non-voting. One student from the College. Voting. Dean of the College, the coordinator of the 
Honors Program, one student from the College, and 2003 Bruce King; 2002 Eric Watts; 2001 
Margaret Smith; 2000 Bashir El-Beshti, Ralph C. Kennedy. 

The Committee of Lower Division Advisers 

Dean of the College, chair of the lower division advisers, and members of the faculty who are 
appointed as advisers to the Lower Division. 

The Committee on Orientation 

Dean of the College, chair of the lower division advisers, who shall serve as chair, dean of fresh- 
men, dean of student services, a designated member of the administrative staff, president of the 
Student Government or a representative, and other persons from the administration and student 
body whom the chair shall invite to serve. 

The Committee on Records and Information 

Non-voting. Registrar. Voting. Dean of the College, archivist, who shall be secretary, vice chair of 
the faculty, secretary of the faculty, and 2003 Dan Canas; 2002 Ananda Mitra; 2001 Paul 
Hemler; 2000 David John. 

The Committee on Open Curriculum 

Dean of the College, the coordinator of the Open Curriculum Program and members of the fac- 
ulty who are appointed as Open Curriculum advisers. 

The Committee on the Teaching and Learning Center 

Six selected members of the faculty, one from each of the five academic divisions of the College 
and one from the Calloway School of Business and Accountancy; 2002 Kathy Smith, Harry 
Titus; 2001 Sarah Barbour, Daniel Kim-Shapiro, Claire Schen; 2000 Page West, Rob Ulery. 



Joint Faculty/Administration Committees 

The Joint Admissions Committee 

Dean of the College, director of admissions and financial aid, provost, and three faculty members 
of the Committee on Admissions. 



297 



Committees of the Faculty 



Other Committees on which the Faculty Enjoys Representation 

The Committee on Capital Planning 

Non-voting. Provost, vice president for investments and treasurer, vice president for finance and 
administration, and one undergraduate student. Voting. Dean of the College, dean of the Wayne 
Calloway School of Business and Accountancy, one undergraduate student; and 2003 Margaret 
Smith; 2002 Deborah Best, Claire Hammond; 2001 Umit Akinc, Sarah Watts; 2000 Andrew J. 
Ettin, Michael Hyde. 

The Judicial Council 

Administration. 2001 Kenneth A. Zick; 2000 William S. Hamilton, Jeryl Prescott. Faculty. 2004 
Fred Horton, Robert Lovett; 2003 Cheryl Leggon, James Powell; 2002 Loraine Stewart; 2001 
James F. Curran; 2000 Douglas Beets, Dan Hammond; and three students from the College. 

The Committee on Student Life 

Dean of the College or his designate, dean of student services, a designated member of the 
administration; 2002 John Earle; 2001 Sarah Watts; 2000 Teresa Radomski; and three under- 
graduate students. 

Members of the Honor and Ethics Council 

2002 Bill Moss, James Norris, Eric Watts, Alan Williams; 2001 Mary DeShazer, Michael Hyde, 
Charles Lewis, Robert Utley; 2000 Jane Albrecht, Simeon Ilesanmi, Nina Lucas, Ulrike 
Wiethaus. 

Faculty Marshals 

John V. Baxley, Richard D. Carmichael, Catherine T. Harris, Elmer Hayaski, John H. Litcher. 

University Senate 

President, senior vice president, the deans of the several schools, the associate dean of the Wake 

Forest University School of Medicine, the director of the Z. Smith Reynolds Library, the secretary 

of the University, and, with the consent of the Senate, any person holding the position of vice 

president of the University or equivalent rank, and the following: 

Representatives of the College: 2003 Bernadine Barnes, Allin Cottrell, Judy Kem; 2002 David 

Levy, Mark Leary, Win-Chiat Lee; 2001 Carole Brown, Catherine Harris. Byron Wells; 2000 

Michael D. Hazen, John C. Moorhouse, Mary L.B. Pendergraft. 

Representatives of the Wayne Calloway School of Business and Accountancy: 2003 Roger 

Jenkins; 2002 John Duchac; 2000 S. Douglas Beets. 

Representatives of the Graduate School: 2002 Greg Shelmess; 2001 Dale Dagenbach; 2000 

Linda McPhail. 

Representatives of the School of Law: 2002 Charles Rose; 2001 Ronald Wright; 2000 Miles Foy. 

Representatives of the Babcock Graduate School of Management: 2002 James Flynn, Timothy 

Smunt; 2000 Jack Meredith. 

Representatives of the Wake Forest School of Medicine: 2003 John Butterworth, Larry Daniel, 

Craig Hinkel; 2002 Electra Paskett; 2001 Louis S. Kucera; 2000 David Harrington. 

Representatives of the Divinity School: 2003 Samuel Weber. 

Institutional Review Board 

Director of research and sponsored programs, Christy Buchanan, Randall Rogan, Earl Smith, 
Jack Rejeski, Cecil D. Price, Daniel Frankel, Robert Jones, Robert Evans, Richard Loeser. 



Committees of the Faculty 



298 



Index 



Academic Calendar 






2,26 


Accountancy Courses 






p. 246 


Accounting, Master's Degree 


P- 


7, 


60, 236 


Accreditation 






p. 11 


Administration 






p. 253 


Admission, College 






p. 19 


Admission, Wayne Calloway School of 




Business & Accountancy 






p. 237 


Admission Application Fee 




P 


. 20, 22 


Admission Deposit 


P- 


20 


, 20, 22 


Admission of Students with Diss 


ibilities 


p. 21 


Admission of Transfer Students 






p. 21 


Admission Requirements 






p. 19 


Advanced Placement 






p. 21 


Advising 






p. 26 


Advisory Committees (Faculty) 






p. 295 


Africa, Courses on Other Sites 






p. 233 


American Ethnic Studies 






p. 69 


Analytical Finance 


P- 


7, 


60, 236 


Anthropology Department 






p. 69 


Application for Admission 






p. 19 


AROTC Scholarships 






p. 38 


Art Department 






p. 73 


Art History 






p. 74 


Asia, Pacific Rim Courses 






p. 233 


Asian Studies (interdisciplinary minor) 


p. 78 


Athletics 






p. 258 


Auditing Courses 






p. 28 


Austria, Vienna 






p. 231 






Babcock Graduate School 

of Management p. 7, 255 

Bachelor of Arts Degree p. 60 

Bachelor of Science Degree p. 60 

Basic Requirements p. 61, 63 

Beijing (China) p. 58, 226 

Berlin, Germany p. 226 

Biology Department p. 80 

Board of Trustees p. 250 

Board of Visitors p. 251 

Board of Visitors, Calloway School p. 252 

Brown Scholarships p. 37 



p. 7 

p. 304 

p. 52, 199 

p. 51 

p. 240 



Buildings and Grounds 
Bulletins of WFU 
Burgos University, Spain 
Burgundy, University of, France 
Business Courses 
Business and Accountancy, 

W. Calloway School of p. 7, 60, 235, 257 

Cable Television Services p. 10 

Caldwell Scholarships p. 37 

Calendar, Academic p. 2, 26 

Calloway (Wayne) School of Business 

& Accountancy p. 7, 60, 235, 257 



Career Services 
Caribbean, Courses in 
Carswell Hall 
Carswell Scholarships 
Chaplain's Office 
Charges 

Chemistry Department 
China, Study in 
Chinese 



p. 259 

p. 234 

p. 8 

p. 35 

p. 259 

p. 22-23 

p. 86 

p. 58, 226 

p. 78, 103, 105,226 



Chronological History of WFU p. 18 

Class Attendance p. 27 

Classical Languages Department p. 90 

Classics p. 93 

Classification p. 27 

CLEP p. 21 

College, Administration p. 253 

College History and Development p. 17 
Combined Degrees in Medical 

Technology p. 65 

Committees of the Faculty p. 295 

Communication Department p. 94 

Composition Condition (cc) p. 62 



299 



Index 



Computer Rights and Responsibilities, 

Summary of p. 14 

Computer Science Department p. 98 

Concessions p. 53 

Course Repetition p. 30 

Courses of Instruction p. 68 

Courses, Overseas p. 226 
Cultural Resource Preservation 

(interdisciplinary minor) p. 101 



Dance 

Dean's List 

Declaring a Major 

Degree Requirements 

Degrees Offered 

Dijon Semester (University of 

Burgundy) p. 52, 58, 227 

Distribution Requirements (Refunds) p. 23 

Divinity School 
Divisional Requirements 
Double Majors 
Dropping a Course 



p. 221 
p. 30 
p. 63 
p. 60 
p. 60 



p. 7, 257 

p. 61,63 

p. 64 

p. 28 



Early Christian Studies 

(interdisciplinary minor) p. 102 

Early Decision (Single/First Choice) p. 20 
East Asian Languages and 

Literatures p. 103 

East Asian Studies (foreign area) p. 105 

Economics Department p. 106 

Education Department p. Ill 

Education Minor p. 113 

Elementary Certificate, Education p. 113 

Emeriti p. 290 

Engineering Degree p. 67 
England, Study in p. 57, 229 

English Department p. 118 

English, Proficiency in the Use of p. 62 

Enrollment Statistics p. 249 

Environmental Studies p. 124 

Europe, Courses in p. 234 

Examinations p. 29 

Exchange Scholarships p. 52 

Executive Committees (faculty) p. 295 

Expenses p. 22 



Faculties, Undergraduate p. 266 

Faculty Adviser p. 26 

Faculty, Committees of p. 295 

Fees p. 22 

Federal Financial Aid Programs p. 52 

Federal Refund Calculation p. 23 

Finance and Administration p. 259 

Financial Aid p. 33-54, 257 
Five-Yr. Cooperative Degree Program in 

Latin American Studies p. 67, 153 
Five-Yr. Program, Accountancy p. 7, 63, 235 

Food Services p. 22 

Foreign Area Studies p. 56, 65 
Forestry and Environmental Studies 

Degree p. 67 
France, Study in p. 52, 58, 202, 227 

Freiburg-im-Breisgau, Germany p. 227 

French p. 198 

French Exchange Scholarship p. 52 

General Requirements for Degrees p. 60 

Geographical Enrollment p. 249 

German (and Russian) Department p. 125 

German Exchange Scholarship, p. 52 

German Studies (foreign area) p. 129 

Germany, Berlin p. 52, 226 
Gordon & Wake Forest Diversity 

Scholarships p. 36 

Governing and Advisory Boards p. 250 

Grade Points/Reports p. 30 

Grading p. 29 

Graduate School p. 7, 254 

Graduation Distinctions p. 30 

Graylyn International Conf. Center p. 259 

Graylyn Scholarship p. 35 

Greek p. 91 

Gymnasium p. 8 



Index 



30O 



Hankins Scholarships p. 37 

Health and Exercise Science Dept. p. 130 
Health and Exercise 

Science Requirement p. 62, 130 

Hebrew p. 197 

Higher Education Act of 1965 p. 24 

Hiratsuka (Japan) p. 58, 229 

History Department p. 135 

History of WFU p. 17 

Holding Scholarship p. 37 

Honor and Ethics System p. 14 

Honors Study p. 55 

Hospital Charges p. 23 

Hospital Insurance p. 23 

Housing p. 8, 25 

Humanities p. 143 

Immunization p. 19 

Incomplete Grades p. 29 

Information Systems p. 9, 260 

Institutional Research p. 260 

Institutional Review Board p. 298 

Interdisciplinary Honors p. 147 

Interdisciplinary Minors p. 65 

International Students p. 56 
International Studies 

(interdisciplinary minor) p. 150 

International Studies, Center for p. 56 

Investments and Treasurer p. 260 

Italian p. 209 

Italian Studies (foreign area) p. 151 

Italy, Study in p. 58, 231 



Japan, Study in 
Japanese 
Joint Majors 
Journalism (minor) 



p. 58, 229 

p. 79, 104, 105 

p. 64 

p. 152 



Latin p. 91 
Latin American Studies 

(interdisciplinary minor) p. 153 

Law School p. 7, 254 

Legal Department p. 260 
Libraries p. 8, 10, 261 

Library Fines p. 23 

Linguistics (interdisciplinary minor) p. 155 

Loans p. 33, 52 

London Semester, p. 57, 229 

Major, Declaring a p. 63 
Major Requirements, 

Options for Meeting p. 64 

Majors p. 60 
Master's Degree in Accounting p. 7, 60, 235 

Mathematical Business p. 60, 235 
Mathematical Economics p. 107, 158 

Mathematics Department p. 157 

Max. Number of Courses in Dept. p. 64 

Medical School p. 7 



Medical Technology, Combined Degrees p. 65 
Medieval Studies 

(interdisciplinary minor) p. 162 

Middle East, Courses in p. 234 

Military Science Department p. 163 

Ministerial Concessions p. 53 

Minors p. 64 
Moscow, Russia, Study in p. 59, 230 

Motor Vehicle Registration p. 23 

Music Department p. 165 

Music Ensemble p. 168 

Music Fees, Individual Instruction p. 23 

Music, Individual Instruction p. 168 

National Achievement Scholarships p. 37 

National Merit Scholarships p. 37 

Natural Sciences p. 171 
Near Eastern Languages and 

Literature p. 197 

Non-WFU Programs, Study Abroad p. 59 

N. C. Legislative Tuition Grants p. 53 



301 Index 



Open Curriculum 
Opportunities for Study Abroad 
Options for Meeting Major Req. 
Orientation and Advising 
Other Charges 
Other Financial Aid 
Outside Assistance, Financial Aid 
Overseas Courses 

Parking Management Office 

Part-time Students 

Pass/Fail 

Philosophy Department 

Physician Assistant Program 

Physics Department 

Politics Department 

Poteat Scholarships 

Presidential Scholarships 

Presidents of WFU 

Probation 

Procedures 

Proficiency in the Use of English 

Provost Office 

Psychology Department 

Purpose, Statement of 

Readmission Requirements 

Recognition and Accreditation 

Refunds 

Registration 

Religion Department 

Repetition of Courses 

Req. for Continuation in the College 

Requirements for Degrees 

Requirements for Readmission 

Residence Hall Charges 

Residential Language Centers 

Reynolda Campus 

Reynolda Hall 

Reynolds Scholarships 

Reynolds, Z. Smith, Library 



p. 55 


Romance Languages Department 


p. 198 


p. 56 


Room Change Fee 


p. 23 


p. 64 


Room Charges 


p. 22 


p. 26 


Russia, Study in 


p. 59, 230 


p. 23 


Russian 


p. 212 


p. 54 


Russian and East European Studies 


p. 212 


p. 54 






p. 226 


Salamanca Semester p. 58 


,208,230 




Salem College, Study at 


p. 55 


p. 23 


Salem Hall 


p. 8 


p. 27 


Scales Fine Arts Center 


p. 8 


p. 29 


Scholarships 


p. 33 


p. 173 


School of Law 


p. 7, 254 


p. 66 


Secondary Certificate (Education) 


p. 112 


p. 178 


Senior Testing 


p. 65 


p. 181 


Sociology Department 


p. 213 


p. 36 


Spain, Study in p. 52, 58 298, 230 


p. 36 


Spanish 


p. 203 


p. 18 


Spanish Exchange Scholarship 


p. 52 


p. 31 


Spanish Studies (foreign area) 


p. 217 


p. 19 


Special Committees, Faculty 


p. 295 


p. 62 


Special Programs 


p. 55 


p. 254 


Sports Medicine 


p. 133 


p. 187 


Statement of Purpose, WFU 


p. 13 


p. 13 


Student Complaints 


p. 17 




Student Health Service 


p. 19,23 


p. 32 


Student Life 


p. 261 


p. 11 


Studio Art 


p. 76 


p. 23 


Study Abroad Opportunities 


p. 56 


p. 26 


Study Abroad in Non-WF Programs 


p. 59 


p. 192 


Summary of Computing Rights and 




p. 30 


Responsibilities 


p. 14 


p. 31 


Summer Session 


p. 262 


p. 60 


Summer Study 


p. 32 


p. 32 






22,26 






p. 56 






p. 7 






p. 8 






p. 35 






p. 10 







Index 



302 



Teacher Education Program 


p. Ill 


Vehicle Registration 


p. 23 


Teaching Area/Requirements 


p. Ill 


Venice, Semester in 


p. 211,231 


Telephone Service 


p. 10 


Veterans' Benefits 


p. 54 


Theatre Department 


p. 218 


Vienna, Austria 


p. 56, 231 


Tokai University (Hiratsuka), Japan 


p. 229 


Visitors, Board of 


p. 251 


Traffic Fines 


p. 23 


Visitors, Board of, Calloway Schoo 


1 p. 252 


Transcripts 


p. 30 






Transfer Credit 


p. 21,32 


Wait Chapel 


p. 7 


Transfer Students, Admission of 


p. 21 


Wake Forest College 


p. 13 


Tribble Hall 


p. 8 


Wake Forest Honor Scholarships 


p. 36 


Trustees, Board of 


p. 250 


Wake Forest Programs, 




Tuition 


p. 22 


Study Abroad 


p. 56 






Wilson Scholarships 


p. 35 


Undergraduate Faculties 


p. 266 


Winston Hall 


p. 8 


Undergraduate Schools 


p. 12 


Withdrawal from the College 


p. 28 


University 


p. 6 


Women's Studies 




University, Administration 


p. 253 


(interdisciplinary minor) 


p. 223 


University Advancement 


p. 262 


Worrell Professional Center 


p. 8 


University Senate 


p. 298 


Writing Center 


p. 63 


University Theatre, Wake Forest 


p. 264 






Urban Studies 








(interdisciplinary minor) 


p. 223 







303 



Index 



The Bulletins of Wake Forest 






The undergraduate bulletin is 
published by the university 
Editor's Office, Room 220 
Reynolda Hall, Reynolda Campus. 
Christine Underwood, bulletin 
editor. Telephone: (336) 758-5960 

Wake Forest University is committed to admin- 
ister all educational and employment activities 
without discrimination because of race, color, 
religion, national origin, age, sex, veteran sta- 
tus, handicapped status or disability as required 
by law. The University has adopted a procedure 
for the purpose of resolving discrimination 
complaints. Inquiries or concerns should be 
directed to Harold Holmes, dean of student ser- 
vices, at (336) 758-5226 ; Paul Escott, dean of 
the College, at (336) 7 58-5312; or Gloria C. 
Agard, assistant director of human resources, 
director of equal employment opportunity, and 
Title IX coordinator, at (336) 758-4814. In 
addition, Wake Forest rejects hatred and big- 
otry in any form and adheres to the principle 
that no person affiliated with Wake Forest 
should be judged or harassed on the basis of 
perceived or actual sexual orientation. In 
affirming its commitment to this principle, 
Wake Forest does not limit freedom of religious 
association or expression, does not presume to 
control the policies of persons or entities not 
affiliated with Wake Forest, and does not 
extend benefits beyond those provided under 
other policies of Wake Forest. 



The Undergraduate Schools 
Director of Admissions and 
Financial Aid 

P.O. Box 7305 Reynolda Station 
Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7305 
(336) 758-5201 

The Graduate School 
Dean of the Graduate School 
P.O. Box 7487 Reynolda Station 
Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7487 
(336) 758-5301 

The School of Law 
Director of Admissions 
P.O. Box 7206 Reynolda Station 
Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7206 
(336) 758-5437 

The Babcock Graduate School 

of Management 

Director of Admissions 
P.O. Box 7659 Reynolda Station 
Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7659 
(336) 758-5422 

The Wake Forest University 
School of Medicine 

Associate Dean for Admissions 

Medical Center Blvd. 

Winston-Salem, NC 27157-1090 

(336) 716-4265 

The Summer Session 

Dean of the Summer Session 
P.O. Box 7866 Reynolda Station 
Winston-Salem, NC 27109-7866 
(336) 759-5664 



The Undergraduate Bulletin is 
printed in Canada. 



Bulletins 



304